Home

For the best in data acquisition, data security and peace of mind

1. A WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES Insulation from channel to channel Normally a channel can be safely connected to a hazardous voltage up to 150V AC common mode with respect to earth However where a channel is connected to a safety low voltage circuit i e is accessible for op erators to touch any channel within the same input bank must be limited at all times to a maximum of 55Vac or 140Vdc This is to ensure that protection of the safety low voltage circuit is fully maintained The inputs are divided into two banks inputs 1 to 3 are one bank and inputs 4 to 6 if fitted are another bank A voltage of up to 150V AC common mode can be applied on one bank as long as any safety low voltage circuits are on the other bank The recorder is protected against accidental connection of a voltage up to 240V AC common mode which might occur as a temporary fault condition provided there are no safety low volt age circuits connected to the same input bank as the channel with the fault Common Mode voltage is a voltage applied between the whole channel and earth not between pins on a channel this reduces to 33Vrms or 70Vdc if any channel within the input bank is configured as an ohms or R T measurement Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO A
2. Address Address TUS Tm 51 52 25 66 1800 6145 Analog In 1 Start Address A 6 1802 6147 Analog In 2 A 6 1804 6149 Analog In 3 A 6 1806 6151 Analog In 4 A 6 1808 6153 Analog In 5 A 6 180A 6155 Analog In 6 A 6 180C 6157 Analog In 7 A 6 180E 6159 Analog In 8 A 6 1810 6161 Analog In 9 A 6 1812 6163 Analog In 10 A 6 185E 6239 Analog In 48 end address A 6 Relay Output Digital Input 48 inputs max Allows you to read digital inputs and set relay outputs over Modbus gru Pire Description 1 9 1 9 Relay Out Digital In 1 9 1 start Address A F 10 15 Relay Out Digital In 10 15 10 19 16 25 Relay Out Digital In 16 25 1A 1F 26 31 Relay Out Digital In 26 31 20 29 32 41 Relay Out Digital In 32 41 2A 2F 42 47 Relay Out Digital In 42 47 30 48 Relay Out Digital In 48 48 end address 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 329 330 Modbus Memory Map Supplement Communications Inputs 32 comms values max Address Address Description Mee 51 52 25 66 1880 6273 Comms 1 start address A 7 1882 6275 Comms 2 A 7 1884 6277 Comms 3 A 7 1886 6279 Comms 4 A 7 1888 6281 Comms 5
3. A 1234 567 Eu Trace at Max Pen Scale Top Bar Trace Displays as normal 1234 567 Valid i um Data Pen Scale Bottom Y 1234 567 Y y Trace at Min Input Range Bottom i i Outside Range Low Y Y Y Y Y v Trace at Min Down scale Burnout Y Y Y Invalid Reading kk x KKKK Trace at Min Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 217 218 Screen Designer Screens not available on the eZtrend QXe Screen Designer screens known as Layouts file type lay can be created in the Screen Designer software on your PC and then loaded onto the recorder This can be done via CF card USB or Network Share folder NAS transfer Templates created in Screen Designer can also be loaded into the recorder added to a recorder screen or screens and displayed Refer to the Screen Designer manual for further details For layouts to be loaded into the recorder Custom Screens must be enabled as a Firmware option See Section 7 Firmware Options on page 221 It is recommended to save Screen Designer layouts directly from the software onto a CF card USB key or to a Network Share folder NAS This will contain all the files required for loading the layout into the recorder If the Screen Designer layout is saved to anot
4. Setup comms a Pens 1 s Pen 1 0 00 to 100 00 P gt mn r Pens 2 Pen 2 50 00 to 500 00 gt B E Pens 3 Pen 3 10E9 to 10622 B gt Pens 4 v Pen 4 10E1 to 1066 Pens 5 v Pen 5 0 00 5000 00 gt Pens 6 Pen 6 20 00 200 00 B lt 5 Ey copy To Q Back P Finish id Back Finish Edit Setup Menu Supervisor access Permission Area 19 Field I O Engineer Pens Supervisor Comms Engineer Events Counters Supervisor General Supervisor Screen Supervisor Recording Supervisor Reports Engineer P es gt Li Recording q ta Screen Setup A Screen Saver Charts Brightness Screen Setup Menu Supervisor Access Permission Area 25 ai xe 9 General CRIN NIN Ident Localisation actory Batch Printer Back General menu Supervisor Access See Figure 5 9 for General menu Edt Setup access Permission Area 20 grup 1 report Y oven 2 batch report X Report 3 X Report 4 X Report 5 Reports menu Engineer Access Permission Area 46 PE T ms E X Report 6 v 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Figure 5 6 Default password access from the Alarms Menu Alarms menu No Login Ack Alarm Operator Confi
5. Uplink optional to Mains other networks Mains 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Hardware Installation Local Area Network setup This is a group of computers and or associated devices e g Honeywell devices that share a common communications line and typically share the resources of a single processor or server within a local geographical area e g within an office Figure 8 2 LAN Setup Realtime data from the device to the Comms Server Comms Database Server p gt Server Software Software i I Y Disk data shown Un in dotted is gt E 5 Realtime data from imported from the e the Comms Server to device to the the TrendServer alc Sl TTR Database server TrendServer Links to Remote Networks Communications is not just limited to local networks Devices and databases on remote net works can be accessed using the TrendServer software via remote comms servers and remote database servers Remote servers means it is not directly connected to your PC Figure 8 3 Data Logging and Transfer on page 230 shows an example of two local systems having access to each others remote servers TrendServer 1 can access Comms Server 2 and Database Server 2 and all the devices within the databases on those servers Similarly TrendServer 2 can access the devices and databases held on Database 1 and Comms
6. Clock Accuracy 29ppm 1 minute month 25 C Summer Winter manual or automatic time adjustment or via communications SNTP Client and or Server included for synchronising over Ethernet Recorder Time Synchronisation on Digital Input 284 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Specification Design Attributes Alarm Set Points 6 per pen integral soft alarm set points easily set by user to announce selected out of limit condi tions user can select if an alarm triggers a change in the screen background colour Alarm triggers can be set for Hi Lo Deviation latched or unlatched for alarm acknowledgement Alarm Damping 1 sec to 24 Hours Hysteresis 100 of pen scale Common relay output 1A 24V can be activated on any alarm Not available for the QXe Data Replay Mode Data replay facility on chart displays at normal fast or slow speeds with zoom and cursor Display Chart Speeds Chart rates 1 mm hour 5 mm hour 10 mm hour 20 mm hour 30 mm hour 60 mm hour 120 mm hour 600 mm hour 1200 mm hour 6000 mm hour Combinations of rates can be mixed and chart speeds can be set independently for each chart Display speeds are independent of logging rate Messages Screen The message screen displays system information and records any setup activity that has been changed It also provides warning and error message updates lists alarm activity and
7. 24Vdc TX 24V TX Power RS485 _ USB Supply Output RS485 port j USB Host card a NETO option Analogue Input Et ernet connection card std Slot A ues Ton D T Figure 2 12 eZtrend QXe Rear panel 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 17 Electrical Installation Analogue Input Card Each Analogue Input card has up to 8 input channels for the Minitrend QX and the Mul titrend SX and up to 6 channels for the eZtrend QXe Connections are made via 2 x 12 way screw terminal plugs that fit into a PCB header on the rear of the unit The 2 way CJC sensor should remain fitted in the central 2 way header The Minitrend QX can have two analogue input cards fitted giving up to 16 input channels 2 x 8 channel cards The slot positions are A amp B these are identified on the rear panel on the back of the unit Either slot can be used it is recommended that slot A is used if only one card is fitted The Multitrend SX can have up to 6 analogue input cards fitted up to 48 input channels The slot positions A B C D E or F these are identified on the rear panel PC boards are fitted in order slot A starts from the top The eZtrend QXe can use this card as an additional Analogue Input card fitted in Slot B providing up to 6 more channels This card would be used after using the 3 or 6 channe
8. eee eee eee eese teen enne tn s tn tensa sun Tniernal Autom lic 5 iaceo mia EO EE RES Ext 0 C Reference o inre eere tto tbi eir ies External with a Specified Temperature External Input Reference ve ee eiii tit oie a e re ee et Appendix D ALANS 1i eiixak irri dde cuui ass kicked din iva qua c cd Appendix E Ethernet Appendix F Fuzzy Logging Appendix G F sub zero Sterilisation esses 323 The significance of FO cierres eoep eeneioe taie i sE REES menit pe GE EET 323 Appendix H Calibration sasicsidssiscdecscesniasstnnsnndiaddeninsacnsdaadenansiwesnzedesesanssasincdianas 325 AI Calibration and CJC Calibration s eesesesesesesosoesesesosoeceoeseseeceoeseossosecoeoesese 325 Sensor COMPeNsation M ssri 325 Appendix I Battery Data ssscicccscasticssscnsnssnncccnsinsisnanssuassannsnanencnsnisnanasaunsundesnaanns 327 Location Processor Board eerie eee eese eese eee nenas ea tento senses tosta stan 327 Safety Guidelines harto in mud entran ata dau tes 327 vi 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Appendix J Function Codes and Memory Maps 329 Modbus Memory Map Supplement 4 esee eee eres eene entente tnnt enenane 329 Totalis pP T 334 Inputslext messd980 asa t REOR in UP dedidit 334 Analogue Input Values Ue ERO IER tase ERES EE SER NE 334 Communications Input en
9. 237 Connect to a Database sse 240 Connect to a Database Server 237 Database senes ite inei breite aes Database Logging Delete a Database Delete a Device Diagnostics Edit a Device Logging Configuration 246 Network Settings c eee 237 Preferences Shutdown Status Screen Summary of Logging Changes 247 Comms Server Database 252 COMMS Server Overview e 236 COMMS Server Setup 239 Comms Server Status Screen 248 Comms Overview Communications Connections Ethernet Connections cree 30 RS485 Connections ce 31 Compact Flash Format 163 Concurrent Batch Mode 11 1 1 119 General Batch Properties 119 Group Batch 4 5 iem p Configure Alarms Configure Menu Edit Layout Layout cereri E renes Load Layout essent Passwords its Save Layout Setup Menu Control TC Copy Cal Adjust 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK AMS2750 TUS Mode s 373 Countdown Timers 355 Counters Event Causes oo cccccssscscssccssscsscssssssscssccssccsssseseees 98 Event Effects essent 104 Counters Process View and Reset 169 Counters Menu eee Credits i Ctr Reset button CUFSOF asse cisieetaestetenetretet Cu
10. a Local Server Pen 1 Temp Local Server Pen 2 1sec Sample Local Server Pen 3 lsec Sample Local Server Pen 4 lsec Sample Local Server Pen 5 1sec Sample Local Server Pen 6 1sec Sample Local Server Pen 7 1 sec Sample Local Server Pens 1sec Sample Client Connections tab displays any Pens being graphed N Database Logging tab displays any Pens being logged Database logging Comms Server can be minimised now it will continue to run in the background Client connections Client Connections Realtime comms data from the device will only display on the comms server communica tions status screen when realtime data is active on either the server software or by using an OPC client Once data is active on a client connection this window will display details of the device selected in the top window its Destination or where the information is going to Source or origin of the data channel or event Rate and Type of data sampling being com municated See OPC Interface Open Process Control on page 253 and OPC Cli ents on page 254 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Communications Server Database Logging This tab will display information on what is currently being logged to a database for the de vice that is selected in the top window its Destination or where the information is going to Source or origin of the data channel or event Rate and Type of data sampling being com municated A
11. ASIA PACIFIC TAC hfs tac support honey well com Australia Honeywell Limited Phone 61 7 3846 1255 FAX 61 7 3840 6481 Toll Free 1300 36 39 36 Toll Free Fax 1300 36 04 70 China PRC Shanghai Honeywell China Inc Phone 86 21 5257 4568 Fax 86 21 6237 2826 Singapore Honeywell Pte Ltd Phone 65 6580 3278 Fax 65 6445 3033 South Korea Honeywell Korea Co Ltd Phone 822 799 6114 Fax 822 792 9015 EMEA Honeywell Process Solutions Phone 80012026455 or 44 0 1202645583 Email Sales sc cp apps salespa62 honey well com or TAC hfs tac support 2honey well com AMERICA s Honeywell Process Solutions Phone TAC 1 800 423 9883 Or 215 641 3610 Sales 1 800 343 0228 Email Sales ask ssc honeywell com or TAC hfs tac support honey well com Specifications are subject to change without notice Honeywell Process Solutions 1250 W Sam Houston Pkwy S Houston TX 77042 www honeywellprocess com 43 TV 25 30 August 2013 2013Honeywell International Inc Honeywell
12. If in doubt contact your IT Administrator for advice on entering Network Admin require ments 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 81 Comms Services Menu Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup Comms gt Comms Services lt Comms Services J lt 1 Finish Modbus Communications protocol for Ethernet and RS485 See Modbus on page 84 Web Browse your recorder using the web browse feature See Web on page 87 Email Setup email accounts to send alarm and event information See Email on page 87 SNTP Simple Network Time Protocols is a protocol for synchronising the clock on the recorder with a Network Server See SNTP on page 89 FTP File Transfer Protocol used to transfer data to and from the recorder See FTP File Transfer Protocol on page 90 Peers Sets up the recorder to be identified on a network Peer to Peer See Peers on page 91 Standard Communication Interfaces Rear Ethernet Communication Port The rear of the recorder is fitted with an Ethernet10 100 port and RS485 port which sup ports RS485 Modbus protocol and TCP IP Modbus Web Browser See Web on page 87 OPC Server connectivity to third party software OPC Server connection must be ena bled by selecting the OPC option in Credits on page 112 For more details on OPC Servers see OPC Interface Open Process Control on page 253 82 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO Augus
13. i Avon Creek north 100022 Add Device box Furnace 1 xs 100089 160 221 36 33 When you get back to the Add De vice Detail Box press OK The recorder you have set up will now be added to the device list T Selection eas Modbus profile tool data update TrendServer Pro software will generate a modbus profile when data is imported from USB key CF card from a Network Share folder NAS or when it is manually imported via FTP This applies to FTP of setup and FTP of pen data The automatic or scheduled FTP import of data from a recorder does not result in an up dated modbus profile being generated Once a modbus profile has been generated it is im mediately available to the Comms Server but will not be automatically used by the Comms Server 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 243 Communications Server Any new connections created in the Comms Server will use the most recent modbus profile that has been generated when importing data on that PC For existing device connections go to the relevant device and press right mouse button for the context menu Select Edit Device and then press OK on the resulting dialog The updat ed modbus profile will now be in use and this should be evident if you graph the data a cou ple of minutes later give enough time for some data to be logged to the database using the updated modbus profile So in summary when updating an X Series recorder configuration import the
14. All digital inputs have volt free contacts and are sampled at 10Hz max 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Electrical Installation The Minitrend QX and the eZtrend QXe recorders have only one slot available for digital inputs and relay outputs for either a 4 or 8 channel Alarm Relay card or an 8 or 16 channel Digital I O card fitted in slot G the position is identified on the rear panel The 16 channel Digital I O card is not available on the eZtrend QXe recorders The Multitrend SX can have up to three Alarm Relay cards fitted in any combination of Alarm Relay card or Digital I O cards The first Alarm Relay card or Digital I O card is fitted in slot G any additional cards will locate in positions H and I A WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES Digital Input Output card channels must not be connected to any hazardous live volt ages no higher than 30V AC rms or 60V DC Alarm Relay Card channels Alarm Relay Card channels can be connected to hazardous voltages up to 300V AC at Measurement Category CAT II Overvoltage Category II Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury NOTICE For 12 and 16 way connectors torque setting 0 4 Nm 3 5lb in Do not over tighten Recommended wire size for termination connector is 22 12 AWG 22 14 SWG 4 and 8 Alarm Relay Cards The 24 way connector for the Alarm Relay Card connects to 3 A 240 VAC SPCO relays The pin outs for 4 and 8 relay Alarm Relay
15. wv This status screen displays all the currently enabled Events as they occur Each event displays the event number lt Event 1 gt followed by the event information C1 Cause 1 C2 Cause 2 C3 Cause 3 C4 Cause 4 E1 Effect 1 E2 Effect 2 E3 Effect 3 E4 Effect 4 If an Event has not been enabled no event will be listed in the status screen If part of an event is not enabled one will appear next to the incomplete cause or effect If a Cause is enabled but not an Effect or an Effect is enabled but not a Cause two will appear next to the incomplete part of the event When a scheduled event is displayed it will show the next time a scheduled cause is due 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 181 NOTICE Remember that Cause 1 2 3 OR Cause 4 will trigger Effect 1 2 3 AND Effect 4 Cause and Effect numbers are not linked eg Cause 1 and Effect 1 are not linked Comms Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Comms General See General Status on page 182 Modbus See Modbus Status on page 182 OPC See OPC Status on page 183 SMTP See SMTP Status on page 184 FTP See FTP Status on page 184 Peers See Peers Status on page 184 This screen contains a description of the type of comms currently being used and its status General Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Comms General Description and Status of comms on the recorder Displa
16. C gt 10M ohms 25 to 25 50 to 50 100 to 100 0 1 F S 0 01 C gt 10M ohms 250 to 250 500 to 500 0 1 F S 0 01 C gt 10M ohms 1000 to 1000 0 1 F S 0 01 C gt 10M ohms Volts DC 0 3 to 0 3 0 6 to 0 6 1 5 to 1 5 0 1 F S 0 01 C gt 1M ohms 3 to 3 6 to 6 12 to 12 0 1 F S 0 01 C gt 1M ohms 25 to 25 50 to 50 0 1 F S 0 01 C gt 1M ohms Milliamps 4 to 20 0 to 20 0 2 F S 0 01 C Ohms 200 0 to 200 0 196 F S 0 01 C Ohms 500 0 to 500 0 1 F S 0 01 C Ohms 1000 O to 1000 0 1 F S 0 01 C Ohms 4000 0 to 4000 0 196 F S 0 01 C Input Actuation Range Ref Accuracy Temp Stability Field Field T Cs F C 4 F C Cal Cal Deg F Deg C B 500 to 1000 260 to 538 8 1 4 5 8 1 4 5 1000 to 3300 538 to 1816 4 0 2 2 0 01 C 2 0 1 11 E 454 to 328 270 to 200 21 6 12 21 6 12 00 328 to 94 200 to 70 3 1 1 7 0 01 C 3 1 1 7 94 to 1832 70 to 1000 1 3 0 7 0 8 0 44 J 346 to 32 210 to 0 3 1 1 7 0 01 C 0 8 0 44 32 to 2192 0 to 1200 1 2 0 7 0 63 0 35 K 454 to 94 270 to 70 36 20 0 01 C 36 20 00 94 to 2502 70 to 1372 1 8 1 0 9 0 5 R 58 to 500 50 to 260 6 7 3 7 0 01 C 6 7 3 7 500 to 1202 260 to 650 2 7 1 5 1 0 0 56 1202 to 3214 650 to 1768 2 0 1 1 1 0 0 56 S 58 to 500 50 to 260 5 9 3 3 0 01 C 5 9 3 3 500 to 1832 260 to 1000 2 7 1 5 1 0 0 56 1832 to 3110 1000 to 1710 2 0 1 1 1 0 0 56 3110 to
17. Event processing All pens enabled for pre trigger will be put into their alarm logging rate and remain in the alarm logging rate while any pre trigger pen alarm is asserted Once one or more alarms on a pre trigger enabled pen s fire the readings in the pre trig gered buffers will be saved to internal flash memory The pre trgger system will request an export to be performed if scheduled export is enabled If Post Trigger is enabled the alarm log rate will continue for this period after all alarms have cleared 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 131 132 If during the post trigger time a pre trigger alarm re occurs but the previous pre trigger event has not been exported then the post trigger timer will be reset and will start again after all pre trigger alarm have cleared Pre trigger information is only secure when it has been saved into the internal flash memory or ex ported Export The pre trigger files are exported from the internal flash memory via the scheduled or man ual export to the externally selected device OR when an FTP download occurs The pre trigger data is appended to the Pen data files during export It is recommended to set up a scheduled export as the pre trigger files will only be exported once and to the first device on which an export occurs following a pre trigger event occurring If power fails when the pre trigger information is waiting to be exported or is being exported then the System will res
18. Multitrend SX See Figure 2 7 1 Insert the panel gasket onto the recorder so it goes between the back of the recorder bezel and the panel From the front panel place unit in the panel and push through the panel 2 To loosen each clamp unscrew the long screw to accommodate the panel thickness Use either a Number 1 Phillips or Straight slot screw driver 3 From behind the panel the orientation of the clamp should be with the screw head towards the rear of the unit 4 Position the circular mounting boss in the hole on one side of the case with the lip of the boss inside the case Ensure the front of the clamp is up against the panel 5 Fix the second clamp on the opposite side of the unit 6 Tighten the screw using a Number 1 Phillips or Straight slot screw driver and the clamp will secure against the panel 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 11 Mechanical Installation Mounting Clamp Diagram Figure 2 6 Minitrend QX Mounting Clamps 2 mounting clamp positions required on two opposite sides of the recorder Nema 4X requires all 4 clamps to be fitted Mounting clamp slots 4 mounting clamp positions 2 shown 2 clamps are re quired on opposite sides of the recorder 12 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Mounting Clamp Diagram for 45mm panel thickness Figure 2 8 Minitrend QX 45mm Mounting Clamps 6 mounting clamp positions gt 8 shown for mounting in 45mm panel thickness Mounting slo
19. Power Relay PWRREL Returns the status of the fixed power relay Pstv PSTVx Get the persisted Global variable x Persisted global variables maintain their value through a power cycle There is a maximum of 50 per sisted global variables PRC PRC Power Relay Counter Pulse Inputs Al slots HPULn Get the Pulse frequency from the Pulse card n 1 to 48 25kHz max Pulse Inputs DIO Slots LPULn Get the Pulse frequency from the Digital Input card when in Pulse mode n 1 to 48 1kHz Max RT Compensation RTCOMPn Get RT Compensation value for channel n 1 to 48 Units mV RT Calibration RTCALn Get RT Calibration value for channel n 1 to 48 Units mA Slave Comms Variable SCV 1 1 1 Returns the value for the Modbus Slave Comms Totaliser Tn Get Totaliser value n 1 to 96 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 297 Full Maths amp Script Processing Table 14 1 Maths Variable Table Maths Variables Syntax Description UC1 to UC16 UC1 User counters 1 to 16 USB1 free storage space USB1FREE Returns the percentage of free storage space available on the USB storage key fitted initially front or rear USB2 free storage space USB2FREE Returns the percentage of free storage space available on the USB storage key fitted after the first USB has been fitted front or rear UV1 to UV32 UV1 This allows a system to be setup where val ues can be altered to effect calculation
20. 3 66 deg C 1 56 deg C 22h07m553s 22h26m42s 1799 deg C 17 11 dag C 2 22h04m04s 22h34m53 Hourly Averages between 22h 00m 00s and 22h 59m 59s 24 01 2008 Average 3 10 degC 17 61 degC 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 171 172 Status Menu Main Menu Status Use the Status menus to easily check on the current configuration of the recorder A number of status information screens are available to the user these will provide information for re porting and diagnostic purposes All Status screens can be saved to removable media or printed For AMS2750 mode a new TC Usage button is displayed middle right on the menu screen Please refer to Thermocouple Usage Tracking AMS2750 on page 363 gt m Recording EN The following Status screens are available System Contains general information about the recorder setup such as Device infor mation software and firmware versions and the recorder s IP address Plus a list of Firmware options and I O cards in the recorder See System on page 173 Pen Overview Each pen is displayed with full configuration details including Pen Value Name Maths Scale In Alarm Pen Rate Alarm Total and Group See Pen Overview on page 175 Maintenance The recorder keeps track of important life actions for improved diag nostics and preventative maintenance notification Health Watch Maintenance is availa ble as a firmware opti
21. Administration E ae cii Database Servers IP Address Description Connection Status Communication Ports x COM1 x COM2 x COM3 x com4 x COMS x COM6 x COM7 x9 coma v Ethernet Database Servers 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Communications Server The Comms Status shows all the activity of devices Communications ports Databases and Database Servers The window to the left displays the areas controlled by the comms serv er the database servers and the communications ports The display area s to the right will display details of any item selected in the left window Depending on what has been selected the right window will split in two to give logging information Items listed in the left window that have a sign against them contain other items click on the sign to reveal the list of items contained within The sign will change to a sign when all the items are displayed To close the list click on the sign Comms Server Toolbar Administration The Administration button appears in the top left of the comms server it contains Shutdown Server From here the comms server can be shut down this will disconnect the comms server it will also shutdown the database servers at the same time Preferences The General Settings tab has an option to minimise the Server when it is opened The Diagnostics option that will produce an additional tab to the bottom window this
22. Events can be set up to Start or Stop a TUS See Events AMS2750 on page 389 During survey Once a survey has been started the TUS process screen will be set to the Running condi tion Each soak is allocated a separate status line with all soaks being shown in this fixed format The system will detect when all relevant TC s are within the acceptable soak limits and will populate the information in the line of the relevant soak The TC s Stabilized button will only be enabled available when a soak has all TC s within the soak and acceptable tolerance pressing the button will override the stability detection and put the current soak from soak mode to stable mode The Configure TUS and Export TUS button will be disabled whilst a TUS is running Survey status Once a TUS is started the recorder moves between three operating modes this helps auto mate the process and provide feedback as to how the survey is performing 1 See Detect mode on page 384 2 See Soak mode on page 385 3 See Stable in soak mode on page 386 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 383 384 w wi b dB M Menu Furnace Mame Furnace 1 Model No QW 234 Y 45 Instrument Type B Setpoint Tol 1 400 00F TC Teo TC0 TCD TCO TC dmid s 10 0 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F O00 600 00F 10 0 1000 00F 10 0 NA TUS mode Detect mode Detect Li
23. Figure 2 14 Input signal wiring on page 21 Active Burnout is not available for the eZtrend QXe recorder Active Burnout checks the health of the thermocouples every 30 seconds if your proc ess requires continuous check of the thermocouples to see if they are in burnout you should use Passive Burnout Active burnout is an implementation of thermocouple health and provides error warning messages for a range of thermocouple activity failure conditions Passive burnout does not provide any error warning messages If the thermocouple wiring changes and the channel is set to Active select Passive and Commit the change Then return to the menu and select Active and Commit the change to update burnout settings Show Burnout Only available when Type is set to TC Toggle between Upscale and Downscale Burnout TC Type Only available when Type is set to TC Select this for a list of available TC types CJ Comp Only available when Type is set to TC Select this for a list of available CJ Compensation See Thermocouple CJC Compensation on page 312 nt Automatic Uses the cold junction sensor in the recorder as a variable ref erence temperature ee Ext 0 Deg C Assumes the cold junction is held at 0 C to provide a OmV refer ence external to the recorder Ext with Spec Temp Uses a reference junction held at a constant tempera ture Specify the temperature that the cold junction sensor is to be set at Ext Inp
24. Figure 4 5 Batch Setup screens Name Batch 017 User ID 017 Enter Batch Name Lot No Lot 1 Desc Start Batch 17 Batch 017 Enter Additonal Comments optional pe d ee ee en Press the Finish button if all the Batch details are correct and you wish to start the batch immediately Use the Back button to return to the Batch setup and not start the batch This icon changes to show a batch is in progress 0001 Turbine 1 18 Jan 06 10 51 23 10 43 00 10 586 10 51 00 Pen 1 18 Jan 06 18 Ja 06 18 Jan 06 67 23 Start Batch Mark on Chart Pen2 Batch Mark on Chart A Batch marker will be placed on all process screens that have a chart displayed The mark on chart will show where the batch is started with S Batch Name The next time you press the Batch button the screen will have changed to give you the Batch Controls The batch control buttons enable the user to Stop Pause Resume Abort or add a Comment to the current batch that has been started A Batch is complete when it has been stopped When a batch is stopped E appears as a mark on chart on the screen If the batch is aborted it is not a complete batch and will be marked on the chart with an A to show it has been aborted If the recorder is not logging starting a batch will automatically start the logging However stopping the batch will not stop the logging 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK If a batch is Paused P will appear as a
25. Introduction di OVETVIQW inhares n t e OE PO Me PDF Support seisoon ian ete eed SAT Report Wizard 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK SAT Report example e 400 TUS Report Example oo eee 414 TUS Report Wizard User Interface Vista Compatibility Reports Event Effects sse 106 Pen Report Information 135 Process Menu Reset All RUN ene View Archive Reports Menu u s 133 Reset Setup Layout Data All sss 117 Reset Passwords 146 Reset at 16M TOASTS serumaren i i e re CE atin aes 75 Resistance Thermometers 20 S SAT Report Wizard s 398 SMTP Status sss 184 NEN TERRE 89 Client Server Network eee 90 BOE e shui Opslaan te Battery Data Hazardous Voltage Static Electricity is SYMBOLS isch sessscevscecrecessigsvsilions torret Reid Safety and Symbol Identification BOUE Ta DUE aient toca kaNunostadidabi ns INAS eee cune ees Save Setup sctasiep MN UU A NUUAM Saving Message Screens s Saving Status Screens iussi etiists Scale Menu n Scheduled Events Event Causes 97 Scheduled Export iussione 128 Screen Activity Alarm Markers sse 215 Charts Speeds 14 etetctene 214 Deviation Alarm Markers eee 215 Mark on Chart Pen Pointers Screen Markers Screen Change Event Effects 104 Screen Configuration 205 Menu Baf seat a 206 Process
26. lt Machine Name Shared Folder Path gt Format Machine Name should not be IP address 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Share Path Access This network shared folder must have Permission and Security rights read for loading files or write for writing files or both for loading as well as writing files to access the shared path for each user If the user does not have access rights to shared path then user will not be able to access shared path General Publish Share Permissions Security Group or user names 24 Everyone Gulhane Swapnil E505040 PACRIM1 ds honepwell com Add Remove Allow Deny Permissions for Gulhane Swapnil Full Control 1 Change Iz L1 Read Cancel Apply This must be done on a local pc or server where the user wants to have access for any par ticular folder User Administrator of local pc or server needs to right click on any folder that needs access for any particular folder General Publish Share Permissions Security Group or user names ffi CREATOR OWNER a Everyone Li Gulhane Swapnil E505040 PACA M1 ds honeywell com ffi SYSTEM f Users IEBDTCSJ52BSNUsers v Add Remove Permissions for Gulhane Swapnil Allow Deny Full Control Modify Read amp Execute List Folder Contents EA ISI KI ESI ES oOooooo Read Write For special permissions or far advanced settings click Advanced Poo
27. select CD ROM drive select Launch exe Follow the instructions on the screen During installation you will be asked to select or confirm the following Which language variant where applicable Destination folder for the software A destination folder and file path will be designated but this can be changed if required by using the browse button Select which version of the application software to install This will be dependant on which version has been purchased TrendViewer TrendManager Pro or TrendServer Pro Select to install Enter the code and organisation as supplied with each particular version of software The code can be found inside the CD case No code or organisation is required with TrendViewer NB This is an alpha numeric code and must be entered exactly in upper case Codes from other Honeywell software will not work each code is unique to the software supplied The TrendManager Suite may find it necessary to automatically upgrade certain applica tions within your PC to complete installation The setup will require a re boot re start your computer to complete installation Upgrades There are three software packages available TrendViewer TrendManager Pro Suite and TrendServer If your software upgrade is for the same package the software will au tomatically over write the previous version Local database information will not be affected and all devices data and setups are retained Any other remote da
28. 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Calibration Input Ranges This table shows which input range is used for each input type 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Table 4 9 Calibration Input range table Input Type Input Range K Type TC 50mV R Type TC 25mV S Type TC 25mV B Type TC 10mV J Type TC 50mV T Type TC 25mV E Type TC 100mV N Type TC 50mV C W5 Type TC 50mV G W Type TC 50mV Chrome Copel 50mV L Type TC 50mV M Type TC 50mV P Platinel 100mV D Type TC 50mV PT100 RTD 100mV PT200 RTD 250mV PT500 RTD 500mV PT1000 RTD 1000mV Nickel 100 100mV Nickel 120 100mV Cu10 50mV Cu53 50mV 200 Ohms 50mV 500 Ohms 100mV 1000 Ohms 250mV 4000 Ohms 1000mV 0 20mA 250mV 4 20mA 250mV 115 116 CJC Calibration For Thermocouple Input calibration only There is a single CJC sensor for each Al card but the temperature across the connector will not be constant The CJC calibration allows the user to compensate for temperature gradi ent n CJC Calibration P Calibrate CJC AI Slot A la le ES PER Ree ered Ge i Input No Temp Value C Temp Temp W 3 sme jJ 27 88 28 38 6077 Slot A 1 8 In this menu there is a button for each slot for Cold Junction Calibration Calibration is per formed per slot card 27 88 0 30 28 17 58 70 27 88 28 08 27 88 h 27 98 Select the desired slot
29. Fy x cpu o e ON CRECEN CN NEUEN Ct ACIE ML ae Login Area l gin 2 Click on Install This Add on for All users on This Computer This Website wants to install the following add on RemotedisplayTool cab from Hon eywell Automation India Ltd If you trust the website and the add on and want to install it click here UE e http 192 168 2 1 index asp p em M A OQ s dpDoNotWad gt C weather Ej Facebook 7 5 Recorder Index site wants to install the following add on RemoteDisplayTool cab Bari Henej Install This Add on for All Users on This Com t What s the Risk Information Bar Help 3 UAC control will appear Click on Yes to confirm the installation Note a If user does not follow steps 1 to 3 and clicks on Remote viewer link and again clicks on add on message for installation of RemotedisplayTool cab file following pop up window will appear 258 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Internet Security Settings Microsoft Internet Explorer The page cannot be refreshed without resending the information Click Retry to send the information again or click Cancel to return to the page that you were trying to view Click on either button to complete the installation b After completing steps 1 to 3 installation for activex control for the particular recorder is complete User can use remote viewer functionality for this recorder If
30. Slaves Full Modbus status can be viewed in Modbus Status on page 182 Refer to the Modbus Master Installation Instructions that are on the CD to help set up other modbus devices to talk to the recorder 43 TV 33 89 43 TV 33 102 Master Enabled Toggle On to make this recorder a Master device Poll Rate Enter a time period in seconds of how often there is a request for data Legacy Ethernet Tick this to connect to Honeywell V5 recorders Slave 1 32 Up to 32 slaves can be setup per master device Setup each Slave in turn starting with number 1 Enabled Toggle On to enable Slave e Friendly name Enter a name to easily identify this slave device D This is to connect to slave ID Port Select this for a list of available ports either Ethernet or RS485 For port configuration see Ports on page 79 Network Name Ethernet only Enter the Modbus Slave IP address Protocol Select this for a list of available protocols Modbus or Modbus X Modbus and Modbus X can both use Ethernet or RS485 Ports Protocols define the format in which the data is transferred from the recorder to a PC or transfer between other devices and peripherals FPLB Floating Point Little Endian Byte Swapped Format amp FP B Floating Point Big Endian Format are standard notations e Transaction 1 8 A request for a register or set of contiguous registers Enabled Toggle On to enable the first trans
31. Sterilisation Specification for Sterilisation The definition Fo Po is the sterilisation pasteurisation time in minutes required to destroy a stated number of organisms with a known z at temperature T For example F18 250 represents the time in minutes required to destroy a stated number of organisms at a temperature of 250 F 121 11 C with a z 18 degrees F F values are used to compare the sterilizing values of different processes however F values cannot be compared unless the z values are the same When temperature is not specified for exam ple F 8 6 it is understood that the temperature is 250 F 121 11 C the subscript O as in the term Fo 7 4 is used to indicate that the z 18 degrees F and the temperature is 250 F 121 11 C See Appendix G F sub zero Sterilisation on page 323 Displaying Totals Totals can be displayed by setting up a separate pen to display the totalised value Totals are best displayed in a DPM screen If you use a separate pen to display a total be aware that if the total is stopped the pause symbol will not appear as it does for a totaliser pen First select a pen you are going to use to display the total of another pen Extra pens are available as a Firmware option see Credits on page 112 For this example this will be Pen 4 To Start Stop Reset and View totals see Totals on page 168 In the pens menu for the totalising pen Pen 4 select Edit Maths and enter T followed by the
32. User Admin The Administrator can set up the recorder s password policies permission levels of access in the menu system and can add delete and unlock users and assign their permission lev els Passwords can be Reset from this screen The recorder will display a default setup that can be customised to suit This is set out in Level Permissions on page 191 Policy Main Menu Configure Passwords User Admin Policy At the top of the Policy menu are four levels to be assigned these are the permission levels that will allow access to specific areas of the recorder menu system The names of these levels can be edited here Pwds Enable Tick to enable the password menu Level 0 Name Administrator Highest permission level Level 1 Name Engineer Second highest permission level Level 2 Name Supervisor Third highest permission level Level 3 Name Technician Fourth highest permission level Level 4 Name Operator Fifth highest permission level Unrestrict allows the Administrator to de restrict access to certain areas so menus will be available even without logging in Menu Timeout Enable Tick to activate the timeout facility to be enabled on the menus This is always enabled for ESS Menu Timeout Set a specific time period of inactivity in a password protected area before logging out 20 to 3600 seconds Web Timeout Enable Tick to activate the timeout facility to be enabled on the we
33. ability Other counters available are Alarm Event Digital Input Relay Output and Pulse counters Other Standard features CE Mark Conformity with 73 23 EEC Low Voltage and 89 336 EEC EMC Directive Soft Alarms 6 software alarms per pen are easily set up to display and record selected out of limit conditions These can be tied to the relay or digital outputs to activate the user s external equipment Common Relay Output A separate relay output at the rear of the unit can be set up as an alarm output Not available for the eZtrend QXe recorder Communications the recorder supports FTP Modbus TCP IP master and slave mode Web and E mail over Ethernet DHCP standard communications port and Modbus RTU master and slave mode via an RS485 port USB ports allow the use of an ASCII barcode reader RS485 port is an option for the eZtrend QXe recorder Email sent to your net work connected PC triggered by an Alarm or an Event Independent Display Chart Speeds and Logging rates logging rates can be pro grammed completely separate from the chart display speed allowing the data to be dis played and stored at the rates that best suit the application Language Support standard language prompts for English UK amp US French German Italian Spanish Brazilian Polish Hungarian Slovak Czech Turkish Romanian Russian Greek Portuguese and Bulgarian Also Asian languages including Chinese simplified Japanese and Ko
34. acter free form math expression for each pen Math calculations available on all pens one per input plus 16 extra pens for the QX 48 extra pens for the SX recorder and 12 extra pens for the QXe Scripting maths includes conditions and multi line scripting in pen maths expressions Allow functions permanent variables constants and timers 500 characters maximum Scripting is not available on the QXe Events optional Events are certain conditions or operations that can be set up and logged according to the time and date of an occurrence Subsequently events can be reviewed or displayed on a graph The Event Causes include Alarms Into Out of and Alarm Ack Totals Start Stop Reset Reset and Start Digital Input ON OFF State Change T C Burnout Scheduled Once Interval Specific Days Month End User Counters Max Mins Reset System Power ON Setup Change Internal Memory Low Export Memory Low FTP Memory Low User Action Mark Chart Batch Start Stop Pause The Event Effects include Mark Chart Logging Start Stop Totaliser Start Stop Reset Reset amp Start Digital Output ON OFF Alarm Acknowledge Emails Screen Change Print Screen Counters Reset Increment Max Min Reset Chart Control Pause Stop Resume Clear Prefil Clear All Messages Delayed Event Script Timers Start Stop Reset Reset amp Start Play Sound Start Stop Display Alert Reports Batch Start Stop Pause Each event marker can be recorded for ana
35. work Admin Perm Area 30 Comms Y Y Modbus Perm Area 31 Comms Y Y Web FTP Perm Area 32 Comms v Y SNTP Perm Area 33 Comms v Y TCP IP Perm Area 34 Comms v Y Email Perm Area 35 Field IO Y Y 1 0 AMS2750 Perm Area 36 Passwords v Perm Area 37 View Status Y Y via Web Page Perm Area 39 Full Control v Y via Web Page Perm Area 40 Calibrate Y Y Screen Perm Area 41 User Y Y Y 4 4 Variables Perm Area 42 Clear Popup v Y Y Y Alert 192 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Table 5 1 Default Level Permissions Default user levels of access to areas within the recorder menu system WE Super e No Login Permission Ar Admin Engineer Technician rator A ermissio ea d ginee visor echnicia Operato required Perm Area 43 Context Menu Y Y Y Y Perm Area 44 Clear Y Y Messages Perm Area 45 Reports Run Y Y Y Y Y and View Perm Area 46 Reports Mod Y Y ify and Reset All Perm Area 47 Script Y Y Y Y Y Timers 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 193 194 Default Password Access Default password access is set up within the recorder and can be changed by the Adminis trator or the Administrator can assign another user to change the access permissions Default permissions Administrator Access is for the Administrator level only Engineer Access is for Engineers and above Administrator level Supervisor Access is fo
36. 2000 2003 XP Vista and Windows 7 32 and 64 bit Professional and Ultimate Edition 4GB Mbyte of RAM 4GB Mbyte of RAM 16 bit colour graphics 24 bit recommended Screen Designer only TCP IP installed 50 Mbyte free hard disk space 2 Gbyte Hard drive free disk space A mouse A mouse Flash card reader or USB port Flash card reader or USB port To browse multiple recorders IE8 or higher version is required 262 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Minitrend QX Recorder 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 263 Ethernet USB host 24X TX Power Supply Common Relay 20 to 55VDC 20 Output to 30VAC or 12VDC 35VDG Analogue Input Wa or Pulse Input E CJC Sensor 12VAC 26VAC Input Instrument power Analogue Input Analogue Output RS485 Alarm Digital IO 264 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Table 10 1 Minitrend QX Spares 51453012 502 51453012 507 51453012 508 51453012 509 51453012 510 QX Processor PWA 128MB CF QX Processor PWA 256MB CF QX Processor PWA 512MB CF QX Processor PWA 1GB CF QX Processor PWA 2GB CF Note Customer must supply model number and Serial number of existing unit when placing and order for processor board kits 2 51453006 501 QX Analogue Input 4CH Assy 51453006 502 QX Analogue Input 6CH Assy 51453006 503 QX Analogue Input 8CH
37. 3 ene eh onP etie RIBOTE Change Chart Speed Chart Control 1 Clear All Messages CCOUDEGES ssion senene odern Na RERE Delayed Event Digital Outputs Display Alert sess Email REN E HET PESCE Embedded Process Values Enter Replay Screen Exit Replay Screen LOSING aoneeesesitinieeieenti Mark on Chart Max Mins Reset Play Sound Preset Markers fx Print Screen eese Reports ereagan a tardis Screen Change sese Senpt LDW ets iuueni e teret TINE SYNC acier tihi eren ierit e e NE TTotaliSet ioci ceci nass Update Tabular Readings Event Status BETTE IIo M T Event triggering from Scripts A Events AMS2750 sessi Events Menu Event Causes Event Effects Events Overview L eeenes Events COUunters Leere 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Exit Replay Screen Event Effects sse 106 Export INOW aescsdeteetimentidtessmensu atn a 163 Network Share folder NAS 163 Extra Pens re 222 F F sub 0 Totaliser ss 73 F sub zero Sterilisation Appendix G 323 ELLE E EE E E E ETE FIP SAUS oieee e E ET Factory Calibration Factory Menu iecit ethernet AI Calibration CJC Calibration Calibration esisiini Credits seiere sss Daylight Saving Firmware Upgrade Language averteret rr rns Localisa
38. 50012893 501 QXe 5 Display with cables 50058905 001 5 5 Display with LED Backlight T055Q1D1 v 0A 50059722 001 5 5 Digital Display Cable and Adaptor 23 50001782 501 QXe QX SX Speaker 24 50012896 501 QXe Case and Back Plate Assy 27 50015474 501 QXe Back Plate 28 50006787 501 QXe QX SX Battery Kit of 5 Not shown 43 50012896 502 QXe Case Handle and Terminal Cover Not shown 44 50012915 501 QXe Rear Terminal Cover Not shown 274 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Table 10 3 eZtrend QXe Spares 45 50020664 501 QXe Left amp Right Hand Chassis kit 48 30755050 502 QXe Mounting Hardware kit 2 Mounting Not shown Brackets 49 51453083 501 QXe Panel Gasket 52 51453038 501 Stylus Kit Black pack of 5 53 50021404 501 Connector kit 2 of each connector type Not shown 50017290 503 Touch Screen Protector kit of 5 Not shown 46184161 502 Carrying Handle kit Not shown 50017181 501 QXe QX SX Blanking Plates Not shown 51452129 501 10 Ohm Resistors Pack of 8 Not shown 50001251 501 QXe Portable Case Not shown 51453051 501 QX SX and QXe Power cord 125V Not shown Minitrend QX and QXe Portable Case Dimensions Height 165 1 6 50 Y Width Depth 165 1 m 235 6 50 9 25 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 275 276 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 20
39. Access to Ez 0001 Main Menu m g u iy 4 Screen 20 Feb 6 10 49 21 10 47 00 10 48 00 10 49 00 100 00 Pen 1 20 Jan 06 20 Jan 06 20 Jan 06 50 00 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 47 2 Log On Off If Password ESS Extended Security System 21CFR security is active on your recorder a password is required to enter the menu system and process screens Limited access is available without logging on For ESS recorders only locate the First Time Password System Setup sheet included in with your recorder or see First Time Password System Setup on page 188 All Users When Log On is required the Log On button will appear in the top right of the Main Menu screen The Log On button can be set to switch to auto Log Off at a specified period of time To Log On select the Log On button at the top right of the Main Menu screen Log On Button Log Off Button Process Log On User is presented with a user name and password entry box First time user login is Admin No password is required Access for the first time user is removed once the password system has been configured Log Off Once the user has logged on the option in the Main Menu will turn to Log Off once selected the user is logged off and returned to the current process screen First Time Log On The first time the system is used a default user name and password is available the user name is Admin and will have no password this is known as
40. Alarm Displays the Pen number and the Alarm number that activates the digital output when the alarm is active The Alarm has to be set to Relay out Status Displays the current state of the digital input on this channel or pulsed if Pulse Out is selected The relay is displayed as open or closed Counters Displays the counter number when active Duration Displays the Output Pulse duration set Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media 180 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Pulse Inputs Status Main Menu gt Status gt Diagnostics gt Hardware gt Pulse Inputs Not available for the eZtrend QXe Channel Displays the Slot position eg A B C D E or F the Pulse Input number and the system channel position This will show a tick if this channel is enabled Frequency Count Displays the input mode fixed as Frequency in Hertz Input Displays the current Pulse Input reading for this channel in Hertz Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media Events Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Events iz Event Events Event 2 Event 27 C1 Alarms Into Alarm P2 Alarm s 1 E1 Display Alert Alert Pen 2 30 Event 3 Event 3 gt C1 User Action Mark Chart E1 Logging Multiple Pens P1 P2 Event 4 Event 4 gt C1 Max Mins Reset P1 P2
41. All user actions can be performed via the touch screen using the stylus All on screen selec tion and navigation areas are large enough so the unit can be operated without falsely se lecting an adjacent option using the stylus provided The stylus is to be used to operate the touch screen It has a rounded end to avoid damage to the screen Only a light touch is required to activate the screen Two styluses are provided and there is a special slot at the top of the recorder to slide the stylus in from the right If the touch screen does not match correctly to where you are touching it with the stylus the screen may need calibrating See Calibrate on page 158 Other User Interface Control All user actions can be performed using a mouse or keyboard attached to a USB host port 1 Menu Access When the recorder is powered up the display will show a splash screen followed by an ini tialisation screen displaying the default language flag The first screen to appear on the recorder is a default process screen with the menu bar at the top Select the Menu button to access the menu system to configure the recorder The Menu button takes you to the Main Menu From the Main Menu you may be required to Log In if the Password function is active see 2 Log On Off on page 48 If not the next configuration required is to set the recorder to the correct local settings see 3 Local Settings on page 49 Figure 4 1 Default process screen
42. Delete User First Time Login LEVEE a EE POliCy inanes ie tie ieee Reset Passwords User Administration 429 USES iaer endo ca facte Cae Ln Rs 146 Passwords AMS2750 ss 392 Passwords Setup First time ESS 188 PEETS rrea R R ud sudes sh herd Peers Status PD Pen Overview Status Pen Pointers sss Pen Report Information Pens Men cietes dtt end qd pabR ipd Alarms Logging Scale Totaliser Pens for TC s Process Mode 362 Play Sound Event Effects 106 Policy Passwords sses 144 Ports Ah 83 Ports COMMS 79 Ports Ethernet ts 82 Post Trigger Set Post Trigger time ee 131 Power up oed e Pre Trigger Acquiring Alarm Rate Configuration Enable sencesa ee ea eire fe Re RL Event processing see 131 EXPO Gameren on Importing Logging Type Post Trigger Restart Lussssssaneeicee Set Pre Trigger time Preface s Preset Markers Print Screen Event Effects 104 Print SUP DONE a eechiatetetiea diim d onini 31 P i ter Men siis ittav enit DR RE MES mnt 122 Printing Message List eene eren Messages Screens Status Screens Status Screen printing Process Menu s Counters View and Reset Max Min ne Reports Script Timers Totals Start Stop Reset User Va
43. Delete User Unlock User E Reset Pwds Finish User Admin Administrator access only Password Net Sync Administrator access only a NChange Pwds J Pwd NetSync 51 Type standalone Finish m Change Password button requires Operator access Permission Area 12 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 197 198 Figure 5 5 Default password access from the Edit Menu Field I O Menu I O AMS2750 if enabled Engineer Access All of this menu requires Engineer access Permission Area 35 tay Field 1 0 a es inn e gt e Analogue In Analogue Out Alarm Digital 10 Be iv nn Pulse Inputs Linearisation lt q Edit Setup Events Event 1 Event 1 Event 2 Event 2 Event 3 Event 3 Event 4 Event 4 Event 5 Event 5 Event 6 Event 6 X Back hy Copy Tr By Finish id Events Counters menus Supervisor Access All of the Events and Counters menu buttons require Supervisor access Permission Area 27 PgEdit Recording a KE Storage Bias Storage Alarm Back Finish Edit Recording Supervisor Access Permission Area 19 Comms Menu Engineer Access See Figure 5 11 for Comms access All of the Comms menu buttons require Engineer access Permission Area 29 Pens Menu Supervisor Access Permission Area 26
44. For Comms wiring details in the recorder see Communications Connections on page 30 Follow these stages for successful communications Read about the different Comms interfaces used by the recorders See Standard Communication Interfaces on page 225 Setup your PC Network connections See Hardware Installation on page 227 Configure the TrendServer software See Comms and Trend Manager Suite on page 231 Comms Server software set up See Communications Server on page 236 Standard Communication Interfaces Before we start here is some information about the comms interfaces that are used in the setup of the TrendServer software and Communications Server Rear Ethernet Communication port The rear of the device is fitted with an Ethernet 10 100 port which supports Modbus TCP IP See Modbus on page 226 OPC Server connectivity to third party software OPC Server connection must be enabled by selecting the OPC option in Credits on page 112 Setup the OPC Server informa tion required OPC Interface Open Process Control on page 253 Web browser See Web Browser on page 255 Rear RS485 port For the eZtrend QXe recorder a Comms option card is available with RS485 Modbus port and USB device connections The card can be purchased and fitted at any time The RS485 connection uses a 3 way connector The card also has connection for 24V DC Transmitter Power Supply see Transmitter Power Supply Card
45. Me WE Configure Alarms Screen 4 p i Batch Recordin Messages 102 3 0 NA Process Status Gish status a System Pen Overview Maintenance gt a p m Recording Diagnostics TC Usage Back Finish Status Menu No Login required All of the Mes sages buttons require No Login access Permission Area 3 Screen Menu No Login required See Figure 5 7 for Screen menu access Permission Area 2 Replay ail Calibrate iz Messages a a zal B All 31 Alarms 28 System B En is Diagnostics 3 Security Users Back Finish Messages Menu No Login required Permis sion Area 1 Except Clear Messages requires Engi neer access See Figure 5 10 P gRecording d gt 7 3 Start Stop Export Now Recording 15 pens recording Export Required In 1d 0h 39m 24s Schedule 1Hour to USB1 Media Full In 20 Days FTP Export Requir Orn 00s Recording Menu Operator Access This is a view only screen All of the buttons on the Recording menu re quire Operator access Permission Area 11 195 Figure 5 2 Default password access from the Configure menu Layout menu Supervisor access Setup menu Technician access All of the Layout menu buttons require See Figure 5 3 for Setup menu Superv
46. See Commu nications Server on page 236 Compact flash is not available for the eZtrend QXe recorder Figure 8 3 Data Logging and Transfer Logged to Database TrendServer 1 Data Comms Database base Server 1 gt Server 1 Software Software _ Data dcm base Logged to Database 1 Data Comms Database base Server 2 Server 2 Software m Software X M Data BS pe m base TrendServer 2 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Comms and Trend Manager Suite Comms and Trend Manager Suite TrendServer software is required to set up and run communications to and from the de vices and the PC software TrendServer offers the ability to download and import data using FTP File Transfer Pro tocol via the Ethernet Interface To use it you must have a device with communications fitted as standard or as an option on the eZtrend QXe recorder with Ethernet as your active port and the FTP enabled TrendServer is part of the TrendManager Suite complete with its own Communica tions Server function TrendServer is a fully network aware package which allows data viewing archiving and communication over Ethernet and RS485 Ethernet can provide com munications limited only by PC resources and RS485 can provide comms for up to 31 de vices Included as standard is the abilit
47. The Alarm Digital IO button will display all the digital inputs outputs available Click on each individual Alarm IO or Digital IO number to set up each channel profile Cards available are 2 types of Alarm Relay cards 4 Alarm Relay Output 8 Alarm Relay Output with 2 Digital Inputs 2 types of Digital IO cards 8 Digital Inputs or Outputs 16 Digital Inputs or Outputs Not available for the eZtrend QXe recorder 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Alarm Relay Card 4 Alarm relay output card or 8 Alarm relay Output with 2 Digital Inputs 6 fixed outputs and 2 configurable Digital Input or output cards Digital IO Card There are 8 or 16 Digital channels per card that can be setup as inputs or outputs The Dig ital I O card also has 4 channels that can be set as pulse inputs channels 1 to 4 The op erating frequency for pulse inputs on the Digital I O card is 1kHz max Input Low 1V High gt 4 5V to 10V DC 9V to 20V p p AC or Volt free input Low short circuit High open circuit To view and log a channel selected as a Pulse input set up an extra pen with a Maths func tion of LPULn in Edit Maths in the Pens menu For more information see Appendix B Maths Expressions on page 295 For connection details see For connection details See Alarm Relay Channel Numbers on page 28 Edit Setup Marm Digital IC Menu path to current menu moult ANE Digital I O 1 D1 Pulse Input Hz gt E The Digit
48. as a part of an Event occurring such as Alarms In Out Ack Totaliser Start Stop or Reset Digital Inputs On Off or State change TC Burnout on a specific Analogue Input channel Scheduled Events Once Interval Specific days Month End OPC 8 OPC Server Open Process Control Software application for realtime interfacing between serv ers and clients OPC is a software standard that defines common interfaces for data exchange between devices such as recorders controllers PCL s and Windows based applications Pwd Net Sync 5 Password Network Synchronisation Password can be synchronised over the network a recorder can be designated as a master of a password group and other recorders can be added to that group as slaves the master will ensure all passwords are synchronised with all recorders in its group AMS2750 Process 5 AMS2750 Process activates the Process Mode screen and the AMS2750 process configuration menus for furnaces and sensors in accordance with AMS2750 specification including Thermo couple tracking AMS2750 TUS 10 AMS2750 TUS activates the TUS screen and the AMS2750 TUS configuration menus for fur naces and sensors in accordance with AMS2750 specification including Thermocouple tracking All of the survey information can be exported to a Report Generating tool Extra Pens 4 pens 2 4 extra pens to store and display totalised values results of calculations etc Maximum
49. either top and bottom or left and right slots NEMA 4X rated recorders require all four mounting brackets to be fitted 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Mechanical Installation Multitrend SX Dimension details 900088 000000 00000 00000 000000000000000 e 00000000000000 45 MM THICK PANEL SLOT LENGHT OF PANEL CLAMP INCREASED TO ACCOMODATED 45 MM THICK PANEL 300 00 46 83 11 811 1 844 280 00 11 024 Figure 2 4 Multiitrend SX Recorder Dimensions and Mounting slots including 45mm panel thickness Installation Instructions Minimum panel thickness 2mm 0 078 max 20mm 0 78 Alternate panel mounting available thickness 45mm 1 77 Both recorders must be inserted from the front of the panel Two mounting clamps are supplied and can be fixed either on the top and bottom sides or on the left and right sides of the case 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK eZtrend QXe Dimension details diu 4 Mounting clamp positions For standard units fit only two brackets on opposite sides of the unit either top and bottom or left and right slots NEMA 4X rated recorders require all four mounting brackets to be fitted Figure 2 5 eZtrend QXe recorder dimensions 10 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Mechanical Installation Panel Mounting Clamp Installation The Minitrend QX Multitrend SX and the eZtrend QXe recorders slide into the panel cut out and are held in place
50. er In Edit mode you can select items on the screen and assign channel pen information to them and move and resize certain items on the screen Expert Non Expert button All process screen are made up from items called Widgets and Objects A widget is a con tainer for one or many objects Objects display data in graphical forms such as Bar Scale DPM Text The Expert button toggles to Non Expert mode displayed with a red cross Ex pert mode allows objects to be selected and Non Expert allows widgets to be selected 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 155 156 To select a widget the Expert button must be disabled displaying a red cross A widget has green resize handles that appear when it is selected To select an object the Expert button must be active with no red cross showing Objects have blue resize handles when selected When a widget or object is selected it can be moved and resized Figure 4 3 Expert and Non Expert selection Standard Screen 1 0001 MiniTrend Expert Exit 20 Jul06 14 16 42 Expert Exit 20 Jul06 14 17 57 14 16 00 9D 4ilf o zem i i Pen 4 5 0e 00 Non Expert mode selects the Expert mode selects the Object Widget with green resize handles with blue resize handles part the whole DPM of the DPM Map Button Map button The Map button in the Screen Menu bar enables the user to associated channels to pens so the pen being displayed on the object or widget will display the actual signal on
51. the chart speed on all screens that have charts The Settings button will auto hide in 4 sec onds touch the chart again to activate To change the chart speed from Slow Medium or Fast return to a process screen with a chart and touch the chart This will produce the Settings button in the top right of the screen select this to display the current chart speeds setting for Fast Medium and Slow The cur rent selection will be highlighted To change the actual chart speed setting for Fast Medium and Slow see Charts on page 125 Press the Hot Button to trigger an event Touch the screen to produce the Settings button Select Settings to produce the chart speeds menu QuickView Changing chart speeds can be used as quick view of the data at different resolutions Hot Button This function is diabled by default To enable the Hot Button go to Settings on page 139 The Hot Button function when active as an Event cause enables the user to select the Hot Button on the active screen and the corresponding event that the user needs to set will be triggered The hot button will be display on active screen in the top right corner To set up a Hot Button as an Event cause go User Action sub menu in Event Causes on page 96 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Screen Activity Alarm Markers Alarm markers appear when an alarm is setup in the Pen Alarms menu Hi A v and Low alarm markers appear as a triangle on a DPM or B
52. this is enabled by default Analogue defaults to the corresponding Pen eg A1 will default to Pen 1 If you change A1 to display another pen scale eg Pen 3 you must go into Pen 3 and change the maths to A1 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 57 58 This will ensure that Pen Scale 3 will display A1 input With this enabled the Engineer ing zero and span is the same as the pen scale Disable this and the Engineering zero and span will not reflect the pen scale When disabled see Eng Span amp Eng Zero bullet points below This is not available when using Linearisation Tables Units Ohms Volts and Amps only This is the Units of Measurement for each input Select and enter a value Max 13 characters For Thermocouple and Resistance Ther mometer units see Localisation on page 117 Label Select and enter a identification label for the input Select and enter a label Max 15 characters SQRT Extract Volts and Amps only Toggle On and Off The Square root extraction in the analogue input is used to linearise certain sensors that have a non linear output for example in the calculation of flow So when you check the Square root extraction in the Analogue input section it carries out the following calculation It ratios the analogue input range that you set to 0 to 1 So any sensor input is represented by a number from 0 to 1 We then take the square root We then re ratio the result back to the user set range Sen
53. to enable the feature within the recorder If there are not enough credits available More credits are available from your supplier For a complete lists of all the firmware options and their functionality see Table 7 1 Firmware Options on page 221 FW Upgrade Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup General Factory FW Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade button allows new versions of the recorder firmware to be loaded into the recorder via a USB key or a CF card The file type required to upgrade the Firmware has the file extension xsu Contact Honeywell for more information Firmware downloads are available from http hpsweb honeywell com Insert the CF card or USB key with the latest revision of Firmware xsu file format and press the FW Upgrade button The recorder will scan and check the files on the external device with the current version running in the recorder Any later version files on the external device are copied into the recorder If there is no external media fitted or the file is corrupt a Firmware installation dialog will ap pear If this occurs check the file is the correct format xsu Secondly download the file to another CF card or USB key See Storage Media Format on page 163 for formatting information of CF cards and USB keys Compact Flash not available for the eZtrend QXe Note The network share folder cannot be used to upgrade firmware remotely Firmware up grade needs to be done locally using local
54. 0 01 C 100 ohm Nickel 76 to 356 60 to 180 0 9 0 5 0 01 C 120 ohm Nickel 112 to 500 80 to 260 0 5 0 3 0 01 C Cu10 328 to 500 200 to 260 5 5 a 0 01 C Cu53 32 to 302 0 to 150 0 5 0 3 0 01 C Reference Temperature 22 C Reference Humidity 65 RH 15 Reference Sample Rate 2Hz 500msec Long term stability 0 2 year Does not includes reference junction calibration of 1 0 C using the standard ice bath method of calibration Factory accuracy can be im proved by performing a field calibration Also does not include any error on the sensor Tolerance for these input types includes that of the external shunt resistors 0 1 tolerance Reference Accuracy can be improved to 0 4 C 0 7 F using the single point compensation calibration not available on the QXe Including all Field Cal values Specification Options Pulse Input optional not available on the QXe 4 isolated inputs per board frequency 1Hz to 25kHz updated once per sec Input Low 1V High gt 4V to 50V or Volt free input Low short circuit High open circuit Alarm Outputs optional Programmable alarm set points 6 per pen can be configured to activate up to 16 outputs for the QX and 48 outputs for the SX Update rate 200 ms for all alarms Number Type 4or 8relay contacts SPDT 3A 240VAC 3A 24VAC DC 0 2A 240VDC non inductive internally suppressed 8l
55. 1 one reading per second per channel 3 The maximum speed of data logging of realtime Modbus data is 1 one reading per second per channel 4 The maximum number of devices depends on whether the connection is serial or ether net Onthe serial port there is a physical limit of 31 devices The Modbus comms can sup port anywhere between 4 and 10 devices at a rate of 1 reading per second depending on the complexity of the recorder configurations As the rate is decreased from 1 one reading per second the number of supported devices increases Onthe Ethernet connection the current physical limit is 247 recorders talking Modbus due to a requirement that the Comms Server must have a unique ID for each device in the network Additional Honeywell V5 recorders using the Trendbus protocol could be supported on the network as long as their device IDs remain unique With Modbus connection anywhere between 24 and 64 devices are supported at a rate of 1 reading per second again depending on the complexity of the device configurations As the rate is decreased the number of devices supported increases 5 The maximum number of pens supported at once per second for a given device is 32 Up to 64 pens supported at once every 5 seconds Then all 96 pens at once every 10 seconds for the Multitrend SX recorder The above specifications should be used as a guideline because factors such as network speed and reliability could impact performanc
56. 152 Volume Sound Effects esses 152 Settings Update Sounds Sound Effects 152 Setup Ment AI Calibration Alarm Relay 1 Alarm Digital IO Alarms Menu Analogue In Menu Analogue Out ou ee ids Batch MENU 15e steterit cens 431 CJC Calibration Calibration Charts eeeocps Comms Services Counters Credits Daylight Saving Digital IO Edit Recording Edit Setup i erect pem eres Email E Error Alert Events Menu Events Counters Menu e 92 BEDS S che ce fea E E AE he N E E md Factory Field IO Firmware Upgrade General Groups IP Address Identity Language Load Menu Localisation Logging Modbus T Peers oe PODS eee Save Setup Scale Menu eie eine direi Screen Saver n eene oat imeem Screen Setup Services TCP IP pranuara Tabular Display Temp Units Time Zone Totaliser oo Web Enable Share Path NAS Show Hot Button Signal Wiring TEE Single Point Cal iiusscuecnatnsssipe Slave ID i SOMWATE ats sac ei dina aa Software Installation Comms 232 Sound Effects Set Volume sess Update Sounds Spares List Mini
57. 16 GLO August 2013 UK 337 Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Fatal startup error 0 1 1 l O board could not be initialized suspect I O board Diagnostics Errors when trying to initialise board after numerous attempts Messages H W error prevents execu 0 1 1 Al board could not be initialized suspect Al board Diagnostics tion of command Failed to set acquisition interrupt timer Al board Messages H W error prevents execu 0 1 1 Al board could not be initialized suspect Al board Diagnostics tion of command Failed to set acquisition interrupt timer Al board Messages H W error prevents execu 1 1 1 PI board could not be initialized suspect pulse board Diagnostics tion of command Failed to set acquisition interrupt timer PI board Messages H W error prevents execu 2 1 1 DIO AR board could not be initialized suspect I O board Failed Diagnostics tion of command to set acquisition interrupt timer DIO AR boards Messages H W error prevents execu 3 1 1 AO board could not be initialized suspect AO board Diagnostics tion of command Failed to set acquisition interrupt timer AO board Messages H W error prevents execu 4 1 1 Internal I O card failure Diagnostics tion of command Triggered Clock Monitor Failure Messages Function code received N A N A I O card did not recognize the command sent to it Diagnostics unknown Message
58. 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 41 42 Functions and Features Minitrend QX Standard Screens The Minitrend QX recorder has up to 12 screens available for displaying combinations of charts bars and DPMs can be configured 6 examples below wl 0001 Turbine 1 Screen 10 Jan 06 14 16 47 2 40 40 12 40 100 88 F n m el Horizontal Chart and DPMs a 2 ij 0001 Turbine 1 18h 3 Screen 10 Jan 06 14 16 47 0001 Turbine 1 Screen 10 Jan 06 14 16 47 Horizontal Chart 4 Vertical Bars and 4 DPMs O001 Turbine 1 Screen 10 Jan 06 14 16 47 Pen 1 20 a Total 1 0 00 Total 3 0 008 7 67 Total 5 0 00 Pen 7 a Total 7 0 00 39 700 60 000 0001 Turbine 1 Screen 10 Jan 06 14 16 47 10 000 m 000 96 DPMs and Scales gt dj 0001 Turbine 1 18h 3 Screen 10Jan06 14 16 47 20 00 40 00 60 00 80 00 p 100 0066 1 10 000 20 000 30 000 49 000 50 000 50 000 14 42 E 10 000 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 60 000 42 a 0 000 5 000 00 15 000 20 000 25 000 30 000 35 000 409005 3 0 00 20 0 40 00 50 00 80 00 100 00 56 550 0 000 5 000 10 000 15 000 20 000Pen 4 20 00 40 00 60 00 80 00 100 00 20 00 40 00 60 00 80 00 100 00 Vertical Chart 8 Horizontal Bars and 8 DPMs 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Functions and Features eZtrend QXe Standard Screens The eZtrend QXe recorder has
59. 8 A 27 24 Pen 2 deg C 27 540 27 598 Pen 3 36 1 2e 01 1 1e 01 Pen 4 96 S 6e 01 5 6e 01 In the Replay screen the traces for pens 5 and 8 have been hidden to allow for 96 56 74 viewing Touch the DPM on 96 the screen to toggle the pen AA trace On and Off gt amp Action Rev Fwd In Out Cursor Exit About Replay The replay screen facility enables the user to Show greater coverage of elapsed time display more history Zoom in and out further Display data on a chart and DPM screen Display Max Min readings on DPMs Display pens on a chart replay screen that are currently displayed on a DPM screen Add any enabled pen on to a process screen All enabled pens have history even if not dis played on a process screen These can be added onto a process screen at any time to view and replay data There is a Replay Screen time out feature so if the recorder is in replay mode and there has not been any user activity for a defined amount of time then the replay screen will return to the process screen See Settings on page 139 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Zooming When the recorder switches to the replay screen it will represent the chart speed that is on your current process screen the one you ve just left This will affect how far you can zoom in and out For example if you are using the Medium chart speed what ever it may be set to the screen can zoom in 5 more times to see detail over a sh
60. Alone recorders will be blank The Peers Diagnostic Status screen only gets updated when a rescan is done if you remove a peer from the network it still shows in the Comms Diagnostic Peers Status screen until another rescan A rescan will be done when a recorder come online startup or a change is made to password netsync If you experience any security issues using peers see Internet Security Settings on page 256 Messages The Messages list displays the Peer to Peer status Thus includes the Type of message usually a system password message Time Date and the Message information This screen can be cleared or printed Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media Media Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Media Pen Pen number Rate Pen speed Store Size How much memory is allocated to this pen Store Time How much storage time is available Remaining How much memory is left before data is over written Store Size Store Time and Remaining are dependant of the pen logging speed how many pens are logging and will be affected by Storage bias allocation of chart and logged data Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Finish When the Finish button is pressed at the end of a new set up or a change to a setup the following opt
61. Area 1 Messages Y Y v v Y Y Perm Area 2 Screen v Y Y Y v A Perm Area 3 Status Y Y v Y Y Y Perm Area 4 View Totals Y Y v Y Y Y Perm Area 5 View Alarms Y Y v Y Y Y Perm Area 6 View Max Min v v v Y v v Perm Area 7 View Counters Y Y v Y Y Y Perm Area 8 Acknowledge v Y v Y v Alarms Perm Area 9 Configure v v v Y v Alarms Perm Area 10 Batch v Y v Y v Control Perm Area 11 Recording Y Y v Y Y Perm Area 12 Change v v Y v Y Password Perm Area 13 Main Config Y v v v Y ure Menu Perm Area 14 Configure Y v v v Counters Perm Area 15 Configure Y v v v Totals Perm Area 16 Configure Y v v v Max Min Perm Area 17 Load Save v v v v Setups Perm Area 18 Main Setup Y v v v Menu Perm Area 19 Edit Setup Y v v Perm Area 20 General Setup Y Y v Menu Perm Area 21 Printer Setup Y Y v Perm Area 22 Batch Setup Y v Y 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 191 Table 5 1 Default Level Permissions Default user levels of access to areas within the recorder menu system Ls Super No Login s r Permission Area Admin Engineer visor Technician Operato required Perm Area 23 Configure Y Y Y Settings Perm Area 24 Configure Y Y Y Layout Perm Area 25 Screen Setup Y Y Y Perm Area 26 Pens Y Y Y Perm Area 27 Events v Y Y Counters Perm Area 28 General v Y All Perm Area 29 Comms v Y Services Peers amp Net
62. Assy 2 51453027 501 QX Analogue Output 2CH Assy 51453027 502 QX Analogue Output 4CH Assy 2 50001017 502 QX Pulse Input 4CH Assy 51453009 501 QX Mother Board Assy 4 51453018 501 QX Digital I O 8CH Assy 51453018 502 QX Digital I O 16CH Assy 4 51453021 501 QX Relay Alarm 4CH Assy 51453021 502 QX Relay Alarm 8CH Assy 5 51453015 501 QX Power Supply AC Mains 51453015 502 QX Power Supply AC TX 51453015 503 QX Power Supply 20V 55VDC 20 30VAC 51453015 504 QX Power Supply 12VDC 35VDC 12VAC 26VAC 7 50013945 501 QXBezel Touch Screen and Std Nema Includes Bezel Touch 3R IP54 Door Assy Screen and Door Assy 50013945 502 QX Bezel Touch Screen and Nema 4X IP66 Door Assy 9 50003508 501 QX Nema 4X IP66 Door 10 50009118 501 QX Std Nema 3R IP54 Door 16 50006685 501 QX Bezel Touch Screen Assembly and Includes Bezel Touch Std Nema 3R1 IP45 Door Assy Screen Assy Door Display Speaker Ca 50006685 502 QX Bezel Touch Screen Assembly and bles and Mounting Nema 4X IP66 Door Assy Bracket 19 50058905 501 QX 5 5 Display with LED backlight T055Q1D1 v 0A 50059722 501 5 5 Display Display Cable 23 50001782 501 QX SX Speaker 24 51453071 501 QX Case and Back Plate Assy 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 265 266 Table 10 1 Minitrend QX Spares 28 50006787 501 QX SX
63. At the top of each process screen is the Menu bar Recorder ID and Name alternates with the Screen Name 18h 78 Screen 10 Jan 06 13 40 47 10 Jan D6 13 40 4 0001 Turbine 1 nel Date and Time Menu This gives direct access to the Menu System to set up the recorder See Section 4 Re corder Setup on page 47 Alarm bell 1 The second button shows the Alarm status When the alarm bell is green this means there are no active alarms If the bell is red then an alarm is active and the number of active alarms will display below Press this button to produce the Alarm menu bar Here there is an Acknowledge button to confirm any latched alarms that require acknowledgment See Alarms Menu on page 71 There is a View button that displays all pens currently with alarms set up The De tail button will take you straight to the Alarms menu see Alarms Menu on page 154 Time Left 18h This button shows how much time is left before data will fill the internal memory and an ex port of the memory to an external device is required before data is overwritten Select this button to go to the Recording screen to export the data now or set up a timed export using the Scheduled option See Recording Menu on page 162 If the Time Left button shows two green arrows this means that the memory Pod buffer is full and the oldest data has started to be over written List 78 This button produces another but
64. Bars and DPMs Vertical Chart 3 Horizontal Bars and 3 DPMs 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 43 Minitrend QX Rear Connections Earth screw Wire seal ground 20 to 55VDC 20 to 30VAC Input or AG supply 100 250VAC 12VDC 35VDC 12VAC 26VAC 24 48V Instrument power option Common Relay Output SPNC Analogue Input 24V TX Power Analogue Output Supply Output or Pulse Input Slot A Slot B CJC Sensor Alarm or Digital 1 0 Ethernet Slot G 100 250VAC Rear Panel AC power is connected via the standard HERI RS485 configuration IEC chassis plug on the rear panel An optional rear cover is available for this recorder it is recommended when using Thermo couples as the measurement device and to protect the wiring and terminals For the rear cover part number see Section 10 Spares List on page 263 44 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Wire seal Earth screw ground 20 to 30VDC 20 to 25VAC Input 24VInstrument power option 24V TX Power Supply Output RS485 port and USB Host option Functions and Features eZtrend QXe Rear Connections 100 250VAC Rear Panel AC power is connected via the standard configuration IEC chassis plug on the rear panel AC supply 100 250VAC Analogue Input card Slot B option Alarm or Digital I O Slot G option Up to 6 Analogue Inputs and Ethernet std An optional rear cover is available for this recorder it is recommended when using T
65. Brightness Set the recorder s screen brightness using the instant brightness slider Default screen brightness is 80 Adjustable between 10 and 100 of full brightness Set the brightness level tick to agree then go to Finish Commit to permanently apply the change For information on increasing the display life by reducing backlight brightness see Back lights on page 277 Tabular Display Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Screen Tabular Display L3 Screen Setup Edit Setup Screen Setup Update Method Periodic ote oo T peere og Update Period 10 Secs Charts Screen Saver Brightness Alignment a g Update Method Periodic or Event Update Period Configuration of periodic display can be set from 10 seconds default per update to 86400 secs or 1440 minutes 1 day per update this will show a new line of data readings at this elapsed time period Alignment an align configuration would be provided to align the tabular display to the nearest minute or hour 126 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Tabular Screen Main Menu Screen Edit Screens or Main Menu Configure Layout Edit Screens cat aout Y socos M Suems De mmm OOO Tabular om Lo B el A Tabular screen will display tabular readings in lines from top to bottom of the screen with the latest readings at the top of the screen The template will aut
66. Can t initialise the SPI for N A N A General error that the I O card channel specified has failed to Diagnostics ADCs make a measurement Messages Can t initialise ADC speeds 0 1 1 One or more measurements on an Al channel have failed Diagnostics ranges etc Error selecting input pair on initialisation of Al board Messages Can t initialise ADC speeds 1 1 1 One or more measurements on an Al channel have failed Error Diagnostics ranges etc setting relays P1 P2 on initialisation of Al board Messages Can t initialise ADC speeds 2 1 1 An invalid configuration has been sent to the Al board Diagnostics ranges etc Error setting filter value on initialisation of Al board Messages Can t initialise ADC speeds 3 1 1 An Al channel could not be reset on the Al board Diagnostics ranges etc Error while resetting ADCs more detail on channel specific Messages faults Can t initialise ADC speeds 4 1 1 An Al channel could not be initialized on the Al Diagnostics ranges etc Error initialising an ADC channel Messages Can t initialise the CUC 0 1 2 CJC failed to initialize Check that CJC is fitted Failed several Diagnostics attempts to initialise CJC device on Al board Messages ADC not ready for requested 0 4 4 ADC conversion timed out perhaps ADC filter value too slow for Diagnostics op chan acq Rate ADC not ready Messages Failed to reset ADC convert 0 1 1 An Al channel cannot be reset correctly Diagnostics ers Failed to reset ADC on Al board Mess
67. Editable MM DD YYYY This field is derived from the TUS data file using the fields Instrument type A to E Material Type Parts or Raw Material and Fur nace class Calendar select button is available If the next Next Survey Due Date is past the Survey date a warning box will appear Next Survey date should be greater than current date this will be prompted when Next is se lected 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK AMS2750 Report Generation Tool Step 3 Recorder Certificate Information This refers to the recorder calibration certificate Please enter Calibration Certificate number of the test recorder used to complete the TUS Enter Certificate Expiry Date MM DD YYY enter the expiry date of the Recorder Cali bration Certificate If the survey date is past the certificate expiry date a warning box will be prompted when Next is selected The message says Certificate Expiry date is past the survey date would you like to continue The generated report shall also highlight the expired date TUS Report Wizard Please enter the Calibration Certificate number of the test recorder used to complete the TUS Enter Certificate Expiry Date MM DD YYYY 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 403 404 AMS2750 Report Generation Tool Step 4 Furnace Instruments Instruments 1 to 5 There are five instrument information boxes available associated with the furnace TUS All the screens are the same as
68. Groups 5 The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis The Batch function manages sections of data Concurrent batches are now associated with a group of pens The pens with in each group will belong to the batch that is controlled by that group Batches can be controlled through the event system and batch markers are setup by the user and are used to identify and analyse batches of data Supports up to 6 concurrent batches 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 221 Firmware Credit System Table 7 1 Firmware Options Firmware option Credit Description value Counters 3 User Counters can be set up and used as a part of the Events system to count an occurrence Other counters are available depending on hardware availability Eg Alarm Event Digital Input Relay Output and Pulse counters Modbus Master 10 Modbus master enables the recorder to communicate with up to 32 Slave devices on both Ether net and RS485 The recorder itself can also act as a slave device while also being a master Mod bus master can also be used in conjunction with OPC to enable the recorder to act as a communication bridge Remote Viewer 3 Extends the user interface of the recorder onto the desktop PC Providing full remote control of the recorder launched from a web browser Email 3 Setup email accounts to send the following When an Alarm is triggered or an Email can be sent
69. Input card has channels using a connector that only takes up half the length of the connector slot Looking from the rear of the unit the Pulse Input connector is on the right of the slot with a blanking plate on the left Table 2 5 Pulse Input card Card Position Slot A Slot B Slot C Slot D Slot E Slot F Channel number 1to4 9 to 12 17 to 20 25 to 28 33 to 36 41 to 44 Pulse Input Connection Details Do not connect anything to terminals marked NC Not Connected For Frequency and Volt age levels see Specification Tables on page 283 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 NC NC NC NC 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 25 26 Electrical Installation Transmitter Power Supply Card The Minitrend QX Transmitter power supply option is 24V DC 200 mA and is fitted to the power supply card 24V OV within the unit Connection is made via a 2 way connector at the rear of the unit the mating half is supplied with this O O option For connector position see page 16 The 24V transmitter power supply is not isolated from the recorder Minitrend 24V DC TXP and is not referenced to ground The Multitrend SX Transmitter power supply option is 24V DC 1 A and is fitted below the power supply card within the unit Connection is made via two 10 way connectors see page 16 mating halves supplied
70. Master recorder 17 Maximum slaves in any one password group are 31 18 Maximum size of any peer to peers network is 32 recorders 19 Stand alone recorders that already contain a password configuration will have their password configuration overwritten when they become part of a password group 20 Anew Master can be elected from any Slave recorder in the password group by going to the Type field in the Pwd NetSync dialog that is available from the Menu gt Config ure gt Passwords menu and selecting Master Any existing Master will automatically be relegated to a Slave and if the current password group Master was down at the time then it will be relegated to be a Slave the next time it comes online at start up Notes 1 Password NetSync is heavily dependent on a reliable network If the system seems to be suffering from apparently poor network connectivity then try splitting the password group up into multiple password groups with each group on a separate Set Please see the Manual for more details on Sets 2 Running Password NetSync without the Master of the password group powered up and connected to the network is an error condition Please rectify this situation as soon as possible as Password NetSync cannot be expected to function properly without a pass word group Master being present NOTICE The Password NetSync function in the X Series recorders uses a Peer to Peer communications protocol to synchronize passwords betwe
71. Maths amp Script Processing Example 3 The application described in Examples 2 and 3 is to be extended to totalise the amount of time that Input 1 is the highest of 1 2 3 amp 4 Again scripting can be used to easily solve this requirement The Pseudo code is written as If input 1 is indicated as the current highest value then display the timer If input 1 is not the highest input value then stop totalising time and return the current timer value We know that in Example 1 the highest value channel number is contained with GLBV1 and as this is a global variable it is also accessible from this script if GLBV1 1 BLKV1 trun 1 0 return tget 1 else BLKV1 tpause 1 return tget 1 Tests if the global variable 1 is equal to channel 1 If it is then keep the timer running without resetting Return the current timer value If not then Pause the timer Return the current paused timer value Note in this script above there is no way to reset the timer this could be modified to allow the user to reset this timer from a switch fed into a digital input as follows if D11 1 if GLBV1 1 BLKV1 trun 1 0 return tget 1 else BLKV1 tpause 1 return tget 1 Tests if the DI 1 is not set If it isn t then Tests if the global variable 1 is equal to channel 1 If it is then keep the timer running without resetting Return the current timer value If not then Paus
72. Max Min Menu No Login required Totals Menu No Login required Start Stop and Reset Totals buttons require Technician access Permission Area 15 Reset Max Min Reset Max and Reset Min buttons require Technician access Permission Area 16 View requires No Login Permission Area 4 View requires No Login Permission Area 6 amp Process Counters Menu No Login required User Variables Max Min EJ Operator access Permission Area 41 Reset button for all Counters require Technician access Permission Area 14 UVn User Variables J Modify and View buttons View requires No Login Permission Area 7 Script Timers Operator access Permission Area 47 3 Reports Operator access Permission Area 45 Run and View Archive reports Reset All Engineer access Permission area 46 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Figure 5 9 Default password access from the General Menu ts General E Error Alert p Batch lt q Back Factory menu requires Engineer ac cess All of the factory menu buttons require Engineer access Permission Area 28 General Menu Supervisor access Permission Area 20 Ident Error Alert and Factory require Engineer access Permission Area 28 Batch requires sion Area 22 Supervisor access Permis Printer requires Supervisor acc
73. Modbus only requires the correct Slave ID to connect see Modbus on page 84 If the device is detected using the Slave ID the Recorder ID and Serial Number will be transferred if the device is not detected an extra device will appear in the database containing the Re altime data Depending on the type of network being used it maybe advisable not to use Modbus comms and FTP in the same time to the same PC This may cause the FTP transfer to time out Only data can be sent via Modbus No recorder setups or events are sent for realtime and logged data However a Modbus interface such as Modscan 32 can be set up as Modbus master and used to transmit Totals Digital Input Digital Output a Comms Variable CV or Messages to the recorder Modbus X Modbus X protocol differs from standard Modbus by the reversed byte order of the floating point number The Comms Server provides an integrated facility for testing a device to help decide which modbus protocol variant to use See Edit a Device on page 245 Modbus Mapping and Function Codes see Appendix J Function Codes and Memory Maps on page 329 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Hardware Installation Device and PC Ethernet connections Connect an Ethernet cable from the Ethernet port on the back of the device to the Ethernet hub Connect another Ethernet cable from the Ethernet port on the PC to the Ethernet hub Hubs or Switches Hubs and Switches come in all dif
74. N A An error has occurred during factory or user calibration Diagnostics calibration Messages Unable to return all or part of N A N A Some or all of the calibration data was corrupt so none could be Diagnostics cal may be corrupt returned Messages Error during I O board star N A N A An error occurred during I O card startup Diagnostics tup Messages The reply message larger N A N A The I O card reply was longer than allowed and so overflowed Diagnostics than buffer the buffer Messages Unable to read configuration 0 3 3 General error one or more values could not be read from the Diagnostics EEPROM Error reading long value from EEPROM Messages Unable to read configuration 1 3 3 The stored Al configuration could not be read on power up Diagnostics Error reading Al config from EEPROM on power up Messages Unable to read configuration 2 3 3 The stored AO configuration could not be read on power up Diagnostics Error reading AO config from EEPROM on power up Messages Unable to read configuration 3 3 3 The stored digital pulse configuration could not be read on Diagnostics power up Error reading DIG config from EEPROM on power up Messages Unable to write configuration 0 3 3 The default board configuration could not be written on power Diagnostics up Error writing Board Setup to EEPROM on power up Messages Unable to write configuration 1 3 3 The Al configuration could not be written to EEPROM on configu Diagnostics ration change Error
75. N A N A The last CJC value was not read correctly Diagnostics read correctly Messages ADC chip failed self test 0 1 1 Did not pass the self test value read wasn t the expected default Diagnostics chan on given channel Messages Detected open circuit load N A N A The AO channel has an O C load i e load has been removed Diagnostics on an enabled AO channel Messages Requested more than 21mA N A N A The AO channel has been requested to retransmit 21mA Diagnostics output Messages Ambient temperature out of N A N A The AI card ambient temperature is outside of operating limits Diagnostics limits Messages Active burnout almost failed N A N A The T C on the specified Al channel has almost burnout how Diagnostics on Al channel ever a value can still be measured T C almost failed O C Messages Active burnout S C detected N A N A The T C on the specified Al channel has burnout failed O C Diagnostics on Al channel whilst set to active burnout mode Messages Active burnout degraded on N A N A The T C on the specified Al channel has degraded performance Diagnostics Al channel however a value can still be measured Messages Out of burnout on Al channel N A N A The T C on the specified Al channel has recovered from a burn Diagnostics out condition Suspect a bad connection failing T C Messages Upscale burnout on Al chan N A N A The T C on the specified Al channel has burnout failed O C Diagnostics nel The pen has gone upscale as stated in th
76. Note 4 OPC Access 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Web Browser Web Browser The Web Browse function can be enabled disabled from the recorder This allows you to view the recorder information only The web button can be password protected if passwords are enabled See Web on page 87 This is a firmware option that first needs to be acti vated in Options see Credits on page 112 Remote Viewer The Remote Viewer is a firmware option that can be added to allow access to the recorder from a web page The Remote viewer option needs to be activated in the Firmware options screen see Credits on page 112 To access your recorder s web page type the device s IP address in to a web browser such as Internet Explorer If Microsoft WINS system Windows Internet Name Service is avail able then the device name can be used to search for the device web page To find your re corder IP address see TCP IP on page 77 The recorder will automatically register a unique Network ID using the serial number The format is xs nnnnnn where nnnnnn is the serial number of the recorder This allows you to browse the recorder if you are using DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol On recorders with password security enabled further login will be required to access Full Re mote Control of the recorder from the web page and to enable a keyboard and mouse For users with Password functionality enabled Login is required Enter your User name
77. OY iisdem n ERE RERO TO HET coset SERRE es 383 Events AMS2730 5 iciistiiintiino nre nana taie Ie o rein 389 Audit Trail AMS2750 sh adesee meminere di PERS 390 TUS Data file TUS Logged data Passwords AMS2750 Lecce cete eee eere eerte esee eee ee tne seta tasse nss sesto sese toas esca TrendManager SuiteSoftware AMS2750 Screen Designer AMS2750 eerie eese eese eene teen ooieoe eeso oS Eoee rsss AMS2750 Report Generation Tool eere eee ee seen eene ense nennen sena Installation siiis eei mro d HIERHER introduch ON M Report Tool User Interface eee eese nennen nenne nen BID NP ERES SAT Report Wizard sonent piemiaio eiie TUS Report Wizard ccu ipte E T CO DH ROR QUE aie 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK vii viii 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Section 1 Preface Preface Thank you for choosing a Honeywell X Series recorder Thank you for purchasing the newest in our range of electronic data recording for Honey well X Series Advanced Graphic Recorders The Minitrend QX Multitrend SX and eZtrend QXe paperless chart recorders are the latest development of the solid state replacement for traditional paper recorders Many options features and functions are available to meet a wide range of applications and requirements including Power Water Treatment Thermal
78. Pen 1 alarm1 and show A3 pen P3 Alamst Almst x y Get the current alarm state for Pen x Alarm y active 0 inactive Di Di x Get the state of Digital input number x Glbv Glbv x Get the value of global variable number x Locv Locv x Get the value of local variable number x Pen Pen x Get the value of Pen number x Tot TOT x Get the current value of totaliser x Table 14 6 Boolean Operators Syntax Description AND amp amp Returns a true or false result from testing if two tests are both true e g IF A122GLBV1 amp amp A2 GLBV2 Assign Assigns one variable to another e g GLBV1 A1 GLBV1 becomes the value of A1 Equal to Returns a true or false result from testing if two variables are equal to each other e g IF A1 GLBV1 Greater than gt Returns a true or false result from testing if one variable is greater than another Greater than or equal to gt Returns a true or false result from testing if one variable is greater or equal to than another Less than lt Returns a true or false result from testing if one variable is less than another Less than and equal to lt Returns a true or false result from testing if one variable is less than or equal to another NOT Returns true if the result is 0 otherwise returns false 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Full Maths amp Script Processing Table 14 6 Boolean Operators Syntax Description Not equal to l
79. Previous completed e g P1 prmax 23 2 1 Max value so far for current day for Pen 23 Continued on next page 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 135 Pen Report Syntax the syntax for the embedded variables is as follows PRPtttxynn v ttt is the type of variables required and can be MAX Max value MAT Time max value was recorded MIN Min Value MIT Time min value was recorded AVE Average Value TOT Totaliser value STM Start time of the reports set X is the report set and can be C Current working hour day week month L Last completed hour day week month y is the period and can be H Hour D Day W Week M Month nn is the pen number from 1 to 96 e g of some embedded variables PRPTOTLM1 v Total for last complete month for pen 1 PRPMAXCD23 v Max so far for current day for pen 23 PRPMATCD23 v Time max was recorded for current day for P23 PRPSTMCD23 v Start time of report for current day for pen 23 136 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Layout Main Menu Configure Layout The user can configure how the data is presented on the screen From the Layouts screen choose to Edit Save or Load layouts in the recorder xj Z Edit Layout d 7 A Edit Save Load Screens Settings Appearance Finish Edit Layout Main Menu Configure Layout Edit The Edit Layout menu displays a Screen button to enable and display Standard and Custom screens The
80. SUCTUS omen oto uta ends 277 Barcode Reader sees cccesrsescseisasensteasvantiniate 32 Barcodes for Batch ss 162 Batch Event Causes Event Effects Batch Commands Batch Mark on Chart Batch Menu ttes Barcodes for Batch Concurrent Batch Mode Batch Setup Control Batch Commands Batch Mark on Chart Batch process screens Batch Overview Battery Data Appendix I 327 Battery Safety al nate 327 Processor Board c 327 Brightness Sereen Sayet shies ie iit n HI THEN 126 CE MTK siete ttotteiibietanae e CJC Calibration CJC Connectors Cables tette Calibrate Screen Calibration tens AI Calibration Appendix H CJC Calibration TR Maintenance Sensor Compensation User Calibration ees Calibration Input Range 115 424 Card Positions and Channel numbers 55 Card and Slot Positions sss 17 Change Chart Speed Event Effects 3m Re epe Change Log Speed Alarms i Change Passwords issiossuendiaiacirinihn Channel Mapping Map button 1 retenti Parent Pens i suni rei re abre AAE Channel Mapping Objects Channel Mapping Widgets Characterisation Tables Chart Control Event Effects 105 Chart Controls Inn M 250 Realtime eer R Chart Speeds ooduaebesiieiivari tede hrtadpnensi 214 Chats sicri
81. Server 1 Data Logging and Transfer Using the TrendServer software the device s details are added on to a database in TrendServer Once the device has been configured and enabled data can be retrieved Data is logged to the internal memory This data can be exported to TrendServer via Compact Flash USB removable media transfer setup and data Network Share folder NAS Modbus RS485 Ethernet transfer data only FTP Ethernet transfer Setup and data 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 229 Hardware Installation Exporting does not remove the data from the device but when the internal memory buffer is full the latest data will start to over write the oldest data Data can be imported from devices and logged to a Database known as Stored and His toric data Databases are managed by a Database Server The data can be retrieved graphed exported to spread sheets e mailed or transferred from devices to other data bases located on Remote Database Servers Using the Comms Server actual current data can be sent from a device straight to the server using Ethernet or RS485 links This actual current data can then be logged to a database and viewed on a graph in real time this is known as Realtime data Different types of data realtime logged and historic data can be displayed next to each other on a split graph screen The comms server is used to configure logging and manage databases and reflect each devices status
82. Settings button is used to enable screen cycling alarm screens and replay screens The Appearance button is used to change the chart background colour for normal charts and charts in replay mode Screens Main Menu Configure Layout Edit Screens This section allows the user to configure and modify the standard screens on the recorder The Edit button will produce a list of available screens in the recorder In each screen you can enable check and change the screen properties On the Multitrend SX recorder if AMS2750 TUS option is enabled Screen 4 will default to AMS2750 Process Mode and the next available screen will be taken by the TUS screen For more information see Appendix L X Series AMS2750 capabilities on page 351 The Edit button may display a warning message if the Commit Later option has been select ed This means changes to the configuration have been made but the changes have not been committed to the recorder See Commit Later on page 185 Select a standard or a new screen to view the following menu list Name Select to Change the name of the Standard Screen 21 characters max includ ing spaces Enabled Toggle On and Off to activate this Standard Screen Template Type Select from a list of pre defined templates ee DPMs Select which pen is displayed Activate to display Max Min readings and or activate to display Total values 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 137 ee DPMs and Bars S
83. Start to a slave address 02 the com plete message would be Start Start No No agave mon addr Addr Addr Addr 53 e Data crc CRC High Low High Lo 02 10 00 04 00 03 05 53 74 61 72 74 CRC CRC The response follows the normal response for function code 16 given in section 3 7 and so to the above message the response would be 02 10 00 04 00 03 CRC CRC Analogue Input Value Analogue readings in engineering units 4byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per reading Communications Input Values can be sent to the recorder for inclusion in the Maths Block using command 16 up to 32 IEEE floats can be sent to the recorder Using CV1 to CV32 in the Maths Block these values can be displayed on the pens i e P1 CV1 will set Pen 1 to the engineering value set address 1880 with the function code 16 Once again these are 4 byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per reading 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Modbus Memory Map Supplement Pen Values Pen values in engineering units 4 byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per reading Figure 22 1 Comms variables Comms variable to be used in Maths block PT EC CV1 CV32 m d CV33 CV96 So ECV1 9 2400 is a different modbus comms register but maps to exactly the same place as CV1 21880 Both map to the comms variables CV1 Pen Alarm Value 43 TV 25
84. TC Type J Track 2Hz M Sensor 2 A2 TC Type T Track 2Hz We Sensors v A3 TC TypeK Track 2H2 Be FEMME s Pon srm boke c ams2750 Info v Track usse D 0M Sample Rate 2Hz 500ms Burnout Type Passive gt qe g Select a Sensor Enabled Toggle On and Off Type Select this for a list of available Signal Inputs e AMS2750 Info See AMS2750 Info Process Mode on page 361 Sample Rate Select this for a list of available Analogue Input sample speeds A Fast Scanning range of 50Hz 20ms is available as a firmware option not available for the eZtrend QXe recorder See Firmware Credit System on page 221 Arranged in 2 banks of 3 inputs and sample rate must be the same within each bank only for eZtrend QXe recorder 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 359 AMS2750 Process mode Damp Level The damping filter is an advanced algorithm offering improved response over more traditional methods It works by producing configurable levels of damping but at the same time being able to respond rapidly to large input changes Enter the Damp Level in Engineering Units Burnout Type Only available when Type is set to TC Thermocouple Toggle between Active and Passive Active means it will send out a current to the TC Set to Passive means it takes a reading without sending out a current The T C is wired differ ently for Active and Passive Burnout see Figure
85. TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK USB host Ethernet RS485 AC supply 100 250VAC Analogue Input card Slot B op tion Alarm or Digital I O Slot G option Up to 6 Analogue Inputs and Ethernet std 273 Table 10 3 eZtrend QXe Spares 1 50012923 501 QXe 3CH Processor PWA 128MB CF Note Customer must 50012923 502 QXe 6CH Processor PWA 128MB CF supply model number 50012923 503 QXe 3CH Processor PWA 512MB CF and Serial number of 50012923 504 QXe 6CH Processor PWA 512MB CF existing unit when placing and order for processor board kits 2 51453006 502 QXe Analogue Input 6CH Assy Requires Expansion card item 3 3 50012927 501 QXe Expansion Board Assy Required for items 2 4 and 6 4 51453018 501 QXe Digital I O 8CH Assy 4 51453021 501 QXe Relay Alarm 4CH Assy 51453021 502 QXe Relay Alarm 8CH Assy 5 50015140 501 QXe Power Supply AC Mains 50015140 502 QXe Power Supply 20V 30VDC 20 25VAC 6 50012930 501 QXe Communications card plus 24V DC Transmitter Power Supply RS485 Mod bus RTU and USB port 7 50016251 501 QXe Bezel Touch Screen and Nema Includes Bezel Touch 4X IP66 Door Assy Screen and Door Assy 9 50015106 501 QXe Nema 4X IP66 Door 16 50015135 501 QXe Bezel Touch Screen Display As Includes Bezel Touch sembly NEMA 4X IP66 Screen Assy Door Display Speaker In verter Cables and Mounting Bracket 19
86. Temperature 121 11 C can be altered if required If TRUE contributions to Fo can be included after the target FALSE Include value has been reached and while the temperature is still cooling phase above the start temperature If FALSE these contributions are not included The maximum Fo totaliser value can be set if Include 15 1 999 Completion cooling phase is not selected the totaliser will stop at Value this value of Fo For setting up the Fo calculation refer to the Totaliser Menu on page 73 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Appendix H Calibration Al Calibration and CJC Calibration For Al and CJC Factory and User Calibration see Calibration on page 113 Sensor Compensation Sensor Compensation may be required to improve accuracy on a sub range This is an ad justment to the value of the signal input on each channel based on the Engineering units To set this up in the recorder see Sensor Comp in the menu for Analogue In Menu on page 56 or for AMS2750 Process and TUS modes see Sensors Configuration Menu Process Mode on page 359 Choose from Single Point Dual Point and Multi Point Cal Single Point Set the Comp Type to Single Point to adjust the signal input reading by an offset amount determined by the user Enter the Offset adjustment required and this is added or subtract ed for all future readings Dual Point Select Dual Point to change two points on the signal inp
87. This menu contains Credits for activating recorder options Firmware Upgrade Calibration Demo Traces Reset Setup and Localisation See Factory on page 112 Batch The Batch menu is for entering the Batch requirements for starting a new batch including using a Barcode reader Batch Menu on page 119 Printer The Printer menu allows configuration for setting up a printer See Printer Menu on page 122 Groups Groups of Pens can be specified and named with a Group name or number See Groups on page 123 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Identity Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup General gt Ident Unique recorder information Name Enter the recorder s name Maximum characters 32 Description Enter a description for the recorder using the on screen keyboard Maxi mum characters 64 ID This is a unique 4 digit identifier specific to this recorder It is advised to change the ID as all recorders will default to 0001 If Modbus communications are used it is highly recommended to use the same number as the Modbus slave ID When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 109 Error Alert Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt E
88. Type is set to Fuzzy This is where the toler ance is set for the input signal Specify as a percentage of the scale range the toler ance band allowed above and below the input signal Select and enter a value 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Fuzzy Band2 Only available if the logging Type is set to Fuzzy Toggles On and Off This is to enable a second tolerance to be set configure it to be On to activate Only used in conjunction with Autofit On to specify the Band 2 96 Band2 Only available if the logging Type is set to Fuzzy This is where a tighter tol erance can be specified which must be set within the limits of Band 1 Specify as a per centage of the scale range the tolerance band allowed above and below the input signal Select and enter a value When the setup is complete go back to the Pen menu and complete the pen setup Alarms Menu Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Pens Alarms This is for setting up alarms on this pen only a maximumu of 6 alarms per pen are allowed Select the first available alarm eg Alarm 1 and configure each alarm Edtsetup Pens A Pensi d AES EE Menu path to current menu Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Hi 90 00 P1 Alm 1 Lo 10 00 P1 Alm 2 The Pen Alarms screen displays up to alarm set points per pen Each alarm setting Select an alarm number to edit the setup of each alarm Enabled Always Hi
89. UK 251 Comms Database Server Comms Database Server l This is the database icon which will appear in the bottom right of the screen zi to show that the TrendServer software is running with the Database server active Loads automatically with TrendServer Devices are held in databases and the databases are accessed via the Database Server It is possible to connect to remote database servers and access their databases and devices Similarly connections can be made to remote comms servers to retrieve data from their de vices See Figure 8 3 Data Logging and Transfer on page 230 System Setup The system can be set up two ways 1 For customers who are setting up in preparation for the arrival of their devices Using the TrendServer and Comms Server software create a database for the device s and configure each device for logging using the comms server When the devices are in place and connected check the IP address for Ethernet devices only and the device ID is correct 2 For larger networks Set up the hardware first noting each devices ID and IP address Use the comms server software to set up the devices on a database and configure log ging for each device The devices will need to be set up on the TrendServer soft ware before the connections can be tested and become active Modbus Capabilities 1 The Comms Server is a Modbus master It has no slave capability 2 The maximum speed of data transfer over Modbus is
90. USB or local CF card To check the firmware upgrade has been successful see the Status Menu General on page 173 Calibration Configure Setup Edit Setup General Factory Calibration Cards will be calibrated in the factory All ranges are factory calibrated and set to the default range of 12V Table 4 9 Calibration Input range table on page 115 Date amp Type of last calibration is stored in Maintenance on page 176 Analogue In and CJC Calibration can be performed per slot card Select the Al or CJC cal ibration button to go to the next menu Recommend use of CJC Clips and the Rear Cover to help maintain a uniform temperature around the terminal blocks and cold junction when using thermocouple actuations Al Calibration In this menu there is a button for each Analogue Input card fitted in the recorder Calibration is done per channel Cards may be reset to original factory cal i e a card holds two sets of calibration constants factory amp user for all ranges Table 4 9 Calibration Input range table on page 115 Factory Cal The recorder is calibrated in the factory These are pre stored calibration val ues that cannot be changed by the user If the recorder is re calibrated to a User Cal the factory values can be restored at any time User Cal User calibration can be applied at any time To meet the accuracy values spec ified see Input Range Performance Accuracy Table on page 287
91. a particular part or material Refer to AMS2750 spec The TUS also involves the soak time and the amount of temperature overshoot observed if any Another key factor in the heat treatment process is monitoring the number of times the T C s have been used and the temperatures they have been exposed too to insure they are accu rate and reliable This type of capability for doing uniformity surveys and documenting the results has been added to the SX recorder and provides an easy to use and understand TUS process screen along with a PC analysis software Temperature uniformity survey TUS mode can be performed using an SX recorder that is configured to be used as a TUS test instrument The SX recorder provides a custom display for the user and outputs a custom data set enabling the AMS2750 Report Generation Tool to produce a TUS report This is a dedicated mode especially for TUS surveys and is only available on the SX recorder TUS mode on the SX recorder is intended to operate as a stand alone piece of test equip ment A total of 40 sensors can be monitored and the data incorporated into a single report by the SX recorder These are consecutive pens from 1 to 40 on a 9 sensors system this assumes the pens are 1 to 9 and map directly to analogue inputs 1 to 9 The probing method for a TUS survey AMS2750 3 5 15 1 is supported using MODBUS master within the SX recorder performing the TUS retrieving the additional information via MODBUS
92. button is available when a TUS is running it prompts the user for confirmation to stop the current TUS this button is password protected When the TUS is started an event is triggered and a message is logged into the system events The Configure TUS button The configure TUS button allows you to quickly check and modify the relevant TUS informa tion before starting a TUS this will not start the survey It displays the TUS Configuration Confirmation wizard of which there are two screens It is only available when a TUS is not running and is password protected The Export TUS button The export button allows you to export the most recently completed TUS data file and will prompt for a USB key external CF card or Network Share folder NAS as follows The tus file can be loaded into a PC to be read by the AMS2750 Report Generation Tool which gen erates a full report Configure Confirmation Wizard The Start and Configure buttons display the configuration confirmation wizard which dis plays the currently configured details and consists of two configuration screens Screen 1 of the wizard shows the furnace and temperature profile ramps amp soaks details allowing the user to edit the configuration or load a saved configuration You can accept the details and progress or cancel out of the wizard at this point Screen 2 of the wizard shows the sensor configuration specifically the sensor ID posi tion and status Changes can b
93. calibration source should be accurate to 0 01 full scale or better 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 113 114 On initial power up the Factory Cal and the User Cal are the same EIN Calibration Calibrate AI Slot A Ce sw Jle e fe Jle s e Jl e B Jejfejej ejsjeja a ro Use Factory Settings 8 Use User Settings 5 8 Recalibrate Caste The Al Calibration menu displays a button for each Analogue Input card fitted Select the desired slot button and select the Range required to be calibrated from the drop down list eg 50V Each card has channels numbered 1 to 8 Underneath each channel is the type of cali bration Select the button below the corresponding channel number and select the type of cali bration from the list in this case Recalibrate The Recalibrate icon will appear under that channel Table 4 8 Analogue In Calibration Calibration Type Factory User Recalibrate Recalibrate All Factory All el el et The Calibration Positive Range box appears with instructions to connect the top limit of the input range Once this is done press the Calibrate button Next the Calibration Neg ative Range box appears instructing the user to apply the bottom range limit When this is done press the Calibrate button When the calibration is complete the icon changes to the User cal icon under the chan nel to show that the channel is using the user cal
94. changed here Paper Size Switch between A4 or Letter 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 117 118 Media Config Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup General Factory Media Config This menu contains the list of Storage media with Save and Load Options Save USB 1 Load USB 2 Save USB 2 Load CF Card Save CF Card Load NAS B Ja Enable this option if you want to allow user to access specified storage drive or disable X if you want to restrict user from accessing the device Load NAS Save NAS Only available if User Share Path is enabled in the Network Admin screen see Network Admin on page 80 NOTE If device is already configured for Scheduled Export or Report then user will not be able to restrict access to that device For restricting access to that media device user need to go Scheduled Export or Report and change the Export device 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Batch Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup General Batch Batch is a firmware option that can be activated from Credits on page 112 The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis Setting up a batch requires information to identify and control batches of data Batch data can also be paused for viewing and resumed A batch can be aborted at any time if so this will not register as a batch a batch is only complete when it has been stopped This Batch menu is the set
95. completed minimum of 30 minutes and recorder indicates whether that survey setpoint was successful or not u x gt id 0001 Multtrend SX 29 Aug 08 16 06 43 Menu 16h 135 Screen Temperature Uniformity Survey Running Furnace Time Mame Furnace 1 Username M Started Fri Aug 29 15 21 07 T Model No QW 234 Y 45 No of TC s 8 Elapsed 45m 34s EM Instrument Type B Class 2 Condition Running Setpoint Status Max TC Min TC Max TC Diff Max TC SP Max Ramp Ramp TCLaginto Stable Soak Meets Tol Diff Overshoot duration Soak Duration Class TC s Stabilized Manual Override 600 00F Detect TCO TCO TCO TCO TCO T6 85 eee 0 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F 1000 00F Tco Tco TC0 TCO Teo Too 8 7100 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F N Remove TC s NA E Na Restart Soak 14 20 00 14 30 00 14 40 00 14 50 00 15 00 00 15 10 00 15 20 00 15 30 00 5 0 5 15 00 00 1 1100 00 23 Aug te 29 Aug08 29 Aug fe 29 Aug08 29Aug b 29 Aug 08 29Aug b 23Aug08 29Rug b 23 Aug08 29 Aug fe s Max TC TC2 449 63 Min TC Tcl 447 80 When the Stable time period specified in the recorder s configuration has been satisfied the recorder will determine if the uniformity survey for that survey setpoint has passed or failed to meet the requirements for the defined class of furnace If it passes this is indicated by setting the colour for this survey setpoint to green and indi cation the Status as b
96. comro TC are corrected Page 6 of 12 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 419 Sample pages taken from a test TUS report Report Reference Number 345 Customer Heat Treatment Plant Equipment Furnace 1 Graph 1 SetPoint 1 950 0 F Measurement Results Met Class 1 Furnace Max Temp 952 6 F Min Temp 949 5 F Ramp Tima HH MM SS 00 03 02 Lag Time HH MM SS 00 00 05 Soak Status Passed Mex Difference across Survey TC s During Measurement 2 6 F Max Difsrence batwesn Surv sy TC s amp Controller Setpoint During Measurement 2 6 F Stari Point 1 7 200815 3000 End Point 1 7 2009 16 02 00 Verhcal grid ines show the Stable measurement period Very Light Gray rectenguter ares on the graph shows error bana SetPoint TH TG2 260 0 F VeTolerance 73800 F Ve Tolerance TYC3 To4 TCR mT THR T9 Report Generated By AMS2750 TUS Report Toot All measured values excepr the control TC are corrected Page 1007 12 420 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Sample pages taken from a test TUS report Report Reference Number 345 Customer Heat Treatment Plant Equipment Furnace 1 Graph 3 Continuous Survey Run Ternporature In Deg F 8 2 F 2 Li i 3 Time T1 TA THe Tha TCR TOK THT TCR THA All measured values excep rhe conero TC are corrected Page 120f 12 43 TV 25 30 I
97. configure how the recorder acquires stores and actions da ta The Setup screen gives access to the Edit menu where the majority of the recorder con figuration is done also Save and Load setups from this screen Edit Setup Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup The Edit Setup gives access to sub menus for Field IO Pens Comms Events Counters General Screen and Recording set up See Edit Setup on page 53 Save Setup Main Menu Configure Setup Save The Save button will produce a list of destinations to save the set up to and allow for naming the setup file Maximum of 50 characters File format is set The CF card and the front USB device port are found under the front flap on the recorder There is another USB port at the rear of the recorder The first USB device fitted will be USB1 therefore the second USB device fitted is USB2 Compact Flash not available for the eZtrend QXe Load Setup Main Menu Configure Setup Layout Setups can be loaded from CF card USB key or Network Share folder NAS The Load but ton will produce a list of source files to load setups from The CF card and the front USB device port are found under the front flap on the recorder There is another USB port at the rear of the recorder The first USB device fitted will be USB1 therefore the second USB device fitted is USB2 Compact Flash not available for the eZtrend QXe Back Button Takes you back to the pre
98. consist of expressions up to 100 charac ters in length Full Maths with 6 A powerful multi line scripting ability available to solve complex state based applications Eg Scripting Notes 1 amp 4 building an application for If X happens then Y will happen else Z will occur Events Note 3 6 Events are certain conditions or operations that can be set up and logged according to the time and date of an occurrence Subsequently events can be reviewed or displayed on a graph The Event Causes currently include Alarms Into Out of and Alarm Ack Totals Start Stop Reset Reset and Start Digital Input ON OFF State Change T C Burnout Scheduled Once Interval Specific Days Month End User Counters Max Mins Reset System Power ON Setup Change Internal Memory Low Export Memory Low FTP Memory Low User Action Mark Chart Batch Start Stop Pause The Event Effects currently include Mark Chart Logging Start Stop Totaliser Start Stop Reset Reset amp Start Digital Output ON OFF Alarm Acknowledge Single pen Pen group All pens Emails Screen Change Print Screen Counters Reset Increment Max Min Reset Chart Control Pause Stop Resume Clear Prefill Clear All Messages Delayed Event Script Timers Start Stop Reset Reset amp Start Play Sound Start Stop Display Alert Reports Batch Start Stop Pause Fast Scanning mode 5 For fast processes the scan rate and recording of the data can be set for up to 50 times p
99. couple Active Burnout Status on page 180 Range Displays the current Range Type set for this channel eg 12V Calibration Displays the type of calibration for this channel either Factory or User Cal Sample Rate Displays the current Sample rate for this channel SQRT If ticked the square root extract is enabled on this channel to linearise a non lin ear input Sensor Comp This will display if any type of sensor compensation applied to this channel Pen Displays which Pen scale is being used to display this analogue input CJC Only for Thermocouple inputs Displays the final adjusted value of a Cold Junc tion Calibration on this channel in degrees C Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media Displayed in the Input column may also be the Thermocouple Active burnout status 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 179 Table 4 14 Thermocouple Active Burnout Status Label Descriptions Disabled Active burnout disabled Normal Active burnout enabled input ok Degraded Thermocouple degraded difference measurement 100 to 99Q increase Failing Thermocouple Failing difference measurement 100Q to 200Q increase Failing Thermocouple Failing absolute measurement over 230Q increase Almost Failed Thermocouple Almost Failed difference measurement over 200 not failed Almost Failed The
100. default of Ethernet has Diagnostics ble selected ethernet been enabled Messages and Status DIO Media Missing N A N A Report that the specified media is not inserted System Status and Messages Media Full N A N A Report that the specified media is full System Status and Messages Scheduled export failed N A N A The scheduled export failed because the media was removed System Status and media removed during during transfer operation Messages export Scheduled export failed N A N A The scheduled export failed because of an unknown cause System Status and unknown media error Messages Scheduled export failed N A N A The scheduled export failed because the export folder was not System Status and could not create export folder present and could not be created Messages 348 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Scheduled export failed no N A N A The scheduled export has failed because no media is present System Status and media present Messages Media space too low for next N A N A The space available on the media is too little for the next sched System Status and scheduled data transfer uled operation Messages Unable to load N A N A Unable to load requested file Diagnostics and System Status and Meassages Message time earlier than N A N A No chart data exis
101. eZtrend QXe recorder See Firmware Credit System on page 221 Arranged in 2 banks of 3 inputs and sample rate must be the same within each bank only for eZtrend QXe recorder Range Ohms Volts and Amps only Toggle between Preset and User Defined The Preset option will make available a list of Range Types or select User Defined to specify High and Lower Limits Range Type Ohms Volts and Amps only Only available when Range is set to Pre set Select for a list of available ranges The factory default range is 12V See User Defined Maximum Input Ranges on page 280 Damp Level The damping filter is an advanced algorithm offering improved response over more traditional methods It works by producing configurable levels of damping but at the same time being able to respond rapidly to large input changes Enter the Damp Level in Engineering Units Figure 4 2 Effects of Damping and Rolling Average example 11 00 14 12 00 14 13 00 14140 Sep amp 13Sep06 13Sep06 13 Sep 06 Rolling Average of input signal Pen 11 Input signal Pen 67 Damping on input signal Pen 10 Pen 10 Pen 11 Pen 67 26 9798 2 26 4373 i 26 8261 Note the Damping Pen 10 has been offset for this example to be able to see the damping effect clearly Linearisation Tables Ohms Volts and Amps only Select a table from the drop down list if required See Linearisation Tables on page 64 Use Pen Scale Toggle On and Off
102. event system See Heports Process on page 170 Note on Groups Groups of pens need to be set up to use this feature see Pens Menu on page 67 Max Min Main Menu Process Max Min Reset Max Min Reset Max or Reset Min values by categories All By Groups of pens or by individual pens Use the View button to just display the Max Min values All Select this to reset all values By Groups If Groups of pens have been set up this can be used to reset the max min values for particular groups of pens To set up Groups see Pens Menu on page 67 By Pen Select this to reset max min values for individual pens Totals Main Menu gt Process gt Totals Select a button to Start Stop Reset and View Totals These can be controlled by the fol lowing categories 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK All Select this to start stop or reset all Totals By Group If Groups of pens have been set up this can be used to start stop or reset particular groups of pens To set up Groups see Pens Menu on page 67 By Pen Select this to start stop or reset individual pens View Use the View button to just display the Totals values for each totalising pen Counters Process Main Menu Process Counters T Counters e Alarm Counters vt wen Digital Input Relay Output Select the Counters button to View and Reset counters Counters have been split into the following types Alarm Coun
103. format recorder The eZtrend QXe is a DIN standard 144mm format recorder with a 5 QVGA dis play The Minitrend QX has up to 16 Analogue inputs and the Multitrend SX has up to 48 Analogue inputs and the eZtrend QXe has up to 12 Analogue inputs Minitrend QX and the Multitrend SX has 70Mb to 1850MB of expandible non volatile flash memory available plus additional removable storage media the eZtrend QXe has 70Mb to 400MB All recorders use digital colour TFT LCD screens to provide easy to read displays with wide viewing angles for the best all around data viewing The touch screen operator interface provides fast easy access to the recorder menus mak ing set up and data analysis quick and efficient Navigation through the menus and text entry are direct and intuitive 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 35 Functions and Features Example of a recorder menu path from the Main Menu to change the Pen Scale configuration with clear rapid navigation a n a E Recordin Messages 102 v Pen 3 10E9 to 10E22 gt Maths Type Basic Maths Pen 4 10E1 to 10E6 J gt i Divs Select Auto Major Divs None 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Functions and Features Features Display 5 5 Colour Active TFT for the Minitrend QX and 12 1 Colour Active TFT for the Multitrend SX and 5 Colour Active TFT for the eZtrend QXe with
104. from compatible controller recorder instruments TUS mode is selectable using a specific option in the credits system 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 365 366 TUS mode AMS2750 TUS Credit Option Main Menu select Configure Setup Edit General Factory Credits Options AMS2750 TUS Mode is available as a credit option this allows the specification of the AMS2750 modes To activate credit options Options on page 174 AMS2750 TUS Mode requires 10 credits to be enabled If more credits are required please contact Honeywell see back page for contact details Edit Setup w 0e ee AMS2750 TUS option enables the recorder to carry out TUS this also enables the thermo couple usage tracking TUS is ONLY available on the SX recorder and is not provided on the QX and QXe models Scroll down the menu and select AMS2750 TUS AMS2750 Process and AMS2750 TUS options are mutually exclusive 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK TUS mode AMS2750 TUS Screen To enable the AMS2750 TUS screen go from the Main Menu Screen Edit Screens or Main Menu Configure Layout Edit Screens The next available screen will default to AMS2750 TUS when this option is selected in the credits This TUS screen is fixed to that screen number and cannot be changed to another Screen type unless the credit option is disabled gt eee 3 Screen 4 Standard Screen 4 For complete details of
105. in Mark on Chart enter name v P1 T P1 V P1 U Figure 4 10 Embedded variables for pen information Mark Chart Text mawa le gt ata aiian sns asan las aiin lataa ataata aa LJe o lse eee name v P1 T P1 v L P1 U an Le Le e or o Lo Lo La e Ia e a e o e Lie ei x e e fe Jn Im ILL EZ Je aloh This will display the marker as Furnace1 Temperature is 14 81 Deg C If Pen 1 name is Furnace1 Tag is Temperature the current value is 14 81 and the Unit text is Deg C Embedded process variables can be used for Pen reports See Pen Heport Syntax on page 136 Embedded variable are not case sensitive and spaces are allowed B 0001 Furnace1 38h 125 Screen 15 Mov 06 11 45 56 Temp 14 806 P4 bss Pen 3 3 2e 01 Pen 4 8 2e 01 Pen 5 20 333 Pen 6 36 61 Pen 7 4 11 Pen 8 0 00 102 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Event Effects continued Logging Is an event effect that can Start or Stop logging enter which one in Sub Type From Selection Type choose either Multiple pens Pen group or All Pens and select the relevant pen s below Totaliser Is an event effect that can Start Stop Reset or Reset and Start a Totaliser in Sub Type From Selection Type choose either Multiple pens Pen group or All Pens and select the relevant pen s below Digital Outputs Is an event effect that can switch a Digital Output On or Off Enter which one in Sub Type and select the r
106. in soak is achieved Temperature overshoot Temperature overshoot is detected logged and displayed An overshoot is deemed as a failure if outside the soak limits defined by the class of the furnace Overshoot will be the highest value recorded for a TC after it enters the soak band but before stability occurs This could be a negative value if the TC does not reach the setpoint before stability is activated 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK TUS mode Soak mode Soak Magenta starts when all T C s for the survey are within the tolerance limits for the defined furnace class but stability period has not started Ta x P d AME2750 TUS 2 Aug 08 15 17 23 Menu 17h 118 RA Temperature Uniformity Survey Running Furnace Time Mame Furnace 1 Username NA Started Fri Aug 29 15 15 54 uw Model No QW 234 Y 45 No of TC s 8 Elapsed 1m 27s Instrument Type B Class 2 Condition Running Setpoint Status Max TC Min TC Max TC Diff Max TC SP Max Ramp Ramp TCLaginto Stable Soak Meets Tol Diff Overshoot duration Soak Duration Clss TC s Stabilized Manual 400 00F Too TC0 TC TCO TCO TC2 445 3s 0 Mins Override 710 0 i 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F 409 95F 600 00F TCO TCO TCO TCO TCO i 0 Mins 10 0 f 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F 1000 00F TCO TCO TCO TCO TCO 0 Mins 10 0 i 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F NA NA NAL Restart Soak JD 13 40 00 13 50 00 0 00 14 10 00 4 2000 14 30 00 1 40 00 1450100 15 00 0
107. in the scale menu Menu path to current menu Edit Setup Enabled Pen 1 Maths Type Basic Maths z Span 100 000 zero 0 000 Scale Type Linear Divs Select Auto Major Divs None Ra Select the Scale button to take you to the Scale menu Click on Scale to set up each scale profile per pen Units Scale measurement Units Select this and enter the units Up to 16 characters Span This is the highest value of the scale Select to enter the Span value Zero This is the bottom of the scale Select to enter the Zero value 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Scale Type Toggle between Linear or Logarithmic Log Divs Select Only available with Linear Scale Type Toggle between Auto or User Defined Major Divs Only available when Divs Select is set to User Defined Select and enter the major division position Minor Divs Only available when Divs Select is set to User Defined Select and enter the minor division position Start Decade Only available when the Scale Type is set to Log Select and enter the start value of the first decade No Decades Only available when the Scale Type is set to Log Select and enter the number of decades required Max 99 decades although not all will be displayed on the recorder Numb Format Displays the Notation of the number format Scientific or Normal Notation Toggle between Scientific or Normal number format The scien
108. is set to Active select Passive and Commit the change Then return to the menu and select Active and Commit the change to update burnout settings Show Burnout Only available when Type is set to TC Toggle between Upscale and Downscale Burnout TC Type Only available when Type is set to TC Select this for a list of available TC types CJ Comp Only available when Type is set to TC Select this for a list of available CJ Compensation See Thermocouple CJC Compensation on page 312 nt Automatic Uses the cold junction sensor in the recorder as a variable ref erence temperature 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK ee Ext 0 Deg C Assumes the cold junction is held at 0 C to provide a OmV refer ence external to the recorder Ext with Spec Temp Uses a reference junction held at a constant tempera ture Specify the temperature that the cold junction sensor is to be set at Ext Input Use a thermocouple or resistance thermometer from another chan nel to measure the cold junction sensor External Input Only available when CJ Compensation is set to Ext Input Select the input required as an external input Eng Span Ohms Volts and Amps only Only available when not using Use Pen Scale option This is the highest value of the engineering range and corresponds to the top of the input range Select and enter a value using the on screen keyboard Eng Zero Ohms Volts and Amps only Only availab
109. it into the window showing available channels for logging logging will stop for this channel The set up is complete and the logging to the database should start immediately To check the setup go back to the Comms Server screen 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 247 248 Communications Server Comms Server Status Screen If you have a graph open Comms Server should be showing that the recorder is operating by displaying flashing green lights in the Active column Click and highlight the recorder Click the Database logging Tab The screen should now show all the pens logging for that recorder and their log rate Figure 8 1 Comms Server Status Screen YP Cammugicatians Server Aristo fal Z Database Servers ff Local Server i 4 Initial Database f June FTP Saved Data Hi Andy FTP Junes 2 CE IDNo Name Mode f Status Channels Active IP Address 1 Furnacei Realtime VILE 20 xs 100089 Communication Ports Mod y comi List of Database Servers x COM2 x COM3 x COM4 x COMS Destination Source Rate Type x COM6 Local Client 1 Pen 1 Temp lsec Sample x COM7 Local Client 1 Pen 2 1sec Sample come Local Client 1 Pen 3 1sec Sample Local Client 1 Pen 4 1sec Sample Ethernet Local Client 1 Pen 5 i sec Sample P Local Client 1 Pen 6 1sec Sample Local Client 1 Pen 7 lsec Sample Local Client 1 Pen 8 isec Sample
110. june Valid Access t 09 41 06 10 04 2008 LOCAL LI june Login Successf 09 40 51 10 04 2008 Session 1101 LCIM 1101 09 40 47 10 04 2008 Power On Off For m 48s D The messages screen will hold the latest 200 messages E i i i i i a i Message button bar The message button bar runs along the bottom of all messages screens The button are Back Takes you back to the main Messages screen Jump Select an item in any of the message lists and press the Jump button This will take you to the exact time of the occurrence on the replay screen See Heplay on page 208 If the message requested is older that the oldest chart time data available a message box will appear and jump you to the oldest chart time and date available Save Save the message screen to removable media Clear This will delete all the messages for the particular message screen you are in Print Select this and choose to print All the Messages in the list or the Current page that will fill an A4 or Letter size page Refer to Application Note 43 TV 07 32 on your CD or website for a list of possible error messages 166 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Message Format Table 4 10 Message Types Icon Type Description Alarm Red Bell in Alarm and not acknowledged Alarm Green Bell out of alarm Green Bell Black outline 2 out of alarm and Alarm acknowledged Alarm Green Yellow bell out Alar
111. just im port any new data since the last import was made 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 235 Communications Server Communications Server 236 Comms Server Overview The Comms Server and the Database server will automatically become active when the TrendServer software is running Refer to the TrendManager Pro Suite Software Manual Installation instructions The Comms server will enable the user to Monitor the status of communications with a device on any serial port up to 8 ports and an Ethernet connection Set up local and remote databases Set up local and remote servers Modbus protocols supported on Ethernet and Serial ports Enable and disable ports Add edit and remove devices Log to database or client connections local or OPC client The comms server will appear as an icon in the system task bar in the bottom right of the PC screen Start up The Communications Server appears as an icon in the Windows system bar at the bottom right of the screen Double click or right click to open loads automatically with TrendServer The comms server manages the commu nications status of devices on a serial port RS485 or through an Ethernet connection Only Modbus protocol is available for X Series devices see Modbus on page 226 Comms Server Administration and Toolbar Database Servers Communications Ports Figure 8 5 Comms Server Overview FF caiupicdings Se Communications Seprer
112. mAh 3 gms Approx Percent age 96 of total weight Active Materials Maganese dioxide mnO 29 Propylen carbonate PC 4 3 1 2 Dimethoxiethan DME 2 1 Lithium metal Li 2 Carbon C 0 9 Lithium perchlorate LiCIO 0 3 Passive Materials Stainless steel 57 6 Plastic 3 8 Safety Guidelines Keep batteries out of the reach of children especially those batteries fitting within the limits of the truncated cylinder as defined in ISO DP 8124 2 2 In the case of ingestion of a cell or battery the person involved should seek medical assist ance promptly It is of extreme importance that batteries are inserted into equipment correctly with regard to polarity and Do not attempt to revive used batteries by heating charging or other means Do not dispose of batteries in fire Do not dismantle batteries Do not short circuit batteries Batteries should be disposed of in accordance with local regulations they must not be dis posed of with normal refuse 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 327 328 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Appendix J Function Codes and Memory Maps Modbus Memory Map Supplement Refer to document Modbus Serial Communications User manual 51 52 25 66 NOTE Some Modbus masters may require an offset of 1 for example instead of entering 1800 enter 1801 First 10 addresses and end address shown in all tables for reference Analogue Input value 48 inputs max
113. may be either one of the existing event markers or one of the two e mail subjects The e mail message body may be either one of the existing event markers or one of the two e mail message blocks Event markers are restricted to 80 characters each The two e mail message blocks are restricted to just over 1000 characters each Both the message subject and body may contain embedded marker tags as used in the event markers When the recorder sends an e mail message that includes a message body the recorder name recorder number and the time date will be appended to the end of the message body text This is to allow easy identification of when the message was send and by which recorder Any e mail message is sent as an action within the recorder events system so anything that can be configured to act as an event cause may be configured to send an e mail message Any e mail message may be sent to up to 12 of the recipients If the e mail server supports named groups of e mail addresses an e mail message may be sent to a combination of e mail addresses and e mail group Mail Server Ethernet Recorder g LAN Local Area Network 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Appendix F Fuzzy Logging What is Fuzzy Logging Fuzzy Logging is a real time Data Compression technique Patent no US 6 405 155 B2 developed at Honeywell as an alternative to the more standard methods of recording data Paperless Re
114. monitoring applications The input to the recorder would be a measure of flow rate eg In litres per second and the total amount that has flowed over a specified time period Multiple totalisations are possible with the use of extra pens firmware Credit option Totalisation values are 10 digits plus exponent NOTICE IEEE floating point numbers with large unit factors beyond the IEEE range may incur incremental errors specially if incrementing by a small amount each time If this is your type of application a work around would be to set the Unit factor to 1 and then divide the total by your original unit factor 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 73 74 Click on Totaliser to set up the totalising profile per pen Totaliser menus showing Normal and Sterilisation types Menu path to current menu Enabled z ee e rU oT Add to Msgs Add to Msgs Units None Temp Input U Celsius Time Factor 1 000 x Start Temper 100 000 A Type Normal Type Sterilisation a fl Dm ce pho 170 Select Totaliser from the Pen screen to display the totalising setup menu Enabled Toggles On and Off to activate or de activate totalising for this pen Type Select this for a list of Types of totalising Normal or Sterilisation Normal totaliser function is usually associated with flow monitoring applications Sterilisation is where items are subjected to heat over a period of time Each pen can be totali
115. more than 256 000 colours makes it easy to interpret process data and take action with the intuitive bar charts digital values trends or customised displays A screen saver function can be set from 1 to 720 minutes to extend the life of the backlight Touch Screen the heavy duty durable touch screen provides easy data entry and rapid navigation though the menus Help Files A complete contextual help system can be accessed and visualised on the screen of the recorder Communications Ethernet Connectivity the Ethernet DHCP standard connection with support for vari ous protocols provides comprehensive connectivity to local area networks LANs The standard Ethernet interface makes networking of the recorder to a LAN or the world wide web fast and convenient Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP automatically acquires the settings IP address for network communications from a DHCP server Mod bus Master and Modbus Slave facility now available for all recorders RS485 Modbus the RS485 connection allows process data to be transferred to other devices or to record data received in MODBUS RTU protocol slave mode only Modbus Master and Modbus Slave facility now available for all recorders A Comms option card and expansion card are required for the eZtrend QXe recorder Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP The recorder can be synchronised over the eth ernet network via a SNTP client or synchronise other recorde
116. nu saa aL Y 2x xRA ROSE EFE nnmnnn nenna 221 Firmware Credit System eee eee eee eee eee ee eene teen atn sets ens tn stas tn ssri 221 Firmware ODOSs saisie a EP nete mite eni dra rs 223 iv 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Section 8 Communication 1 lese cec eeeeieeeien eee en nennen nena mra narra 225 Comms Configuration RR R 225 Standard Communication Interfaces eee eerte eese seen eene en et atna tn 225 Imo d 226 Hardware Installation ssssssssssssssossssossssosessssosssssssososssesossssoosusvossosossosossosssssssi 227 Getting connected IP Addres Srann A 228 Local Area Network Setup seszcsessassessesccvscsaces esc cete ka Pr REX ENEE XR IR eee en Eee eR 229 Links to Remote NetWOFks ee ene eo ANERER 229 Data Logging and Transfer eese eese tnnt 229 Comms and Trend Manager Suite eese eee eese eee ee entes tn atn tnann 231 System Requirements E M 231 Software Installatiort e tr hr e Repetitio Rods 232 Stati OD sess eise oen t usen eie itn etn Donate tene ren deseada 233 Communications Server 4 eese esses eese eese nete sense tns tn aso ta toss ta ene s etse ta sensn 236 Comms Server OVerVieW sii t ei rH HORN Fei ETHER ERREUR 236 SAUD E 236 COMMS Server SUD iiio eai idsedetesecse eb b rb WEE eee rn beet pee seen 239 Comms Server TOR BI
117. of performing this task by enabling the appropriate number of credits in the Credits Option This additional functionality provides you with an easier to use more complete solution especially in conjunction with the thermocouple usage tracking facility see Thermocouple Usage Tracking AMS2750 on page 363 Note Abbreviated terms used in this document TUS Temperature Uniformity Survey AMS2750 Aerospace Material Specification SAT System Accuracy Test The abbreviation will be used throughout this document AMS2750 Credit Option Main Menu select Configure Setup Edit General Factory Credits Options AMS2750 Process Mode is available as a credit option this allows the specification of the AMS2750 modes To activate credit options see Options on page 174 AMS2750 Process Mode requires 5 credits to be enabled If more credits are required please contact Honeywell see back page for contact details Edt setup QGererl Factory X credts dioptens peer RR 3 Email 3 OPC 8 Y Pwd Net Sync v a o Extra Pens 0 lo ft Jo AMS2750 Process option enables the AMS2750 process mode and thermocouple usage tracking This option is available for the SX QX and QXe recorders Scroll down the menu and select AMS2750 Process 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK AMS2750 Process mode AMS2750 Process Menu Main Menu Screen Edit Screens or M
118. of the thermocouple within the furnace in process mode Process mode You can reset the date time for SAT or TUS providing another new target time date for the timers Upon reset a message will be logged into the system message list If enabled this is password protected for tracking Timer reset dialog When a SAT TUS Instrument Cal or Control TC button is pressed they will be challenged to enter user name and password if passwords are enabled This is to restrict unauthorized access when resetting new dates 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK TrendManager SuiteSoftware AMS2750 TrendManager SuiteSoftware AMS2750 Refer to the TrendManager Suite software manual 43 TV 25 11 for full details on AMS2750 functionality AMS2750 includes Process or TUS Mode selection in hardware wizard setup Furnace configuration for Process and TUS modes Setpoint and Stability configuration for TUS mode Event Cause to set TC Timers or Alert Timers and Event Cause to Start Stop TUS Screen Designer AMS2750 Tabular mode canned screen are configurable from within Screen Designer The TUS process screen is not accessible from within Screen Designer this is a fixed screen that is always within a TUS enabled SXrecorder 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 393 AMS2750 Report Generation Tool AMS2750 Report Generation Tool 394 The AMS2750 Report Generation Tool is a stand alone software package and operates in dependentl
119. options in the recorder or they will not be available See Firmware Credit System on page 221 Maths Credit Options Full Maths firmware credit option will allow the functions listed in Table 14 1 on page 296 and Table 14 2 on page 298 Scripting firmware credit option will allow the Full math functions plus the scripting func tions in Table 14 3 on page 300 Table 14 4 on page 301 Table 14 5 on page 302 Table 14 6 on page 302 and Table 14 7 on page 303 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 295 296 Full Maths amp Script Processing Maths Variable and Function Tables Table 14 1 Maths Variable Table Maths Variables Syntax Description Alarm Level PnAxL Gets the Alarm Level n is Pen number 1 to 96 and x is alarm number 1 to 6 Analogue Input Eng values An Get the value of Analogue n 1 to 48 in Engi neering units Analogue Raw Electrical RAn Get the value of Raw Analogue n 1 to 48 in values Electrical values Batch Mode BATMD1 to Per group Returns 12 batch running 2 batch BATMD6 stopped or 3 batch paused Batch comment list blcomm x Get index of Batch comment list entered on batch start where X is the group number 1 6 Batch description list bldesc x Get index of Batch description list entered on batch start where X is the group number 1 6 Batch lot number list bllot x Get index of Batch lot No list entered on batch start wh
120. recording has stopped 10Hz y 10Hz v 10Hz v 10Hz y 10Hz y 10Hz y 10Hz y 10Hz y 10Hz v 10Hz y zHz K 2Hz K 2Hz X 2H amp 2Hz X 2Hz K 2H2 K 2Hz amp 2Hz X 2Hz amp No Group Ma Group Mo Group Mo Group Mo Group Mo Group Mo Group Mo Group Mo Group Mo Group Value Displays the current pen value Recording Displays either Continuous or Fuzzy logging 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 177 Log Rate Displays the Log rate set in Hertz A tick denotes if it is enabled and a star will indicate the current log rate Alarm Rate Displays the alarm rate in Hertz if this has been set up to change when the pen goes into an active alarm state A tick denotes if itis enabled and a star will indi cate the current log rate Pre Trigger Each Pen will display it s pre trigger enabled status from within the Pen logging status display Group Displays the name of the group that this pen has been assigned to Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media Diagnostics Main Menu Status Diagnostics The Diagnostics button will become active when Health Watch Maintenance is selected as a firmware option To enable this go to Options on page 174 Hardware Hardware Status on page 179 Events Events Status on page 181 Comms See Comms Status on page 182 Med
121. resources to enable the most effective and efficient way of using the scan rate storage capacity and record ing time See Appendix F Fuzzy Logging on page 319 Rate Units Set the Units for the logging rate to be displayed Select and choose the logging rate units from the drop down menu Rate This is the speed at which data is required to be logged If the Millisecond option is selected as the Rate Units for the logging then a drop down menu of options will appear When all other Rate Units are selected a keypad will appear for user entry Fastest rate is 20mS and slowest is 60 hours Alarm Rate Units Only available if the logging Type is set to Continuous Set the Units for the Alarm logging rate to be displayed Select and choose the alarm logging rate units from the drop down menu Alarm Rate Only available if the logging Type is set to Continuous This is the new logging rate used when this pen goes into an active alarm state To enable this feature to change the logging rate in an alarm state see Change Log in the Alarms menu If the Millisecond option is selected as the Alarm Rate Units for the logging then a drop down menu of options will appear When all other Alarm Rate Units are selected a keypad will appear for user entry PreTrigger activate pre triggering for that pen any alarm on that pen will cause the pre trigger system to be activated Only the first 16 pens can be configured for pre trig gering For detai
122. selected the dialog box will change Hit the Set up button The dialog box ex tends to allow you set up your recorder to al Set up Batch Schedule low FTP transfers General options Source Location C From Directory From Network FTP Henry 160 221 36 29 Recorder information imported by FTP will not update in the Modbus Profile tool To en sure the recorder details are updated in the Modbus Profile tool setup must be imported manually using removable media Series FTP options Connection speed Fast 5 mbps Tendfew VS FTP ions See for more details Modbus profile tool ownload from data update on page 243 Disk drive C PC Card r NOTE Hit F1 for help on using FTP Press the Add button to add a new recorder to the list Ftp Recorder Setup PENE e i Recorder Location IP Address Eg 192 168 1 1 Recorder Name IP ddress 160 221 36 33 X Series network name xs 100088 Look up IP address descriptive name for the recorder Furnace OK Cancel Edit Remove Enter the IP address from the recorder that you noted earlier If you don t know it select the Look up IP Address button The other method is to select the Find Device button This will search for all X Series recorders on the network using their Network ID eg xs nnnnnn where nnnnnn is the recorder s serial number Give a name for the recorder This should be som
123. software application and vice versa You can therefore easily combine differ ent devices from different manufacturers in one system OPC gives you the freedom to add new hardware from third party vendors to existing set ups or to replace a device without worrying about compatibility with your chosen software The measurement and control hardware such as a recorder provides front line data acqui sition As soon as the hardware device has collected the data it makes it available to soft ware applications running under Windows It presents the data according to the OPC standard and is thus known as an OPC server Each OPC server offers data in the same way If the software application can understand the OPC format it can therefore access data from any OPC server device making individual drivers for each piece of equipment obso lete OPC enabled software include spread sheets databases virtual instruments and SCADA supervisory control and data acquisition interfaces These applications are known as OPC client software Each OPC server can simultaneously provide data for any number of OPC clients Likewise multiple clients can at the same moment access any server a robust method of communi cation With OPC measurement and control systems can share information and co operate with other installations across factories offices laboratories etc The same data is therefore readily available to engineering maintenance management in fact t
124. state remains If the output is set to Single Pulse when the alarm is activated the signal will display a single pulse for the duration set See Pulse Duration The alarm will trigger again when it goes back into an active alarm state 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 61 NOTICE Outputs that are set to Single Pulse should not be used as a part of a maths expression as it can cause spurious values Pulse Duration Output only Available when Single Pulse is selected as an Output Specify the pulse length in seconds from 0 1 100ms to 6480 108 minutes in 0 1 sec ond increments Select and enter the pulse length Failsafe Output only Toggles On and Off Each relay channel can be independently selected with the fail safe option This will invert the state of the relay output With Fail safe Off normally open NO relays have open contacts when the power is off and open contacts when there is no active alarm The contacts will close when an associ ated alarm goes active With Failsafe On normally open relays have closed contacts when the recorder is powered on and there are no open active alarms and the contacts open with an alarm active or when the power is removed See Failsafe Relay Positions on page 282 Label Select and enter an identification label Up to 16 characters Active Label Input and Output only This is the label that is shown when an alarm becomes active Select and enter a label Not av
125. storage keys are pre formatted for use in the recorder and PC If you have a used CF card or USB key we recommend you erase it Formatting of CF cards and USB keys can be done through your PC The formatting types accepted by the recorder are FAT FAT16 TFAT and FAT32 Compact Flash not available for the eZtrend QXe Start Stop Recording The Recording screen will allow the user to manually Start and Stop recording Select either the start or stop buttons to activate the function for All pens a Group of pens if a group is defined or By Pen to identify an individual pen s Recording Displays the current pen recording status and the number of pens currently recording Export Required In XXd XXh XXm XXs This is the amount of days hours minutes and seconds left until the internal memory buffer starts to be over written Exporting does not remove the data from the recorder but when the internal memory buffer is full the latest data will start to over write the oldest data Available as a Maths expression giving the hours until recycling starts see Maths Variable and Function Tables on page 296 Schedule Displays the frequency of a scheduled export only if a scheduled export has been set up see Edit Recording on page 128 Media Full In Displays how long before the external media selected for the scheduled export is full FTP Export required XXd XXh XXm XXs This is the amount of days hours min utes and se
126. t Event 1 example Adding Effect 2 sro C aoe A OS Alarm Ack 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 95 Event Causes Alarms Set to cause an event when a pen goes Into Alarm Out of Alarm or an Alarm is Acknowledged Set the pen number and the Alarm that will trigger this event Totalisers Set to cause an event when a totaliser Starts Stops is Reset or a Rollover is required Select which pen has been set up as a totalise pen to trigger this event The upper limit for the totaliser count is fixed to 16777215 to prevent an inaccuracy in the calculation above this upper limit To continue count over 16 million Disable this function go to Reset at 16Moption in the Totaliser Menu on page 73 The Totaliser Rollover occurs automatically once the count reaches the accuracy limit and totaliser starts counting from zero If the user fails to configure the event totaliser it will auto reset The Rollover cause gets triggered each time the totaliser rollover occurs above the accuracy limit Digital Inputs Set to cause an event when a Digital Input is turned On Off or has a State change Select the Digital to trigger this event TC Burn Out Select which analogue input has a thermocouple on that will trigger this event when it goes into a burnout state Scheduled See Scheduled Events on page 97 User Counters See User Counters on page 98 Max Mins Reset A manual reset of the Max Min values by the user can b
127. than waiting for the pre defined conditions to be met 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 385 386 Tn x Menu Fu Na 6 rnace me Furnace 1 600 00F 10 0 1000 00F 10 0 NA NA NA 14 10 00 3 Aug 08 29 Aug 08 TUS mode Restart Soak The setpoint run can be restarted if required Under certain conditions the AMS2750 spec allows bad T C s to be removed from the survey and Restart Soak button provides the abil ity to do that These conditions are defined within the AMS2750 spec and depends on the quantities of T C s that are in the survey and their relative positions Stable in soak mode Stable Yellow the actual period that the survey data is being collected gt ld M 0001 Multtrend SX 29 Aug 08 15 45 48 17h 133 Screen Temperature Uniformity Survey Running Time Username NA Started Fri Aug 29 15 21 07 A Model No QW 234 Y 45 No of TC s 8 Elapsed 24m 39s Stop TUS Instrument Type B Class 2 Condition Running Setpoint Status Tol Max TC Min TC Max TC Diff Max TC SP Max Ramp Ramp TCLaginto Stable Soak Meets Diff Overshoot duration Soak Duration class TC s Stabilized Manual NSS ce ar ae ECURNUAUGDCTNSEEE Override 405 09F 402 66F BF 5 09F 405 29F TC0 To TCO TCO 0 Teco 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F A 0 00F TC0 TCO0 TcO TCO TCO 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F J 0 00F 14 20 00 14 3 14 40 00 14 50 00 15 00 00 15 10 00 15 20 00 15 30 00 15 40 00 29 A
128. that displays and prints data imported from the storage media used by the recorder TrendManager Pro This is an advanced data analysis archiving software package providing full configuration of the re corders TrendManager Pro is a stand alone package that delivers to the user total recorder con figuration allowing the user to archive graph print and export data It also allows files to be exported using comma separated variables CSV format that can be imported into most computer software TrendServer Pro This is a fully network aware software package for real time viewing and archiving of data with com munications to the recorder It supports all the capabilities of TrendManager Pro plus real time data acquisition FTP File Transfer Protocol and web browser access TrendServer Pro provides secure multi level multi user access to the recorder data by various departments with security Stand ard features of TrendServer Pro include data archive tools Email set up and alarming graphing print import and export data facilities TrendManager Pro with OPC Server provides the same functions as the TrendServer Pro but includes the added function of an integrated OPC Server to allow easy interfacing to third party HMI software packages that support an OPC Client This provides a real time interface between serv ers and clients Modbus Profile Configuration Tool this is a tool that comes as part of the TrendServer Pro software that all
129. the Screen menu go to Screens on page 137 Use the Screen button at the top of the recorder screen to change the screens using the Next and Previous buttons I O AMS2750 TUS Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt Normally labelled Field IO this button has been modified for AMS2750 configuration All oth er analogue inputs are not affected This menu includes Furnace Configuration Menu TUS on page 369 AMS2750 button Sensor Configuration Menu TUS on page 372 Bim iC rus Alarm Digital IO gt L3 Recording Reports Finish 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 367 TUS mode AMS2750 Menu TUS Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt I O AMS2750 gt AMS2750 Each configuration requires TUS specific entries these are as follows Ramp and soak configuration there are up to six ramp and soak settings available these specify the different soak dwell temperatures required for the TUS Timers the timers associated with the TUS soak and ramp detection can be adjusted to suit the user The tolerance hysteresis of the soak stability detection can be adjusted to suite the user this defines how stability is determined in the soak e Furnace on page 369 e Stability Detect on page 370 e Setpoint on page 371 Edit Setup I O AMS2750 Furnace 1 Grahams Parts Oven Stability Detect v Timer Enable Auto Enable v Setpoint 1 X 150
130. the identified Al channel correctly for acquisition in Diagnostics SetMainsF command Failed writing Al ADC values Messages Failure writing output value 6 1 1 Failed to set the identified Al channel correctly for acquisition Diagnostics attempting restore in ChangeAcqF req Messages Failed writing Al ADC values Failure writing output value 7 1 1 Failed to set the identified Al channel correctly for acquisition Diagnostics attempting restore in ChangeRange Messages Failed writing Al ADC values Failure writing output value 8 1 1 Failed to set the identified Al channel correctly for acquisition in Diagnostics WriteAlConfig command Failed writing Al ADC values Messages Failure writing output value 9 1 1 Failed to set the identified Al channel correctly for acquisition in Diagnostics WriteAlChanConfig command Failed writing Al ADC values Messages 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 339 Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Failure writing output value 10 1 1 Failed to set the identified Al channel correctly for acquisition in Diagnostics SetActiveBurnout command Failed writing Al ADC values Messages Failure writing output value 11 1 1 Cannot turn ohms measurement current off suspect Al board Diagnostics Failed writing Al ADC values in TurnRTCurrOff command Messages An error has occurred during N A
131. the rear of the recorder to ensure that the recorder is always earthed Before performing any installation please read the section on Safety on page 2 and Warnings and Safety Precautions on page 3 All connections to the unit are made via the rear panel the layout of which is shown in page 16 Note The eZtrend QXe Analogue Input card Slot A Cable screen must be well connected to the recorder case using a low impedance bond Also avoid use of a length of wire between the cable screen and the recorder case Signal Wiring A WARNING ENSURE SAFETY EARTH CONNECTION Always ensure the unit is connected to safety earth when connecting to an AC or DC supply Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury Your recorder is intended for panel mount use and only the front face is intended to be exposed to the operator Disconnection from the supply MUST be made possible by means of a switch circuit breaker or other means of supply isolation The disconnection device must be included in the panel installation clearly marked in close proximity to the recorder and within easy reach of the operator The protective earth terminal must remain connected even if the recorder is isolated from the mains supply if any of the analogue or relay terminals are connected to hazardous voltage 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Electrical Installation A CAUTION UNIT DAMAGE CONTROL To protect agai
132. the report is being created Please Wail TUS Report PDF creation is in progress When the report is created a message is produced informing the report has been success fully created and shows the path location to where the file is now saved Print TUS Report Once the report is created if appropriate version of acrobat reader is installed then user will be prompted with the message box Would you like to open print the generated report If user selects Yes then report will be opened with installed acrobat reader tool The TUS report is complete A final dialog appears asking if you wish to exit the application 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK AMS2750 Report Generation Tool Header and Footer report information The header and footer information that is auto displayed on the report includes Header Report Reference Number Customer Name or Reference Furnace Tag Name or Reference Logo option Footer The Footer information includes Page Number of total number Report Generated by TUS Report Tool 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 413 TUS Report Example The next few pages show selected pages from a sample test TUS report Report Reference Number 345 Customer Heat Treatment Plant Equipment Furnace 1 Temperature Uniformity Survey Report Cusomer Heat Treatment Pant Issue Date 6 5 2013 TUS Test Complies with AMS2750 Standard JS di pu Jae SP1 950 0 F
133. third tab Diagnostics can be enabled using the Administration button and selecting Preferences Send Recorder Events Comms Server has a set of chart controls that can control the chart on the recorder from your PC This can be done in Realtime chart controls on page 249 or can be setup as an Effect of an Event Furnace 1 Edit Device Configure Logging Delete Device Send Recorder Event Recorder Chart Functions Properties ast Prefill Chart Fast Prefill Chart Normal Chart Pause Chart Right click on an active recorder to produce the drop down menu Realtime chart controls Right click on an active recorder in Comms Server Ethernet or RS485 either from the recorders listed in the left hand window or from recorders in the main window From the list select Send Recorder Events and the Recorder Chart Functions box will appear If the option is not in the list go to Preferences in Administration on page 237 Select a chart control function for immediate effect on the recorder Because TrendServer Pro is graphing the data that is being transferred in realtime the recorders running on TrendServer Pro will not be affected 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 249 Communications Server Event chart controls The same set of chart controls can be activated using the event system in TrendServer Pro Chart controls can be used as an effect of an event happening In the Events tab i
134. to the control temperature the As Found and As Left offset information would be entered in this window These are the As Found and As Left offsets used in the controller to create a bias if need ed TUS Offset As Found sj Note Enter 0 if not used in production TUS Offset As Left 29 Note Enter 0 if not used in production 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 409 410 AMS2750 Report Generation Tool Step 9 Plot Readings Form TUS Report Wizard Plot Readings Start the graph plot for each SetPoint when TC s are within 20 Deg F of the SetPoint Time to show readings once stability reached gt i Minutes Start the graph plot for each Setpoint when TC s are within X Deg of the Setpoint This indicates that it will only start the readings table and graph once all thermocouples are within X degrees of setpoint For example A setpoint is at 100 Deg C and you enter 30 then it will start plotting when all thermocouple readings reach to 70 Deg C This does not affect the data in the TUS file only the data being graphed for the report Time to show readings once stability reached X Minutes This is to allow only spec ified period of recorded data to be in tabular form after TC s are defined as stable or until the temperature moves outside the range detailed For example Only 30 minutes of data shall be in tabular form once stability has been reached 43 TV 25
135. used only 6 relay outputs are available Closed 500 ohms Open gt 300 kohms Transmitter Power optional QX has 200mA 9 24VDC 3VDC SX has 1 Amp 9 24VDC 3VDC QXe is available with 130mA 9 24VDC TXP as an option on the Comms card Agency Approval optional CSA Optional CSA22 2 No 1010 1 2004 Certificate Number 211230 UL Optional ANSI UL61010 1 2004 File 201698 FM Class 1 Division 2 optional FM not available for the QXe Vutronik Connection optional QX Recorder only Optional rear cover with 50 pin connector for direct connection to the recorder TDC2000 3000 system using Vutronik Trend Recorder 24VDC instrument power only Extended Security System ESS optional Provides full support for 21 CFR Part 11 Includes features for entry of unique User ID s and associated passwords timeout on inactivity 1 to 10 min password expiration 1 to 365 days up to 50 users pass word re entry lock out for incorrect entry of password more than 3 times no re use of passwords pro grammable 4 to 12 times traceability by user name Miscellaneous Optional customer ID Tagging 3 lines of up to 22 characters each line 288 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Specification Options Firmware Options Math Algorithms optional All analog input channels have a math expression text block This is a fully user programmable 100 char
136. user wishes use remote viewer functionality for the other recorder from the same web browser same machine he will have to undergo steps 1 to 3 again for that recorder Recorder is not Password Protected 1 On the Language selection page add on message will appear as This Website wants to install the following add on RemotedisplayTool cab from Hon eywell Automation India Ltd If you trust the website and the add on and want to install it click here indo ernet Explore http R Dis E http 192 168 21 Region asp v Bg Kw an x Wa Qi Search safe DoNotTrak Mj v E weather Facebook Speedtest d Favorites S Region PAGE 444 This website wants to install the following add on RemoteDisplayTool cab from Honeywell If you trust the website and the add on and want to install it click here English German Spanish 5 French Submit Preference 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 259 Internet Security Settings 2 Click on Install This Add on for All users on This Computer This Website wants to install the following add on RemotedisplayTool cab from Hon eywell Automation India Ltd If you trust the website and the add on and want to install it click here we Favorites S Recorder Index This website wants to install the following add on RemoteDisplayTool cab from Honey Install This Add on for All Users on This Computer What s the Risk Inf
137. will display properties and values of a selected device Send Hecorder Events is an option that needs to be enabled to allow event data to be exported when the export data function is performed and this will also allow event chart controls to be enabled The Clear Setup Cache button will remove all setup files Network Settings is for PC s with more than one network card fitted to access devices on other networks The network cards are displayed here for selection If the Use NIC Default IP Address Selection is ticked then the first network card that was added to the list will always be selected Preferences The Timing Setups tab displays the current timings for the current com munications setup These entries should be configured correctly and not require any changes by the user Contents Enables the Help files About Communications Server Gives the version of the software Add a new Device to a communications port Use this icon button as one way of adding a device to Communications port Other ways of adding a device are to right click on the desired port in the left window ie Ethernet and select the Add Device option Or select a comms port in the left window right click in a clear space in the top window and select Add Device See Add a Device on page 240 Configure Database Logging te Use this icon button to configure a device for logging channels to a database Other ways to configure logging are to right cl
138. with this option The Multitrend SX transmitter power supply is isolated from the recorder A red LED light will illuminate when there is voltage on the connectors The LED is situated between the two connectors at the back of the unit See page 16 The eZtrend QXe has a 24V DC 130mA Transmitter Power Supply card that can be fitted as an option Connection is made via a 2 way connector at the rear of the unit the mating half is supplied with this option For connector position see page 17 The 24V transmitter power supply is not isolated from the recorder and is not referenced to ground The option card also has an RS485 Modbus port and a USB port Recommended wire size for termination connector 22 12 AWG 22 14 SWG 123456789 10 11213141516 17 18 19 20 cua aa ee E UG Oe ee aaa addu daa 24V LED OV Figure 2 16 Transmitter Power Supply card for the Multitrend SX recorder Alarm Relay Cards amp Digital Input Output Cards The Alarm Relay Cards and the Digital Input Output Cards are both options available for the Minitrend QX Multitrend SX and the eZtrend QXe recorders To fit these option cards into the eZtrend QXe recorder it requires an expansion card to interface to the recorder See QXe Analogue Input Standard card on page 21 All Alarm Relay card outputs provide 240V AC isolation channel to channel and channel to recorder Digital Input Outputs will provide isolation to 100V AC test voltage not for mains connection
139. 0 15 10 0 415 000 23 Aug O 29 Aug US 29 Aug Max TC 3 409 855 Haos fal Min TC TC5 405 55 F r395 000 TC Diff 4 30 385 000 The recorder enters this mode when all sensors have been within the soak tolerance for a qualification period This is based on the survey setpoint and the defined class of the fur nace The recorder switches to the second survey phase defined as the Soak phase When this happens the recorder changes the trend graph from a full scale graph to a Zoomed in dis play The recorder begins to check for the time it takes before all the survey inputs are within the soak band The amount of overshoot if any and the time it took to reach this first survey setpoint The recorder starts to monitor all sensors for stability all sensors must remain sta ble for 2 minutes in order to progress to in soak in stability mode If any sensor falls outside of the soak tolerance then the recorder falls back to an out of soak mode The time between the first and last sensors entering soak is recorded TC Stabilized A manual override of in stability can be performed The T C s Stabilized button can be pressed if the trend graph shows all requirements are within the defined limits to start this stability run This button is not active until the stability conditions have actually been met but once they are achieved it allows you to start the uniformity test rather
140. 0 Low Eng Dual Point Sensor Compensation is used to used to offset the signal input by a user offset the signal input by a user specified specified amount over the full range amount against the Low and High Eng val ues The offset amount can vary throughout the signal input range Multi Point The Sensor comp screen for a mutli point cal will show the user compensation type Multi Point and the number of values in the table To configure the multi point cal table select the value button and the instrument will display a table entry screen This table is a minimum of 2 default points and a maximum of 9 points Additional rows can be added or deleted by using the Add button or select a channel to insert or delete channels above or below the row selected The input temperature is entered in the left column and the respective offset to be applied entered in the right column Once the table is complete the settings are accepted by clicking the tick button All configuration changes are not fully saved until the Finish and Commit actions have been completed 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Appendix I Battery Data Location Processor Board Located on the processor board this battery is used mainly for Clock battery back up Type 6032 IEC CR2032 System Li MnO org elyt Voltage 3 0V Cell Type Typical Capacity Weight mAh 6032 230
141. 0 pixels e Multitrend SX has a 12 1 Digital Colour LCD TFT SVGA Resolution 800 x 600 pix els e eZtrend QXe has a 5 Digital Colour LCD TFT QVGA Resolution 320 x 240 pixels Clear and intuitive operation Industrial rugged Touch Screen with rapid navigation Custom build screens in the recorder or using Screen Designer not eZtrend QXe 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 34 Functions and Features Comprehensive Connectivity 10 100 Ethernet DHCP Web OPC Server and E mail FTP and TCP IP transfer of encrypted data by using Trend Server Pro software RS485 Modbus Protocol A Comms option card and expansion card are required for the eZtrend QXe recorder USB ports for keyboard mouse and printer Rear port is an option for the eZtrend QXe Data Storage On board non volatile Flash memory up to 2GB for Minitrend QX and the Multi trend SX up to 400MB for eZtrend QXe Removable Compact Flash and USB storage See Storage Media Format on page 163 for formatting information of Compact Flash cards and USB keys Compact Flash not available for the eZtrend QXe No moving parts all solid state flash memory Security Stringent Total Data integrity Password Protection 21CFR Part 11 ESS Extended Security System Password Newtwork Synchronisation Plus Health Watch for preventative maintenance Remote Access Advanced Software Data Analysis at your PC
142. 00C TCO TCO TCO TCO TCO TCO 0 Mins 6 0 0 00C 0 00C 0 00C 0 00 0 00 500 00C TCO TCO TCO TCO TCO TCO 0 Mins 6 0 0 00C 0 00C 0 00C 0 00C 0 00 NA Middle panel displays the setpoint information plus manual stability override button 15 05 00 15 10 00 25 08 25 Sap 08 Lower panel displays two thermocouples Max and Min temperatures plus a third reading of the difference between them e See Top Panel on page 376 e See TUS Survey Process screen Middle panel on page 379 e See TUS Survey Process screen Lower panel on page 381 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 375 376 TUS mode Top Panel The top panel shows a summary of the survey including the furnace details and TUS control buttons All information displayed here has been entered in the See AMS2750 Menu TUS on page 368 Other information displayed includes The start time is entered into the started field in the top panel and the elapsed timer shows how much time has passed since the survey was started this will be updated within a 2 second period The Condition field will display the sta tus of running The Start Stop button This displays the configuration confirmation wizard if accepted it starts the TUS running see Configure Confirmation Wizard on page 376 This is only available when a TUS is not running and can be password protected See Passwords AMS2750 on page 392 The Stop
143. 0DegC v Setpoint 2 X 3000DegC v Setpoint 3 X 5000DegC v Setpoint 4 X 7500DegC v Setpoint 5 X 11000 Deg C v Setpoint 6 X 13000DegC m owe Ja m JE 368 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK TUS mode Furnace Configuration Menu TUS Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt I O AMS2750 gt AMS2750 gt Furnace Refer to AMS2750 section 3 3 1 and Tables 6 7 8 amp 9 Furnace RS G Y Edit Setup 1 0 AMS2750 AMS2750 Grahams Parts Oven Manufacturer Joe Bloggs Model No XRH56748 Class Mat Type Parts Shape Rectangular Meas Units Metres Height 8 0 Metres Width 5 0 Metres T v a JA A number of parameters are needed for each furnace requiring a TUS they are stored in a furnace configuration within the setup and are as follows Name Name or tag used to identify this furnace 39 characters of Alphanumeric Manufacturer Enter the manufacturer of the furnace Model Number Unique Model or Serial number of this furnace 19 characters Alpha numeric Class Enter the Furnace class 1 to 6 numeric Mat Type Enter the type of material or load Parts or Raw material furnace Shape Furnace shape rectangular cylindrical or other Meas Units Furnace measurement units Metres millimetres feet or inches Height Furnace height dependent on shape Width Furnace width dependent on shape Depth Furnace depth dependent on shape Note t
144. 13 UK Section 11 Instrument Care and Maintenance Instrument Care and Maintenance The X Series range of recorders contains no parts serviceable by the user except for a fuse on the DC power supply see Fuses on page 14 In the event of a recorder failure contact your nearest Service Department or an author ised agent to arrange for the return of the unit for repair Cleaning Instructions The recorder s touch screen can be temporarily disabled for cleaning see Clean Screen on page 158 Cleaning the unit should be done with a soft lint cloth and warm soapy water or screen cleaner recommended for use on a PC Solvents and prolonged exposure to detergents can cause damage to the front panel It is recommended that any cloth used for cleaning is damp but NOT wet to avoid water collecting in the unit For Nema 4X IP66 rated recorders option refer to the Nema 4X standards Backlights 1 MTTF Mean Time To Fail is defined as the time at which 5096 of a batch of backlights remain in excess of half their original brightness i e a display has a greater than 50 chance of being half its original brightness when used at 100 after 55 000 hrs for the Minitrend QX Maximum luminosity 400 cd m2 86 000hr if used at 80 43 000 hrs for the Multitrend SX Maximum luminosity 400 cd m2 67 000hr if used at 80 40 000 hrs for the eZtrend QXe Maximum luminosity 450 cd m2 62 500hr if used at 80 For this recorder the
145. 14 1 Maths Variable Table Maths Variables Syntax Description HPC1 to HPC48 HPC1 High Pulse count using Pulse cards Internal memory hours left INTHRS Returns the amount of hours left until the inter nal memory starts to recycle over write IOC1 to IOC48 IOC1 Digital Input Output counters for Digital in and relay out LPC1 to LPC48 LPC1 Low Pulse count using Digital IO cards in pulse count mode Pen Pn Get the value of Pen n 1 to 96 Pen Minimum Value PnMINU Gets the Pen Minimum value n 1 to 96 Pen Maximum Value PnMAXU Gets the Pen Maximum value n 1 to 96 Pen report Maximum Value prmax x y Z Gets the Pen Maximum value for a report x pen number 1 to 96 y period 1 hour 2 day 3 week 4 month z report set 1 current 2 previous completed Pen report Minimum Value prmin x y z Gets the Pen Minimum value for a report x pen number 1 to 96 y period 1 hour 2 day 3 week 4 month z report set 1 current 2 previous completed Pen report Average Value prave x y Z Gets the Pen Average value for a report x pen number 1 to 96 y period 1 hour 2 day 3 week 4 month z report set 1 current 2 previous completed Pen report Totaliser Value prtot x y z Gets the Pen Totaliser value for a report x pen number 1 to 96 y period 1 hour 2 day 3 week 4 month z report set 1 current 2 previous completed
146. 154 Sereen MONI 155 Batch Setup Batch Gontrol oput ee tre bee ets 159 Recording Menu Messages Mehl icut iaesi son i e E OI EE FOE EVER RERO ENTRE KEEN YE YR Process 20 M Status MONS PUNISH Section 5 Password Security eeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeseeneeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeensenneees 187 Log OWOJf ciant oqeni n eio neto tE 187 Users and GTOUDS icii etie ie conim c t residere tb RS 187 Administrator Password Policy User Interface requirements eese eene nnne nnne nne 190 Audit TAIL scssson sense sed e tttm rien 190 Level Permissions ettet rr irr eiie bas 191 Default Password ACCES naiinis aE NEES eene nennen 194 Section 6 Screen Configuration eeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 205 Process Screen OVEPVICW vs ssiessssssossossasssssssssassssssosssotststassnsoasnassssessecsssssssossens ste dein 205 Menu Bar ei estexotiieitaeti atento tetuer ier ie e ie br tenido 206 Screen Menu Bar i Eri nte i RE beds ener iie 207 Replay 208 Chart Speeds iiisceceseiee ierit etr HERE RE ERR 214 Hot BUttON 214 Sereen turi nr M 215 Section 7 Firmware OPTIONS 1 taaasaui nn sus tke Ran
147. 174 Edit Maths Edit the Maths for this particular pen For details see Appendix B Maths Expressions on page 295 Scale Select Scale to go to a sub menu to set up the scale parameters See Scale Menu on page 68 Logging Select Logging to go to a sub menu to set up the logging configuration See Logging Menu on page 69 Alarms Select Alarms to go to a sub menu to set up the alarm profile See Alarms Menu on page 71 Totaliser Select Totaliser to go to a sub menu to set up the totaliser settings See Totaliser Menu on page 73 RAV This will display the Rolling Average for this pen The recorder takes an average of the number of samples entered For example a 1 hour rolling average made up of 1 minute averages it would be 60 seconds per sample with 60 samples and you can increase the time span accordingly so 1440 samples at 60 seconds per sample would give you a 24 hour rolling average made of 1 minute averages Enable the RAV function Enter the Number of Samples Then enter the Sample Interval or how often a reading is taken in seconds 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 67 Prefill works as follows if you setup a 60 sample rolling average a 10 second samples that will create a 10 minute rolling average with each sample being accumulated as an average from the current recorder processing rate 10Hz say so each 10 second sam ple is added to a queue of 60 samples and each 10 seconds the new rolling avera
148. 229 Local Settings Default Time Zone Localisation Daylight Saving Language Line Hz Temp Units Time Zone Log On Off HER DLOBSDIEB isrdnstaceninminuntaanasiwninndtianivindn nein Event Effects sese 428 Look up Tables dide or D cannes 64 M Main Ment eterne Alarms Menu eee Batch Commands Batch Mark on Chart NONU cena ee Batch Setup Control sss Configure egenos s Layout Messages Menu Passwords eee Process Menu ee Recording Menu Screen Menu oo Setup Menu seas Status Menu oo ccc ccscsscsscescsscescessseeeseeeess Main Menu Access Maintenance Backlights Calibration Cleaning senise Operating Temperature Touch Screen Maintenance Status Map button C Mark Chart Alarms Mark on Chart Event Effects sse Maths Credit Options Maths Error Messages Maths Expressions s Full Maths e Full Maths amp Script Processing Maths Variable and Function Tables Script Function Application Examples Maths Variable and Function Tables 296 Max Mins Reset Event Causes 96 Max Mins Reset Event Effects sess Max Min Reset Mechanical Installation Di
149. 29 Services Permission Area 29 TCP IP Permission Area 33 Network Admin Permission Area 29 lt Comms Services Finish Comms Services Engineer ac cess Permission Area 29 Modbus Permission Area 30 Web Permission Area 31 Email Permission Area 34 SNTP Permission Area 32 FTP Permission Area 31 Peers Permission Area 29 Figure 5 12 Default password access from the Web page General Pens Alarms Hardware Remote Viewer Info EI Support 3 Sales 0001 QX Website Take Control Web page Engineer access View Status Permission Area 37 Full Control Permission Area 39 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Figure 5 13 Default password access to clear a pop up Alert Internal Memory Full Thu Apr 19 13 24 44 ged data is being lost Clear Pop up Alert Technician access To OK or clear the error alert message Technician permission level is required Permission area 42 en 4 5 3e 01 Pen 5 LLL Pen 6 48 98 Pen 7 14 64 Pen 8 0 00 Figure 5 14 Default password access to use the Context menu APY E M 32 40 09 Jun 07 09 Jun 07 09 Context menu Technician access Touch any chart process screen to produce the Settings button in the top right of the screen Select the Settings button to change the chart speeds Permission Area 43 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GL
150. 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Step 10 Results and Affirmation This screen summarises each setpoint temperature result by stating which furnace class it met during the TUS and prompts you to enter general survey comments and an affirmation field where you will make the statement as to whether the survey is a pass or fail Results Summary SP 1 200 F Aborted TUS Test Complies with AMS2750 Standard General Survey Comments Affirmation Authorized Person Comments amp Affirmation are included in TUS Report TUS Test Complies with AMS2750 or other processing specifications Enter any other compliance required to additional specifications e g Mil 6875 BAC 5621 etc Enter any text required into the Comments field Enter the name of the Engineer who is creating the TUS report 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 411 412 AMS2750 Report Generation Tool Step 11 Save TUS Report This screen helps in obtaining the location to save the PDF file Reports can be saved on your local PC remote machine or on any external devices attached with the machine Re ports can be saved only in the PDF format Ej Desktop B My Documents Y My Computer My Recent a My Network Places Documents f Desktop My Documents My Computer File name TusReport v My Network Save as type PDF file pdf v An egg timer message is produced informing you that
151. 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Modbus registers CV1 1880 CV32 ECV1 2400 ECV 96 335 Modbus Function Codes Modbus Function Codes These are described in document Modbus Serial Communications User manual 51 52 25 66 Pages 14 to 25 inclusive For X Series recorders only use codes 01 02 03 04 16 and 17 Supplemental to Function code 16 with standard address 0004 can be used to send Supplemental to Function code 17 Report Device ID e Page 23 Slave ID for X Series recorders is always 05 e Page 24 Device description Item Size in bytes Contents Device Description 16d 0x10 Recorder type space software version The length is extended to exactly 16 bytes by trailing 0x00 characters Recorder type is a combination of the OEM series name followed by the OEM device name truncated to 16 characters Software version is of the form nn XX eg 00 FQ e Page 25 Number of data block records byte 23 always equals 05 for the Trendview range data blocks are always in order 00 Analogue inputs 02 Digital inputs 03 Digital outputs 06 Pens 09 Totalisers 336 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Appendix K Troubleshooting Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Cannot read board hard 0 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has be
152. 32 Internal Data Buffer QX and SX Recorder Non volatile 70MB 16 million acquisition values upwards to 1850MB up to 400 million points Internal Data Buffer QXe Recorder Non volatile 70MB 16 million acquisition values upwards to 400MB up to 90 million points Setup and screens Stored internally on non volatile memory Manual Saving Data saving by inserting Compact Flash card or USB memory stick Data Saving Period Related to log rate number of pens totals and alarms Each pen is capable of its own independent storage rate QX and SX Recorder 20ms to 60h QXe Recorder 100mS to 60h Data Format Honeywell binary encoded format Recycling Mode Internal memory has FIFO First In First Out capability where the newest data over writes the oldest data Power Requirements QX Recorder Voltage VRMS 100VAC to 250VAC auto select Frequency 50 60Hz Inrush Current 75A max High Line Cold Start Power Consumption lt 40W 24V Optional instrument power 20 to 55VDC 20 to 30VAC Power Consumption lt 40 watts 18V Optional instrument power 12VDC 35VDC 12VAC 26VAC SX Recorder Voltage VRMS 100VAC to 250VAC auto select Frequency 50 60Hz Inrush Current 75A max High Line Cold Start Power Consumption 60W 24V Optional instrument power 20 to 55VDC 20 to 30VAC Power Consumption lt 60 watts QXe Recorder Voltage VRMS 100VAC to 250VAC auto select Frequency 50 60Hz Inrush Current 75A max
153. 3214 1710 to 1768 2 5 1 4 1 0 0 56 T 454 to 346 270 to 210 9 7 5 4 0 01 C 9 7 5 4 346 to 752 210 to 400 1 8 1 0 9 0 5 L 328 to 32 200 to 0 2 2 1 2 0 01 C 1 0 0 56 32 to 1652 0 to 900 1 3 0 7 0 7 0 39 G W_W26 32 to 212 0 to 100 45 25 0 01 C 45 25 212 to 600 100 to 316 11 2 6 2 11 6 6 2 600 to 1526 316 to 830 5 0 2 8 5 0 2 78 1526 to 2759 830 to 1515 3 1 1 7 1 6 0 89 2759 to 4199 1515 to 2315 5 0 2 8 5 0 2 78 C W5 W26 32 to 356 0 to 180 4 5 2 5 0 01 C 4 5 2 5 356 to 2228 180 to 1220 3 6 2 1 8 1 0 2228 to 4199 1220 to 2315 6 7 oul 6 66 3 7 M NiMo NiCo 58 to 698 50 to 370 2 0 1 1 0 01 C 1 0 0 56 NNM90 698 to 2570 370 to 1410 1 4 0 8 0 72 0 4 N Nicosil Nisil 328 to 212 200 to 100 5 8 3 2 0 01 C 5 8 3 2 212 to 2372 100 to 1300 2 0 1 1 1 0 0 56 Chromel Copel 58 to 1112 50 to 600 1 1 0 6 0 01 C 0 54 0 3 P Platinel 32 to 2534 0 to 1390 2 5 1 4 0 01 C 1 4 0 78 D 32 to 356 0 to 180 6 3 3 5 0 01 C 6 3 3 5 356 to 3344 180 to 1840 4 2 2 4 2 2 3344 to 4515 1840 to 2490 11 7 6 5 11 7 6 5 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 287 Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Input Actuation Range Accuracy Temp Stability PT100 o 0 00385 328 to 1562 200 to 850 1 1 0 6 0 01 C PT200 o 0 00385 328 to 1562 200 to 850 1 4 0 6 0 01 C PT500 o 0 00385 328 to 1562 200 to 850 1 1 0 6 0 01 C PT1000 o 0 00385 328 to 1562 200 to 850 1 1 0 6
154. 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Unable to write configuration 10 3 3 The AI configuration could not be written on configuration change Diagnostics after SetBdTestData command Messages Error writing Al setup to EEPROM Unable to write configuration 11 3 3 The AI configuration could not be written on configuration change Diagnostics after SetBdGuid command Error writing Al setup to EEPROM Messages Unable to write configuration 12 3 3 The Al configuration could not be written on configuration change Diagnostics after WrAlConfig command Error writing Al config to EEPROM Messages Unable to write configuration 13 3 3 The Al configuration could not be written on configuration change Diagnostics after WrAlChanConfig command Messages Error writing Al config to EEPROM Unable to write configuration 14 3 3 The Al configuration could not be written on configuration change Diagnostics after WrBoardSetup command Messages Error writing Al setup to EEPROM Unable to write configuration 15 3 3 The Al configuration could not be written on configuration change Diagnostics after SetMainsF command Error writing Al setup to EEPROM Messages Unable to write configuration 16 3 3 The digital configuration could not be written on configuration Diagnostics change after WrDigConfig comma
155. 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 405 AMS2750 Report Generation Tool Step 6 Site Information Enter the Customer Name Location Address and Contact Name that will be entered onto the report Please enter the name of the Survey Testing Company if the survey is not performed in house If the survey is performed in house this field can be left blank Customer specific Proc ess information can be entered for Job Name Customer Name and Comments TUS Report Wizard Customer Name Heat Treatment Plant Location Address Washington Contact Name Please enter the name of the Survey Testing Company if the survey is not performed in house Customer Specific Process Information Job Name Heating Parts Customer Name Airship Comments 406 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK AMS2750 Report Generation Tool Step 7 Furnace Thermocouple Positioning This screen is used to show the positions of thermocouples inside the furnace This will de fault to the image of 9 thermocouples rectangular square The down arrow will provide more options for commonly used layouts found for survey layouts These are static bitmap images and cannot be changed care needs to be taken to make sure that the position of the T C as positioned in the furnace matches the diagram Add and references or comments in Add Notes These will appeatr in the TUS report Alternatively you can upload your own Custom layout graphic image Defaul
156. 63 times Last powered up Thu Sep 04 2008 09 40 44 Time on since powerup 38m 45s Last Setup Modified Thu Sep 042008 10 09 19 Total On time 546d 3h 07m 56s Total Off time 223d 22h 23m 30s Longest Off time 23d 12h 06m 19s Lithium cell liFe 24626 hours left Backlight Life 50630 hours left at full br Compact Flash 277 inserts Lowest temperature 11 4 Deg C mm Highest temperature 41 9 Deg C Once enabled this screen will keep the following information Powered on How many times the recorder has had the power turned on Last Power up The last time the recorder had been turned on Time On since power up The amount of time since the recorder was last turned on Last Setup Modified displays the last Day Month and Time the setup was last modi fied Total On time How much time the recorder has had the power turned on Total Off time How much time the recorder has had the power turned off Longest Off time How long was the longest time period the recorder was powered off Lithium cell life Approximately how much battery time is left Backlight Life Approximately how many hours of Back light time left Compact Flash How many times the Compact Flash card has been inserted Lowest temperature Displays the lowest ambient temperature detected so far Highest temperature Displays the highest ambient temperature detected so far Al last factory cal When the last factory calibration was made to this Analogue Inpu
157. 7 51 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 127 128 Edit Recording Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Recording Scheduled see below Storage Bias on page 129 Storage Alarm on page 130 Pre Trigger on page 131 gt Edit Recording i EK Scheduled Storage Bias Storage Alarm a Pre Trigger Finish Scheduled Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt Edit Recording gt Scheduled Set up Scheduled exports to transfer data at timed intervals from internal flash memory to externally attached devices CF card or USB storage key Compact Flash not available for the eZtrend QXe Note The use of the network folder for Scheduled export is not recommended since network connectivity and network problems could result in the risk of missing data due to the Sched uled export not being performed at the scheduled time and the folder It is advisable to use other media USB CF for scheduled export See Hecording Methodology on page 162 and Storage Media Format on page 163 Select the Scheduled button to reveal the scheduled menu Schedule Export Tick to enable Export Device Select the device you wish to export data to USB1 is the first USB device to be fitted and USB2 is the second one fitted front or rear of the recorder Compact Flash not available for the eZtrend QXe and the rear USB port is only available as an option A network share path may be available he
158. A 7 188A 6283 Comms 6 A 7 188C 6285 Comms 7 A 7 188E 6287 Comms 8 A 7 1890 6289 Comms 9 A 7 1892 6291 Comms 10 A 7 18BE 6335 Comms 32 end address A 7 Extended Comms Inputs 96 comms values max Address Address Description prend 51 52 25 66 2440 9281 Extended Comms Input 33 start address A 7 1 2442 9283 Extended Comms Input 34 A 7 1 2444 9285 Extended Comms Input 35 A 7 1 2446 9287 Extended Comms Input 36 A 7 1 2448 9289 Extended Comms Input 37 A 7 1 244A 9291 Extended Comms Input 38 A 7 1 244C 9293 Extended Comms Input 39 A 7 1 244E 9295 Extended Comms Input 40 A 7 1 2450 9299 Extended Comms Input 41 A 7 1 2452 9301 Extended Comms Input 42 A 7 1 24BE 9407 Extended Comms Input 96 end address A 7 1 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Modbus Memory Map Supplement Communications Inputs can be set by using Modbus function code 16 Pen Values 96 pens max Address Address Description UE 51 52 25 66 18C0 6337 Pen 1 start address A 8 18C2 6339 Pen2 A 8 18C4 6341 Pen 3 A 8 18C6 6343 Pen 4 A 8 18C8 6345 Pen 5 A 8 18CA 6347 Pen 6 A 8 18CC 6349 Pen 7 A 8 18CE 6351 Pen 8 A 8 18D0 6353 Pen 9 A 8 18D2 6355 Pen 10 A 8 197E 6527 Pen 96 end address A 8 Totalisers 64 totalisers max Addres
159. Alarm 6 this is decoded as follows Bit number 0 2 4 5 Alarm Number 1 3 5 6 Decimal 1 4 16 32 So if you request the alarm status from Pen 1 and it returns the value 41 that number is made from 32 8 1 i e bits 5 3 and O In other words alarms 6 4 and 1 are active 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 333 334 Modbus Memory Map Supplement Totalisers Totaliser values in engineering units 4 byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per reading Input Text message This facility allows a text message to be passed to the recorder to be annotated on the chart and added to the message log The maximum length of the message is 32 bytes of ASCII characters which need not be null terminated It operates by utilising modbus function code 16 0x10 Preset Multiple registers and the unique address 0x0004 in the modbus global register map Table A 1 The modbus message format follows that shown in section 3 7 of the document cited The Start Address will be 00 04 and the Byte Count of the number of bytes in the follow ing text message As 2 modbus registers are used to pass an address to function 16 the Number of Addresses has to be back calculated from the required Byte Count to give the lowest integer such that Number of Addresses 2 2 Byte Count For example if Byte Count 4 then Number of Addresses 2 but if Byte Count 5 Number of Addresses 3 As an example to send the 5 character message
160. Battery Kit of 5 29 50056624 502 Compact Flash card 8Gb Not shown 43 51453071 502 QX Case Handle and Terminal Cover Not shown 44 50005224 501 QX Rear Terminal Cover Not shown 48 30755050 502 QX Mounting Hardware kit 2 Mounting Not shown Brackets 49 51453083 501 QX Panel Gasket 52 51453038 501 Stylus Kit Black pack of 5 53 50013947 501 Connector kit 2 of each connector Not shown type 50017290 501 Touch Screen Protector kit of 5 Not shown 46184161 502 Carrying Handle kit Not shown 50017181 501 QX SX Blanking Plate for I O Slots 2 Not shown 51452129 501 10 Ohm Resistors Pack of 8 Not shown 50001251 501 QX Portable Case Not shown 51453051 501 QX SX and QXe Power cord 125V Not shown Minitrend QX and QXe Portable Case Dimensions Height 165 1 6 50 Y Width Depth 165 1 e pe 235 6 50 9 25 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Multitrend SX Recorder 0 GNE 86 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 267 USB Ethernet host 268 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 20 to 55V DC 20 to 30VAC Input Common Relay Instrument supply Output Analogue Input or Analogue Output GJG Sensor Analogue Input or Pulse Input Alarm Digital IO 24V TX Power RS 485 Supply Output 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 269 Table 10 2 Multitrend SX Spa
161. Bezel Touch Screen Assy NEMA 3 IP54 270 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Table 10 2 Multitrend SX Spares 31 50004352 501 SX 12 1 Display 36 51453098 501 SX Case and Back Plate 39 50004348 501 SX Inverter and Cable kit 42 50005458 501 SX Rear Terminal Cover kit Not shown 46 51453095 501 SX Chassis kit 50 50000871 501 SX Panel Gasket 51 50004292 501 SX Panel Clamp Assy Qty 2 Not shown 52 51453038 501 Stylus Kit Black pack of 5 53 50013947 501 Connector kit 2 of each connector Not shown type 55 50017180 501 SX 12 1 Backlight Not shown 50017290 502 SX Screen Protector Kit of 5 Not shown 46184161 502 Carrying Handle kit Not shown 51452129 501 10 Ohm Resistors Pack of 8 Not shown 50017181 501 QX SX Blanking Plate for I O Slots 2 Not shown 50001249 501 SX Portable Case Not shown 51453051 501 QX SX and QXe Power cord 125V Not shown Multitrend SX Portable Case Dimensions Height 336 6 13 25 Y Width Depth 336 6 336 6 13 25 13 25 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 272 eZtrend QXe Recorder 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Wire seal Earth screw ground 20 to 30VDC 20 to 25VAC Input Instrument power 24V TX Power Power Supply Supply Output RS485 port and USB Host option 43
162. CB header on the rear of the unit The Pulse Input card position for the Minitrend QX is shown in page 16 and for the Mul titrend SX The Pulse Input card is not available on the eZtrend QXe recorder however the 8 Digital O option card has 4 channels that can be set as pulse inputs channels 1 to 4 The operat ing frequency for pulse inputs on the Digital I O card is 1kHz max Input Low lt 1V High gt 4V to 50V DC 8V to 50V p p AC or Volt free input Low short circuit High open circuit 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Electrical Installation A WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES Insulation from channel to channel Normally a channel can be safely connected to a hazardous voltage up to 300V AC common mode with respect to earth However where a channel is connected to a safety low voltage circuit an immediately adjacent channel must be adequately insulated from hazardous voltages between 150V AC and 300V AC max This insulation should comprise of at least 1 5mm air gap or a bar rier rated greater than 1400V AC This is to ensure that protection of the safety low voltage circuit is fully maintained Common Mode voltage is a voltage applied between the whole channel and earth not between pins on a channel 300V AC is permitted at Measurement Category CAT Il Overvoltage Category Il Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury Pulse Input Channel Numbers The Pulse
163. CLaginto Stable Soak Meets Tol Diff Overshoot duration Soak Duration Class TC s Stabilized Manual Override Restart Soak 14 50 00 15 10 00 15 20 00 5 30 J 5 40 00 y egoon 1015 000 22 Aug 08 2Aug08 22Aug08 22Aug08 22 Aug 08 22 Aug 08 22 Sig 08 22 Au be 3 k n Max TC TC 1002 1 1005 000 Min TC TCi 1000 1 995 000 pabueu dnjac pabueu dn3as pea e gt euge adus pdpaasxa 8 51 TUS can be stopped at any time If there is a failure the survey carries on running the test on the others but it is not a valid test because of the failure All 9 TC s would have to run again to complete the test with no failures Example 9 TC s 1 control TC are required for an oven of a certain size The sensors are placed in each corner of the rectangular furnace and one in the middle The control TC is usually placed on the edge of the load No failures allowed With 10 16 TC s one failure is allowed see AMS2750 spec for details 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK TUS mode Ending the Survey This process is repeated until each of the survey setpoints has been completed Select Export TUS A TUS data file is generated with all the relevant information for the AMS2750 Report Generation Tool to produce a survey report The user is prompted to enter free format notes which is included in the TUS When the entire survey has been completed you can export the TUS data file to the remov able media The file can
164. Cards amp Digital Input Output Cards eee 26 Communications Connections eese eese esee eene nete enne nente 30 eZtrend QXe Expansion Card aissis aeiia ii aai aiian 31 USB Devices E E i re en E E 31 Seclioh d OVOLVIGM vissnisisetsncanciesnpaniaran Quod Sa aU DNI DU DUNT NN SAC MEE EE 33 Functions and Features eeeeeeeee eese esee enses tasa satu aetates tns tu senses tosta san 33 Recorder Functionulily ideo then ROO 35 PCGIUIPES VV ESk Options Hardware 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Section 4 Recorder Setup eiiis enira inania d ERR RR x Ra ous LEE xa dE daa dde POWEL UP ta s s 1 Menu Access Ho 2 Log OWOff iiie o era RE OO OUTRE 4 Time and Date Settings ese et tei ibeni iie titer e r eniti 49 Ds Firmware Options iiic retenti nite tob ee ER Ee dei ots to ESPERES 49 Menu Path istviesssies rd re er a be e er PC E desires cese 49 Help M IER 50 Configure Men MH 5I Setup CINE M 52 Edit Recording ssi itdsdes ie aen etii iiie eset ie i nass 128 Reports Menu iiasadi eie a eH ERR ORDER IEEE REDI EO 133 MEE 137 POSSWOPES MM 143 Rr 152 EIDLIRN1 A NESE 0sa
165. Configure Passwords User Admin Delete User This will list all the current users that have been entered into the password system The Ad ministrator can delete users from a drop down list Note Administrator cannot be deleted When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit or Discard Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Unlock User Main Menu Configure Passwords User Admin Unlock User This will list the current users that have been entered into the password system The Admin istrator can unlock a user that has been timed out eg password expiry by selecting a user from a drop down list Select the user and choose Re enable Current or Reset to Default that will set it back to the original setting Reset Passwords Main Menu gt Configure gt Passwords gt User Admin gt Reset Password This will produce a text box warning that if you reset the passwords all the current settings will be lost and the password system will return to the factory default setting Select whether to Continue or Stop the reset procedure Change Passwords Main Menu gt Configure gt Passwords gt Change Passwords The Change Password function can be accessed by all users Select Change Password and enter your user name and old password you will then be prompted to enter your new pass word twice to confirm 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Password Network Synchronisation P
166. Delayed Event This will allow one event to trigger one or more other events after a specified period of time The time period can be set in seconds from 1 to 3600 1 hour Select Delayed Event and select the event s this will apply to Enter the time delay Script Timers Script timers provide 20 independent timers to be used as desired pre viously control and access of script timers was limited to maths functions for use in script but this has now been extended allowing the timers to be controlled using the event system allowing them to be stopped started and reset Script timers can also be viewed in Script Timers on page 170 Access to timers via the Maths scripting feature is still available see Table 14 4 on page 301 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 105 106 Play Sound Sound effects can be used to alert the user that an event effect has occurred Set the Sub Type to Start to reveal two more menu options Sound name and Play Mode The user can pick from a list of 20 different sounds these can be configured to play a single time or repeat continuously Please be aware that continuous mode will repeat continuously until a corresponding stop event is triggered for that sound Also like ring tones the sounds themselves can be replaced on the recorder with custom sounds To update the sounds see Update Sounds on page 152 Display Alert Display alert as an event effect this feature is available from within the event sy
167. Diagnostics 180 Alarm Digital IO Menu Alarm Relay Card Digital IO Card Alarms Appendix D Alarms Menu s Acknowledge Alarm Change Log Speed Configure Alarms Deviation 5 5 Email Alarm High and Low Mark Chart Rate Up or Rate Down View Alarms Alarms Pens All Messages n Analogue In Menu Analogue Input Card sss CIC Comme Cts sernir an s Channel Numbers Connection Details Current Input Diagnostics Signal Wiring Analogue Out Menu Analogue Output Card Channel Numbers Connection Details ais Diagnostics inertes Analogue Output Specifications Appearance s Appendix A Quality and Safety Appendix B Maths Expressions Appendix C Thermocouple Connections 311 Appendix D Alarms 315 Appendix E Ethernet 317 Appendix F Fuzzy Logging 319 Appendix G F sub zero Sterilisation 323 Appendix H Calibration 325 Appendix I Battery Data 327 Appendix J Function Codes and Memory Maps 329 Appendix K Troubleshooting 337 Appendix L 423 AMS2750 Capabilities sss 351 Audit Trail AMS2750 390 B Backlight Event Effects 104
168. Eth ernet addresses to which data can be sent 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 317 318 Email General operation of the e mail system The recorder sends messages for distribution by an e mail server The e mail server is located by its IP address or it s name as set up in the communications set up options When the recorder sends an e mail message it locates the e mail server and uses SMTP Simple Message Transfer Protocol to send the message to the e mail server SMTP allows the recorder to send messages to an e mail server without having its own e mail address because of this the e mail server will not be able to send any reply back to the recorder When setting up the e mail address list it is important to include the e mail administrator address The Administrator e mail address is the e mail address to where the e mail server will respond in the event of any problems with the delivery of e mail messages The Administrator will also appear to be the source of any e mail messages sent by the recorder Most e mail systems require a Reply To address as part of an e mail message since the recorder does not have its own e mail address it uses the e mail administrator as the Reply To address Any e mail message will consist of a delivery list recipients a subject and an optional message body The message body may be omitted for very short messages or where the message is to be sent to a paging system The e mail subject
169. Field I O ut Menu path to current menu Ana Out 9 409 Pen No 1 0 20m Ana Out 10 AO10 PenNo 1 4 20m fe The Analogue Out screen displays all the available ana Out 11 A011 Pen No 1 4 20m4 gt Analogue Output channels Ana Out12 AO12 PenNo i1 4 20m gt puede rr its Select a numbered channel to edit the configuration of each output eo aa Press the Analogue Out button to display all the analogue outputs available Click on indi vidual Analogue Out number to set up each channel profile Enabled Toggle On and Off Allow Overrange Toggle On and Off Disabled as default this will allow the output sig nal to go overrange to 21mA if disabled the maximum is 20mA Transmit Pen Eg Select a pen to output 4 20 mA loop This will take the scale value from the pen it is transmitting and convert to 4 20mA output signal eg if the scale is 0 50 this signal will fit the scale so 4mA 0 and 20mA 50 For 0 20mA output sig nal with the same 0 50 scale this would read OmA 096 and 20mA 50 Output Select either 4 20mA or 0 20mA Label Select and enter an identification label Select and use the on screen keyboard Up to 16 characters When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Alarm Digital lO Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Field IO Alarm Digital IO
170. High Line Cold Start Power Consumption lt 40W 24V Optional instrument power 20 to 30VDC 20 to 25VAC Power Consumption 40 watts Common Relay Output SPNC NC common alarm relay Two contacts normally open when the recorder is powered no active alarms Rating 24V 1 Amp Not available for the QXe Battery Battery backed up for clock replaceable Lithium battery Type 6032 3 0V 10 years life Recorder powered 4 years life typical Recorder unpowered Password Protection Multiple Administrator control of password setup and management with four levels of password protection for Engineer Supervisor Technician and Operator Up to 50 different users are avail able Password protection restricts user entry to the recorder set up and specific screens Engineer Highest access to all levels Supervisor Technician and Operator Supervisor 2nd highest level including Technician and Operator access Technician 3rd level including Operator access Operator 4th and lowest level of access Languages English UK amp US French German Italian Spanish Brazilian Polish Hungarian Slovakian Czech Turkish Romanian Russian Greek Portuguese and Bulgarian Also Asian languages including Chinese simplified Japanese and Korean Temperature Units C F K Recorder Identification Status bar Alternately displays Recorder ID and Recorder Screen Name Displays Time and Date
171. Honeywell Minitrend QX Multitrend SX and eZtrend QXe Recorders See Store and Send Data Securely For the best in data acquisition data security and peace of mind choose Honeywell 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Table of Contents Section 1 Preface usuuereeliseeesannm emen hnn rr hhh sm nhan atra anra n nn nnn 1 Preface Thank you for choosing a Honeywell X Series recorder DOGCHImentatlongs dete et itis ertt aedium eine eve n ed d 1 Protocols used in this manual Safety and Symbol Identification Warnings and Safety Precautions eese eee eee eese eene enses tn nenas senses stnana 3 Do s and Don ts Hazardous Voltage Section 2 Installation bsicas uda aq UECdE pav c ds xR ded Caua d ERU DEIN IDEM D RIDE DIE OE 5 Environment and Location eese ee eee eene eee eee eate teet tento aene aee nene sete eee eo 5 Mechanical Installation Installation Instructions Electrical Installation 4 esee eee eee eene eene netten nins tn stus tns tn sense tuse ns ene n Installation Category situ di ti tte tine rie oes e tole Analogue Input Card ossi aei e bene be P DERI QXe Analogue Input Standard card esee 21 Analogue Output Card ET Pulse Input Cardaria ereti ine Sesto ws sla lest dt mie bietet ets Transmitter Power Supply Card eese nene 26 Alarm Relay
172. Independent Chart and Logging speeds Global Language Support Rapid review and replay of data at recorder Approvals CE CSA UL Minitrend QX and Multitrend SX also have FM approval NEMA 4X IP66 option AMS2750 functionallity option Active X control French and German USB keyboard compatibility Time Sync on Digital inputs Password Net Sync a group of up to 32 recorders 1 sync 31 Temperature Uniformity Survey functionality option AMS 2750 Logging speed up to 50Hz 20 msec 10Hz 100msec for eZtrend QXe Upto 16 Analogue Inputs for the Minitrend QX Upto 48 Analogue Inputs for the Multitrend SX Upto 12 Analogue Inputs for the eZtrend QXe Remote Viewer via the recorder web page Events set up occurrences to trigger actions Single and concurrent batch capability Print Support 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Functions and Features Counters Modbus master communications Alert System Sound system add sound effects to identify occurrences Email facility the recorder will email an event notification and include a screen shot of the occurrence as an attachment Pre and Post Trigger alarm function Recorder Functionality X Series recorders provide flexible electronic data acquisition and recording in a high functionality instrument Minitrend QX is a DIN standard 144mm format recorder with a 5 5 QVGA display and the Multitrend SX is a large 12 1 diagonal display
173. LO August 2013 UK 6000mm h 1200mm h o B Dim Saver Only available when the Screen Saver function is active Dim Saver will help to increase the life of the backlight and lower the screen brightness for night time use Use Saver Brightness or Off Always Saver Level Only available when the Dim Saver function is set to Use Saver Bright ness Select this to use the instant dimming slider which lowers the screen brightness Default screen brightness is 80 Adjustable between 10 and 100 of full brightness This works on a square law rule that means if you reduce the saver level by 2596 you will double the backlight life If you reduce the saver level by 50 you will quadruple the backlight life Normal backlight MTBF at 100 brightness is ee QX 55 000 hours 86 500 at 80 brightness SX 43 000 hours for the 67 000 at 80 brightness ee QXe 40 000 hours 62 500 at 80 brightness When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Note Once you enable the screen saver it will not turn off the backlight if at the time of the Timeout there is a penin alarm The screen will stay on until the alarm is gone and the Time out is passed Once the Saver is active and screen is Dark backlight is off it will turn back on if a pen goes into alarm Exit Screen Saver If the screen saver is active on the recorder any of the follo
174. Measuring junction Reference Input junctionheld terminals ato C on rear Temperature reading panel of to maths expression recorder Ext 0 C Reference By keeping the reference junction at 0 C then the negative input is act ing as a 0 Volt reference so the voltage reading from the thermocouple can be passed di rectly to the tables where the corresponding temperature reading can be found Diagram shows passive burnout for active burnout replace the for External with a Specified Temperature Thermocouple Copper wire zw Inputs Look up table us c 0 Volts oO VD ar added Vols converts C D voltage read Measuring ing to tem junction Input r perature terminals Reading in volts Reference on rear junction held panel of O Thermocouple Temperature at 45 C recorder Table reading to Per maths imp expression External Reference with a specified temperature The reference junction is kept at a con stant known temperature other than 0 C This temperature can be specified in the setup menus This reference temperature is then used in the same way as the reading from the temperature sensor using the Internal Reference method Diagram shows passive burnout for active burnout replace the for 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 313 Thermocouple CJC Compensation External Input Reference Co
175. Met the requirements of Class 1 Survey Passed Failed Fumace SP2 1200 0 F Met the requirements of Class 1 Survey Passed JFailed Fumace Report Reference Number 345 Report Generated By AMS2750 TUS Report Tool All measured values except the control TC are corrected Page 1 of 12 414 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Sample pages taken from a test TUS report Report Reference Number 345 Customer Heat Treatment Plant Equipment Furnace 1 hz me omo c uM EU m 5 5 5 56 d SP2 2000 7F en All channels shown are corrected G SP 950077 i o o d SP2 T2000 F ee All channels shown are corrected 3 XS PES SPTO F Hip 1 SP2120007F t All channels shown are corrected ieren lt m d m A RampTime HH MM SS sid am Time HH MM SS j SP1 950 0 F 00 03 02 SP2 12000 F All channels shown are corrected LU SP2 12000 F All channels shown are corrected Pre TUS instrument Comments Post TUS Instrument Comments All soaks have been completed the survey was stopped automatically TmwemueUis SSCS Report Generated By AMS2750 TUS Report Tool All measured values excep the control TC are corrected Page 20f12 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 415 Sample pages taken from a test TUS report Report Reference Number 345 Customer Heat Treatment Plant Equipment Furnace 1 Survey Instrument Certificate No amp JUXAS93 Mersewybe o o
176. NG ea os dv t terere ate er ed 245 Comms Database Server 1 eese eee e enses eene eese estne tenens sonst ta toes teet ta stans 252 NA 252 Modb s Capabilities 252 OPC Interface Open Process Control eee ee eee esee eerte eene etn stnaen 253 WED BIOWSED c M Internet Security Settings Section 9 PC Software Suite ucuciscesssisn nip RR x t s UkAE OPE Gn N RENE UU SRM A URRIN RR UDIR 261 The TrendManager Pro Software Suite eee 261 A Series Screen Designer ie etin reet cete EO ER E pda rho 261 Database Management Tool eese eee 262 Report Generation Tool AMS2750 essent 262 System Requirements Section 10 Spares List Jine nba ida ee MGR Kad Uuind Bod wo ER 263 Minitrend QX Recorder isset REESE REN EHE KEY ERR 263 Mu ltitrend SX Recorder uie e e ERR EE tr GRON ER RIPE 267 eZirend OXe Recorder a ssi o omi os 272 Section 11 Instrument Care and Maintenance 277 Instrument Care and Maintenance eese eee eese eene enses tn stns tna ann 277 Lai v DEPPEXTIHITI CENE 277 DI 277 B A HTTANEDITIAPITI CASE 277 Touch Screen en 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Section 12 Technical Data amp Specifications 279 Field I
177. O August 2013 UK TUS mode TUS Logged data Data is logged for each sensor pen within the TUS at the configured rate The data is time stamped and any power outages indicated within the format The algorithm in the recorder is acquiring data once per sec evaluating the Max and Min TC The logging in the TUS is every 2 mins The chances of the 2 minute data point recording the highest TC reading at the same time as the recorder 1 sec data point is 1 in 120 Looking at the recorder logged data 1 per sec it could show the highest temp TC at 652 3 but the TUS logged data 2 min might miss that point and its highest recorder TC could be 651 7 Check the recorder logged data that runs at 1 per sec to find Max amp Min TC readings TUS logged data only logs once every 2 minutes so it will only correspond to the Max Min read ings for those data points If the logged data is set to 1 per second the readings for Max Min on the TC s are the same as the recorder logged data The same data can be logged to other pens for saving to TrendManager Suite software for additional analysis TUS periodic data logging The data logging for the TUS populates a single set of readings taken from the Data item table of the latest processing cycle this is aligned to the top of an even minute 2 4 6 past the hour for example The logging runs on a TUS enabled recorder at all times so when a TUS is started the most recently populated time can be used as t
178. O August 2013 UK 169 170 User Variables Main Menu Process User Variables User variables provide the user the ability to set values for up to 32 variables to be used with in the maths and script Modify allows the user to set and edit the variables View the user can view the variables The User variable function allows a system to be setup where values can be altered to effect calculations without having to change the configuration The variables can be used within the Maths and script using UV1 to UV32 and can also be set within the maths using the func tion UVSET x y where x the user variable number 1 to 32 and y is the value The User variables are also non volatile See Appendix B Maths Expressions on page 295 Script Timers Main Menu Process Script Timers Script timers provide 20 independent timers to be used as desired Previously control and access of script timers was limited to maths functions for use in script but this has now been extended allowing the timers to be controlled using the event system Select a Timer that can be stopped started and reset 5 Access to timers via the script is still available in Maths Variable and Function Tables on page 296 Reports Process Main Menu Process Reports Reports can be generated manually or on a periodical basis using event system to show dai ly weeks monthly totals max mins averages etc the reports can be printed e mailed as atta
179. O August 2013 UK 203 204 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Section 6 Screen Configuration Process Screen Overview Figure 6 1 Minitrend QX Process Screen Standard Screen example Chart and DPM Message List icon allows quick access to Batches Recording menu allows Batch Detail User Mark on Chart and Messages stop start recording immediate download of recorded data p R Batches Detail Mark Msg Exit Select Options for Group 3 This grey area will appear if you are viewing a batch related screen View Alarms Alarm Status Print Modify Replay List of View Configure orSave screen chart available available Individual Alarm screen layouts history screens screens Acknowledge Acknowledge all Alarms Fe Ack View Detail Exit t Exit Enter recorder Recorder ID No amp Name Setup menu alternates to display the Screen 10 Jan 06 14 16 47 nao 124 100g Pen P Screen Name E Time and Date ene 69 00 Pen 3 26 00 Chart Area Yellow area shows when Pen 1 was in alarm state Realtime Pen Pointers Alarm Marker marks the chart to show when Pen 1 was out of its alarm state Pen Digital Read out Touch the screen to activate a short cut to Settings such as change the chart speed 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 205 206 Menu Bar
180. O Specification 1 eee ee eee esee ee eee essen enean ebar senses natn sta snnens 279 Analogue Input 280 Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification eee eee esee eene tente tnntne 280 Relay Alarm Output Card Options eese 280 Digital Input Cards 281 Specification Tables 283 Input Range Performance Accuracy Table ar 287 Input Act ation eoi dc ee Pe e re saa RE RE RPER FERRE TN 287 Input Actuation eei reel te eter e praed oisi re o e EE 288 LED Flash Codes aieenanoiatie m WEE oi at as tae a 291 Appendix A Quality and Safety 5 aei asasn cas ssaiacucrkdu ta ncs aucSu a rR Roa na kRiaimacE 293 CEMark 293 NV 293 Appendix B Maths Expressions ss ecccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 295 Full Maths amp Script Processing srccccsssssssssssccssessssscsssseseesessssesssesssssssesseses 295 Maths Credit Options screen tette trt i Dre hr ere RN 295 Maths Variable and Function Tables essere 296 Full MAS acaso e e POR GEUEXER ecb OO eine 304 Script Function Application Examples eese 305 Maths Error Messa pes iacere S ROREM es E casita 310 Appendix C Thermocouple Connections eere How Thermocouples Work 4 eeeeeee eene eene enne enata enses stas tn son Thermocouple CJC Compensation
181. Once the setup or data has been imported it will display in this window the next time that it is opened no need to restart Comms Server For X Series recorders drop down the list and select the recorder from the list It will be in the list under the same name as the setup previously saved If any equipment other than X Series recorders is to use TrendServer Pro to log and graph data then a profile has to be generated The Modbus Profile Tool is available to aid in setting up Device Profiles for other devices see Modbus profile tool data update on page 243 For more detailed informa tion on the Modbus Profile tool refer to the TrendManager Pro Suite software man ual NOTE The Recorder ID number is NOT the same as the Slave ID Number Communications Port Choose between Ethernet or RS485 for COM ports 1 to 8 This may already be entered depending on how you have chosen to add the device A Comms option card and expansion card are required for the eZtrend QXe recorder 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 241 242 Communications Server IP Address Go to Main Menu gt Status gt System gt General In this list is the recorder IP Address The comms server uses IP Addresses to locate devices on local and remote serv ers X Series recorders can also be located using their network ID Network ID X Series recorders will automatically register a unique Network ID using the serial number The format is xs nnnnnn whe
182. Oor 16 I O SPNO 1A 24VDC non inductive internally suppressed 16 l O not available for the QXe Activation Fully programmable internal alarm levels Assignable to any relay or discrete output Analogue Outputs Re transmission Outputs optional not available for the QXe 2 or 4 re transmission outputs available for the QX Recorder and 2 4 6 or 8 re transmission outputs avail able for the SX Recorder a pen drives each output Analog inputs totalised values or any mathematical result can be re transmitted Update Rate 250 msec all channels Type 0 to 20 4 to 20 mA Resolution 0 00296 Accuracy 0 1 0 500Q load 0 25 500Q 1KQ load Maximum Load Resistance 1000 Ohms Isolation 300VAC Digital Input Output optional 8 I O or 16 I O all channels may be selected freely as either digital inputs or outputs The Digital I O card also has 4 channels that can be set as pulse inputs channels 1 to 4 The operating frequency for pulse inputs on the Digital I O card is 1kHz max Input Low lt 1V High gt 4 5V to 10V DC 9V to 20V p p AC or Volt free input Low short circuit High open circuit 16 I O not available for the QXe 4 relay outputs all four channels are relay outputs only 8 relays 2 DI card two outputs can be configured for use as digital inputs A digital input is provided by a volt free contact between the normally open NO and the common C terminals of an output relay If the 2 Digital inputs are
183. Processing Food and Beverage Pharmaceutical Biotech and Manufacturing industries This manual explains the product functionality operation configuration and communication as well as Safety Precautions Installation amp Wiring Recorder Setup Troubleshooting and Spares List It is recommended that the user reads the manual before installing and operat ing the recorder Documentation A full set of manuals for the software and the recorders including some language ver sions are available on the CD provided and from our website www honeywellpro cess com Also Application Notes and Installation Instructions first time password setup and database tool information Supplementary documentation to accompany these recorders are Table 1 1 Supplementary documentation Manual Part number TrendManager Pro V5 amp X Series Software Suite 43 TV 25 11 Screen Designer X Series Recorders 43 TV 25 31 Notes The contents of this manual are correct at the time of issue The contents may change at any time without prior notification This is due to continuous develop ments to the recorder and it s functionality Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this document however should there be any anomalies found please contact your nearest Honeywell supplier See back page for contact addresses All rights are reserved No part of this manual should be copied or repro duced stored on a retrie
184. PulseChan Messages Arguments of the message 3 4 4 Illegal channel number requested in message Invalid channel Diagnostics were invalid number sent to SetAcqTimerFreq Messages Arguments of the message 4 4 4 Config change message can not change to raw mode acquisi Diagnostics were invalid tion Attempted to set raw mode via config change use SetRaw Messages Mode Arguments of the message 5 4 4 Active burnout was selected on a channel configured as a RT Diagnostics were invalid Attempted to set active burnout with RT input Messages 338 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code The message had an invalid N A N A The message sent to the I O does not match it s CRC Diagnostics CRC Messages The message was incom N A N A A incomplete message was detected by the I O card Diagnostics plete Messages The configuration operation N A N A General failure of an operation that queried or changed configu Diagnostics was not successful ration Messages Unable to determine N A N A Unable to determine the firmware revision number so some Diagnostics firmware version number functions may not operate correctly Messages Unable to determine N A N A Unable to determine the firmware build number Diagnostics firmware build number Messages Unable to determine the N A N A Unable to dete
185. Report Generation Tool generates files in PDF format that you can view and print on the same PC as the AMS2750 Report Generation Tool The installer shall prompt you to install a compatible version of Adobe Reader if it is not al ready installed If Adobe Reader is required you will be prompted to begin installation An installable version is provided on the product CD 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 395 Introduction This document provides information regarding AMS2750 Report Generation Tool user inter face and will help you in understanding how this application works and what the various Screens are This application is used to create TUS and SAT Reports based on the AMS2750 standard Reports will be created in PDF format Splash Screen This is the first screen that appears when you run the application It remains on screen for around one second and then disappears This indicates that AMS2750 Report Generation Tool application is about to start Report Tool User Interface When the tool opens it will be blank At the top are two tabs labelled Reports and Help TUS Report SAT Report Browse Logo Exit Reports tab select to create a TUS report or a SAT report using the creation wizard The Browse Logo option is here so you can select a logo to use as a header on your report Exit will produce a question asking if you want to close the application Yes will close the application Help Tab this opens t
186. Returns a true or false result from testing if two variables are not equal to each other e g IF A1 GLBV1 OR Returns a true or false result from testing if one or other or both tests are true e g IF A1 GLBV1 A2 GLBV2 XOR x Returns a true or false result from testing if one or other but not both tests are true e g IF A1 GLBV1 A2 GLBV2 Functions for Scripts Scripting is not available on the eZtrend QXe Scripts evaluate at whatever the Analogue sample rate is set to There is 500 character limit for scripting Table 14 7 Functions for Scripts Syntax Description Else else Steps into brackets to run Must always finish with a return else return y Elseif elseif x Carries out a conditional test and if true steps into brackets to run Must always finish with a return elseif x gt 4 return y First run FIRSTRUN Returns true if the script is being run for the first time otherwise returns false if x Carries out a conditional test and if true steps into brackets to run If false steps to next test without operating the contents of the brackets Next step will be either e seif or else Must always finish with a return If x5 return y Set Changed SETUPCHAN GED Returns true if the setup has been changed otherwise returns false Time Changed TIMECHANG ED Returns true if th
187. Screen Overview eee 205 Screen Designer Screens sss 218 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Screen Menu Bar sese Screen Designer s Loading a Layout into a Recorder Loading a Template into a Recorder SONWALE icti ied edens diens Screen Designer AMS2750 s1111 Screen List MMC Screen Markers ds Screen Menu ss Calibrate 15i nei rh tes Charts eiie etes Clean Screen ss Replay enero mieten Sereemm LAGU ecc maet eR Ur CHUTE Screen Saver Tabular Display Touch Test oes Screen Menu Bar Edit Screen Properties Replay ensem Screen Saver sosta pdt n ANI ItUp Iq Brightness iue cire tree itn Dim SAVED stieni iini den teas DOTS aunen d b QURE Tabular Screen Script Function Application Examples 305 Script Timers Event BIeGts zie die IE rn ep rcs Process Menu Scripts Trigger Events Tr Security Messages Lesser eet Security Overview sse Send Recorder Events m Chart Controls cic estero eren eeienrenge Sensor Compensation Analogue Input Calibration Dual Point Cal Multi Point Cal Single Point Cal Sensor Config Menu TUS Sensors Config Menu Process Mode 359 Server Name Email 2 es 87 Server Name SNTP 2 ee 89 WETVICES W 77 DENES pornoa n GB RENE UTUIN 152 Thermocouple Adjustment Factor Disable 153 Time 8 Dale ether tee e Ege
188. Select a template from the list To set up templates for multiline text see Email on page 87 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 103 104 Enabled Type Sub Type Recipients Email Text dili Figure 4 11 Event Effect using a Template with Embedded values FEN Email Multiline User phil d gap underground com From Gap Phil D loc 5 Sent Wed 13 09 2006 10 29 Ta Pen 1 Temperature Test Cc Subject Pen 1 Temperature Test Event Cause Scheduled Sub Type Interval Trigger Time 2m 00s Pen 1 Temp 18 197 deg C Screen Change or Backlight On Off Select Screen Change as an effect to change the screen when triggered by an active alarm or sytem alert message Eg Pen 1 goes into Alarm and the screen changes from a chart to a DPM screen where Alarm markers are visible Backlight select On or Off When the Event is triggered the effect is to turn the backlight to what state has been selected On or Off If an active alarm is triggered it will override this state as it has a higher priority Print Screen As an Effect this will print the current screen when triggered by a Cause Eg Cause Digital turns on Effect Print Screen To set up network printer information see Network Admin on page 80 Counters Counters can be used as an Effect of an Event to count an occurrence or to reset different types of counters A User Counter must be set up first before it can be used as a p
189. Set User variable UVSET x y Returns the result of x the user variable and y the value Sin sin x Returns the SIN of x SinH sinh x Returns the Hyperbolic SIN of x Square Root sqrt x Returns the Square Root of x Square sa x Returns the square of x i e x multiply by x Subtract Returns the result of the subtraction Tan tan x Returns the TANGENT of x TanH tanh x Returns the Hyperbolic TANGENT of x 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 299 300 Full Maths amp Script Processing Table 14 2 Maths Function Table Maths Functions Syntax Description Trigger an Event TRIGE x This will trigger Event x 1 to 20 TRIGE x will return 1 when the event is fired otherwise it will return 0 Functions use radians 27 radians 360 degrees Event triggering from scripts This feature allows any enabled event with an enabled effect does not have to have any causes enabled to be triggered from within the scripting system using the following function TRIGE x where x is the event 1 to 20 Once an event is triggered using scripting the event is locked and cannot be triggered again from scripts until the lock is cleared using the clear event function CLRE x where x is the event number 1 to 20 This prevent successive exe cutions re triggering the same event As a further measure to avoid the system being over loaded by events from within the script system each time an event is t
190. Signal Wiring A CAUTION CONTROL UNIT DAMAGE Do not apply a hazardous live voltage between and pins within a channel eg 60V maximum on voltage ranges 5V maximum on millivolts ranges Do not apply a voltage above 1 2V to the pin Failure to comply with these instructions may result in product damage Figure 2 13 Analogue Input connector 314 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 4 urn 35 cuc 1 aPeodbodt e e Foolbs b bs CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 This Analogue Input card can be used as an option to add up to 6 more Analogue Input channels for the eZtrend QXe recorder This will fit into Slot B and will display as channel numbers 9 to 14 The standard fit Analogue Input card is fitted in slot A with up to 6 channels channels numbers 1 to 6 To fit this option card into the eZtrend QXe recorder you will require an expansion card to interface to the recorder See QXe Analogue Input Standard card on page 21 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Electrical Installation Figure 2 14 Input signal wiring Active Burnout Passive Burnout C i Volts mV Thermocouples Thermocouples urren x x zal ds Se x f 10R d ve ve ve ve ve ve ve ve Ohms 4 wire R T 3 wire R T 2 wire R T e x x ve optional connection R T R T Recorder setup will be required if wiring
191. Sync First Time Login The First Time Login only relates to ESS Extended Security System purchased with the recorder Non ESS user For users without ESS once you enable the password you can add a user at adminis trator level and finish apply etc Then go into the menu system and enter the login and it will give you a message that you password has expired and would you like the enter an other you click yes If the first user is not entered and changed to administrator defaults to operator and saved you will be denied access as an operator because an operator level will not allow you to get back in the passwords The first time the system is used a default user name and password is available the user name is Admin and will have no password this is known as the first time user Access to the first time user is removed once the password system has been configured The first time user is reinstated if the password system is reset For recorders with Extended Security System ESS see First Time Password System Setup on page 188 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 143 144 Administrator This is the top level access to all menus Only the Administrator has access to the password setup The Administrator is responsible for adding users and assigning their levels of access throughout the recorder menu system More than one Administrator can be set up User Administration Main Menu Configure Passwords
192. T a 14 33 05 PM 3 4j2008 TUIS Auto Stability achieved a 14 36 38 PM 3 4f2008 TUS ALL in soak 2 ramp 104s lag 18s 14 36 19 PM 9 4 2008 TUS New soak statted for soak 2 limits 590 00 to 610 00 a 14 34 53 PM 3j4f2008 TUS Try to detect new soak 2 limits 590 00 to 610 00 a 10 58 02 AM 9 4 2008 TUS Soak 1 Completed OK E 10 27 34 AM 3j4j2008 TUS Auto Stability achieved E 10 25 32 AM 9 4 2008 TUS ALL in soak 1 ramp 163s lag 8s a 10 25 24 AM 9 42008 TUS New soak started for soak 1 limits 330 00 to 410 00 a 10 22 49 AM 9 4 2008 TUS Try to detect new soak 1 limits 330 00 to 410 00 d 10 22 48 AM 3j4j2008 TUIS Started d 3 45 35 AM 9 4 2008 Session 466 LCM 466 a 9 45 31 AM 3 4f2008 Power On Off for 3m 435 E 3 45 31 AM 3ianna Firroware jinntade ta HG 4 TUS Data file Once a TUS is stopped a TUS data file is created with all the information required for the AMS2750 Report Generation Tool to produce a TUS report and contains the following The data file is only available for export from the recorder to front CF USB key or Network Share folder NAS the TUS instrument is portable and stand alone and extraction of this file via network is not a requirement The tus file contains logged data at 2 minute intervals This is independent of the logging in the recorder Configuration details the furnace sensor and ramp soak configuration details are included within the file 390 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GL
193. TC Type expendable Designed for a single use not reusable non expendable thermo couple Designed for more than one use refer to AMS2750 spec Number of uses usually 0 this is overridden to allow reuse of salvaged thermocouples this is clearly logged Load TC Check this if this is the Load TC TC s attached directly to parts that are being heat treated are usually bare and called load thermocouples Only calibrated thermo couple wire be used when making TC s Refer to AMS2750 spec Table 1 Renewed On Enter a date using the date selection screen for when the sensor was last renewed i e the current TC was connected on this date Track Cal Check this to track the calibration information of this sensor Next Cal Date Enter a date using the date selection screen for when the next calibra tion is due for renewal Cal Adjust Cal adjust for each TC up to 9 cal points Extrapolates between those points Calibration adjustments can be added and deleted by selecting Add In the Cal Point Deg C column use the touch screen and the on screen keypad to enter the cali bration point value In the Correction Deg C column enter the amount by which the sensor can be allowed or from the Cal point in degrees C before being regarded as out of calibration EG cal point 1 100 5 cal point 2 300 1 0 cal point 3 500 75 Looks for the setpoint 150 and works out the sensor cal for 150 See Ther mocouple Cali
194. X we Channel Slot position Card type numbers Slot A 8 Analogue In 1108 Pulse Inputs 1to4 Slot B 8 Analogue In 9 to 16 Pulse Inputs 9 to 12 4 Analogue Out 9 to 12 Slot G 4 Relay Output 1t04 8 Relay 2 Digital In 1to8 8 Digital Input Output 1to 8 16 Digital Input Output 1 to 16 Multitrend SX T Channel Slot position Card type n mbars Slot A 8 Analogue In 1108 Pulse Input 1to4 Slot B 8 Analogue In 9 to 16 Pulse Input 9 to 12 Slot C 8 Analogue In 17 to 24 Pulse Input 17 to 20 Slot D 8 Analogue In 25 to 32 Pulse Input 25 to 28 Slot E 8 Analogue In 33 to 40 Pulse Input 33 to 36 4 Analogue Out 33 to 36 Slot F 8 Analogue In 41 to 48 Pulse Input 41 to 44 4 Analogue Out 41 to 44 Slot G 4 Relay Output 1t04 8 Relay 2 Digital In 1 to 8 8 Digital Input Output 1 to 8 16 Digital Input Output 1 to 16 Slot H 4 Relay Output 17 to 20 8 Relay 2 Digital In 17 to 24 8 Digital Input Output 17 to 24 16 Digital Input Output 17 to 32 Slot 4 Relay Output 33 to 36 8 Relay 2 Digital In 33 to 40 8 Digital Input Output 33 to 40 16 Digital Input Output 33 to 48 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 55 eZtrend QXe un Channel Slot position Card type numbers Slot A 3 Analogue Inputs 1to3 6 Analogue Inputs 1to6 Slot B option card 6 Analogue Inputs 9to 14 Slot G 4 Relay Output 1 to 4 8 Relay 2 Digital In 1to8 8 Digital Input Output 1 to 8 To fit the Analogue Input option card Slot B into the eZtrend QXe rec
195. a tick Now the recorder must be added To do this click the add new device button The first in the row of three This will bring up the Device Details box All these methods will produce the Add Device Details box Areas of the box become greyed out as the selections are made 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Communications Server Device Details Add Device Details Protocol z Modbus Profile xxxxx xxx Communications Port Eee o SY 0 0 0 0 IP Address e i xxxxxx Network ID eS Xxx Slave ID Recorder Name I Status Socket Test Profile Find Device Cancel Protocol The protocol should be matched to that set on the recorder It will be Modbus X by default so leave it at that unless you changed it on the recorder For active Modbus devices the recorder name and protocol variant can be changed Modbus vs Modbus X For an inactive Modbus device the device profile can also be changed Modbus Profile The Profile name box is used to tell TrendServer Pro how to access the data on the recorder This profile is automatically generated from the recorder setup that was downloaded to TrendServer Pro previously The system creates Modbus profiles from an imported setup or logged data and creates a profile including information for pen scale units etc A set of profiles are available for Honeywell modbus devices The profile Name is made up from the Recorder name Type and ID number
196. action request Direction Direction for the data to flow In to or Out from the recorder Command This is the type of Registers used by the slave device Refer to the individual memory map for the register type used for each type of device Data Type Refer to individual memory maps for each type of device to deter mine the type of data Eg signed 16 bit int unsigned 16 bit int or IEEE float X Series devices use IEEE float 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 85 Start Addr This is the register address number to start the transaction from No Of Items Enter the number of items from the start address that are included in the transaction For example displayed here will be 10 SCV 1 1 1 1 1 10 This means the transaction will take 10 items from the start address with a Serial Comms variable of Slave 1 Transaction 1 Register 1 to Slave 1 Transaction 1 Register 10 Enabled Y Friendly Name Slave Device ODBUS master savel 4 ID 1 Enabled Direction In Command Coil Status 1 Protocol Modbus Transaction 1 Data Type short Start Addr 1 Each Master device can have up to 32 slaves and each slave can perform up to 8 transactions al Slave Enabled Toggle On to make this recorder a Slave Device Port Select this for a list of available ports either Ethernet or RS485 For port configu ration see Ports on page 79 Protocol Select this for a list of availa
197. ages 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 345 Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Factory cal read from EEP 0 3 3 An error occurred whilst reading the factory calibration on power Diagnostics ROM was corrupt on power up return to factory or try user calibrating Error reading an Al Messages up factory calibration from EEPROM on power up Factory RT cal read from 1 3 3 An error occurred whilst reading the RT calibration on power up Diagnostics EEPROM was corrupt on return to factory Error reading Al RT calibration from EEPROM Messages power up on power up User cal read from EEP 0 3 3 An error occurred whilst reading the user calibration on power Diagnostics ROM was corrupt on power up try re user calibrating Error reading an Al user calibration Messages up from EEPROM on power up User cal read from EEP 1 3 3 Several errors occurred whilst reading the user calibration on Diagnostics ROM was corrupt on power power up try re user calibrating Multiple errors reading Al user Messages up cal on power up factory calibrations set Both cals read from EEP N A N A Both factory and user calibrations read from EEPROM were cor Diagnostics ROM were corrupt rupt Messages There is no CJC reading N A N A There is no CJC reading available Diagnostics available Messages The last CJC value was not
198. ailable for Pulse Input Up to 12 char acters Inactive Label Input and Output only This is the label that is shown when an alarm becomes inactive Select and enter a label Not available for Pulse Input Up to 12 char acters Reports To This will acknowledge the Alarm Digital IO to a selected destination Select User message to add the Digital IO occurrence to the messages list only Select Mark On Chart to display the occurrence on a chart and to the messages list When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Pulse Input Not available for the eZtrend QXe recorder Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Field IO Pulse Input Only available when a Pulse Input card is fitted as an option The Pulse Input card operates up to a frequency of 25kHz max See Pulse Input Channel Numbers on page 25 Input Low 1V High gt 4V to 50V DC or Volt free input Low short circuit High open circuit If a Pulse input card is fitted in slot A the first 4 pens will display the maths function of HPULn in Edit Maths in the Pens menu as default to display the pulse reading For more information see Appendix B Maths Expressions on page 295 Edit Setup Field I O Pulse Input Y Menu path to current menu Pulse Input 1 PIL Frequency Measure H The Pulse Input screen P
199. ain Menu Configure Layout Edit Screens Available on the SX QX and QXe recorders A dedicated status screen is available for the process mode based on a group this displays the parameters for the process furnace details as well as the countdown timers and ther mocouple tracking status To enable the process timers select any Screen go to Template Type and select AMS2750 Process m B The screen has a group name selection where you can select the groups 1 to 6 This relates to the furnaces 1 to 6 as configured in O AMS2750 Process Mode on page 357 Furnace configuration menu NOTE Pens must be assigned to the individual groups in the Group item in Pens Menu on page 67 For details on the complete Screen menu go to Screens on page 137 AMS2750 Process Screen Process Screen details When the AMS2750 Process screen first appears all the buttons are grey until the due dates are set Select the button on the screen to set the due dates Use the Screen button at the top of the recorder screen to change the screens using the Next and Previous buttons 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 353 AMS2750 Process mode a Example of a Process x P EY E Stopped screen on a QX or QXe re AMS2750 Status corder Furnace Class 2 AMS2750 Process screen TUS Due SAT Due Shows countdown timers In In that can be set manually by the user Inst Cal etn Control due In erbe TC Due Gr
200. ains the Serial No of the recorder how may credits are available dis plays the Options Code and lists what firmware Options are currently active Serial No read only and cannot be edited Credits read only and cannot be edited It displays the number of Credits available to activate additional firmware functionality including the total credit value Options Code the Options code is a unique coded number for this recorder that contains information that enables certain functionality including credit value Options Select the Options button This displays how may credits are currently in use Select Options to produce a list of Firmware options available with their credit values The number or credits required is shown in brackets Toggle each option On or Off to enable the feature within the recorder More credits are available from your supplier Serial No Credits Options Code Options 100089 Maths 4 6 3 Events 6 1000890302109 Fast Scan 5 25 Credits in Use Totals 4 Custom Scrn 4 Maintenance 2 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Full Maths 223 224 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Section 8 Communication Comms Configuration Once the recorder has been set up for Comms the TrendServer software and Communi cations Server requires configuring to allow the recorder to connect with your PC To set up Comms in the recorder go to Comms Services Menu on page 82
201. al IO screen iat 0 2 D2 Input displays all the available channels that can be set Digital I O 3 D3 Pulse Input Hz a up to be digital inputs or outputs Digital I O 4 D4 Input Each channel displays Digital 1 0 5 DS Output Relay 24V b a its individual settings A Select a numbered Digital 1 0 6 D6 Output Relay 24 B I MOON PR M E E Ls figuration of each input 4 x da H con adi or output For all cards select an Alarm Digital to display the configuration menu Each Alarm Digital has a list of menu items to be configured Enabled Toggle On and Off Digital Type Set to Output Relay contact Power for the Alarm Relay cards Toggle between Input and Output or Pulse Input for the Digital IO card On the 4 Relay Alarm card only output type is available Channels 1 to 6 on the 8 Alarm Relay card are out puts channels 7 amp 8 can be either inputs or outputs Note Pulse Input only available on channels 1 to 4 for slot G 17 to 20 for slot H and 33 to 36 for slot I Output Output only The relay outputs can be set to be either Latched or Single Pulse A Latched relay will be maintained in its active state until the trigger source has returned to a non alarm state unless acknowledged For Single Pulse the relay will go active for a period of time specified by the user then return to a non active state The time out period remains independent of the length of time the active
202. al Input Functions The digital inputs can be used for the following actions A Digital contact on an input can be used to enable or disable one or any combination of alarms Can be used in Maths expressions Can have current status indicated on DPMs Bars and Charts Failsafe Relay Positions Table 12 2 QXe QX and SX Relay Positions no alarms active NO NC Normal Relay Output Power On Open Closed States Power Off Open Closed NO NC Failsafe Relay Output Power On Closed Open States Power Off Open Closed AMS2750 Process Mode Provides on line monitoring in the process recorder to alert the user to potential AMS2750 non compliance issues Monitors and alerts the user concerning days until next SAT days until next TUS days until next control T C change out and days until the recorder requires calibration The recorder also provides an overview of T C usage for all survey T C s provid ing a colour coded for early warning screen 5 day expiration AMS2750 TUS Mode The Multitrend SX recorder monitors a temperature uniformity survey and generates a data file that can be used to create a TUS report It tracks a number of parameters during a TUS which includes the ramp time the time between the first T C entering dwell zone and the last T C entering dwell zone the point where all t C s are stable and lie within the SP tolerance limits for the defined furnace class the dwell time minim
203. an be entered before the user account is locked out 1 to 10 retries O will disable 1 to 6 retries and no disable for ESS recorders Pass Expiry Set how many days before the current passwords will expire 1 to 365 days and 0 will disable For ESS recorders 1 to 180 days and no disable Expiry Warning Set how many days before the passwords expiry date that a warning notice will appear 1 to 20 days and 0 will disable no disable for ESS recorders When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Select the Back but ton to return to the previous menu Levels Main Menu Configure Passwords User Admin Levels The Level permissions are the 4 user levels that have been set up and named in the Policy menu eg Engineer Supervisor Technician and Operator Select each user level eg Engineer and setup the permission areas for that particular level of user Each Permission Area will give the user access to selected menus in the recorder The level permission has a set of default settings that are defined in Level Permissions on page 191 Permission areas can be customised for each level if required see Users on page 146 Add User Main Menu Configure Passwords User Admin Add User The Administrator enters each new user name then selects the new user and assigns their Level of permission The Administrator can set up a new user but cannot assign a password A dummy password is set an
204. an be set so that the effect is to change the screen so that the recorder will Exit the Replay Screen Change Chart Speed An event can be set so that the effect is to change the Change Chart Speed The speed of the chart can be set in the Sub Type section for Fast 6000mm h Medium 120mm h or Slow 10mm h When that event gets triggered selected chart speed will be set to the current active screen Event triggering from scripts Trigger an Event This feature allows any enabled event with an enabled effect does not have to have any causes enabled to be triggered from within the scripting system using the following function TRIGE x where x is the event 1 to 20 Clear Event Once an event is triggered using scripting the event is locked and cannot be triggered again from scripts until the lock is cleared using the clear event function CLRE x where x is the event number 1 to 20 This prevent successive executions re triggering the same event As a further measure to avoid the system being overloaded by events from within the script system each time an event is triggered from within a script it will apply a 1 second automatic lock preventing the same event from being trig gered more then once a second irrespective of the CLRE x being called for that event 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Set clear a digital output This feature allows a digital output to be set or cleared from a script using the function SETD x y wh
205. and Password in the box to gain access to the recorder web page For Users without Password security just choose a language option to access the web page Select Remote Viewer to enable a desktop user interface This will allow you to view and control your recorder in realtime For details on installing Active X procedure for Remote display Tool see NOTE When using the remote control function for the recorder if you need to enter pass word in the recorder it is recommended that you use the external keyboard and not the Re corder SIP Soft Input Panel IP Address Troubleshooting If your recorder s IP address begins 169 this means there is no DHCP Server Dy namic Host Configuration Protocol available to create a dynamic IP address Either make a DHCP server available or allocate a Static IP address see TCP IP on page 77 The recorders IP address can be viewed in the Status menu see General on page 173 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 255 Internet Security Settings Honeywell D b mj WtMnitrend X a 12 03 02 Series U 1 5600 12 00 00 _ 1 ra Pen 1 General Pens Alarms Hardware Remote Viewer Print screen Info E Support EJ Sales Website Take Control D Internet Security Settings 256 Types of web browser for use with the Remote Viewer include Internet Explorer 5 and above Figure 8 10 Internet Security on pa
206. ange the configuration select the desired pen this will display the alarm details Select the Edit button to change the alarm level If the Edit button is greyed out go to the Pens Alarms menu and select the relevant alarm number then activate Allow Change View Main Menu Alarms View This will display all available Pens with alarms set up To view the configuration select the desired pen this will display the alarm details 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Screen Menu Main Menu Screen The Screen Menu contains an Edit button to configure screen settings for standard screens or Pen Channel Mapping for custom screens The Replay screen is used to view previous data and has a List button to change the screen currently being displayed There is also a Clean Screen facility and should you require to re Calibrate your touch screen there is a Calibrate function and a Touch Test feature Bs Screen e Replay ES ai Clean Screen Calibrate Touch Test Finish Edit Screen Properties Main Menu gt Screen gt Edit For Standard Screens the menus are the same as Edit Layout on page 137 Edit Toolbar For Custom Screens Not available on the eZtrend QXe Select the Edit button whilst displaying a Custom Screen Layout from Screen Designer will take you to your current process screen and displays the Edit toolbar at the top of the screen a g 5 0001 0 Snap Expert Exit 20 Jul06 14 11 03
207. ar pointing up for a Hi alarm and down for a Low alarm See Alarms Menu on page 71 Deviation Alarm Markers These are diamond shape markers Deviation is how far this pen can de viate from the Ref Pen before triggering an alarm See Alarms Menu on page 71 to set up the alarm Type Deviation Level and the Ref Pen Rate of Change Alarm Markers There are two types of rate of Change Alarms Rate Up and Rate Down i They will appear on a DPM or Bar when a Rate Up or Rate Down type alarm has been set up in the Alarms Menu on page 71 and has been triggered The Rate Up Alarm Marker will slope up to the right and the Rate Down Alarm Marker will slope down to the right Alarm Marker Flash Colours For Hi Low and Deviation alarms Table 6 1 Alarm Markers Flash Colour A Magenta flash In alarm not acknowledged A Yellow flash In alarm acknowledged latched alarm A Cyan blue flash Out of alarm latched not acknowledged Grey Out of Alarm Pen Pointers Pen Pointers appear on a scale next to a chart when no bars are present They move to dis play the real time value Each pen pointer is numbered according to its associated pen and will flash yellow when that pen goes into an alarm state Pen pointers will change direction and point up or down when a pen signal goes off scale 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 215 216 Mark on Chart There are two different types of Mark on Ch
208. are enabled and configured in the Pens menu 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 93 Table 4 4 Events Cause and Effect State Change T C Burn Out Analogue Input Scheduled Once Interval Specific Days Month End User Counters User Counter Max Mins Reset Reset Max Min values Power On Setup Change System Internal Mem Low Export Mem Low FTP Mem Low User Action Mark Chart Hot Button Batch Start Batch Stop Batch Pause Batch TUS Start Stop AMS2750 Timer TC Timers Process Timers Cause Effect Into Alarm Alarm Out of Alarm Mark on Chart Acknowledge Alarm Logging Start Stop Totaliser Totalisers Reset Digital Outputs Rollover Alarm Acknowledge On Digital Inputs Off pu Screen Change Print Screen Counters Max Mins Reset Chart Control Clear All Messages Delayed Event Script Timers Play Sound Display Alert Batch Reports Update Tabular Readings Enter Replay Screen Exit Replay Screen Change Chart Speed For Maths variable for counters see Maths Variable and Function Tables on page 296 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Figure 4 8 Event 1 example Event 1 example Adding Cause 1 Exc Jone jeer fami Enabled Y Alarm Ack Pen 2 Los Select which Pen number and which alarm on that pen will have the alarm acknowledged M k Ch
209. area make changes to the setup but when they try to finish and commit it will come back with a message that says they do not have a high enough access level to perform that function Once the batch is stopped the operator and technician level can login to the setup area and make changes When the batch is running all users with access levels higher than operator and technician can enter setup make changes finish and commit There will be a message that comes up and says that to perform this function the batch needs to be stopped and do you want to do that Answer yes and stop the batch and save the setup changes Calendar Function Day of week restriction is required for all levels apart from Administrator this will consist of any combinations of 7 days An everyday selection is available 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 189 190 Password Policy See Policy on page 144 Duplicate Passwords Duplicate passwords are allowed for different users otherwise this would alert a user that the same password is available on another user login The User name and password cannot be the same Retry Lockout A password retry lockout option is available if the user enters the incorrect password for a preset number of times in a row the account must be de activated and only an Administrator can re activate the account The account can be reactivated in 2 ways Retry amp Preserve Password Reset retries unlock and preserve password a
210. art automated or user An automated Mark on Chart can be set up for An Alarm going in and out of an alarm state Start Stop or Reset Totals Batch control such as Start Stop Pause Resume and Abort batch Generated by an effect of an Event A user Mark on Chart is activated by first selecting a process screen that is displaying a chart Go to the Messages List button on the Main Menu bar and select Mark A text box will appear enter the message you wish to be displayed as a mark on chart on the screen using the on screen keyboard or a USB keyboard Pen out of alarm Batch stopped Pen into alarm Totals started User 101 0 3 Jan 06 15 03 00 15 070 100 00 Pen 1 13 61 70 e Pen 2 43 05 Pen 3 Figure 6 5 Mark on Chart 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Screen Markers Table 6 2 Screen Markers on page 217 shows different types of markers that may appear on the screen during normal data activity and where they would appear The markers change depending on if the signal goes High or Low outside the Pen Scale or outside the Input Range Note It is recommended to display DPMs on a chart to identify over range and under range activity Table 6 2 Screen Markers 43 TV 25 30 Pointer DPM Bar horizontal Chart chart Upscale Burnout A A A Outside Range High A A A A Eu Trace at Max Input Range Top
211. art of an Event See Counters Menu on page 107 Enabled Tick to enable Event ee Type Counters ee Event Action Increment will add by whatever value is entered in Increment By Reset will restart the counter to whatever number is entered in Reset To ee Sub Type only available when Reset is selected as the Event Action Select to reset User Pulse Events Digital Inputs Relay Outputs or Alarm counters Selecting any of these Sub Types will activate the corresponding menu item s so you can then specify the number of the Sub Type to be reset To view counters using a maths equation see Maths Variable Table on page 296 User Counters only available when Sub Type is set to User Select the User Counter number to be used from the available list Counters will only be available if they have first been set up in the User Counters Menu Increment By only available when Increment is selected as the Event Action Enter the number at which you want the counter to increment by when the event cause is triggered 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Reset To only available when Reset is selected as the Event Action and Sub Type is set to User Enter the number at which you want the counter to reset to when the event cause is triggered Max Mins Reset Use this as an effect of an event to reset all Max Min values Chart Control The chart activity can be controlled as an effect of an event The char
212. as a part of an Event Effect or manual added from the process screen as a Mark on Chart The mark on chart functionality has been extended to include the use of 20 separate preset markers With some markers configured when using mark on chart the user has the option of starting with blank text the previously entered text or one of the preset markers Preset markers are also used in the Mark on chart effect and the Alert system effect See Error Alert on page 110 To add text to a marker select the next available marker and enter the text via the on screen keypad Hit the tick mark to accept the text and then go to Finish to confirm Time Sync Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Events Counters Time Sync This provides Time Synchronisation on recorders on a Digital Input Enabled Select the tick to enable Time Sync Trigger When recorder receives the Digital Input and there is a state change i e On or OFF then the recorder time will be synchronized to the nearest hour Digital Input Choice the input pulse through one of the channels supported 1 to 4 Time sync will only happen on the configured channel when digital input is received on that configured channel Once the time synchronization is complete message will be send in the system messages to show time changed on digital input This will notify the user that system time has been synchronized to the nearest hour due to digital input Time synchronisat
213. as slaves the master will ensure all passwords are synchronised with all recorders in its group up to 32 recorders can be in a Password group this include the password Master AMS2750 Process AMS2750 Process activates the Process Mode screen and the AMS2750 process configuration menus for furnaces and sensors in accordance with AMS2750 specification including Thermocouple tracking AMS2750 TUS AMS2750 TUS activates the TUS screen and the AMS2750 TUS configuration menus for furnaces and sensors in accordance with AMS2750 specification including Thermocouple tracking All of the survey information can be exported to a Report Generating tool Extra Pens 4 pens optional 4 extra pens to store and display totalised values results of calculations etc Maximum is up to 16 extra pens for the Minitrend QX 12 extra pens for the eZtrend QXe recorders and 48 extra pens for the Multi trend SX recorder Specification table for Sterilisation The definition of Fo Po is the sterilisation pasteurisation time in minutes required to destroy a stated number of organisms with a known z at temperature T For example F18 250 represents the time in minutes required to destroy a stated number of organisms at a temperature of 250 F 121 11 C with a z 18 degrees F F values are used to compare the sterilizing values of different proc esses however F values cannot be compared unless the z values are the same When temperature
214. assword NetSync Main Menu Configure Passwords Pwd NetSync Passwords can be synchronised over the network a recorder can be designated as a mas ter of a password group and other recorders can be added to that password group as slaves The master will ensure all passwords and password policies are synchronised with all re corders in its password group Limited changes can be made on slave recorders eg the user may change passwords and this will be propagated to all the other devices in the pass word group Password Net Sync Rules Before starting read through this check list 1 To enable a recorder to use Password Net Sync the firmware option needs to be acti vated in the Credit system see Section 7 Firmware Options on page 221 2 Only recorders with the Password Net Sync option enabled in the Firmware options will be available to the designated Master or Slave and be accessible in the password group 3 Ensure that the networked recorders to be included in the password groups are on the same IP subrange of A B C lt x gt such that A B C is fixed and only x is variable 4 Ensure that all recorders to be included in the same password group are configured to be in the same Set with the same Start Port and have Peer Services enabled This can be checked from the Menu Configure Setup Edit Comms Services Peers menu Unless the network administrator states otherwise there is no reason to change the de
215. at what number it will Rollover and start again See Counters Menu on page 107 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Event 1 has been set up with Cause 1 as a Scheduled interval every 30 seconds The Effect is that User Counter 1 is set to increment by 1 When the scheduled interval occurs every 30 seconds Counter 1 will increment by 1 EN Enabled Y k nabled xxx Scheduled Interval L Event 1 example Cause Scheduled interval every 30 seconds Effect User Counter increments by 1 A second Event can then be set up using the User Counter Effect in Event 1 as the Cause for Event 2 In this example the Cause will be triggered by User Counter 1 in Event 1 reach ing an count of 50 The Effect of this will be a Mark on Chart M Enabled Y Cause 1 Cause 2 Event 2 Event 2 example Cause User Counter 1 triggers at 50 increments Effect A Mark is placed on the Chart In summary every 30 seconds a scheduled interval will cause a counter to increment by 1 When the increments reach 50 a mark will be placed on the Chart 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 99 100 Event Effects Enabled Tick to enable Type Choose from Mark on Chart Logging Totaliser Digital Outputs Alarm Ack Email Screen Change Print Screen Counters Max Mins Reset Chart Control Clear All Messages Delay
216. ax and min readings at the position of the cursor bar This can be done by touching the chart on the screen and dragging it to either side or by using a mouse See Figure 6 3 on page 208 Speed set a Fast Medium or Slow chart speed in replay mode Select the Speed button and three chart speeds will appear for the replay scree Fast 10x Medium 3x and Slow speed 0 which is normal speed Exit to return to the previous process screen Action Toolbar The Action toolbar can be set to timeout disappear after a specified time To set the time see Menu bar TO Settings on page 139 Print This will print the current replay screen For network printers ensure all printer server information has been entered in Network Admin on page 80 Single This is for a single cursor to be displayed on the replay screen Dual This is a mode that displays an additional cursor showing the time difference between the two When Y amp selected the toolbar icons will change to Swap and Link The two cursors appear on top of each other and can be moved by dragging one of the cursors using the stylus on the touch screen The cursor with the two grey arrows is the movable one to change this use the Swap button Each cursor can be positioned independently and linked so they can be moved together use the Link button Each cursor will also show its current time date and the digital readings on the right hand side show the max and min between the cu
217. aximum range set the total will reset to the minimum range set When Use Remainder is active it will carry over any amount in excess of the maximum range set Temp Input Units For Sterilisation select the temperature input units Start Temp For Sterilisation select the Start Temperature Ref Temp For Sterilisation select the Reference Temperature ZFactor Temp For Sterilisation select the Z factor temperature Include Cooling For Sterilisation Include Cooling if required Completion Value For Sterilisation if cooling is not required enter a Completion Value The totaliser will stop at this value Reset at 16M Enabled by default The upper limit for the totaliser count is fixed to 16777215 to prevent an inaccuracy The totaliser will get reset after this count To go above the 16M limit disable this function but be aware that the count will add some inaccuracies in the calculation above this upper limit see Table 4 2 on page 76 Numb Format Displays the Notation of the number format Scientific or Normal ee Notation Toggle between Scientific or Normal number format Auto Toggle Between Automatic number formatting and User Defined ee After Decimal Only available when User Defined is selected Select and enter the number of decimal places up to 15 decimal places When the setup is complete go back to the Pen menu and complete the pen setup 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 75 76
218. b page This is always enabled for ESS Web Timeout Set a specific time period of inactivity in the web page before logging out Enter the time in seconds 20 to 3600 seconds Old Passwords Select how many previously used passwords are locked from use as a new password Max 12 previous passwords 0 for disabled Cannot be disabled for ESS recorders Username Max Set the maximum amount of characters that can be used for the User name login 1 to 20 characters 4 to 20 for ESS recorders Password Max Set the maximum amount of characters that can be used for the Pass word login 1 to 20 characters 6 to 20 for ESS recorders 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Username Min Set the minimum amount of characters that can be used for the User name login 1 to 20 character and 0 will disable 4 to 20 characters and no disable for ESS recorders Password Min Set the minimum amount of characters that can be used for the Pass word login 1 to 20 characters 0 will disable 6 to 20 characters and no disable for ESS recorders Min Alpha Set the minimum amount of alpha characters to be used in the Password 0 to 20 characters Min Symbol Set the minimum amount of symbol characters to be used in the Pass word 0 to 20 characters Min Numeric Set the minimum amount of numeric characters to be used in the Pass word 0 to 20 characters Pass Retries Set how many times the incorrect password c
219. backlight cannot be changed separately so the display has to be replaced Reducing the brightness can significantly improve the life of the backlight 2 At extended temperatures these times are reduced 3 The backlight is a consumable item and will NOT last forever 4 A maintenance schedule of exchanging backlights should be every 5 years to maintain the optimal screen clarity Operating Temperature Operating temperatures are described in Specification Tables on page 283 Prolonged operation at temperatures over 50 C will accelerate degradation of the display backlight If the unit has been moved from a cold environment into a warm one ensure that the unit has reached a minimum temperature of 12 C or is left to stand for 1 hour at room temper ature before applying power to ensure no condensation remains in the unit 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 277 278 Instrument Care and Maintenance Touch Screen Care should be taken with the touch screen when handling the unit Sharp and hard objects may pierce the touch screen and damage the display Only use the stylus provided for screen selection Clean the screen using a suitable touch screen cleaner Abrasive materials will damage the touch screen Protective Screen covers are available to provide additional protection against abrasive ma terials See Section 10 Spares List on page 263 Calibration It is recommended that Recorder calibration is checked at leas
220. be exported prior to the completion of all the survey setpoints but those not completed would be indicated as not having been completed when the report is generated The data file being exported is a completely separate data file from the recorder s normal saved data name tus When loaded on the media this data can be imported to the AMS2750 Report Generation Tool to generate the actual hard copy Temperature Uniformity Survey report These data files can be saved to a folder on the PC for archival purposes but the AMS2750 Report Gen eration Tool is require to actually open these files and to create the report The recorder only archives a single TUS report in the recorder s buffer the files should be archived in the PC or on a CD for permanent record retention The survey ends when the user presses the stop survey button or the survey runs for a con tinuous period of 72 hours including stable time A simple report is generated within the recorder that is available as with other recorder based reports An eventis triggered to indicate a TUS has ended and a message is logged into the system message list Events AMS2750 Two new Event Causes have been added TUS Temperature uniformity Survey This will only be enabled if the AMS 2750 TUS or TUS Process option has been enabled in the recorder credits menu Select either Start or Stop TUS When a TUS is started or stopped this can be used to trigger and effect AMS2750 Tim
221. become active Select the relevant media button to display the layout files available to load Select the file and click on the Load button For Network Share folder select the NAS button and the Load Layout from NAS dialog will open Select the Layout file required and click Load All screens loaded from another recorder via CF card USB a Network Share folder NAS or Screen Designer will over write the existing screens on the recorder 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 141 The CF card and the front USB device port are found under the front flap on the recorder There is another USB port at the rear of the recorder The first USB device fitted will be USB1 therefore the second USB device fitted is USB2 See Storage Media Format on page 163 for formatting information of CF card cards and USB keys CF card not available for the eZtrend QXe recorder When loading layouts from Screen Designer see Loading a Layout into a Recorder on page 218 142 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Passwords Main Menu Configure Passwords The Password system manages the security within the recorder menu system It allows re stricted access within the recorder providing password protection at different levels If your recorder has ESS Extended Security System enabled the password system cannot be disabled An Administrator should be nominated to have control of the password system Change Pwds e Net
222. been successfully loaded System Status and Messages Setup Changed N A N A Notification that the user has changed one or more items on the System Status and recorder setup Messages Pen x using scripts but N A N A Scripts are selected on Pen X but the recorder options disables Diagnostics and option not available scripts System Status and Meassages Invalid number format N A N A The number entered was not in the correct format Diagnostics Status Exponential numbers must DIO and Messages be entered in the format 1 23E 12 AUTO OPS Failed to load N A N A Configuration remote download has failed remotely uploaded configu ration Configuration remotely N A N A Configuration has been remotely downloaded successfully System Status and loaded Messages FTP transfer operation time N A N A The requested FTP operation has timed out System Status and out failure Messages FTP transfer operation failed N A N A The requested FTP operation has failed System Status and Messages FTP transfer finished suc N A N A The requested FTP operation has completed successfully System Status and cessfully Messages Scheduled Export data per N A N A The scheduled data export completed successfully System Status and formed Messages Trendbus RS485 not availa N A N A RS485 is not available on recorder so default of Ethernet has Diagnostics ble selected ethernet been enabled Messages and Status DIO Modbus RS485 not availa N A N A RS485 is not available on recorder so
223. ble protocols Modbus or Modbus X Modbus and Modbus X can both use Ethernet or RS485 Ports Protocols define the format in which the data is transferred from the recorder to a PC or transfer between other devices and peripherals FPLB Floating Point Little Endian Byte Swapped Format amp FP B Floating Point Big Endian Format are standard notations Slave ID This is a unique Modbus ID Address used by the recorder to identify Modbus messages Applications that talk to the recorder with Modbus will need to know this number to return messages to the device If you are using the Communication Server on TrendServer Pro the same Slave ID number must be entered 1 254 RS485 Baud Rate Select this for a list of available Baud Rates This is the speed in bps bits per second at which data is transferred Byte Options Select this button for a list of available Byte Options The Byte Options consist of 3 digits comprising of Parity set to None N Even E or Odd O 8 Data Bits and Stop Bits signifying the end of the character string 1 or 2 Line Turn Around This is for a 2 wire line type Data has to be fully transmitted before the line can be turned around and data can be received or vice versa Reply Delay Enter a delay time in milli seconds before the recorder sends a reply Recommended delay should be set to 12mS min if using the Comms Server 86 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Modbus X Modbus X pro
224. bration Adjustments on page 362 e Copy Cal Adjust the ability to copy settings from one input to another See page 373 Cert No enter the certificate number for the sensor 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 361 362 AMS2750 Process mode Pens for TC s Process Mode Set up and configure pens to display the readings for each thermocouple Pens can be allocated to a Group with other pens to display information Pens are required to be put into a group and then the group is selected in the Screen menu and displayed on the Process screen See Pens Menu on page 67 To run reports pens must be in a group Up to 6 groups of pens can be created The screen has a group name selection where you can select the groups 1 to 6 See AMS2750 Process Menu on page 353 Groups 1 to 6 relate directly to furnaces 1 to 6 as configured in I O AMS2750 Process Mode on page 357 Furnace configuration menu Thermocouple Calibration Adjustments If a thermocouple has been calibrated the calibration points can be added to the additional TUS info for each sensor the calibration will then be added to the existing single or dual point cal Instrument cal under process conditions and the relevant corrections for each soak extracted into the report The tables can contain just a single entry effectively acting as a single point calibration and will be applied across the whole range A total of 9 points are available allowi
225. button If a CJC connector is not fitted a message box will appear The CJC temperature reading is displayed in the CJ Temp column fthe known temperature is different to the recorder s reading an Offset can be entered to make an adjustment to future values The Cold Junction temperature should be measured at the point where the thermocouple is connected in the terminal block Ensure the measured temperature is accurate to within 0 1 C Enter the difference between the CJ Temp on the recorder and the measured reading as the Offset Value The offset is added to all future readings and displayed in the Cal ibrated CJ Temp column The Measured Temp column will display the actual temperature using the Calibrated CJC Temp on channels with T C fitted For more details of how a thermocouple works refer to Appendix C Thermocouple Connections on page 311 Select the tick box to go back and the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Demo Traces Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup General Factory Demo Traces A set of demo traces available for demonstration or simulation purposes when no Analogue cards are fitted Options for each demo trace are NoSimulation Demo traces are deactivated and no simulation traces are available Simulate if board not fitted Simulation is activated when an Analogue In card is not fitted in one of the top two slot positions Configure the Demo Setup in A
226. by two or four panel clamps 6 clamps for Minitrend QX re corder with 45mm panel thickness The panel clamps should be fitted on diagonally oppo site sides of the unit and tightened against the rear of the panel using two fixing screws The mounting clamp assembly and fitting instructions differ slightly for the two recorders Minitrend QX and eZtrend QXe See Figure 2 6 1 Insert the panel gasket onto the recorder so it goes between the back of the recorder bezel and the panel From the front panel place unit in the panel and push through the panel 2 To loosen each clamp unscrew the long screw to accommodate the panel thickness Use either a Number 1 Phillips or Straight slot screw driver 3 From behind the panel the orientation of the clamp should be with the screw head towards the rear of the unit 4 Take the first clamp and locate the two lugs on the clamp into the slots on the unit 5 Take the second clamp and do the same but in the diagonal position to the opposite side Repeat for all other clamps 6 Tighten the screw using a Number 1 Phillips or Straight slot screw driver and the clamp will secure against the panel A CAUTION CONTROL UNIT DAMAGE Do not over tighten mounting clamp screws Minitrend QX and eZtrend QXe torque setting should be 0 5 0 75Nm 4 4 6 6lbf in Multitrend SX torque setting should be 0 5 0 70Nm 4 4 6 2lbf in Failure to comply with these instructions may result in product damage
227. cStatus for SPI master Al board Messages Can t execute invalid state 4 4 4 The I O card internal state is unable to update for all AO chan Diagnostics nels Invalid state of DacStatus SPI master AO board Messages Can t execute invalid state 5 4 4 The I O card internal state is unable to take a reading for all Al Diagnostics channels Invalid state of ReadingType Al board Messages Can t execute invalid state 6 4 4 The communications to the I O card have failed due to the I O Diagnostics cards internal state Messages Invalid state of MessageStatus Host or FieldPort Can t execute invalid state 7 4 4 Error whilst making an active burnout measurement Diagnostics Invalid state of Active Burnout measurement type Messages Can t execute invalid state 8 4 4 Error whilst making an active burnout measurement Diagnostics Invalid state of gain in Active Burnout calculation Messages Unable to execute unspeci 0 4 4 The measured pulse frequency is too high for the digital I O Diagnostics fied reason board try using a dedicated pulse card channel Messages Unable to execute unspeci 1 4 4 The command referenced an illegal invalid board channel Diagnostics fied reason number on the DIO board Messages Unable to execute unspeci 2 4 4 I O card is not able to operate on SPI bus Invalid board type for Diagnostics fied reason SPI master function Messages Unable to execute unspeci 3 4 4 An illegal operation on the I O board firmware was found Diagnos
228. cards are numbered from left to right and they read as follows for each channel NC normally closed C common NO normally open Devices driven by the relays are connected via two 12 way screw terminal plugs The last two channels 7 amp 8 23 amp 24 or 39 amp 40 can be used as digital inputs connect across Common C and Normally Open NO CAUTION IMPROPER MAINS SWITCHING For 8 channel Alarm Relay cards Switching mains on the normally open contact on channels 7 and 8 is not recommended as surges and spikes on the mains supply could cause damage to the input circuitry The normally closed contact is unaffected and can be used like all the other channels A Form C dry contact relay is used for this type of card The inputs are designed to accept Dry contact no volt inputs The relays should be used for non inductive loads only where a device requires a voltage to operate it such as a 12 Volt buzzer connect it to the normally open NO contacts unless the fail safe setting is activated The maximum voltage which may be used with the alarm relays is 240V 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 27 28 Electrical Installation Alarm Relay Channel Numbers The Alarm Relay cards are either 4 or 8 channels with a full length connector taking up 8 channels even though the cards only operate on 4 channels or 8 channels The 8 channels Alarm Relay card has 2 digital inputs available on the last 2 channels There are no Digita
229. cator to meter 2 return A2 And return the current flow reading elseif A8 gt A1 amp amp A3 gt A2 amp amp A3 gt A4 This tests if flow meter 3 is more than 1 2 and 4 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 305 306 Full Maths amp Script Processing GLBV1 3 If yes then set display indicator to meter 3 return A3 And return the current flow reading else If none of the above are true then 4 is biggest GLBV1 4 So set display indicator to meter 4 return A4 And return the current flow reading In this application the flow meters are connected to inputs 1 2 3 and 4 at the rear of the recorder and these are recorded on Pens 1 to 4 P1 A1 P2 A2 P3 A3 P4 A4 Pen 5 has the script above which records and displays the highest flow rate of the four Pen 6 is set to record and display the input between 1 and 4 that is the highest rate P6 GLBV1 NOTICE Please note Pn is not entered in the Maths Block and is assumed by the Recorder e g To enter the equation P2 A2 the user would just type A2 Example 2 In the same application as above the user has noticed that whilst flow meter 2 normally has the highest flow rate on occasion a surge in flow meter 3 causes problems The user needs to monitor the two inputs and count the number of times flow meter 3 reading exceeds that of flow meter 2 The code consists of the two flow meter readings and a change counter that totals the number of times
230. changes are made for Active Burnout Thermocou ples See Thermocouple Wiring Changes on page 59 Thermocouple Active Burnout status can be viewed in the Main Menu gt Status gt Diagnostics gt Analogue Input screen Input column The Health Watch Maintenance firmware option must be active to access the Maintenance and Diagnostic buttons See Diagnostics on page 178 For the eZtrend QXe recorder Active Burnout is not available Onms measurements must have the link between positive and negative CJC Connectors The CJC connector resides between channel 4 and channel 5 on the Analogue Input card For information on connecting the CJC sensor see Figure 2 13 Analogue Input connec tor on page 20 For the eZtrend QXe recorder this is available on the Analogue Input card option QXe Analogue Input Standard card The eZtrend QXe is fitted with a standard Analogue Input card in Slot A with up to 6 chan nels The card is also fitted with an Ethernet port as standard Connection is made via 1 x 18 way screw terminal plugs that fit into a PCB header on the rear of the unit To fit up to a further 6 analogue input channels see Analogue Input Card on page 18 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 21 22 Electrical Installation Figure 2 15 eZtrend QXe Analogue Input card std Slot A 123456 78 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1718
231. chiving of the data in the event of a hard drive failure Larger databases increase the time and effort required to back up the data and increase the risk of unintended data loss if there is a PC failure and the data is not backed up The PC s performance is dependant on the size of the database and the PC characteristics e g Performance Memory Hard drive space along with how many recorders are connect ed to it An initial recommendation would be that if your process involves archiving to remov able media DVD for example then the Database should be kept to 4GB to ensure that it fits onto a DVD for long term storage This would provide good PC performance make ar chiving of the data easier and limit the risk of data loss between archives As with any rec ommendation you need to evaluate this relative to your needs this is your data and it is important that a suitable process is put in place to ensure that it remains protected and se cure while achieving adequate process performance Comms Server Setup The comms server software can be run independently to the main application software by creating a shortcut to the Startup folder If over writing a previous version of X Series com ms server only the local server will retain the database information and load all the devices and settings from the databases Any other remote database servers will have to be added manually Comms Server new user Using the comms server from scratch requ
232. chments or exported to external media The reports will be in RTF format for use in MS Word or other compatible word processors Before a report can be run the report details must be entered in Reports Menu on page 133 To trigger a report using the event system see Event Effects on page 100 TE Reset 2 Run This will list the reports that are available Before a report can be run the report details must be entered in Reports Menu on page 133 Oncea report in selected from the list then report is immediately created 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK View Archive This will produce an archive list of all reports that have been run Select a report on the screen and press the display button From this screen you have the option to Print or Export the report The printer settings must be configured in Printer Menu on page 122 To export the report to a USB key CF card or Network Share folder NAS ensure the media is fitted to the recorder and there is enough memory available marki Sat May 26 2007 15 18 00 Pen Overview 5 0571 18 333 System Max Mins Information Pen Max Reset All This action will reset all hourly daily weekly and monthly max mins totals and averages System max mins and totals shall remain unaffected A warning dialog will appear to ask if you are sure you wish to continue Figure 4 7 Email Report example 8 3737 degC 19 189 deg C Invalid
233. conds of safe recording time available An FTP export must be completed before the FTP buffer is full and the latest data will start to over write the oldest data Available as a Maths expression giving the hours until recycling starts see Maths Variable and Function Tables on page 296 Pre Trigger Status This will show if the pre trigger system is active along with its cur rent state The dialog automatically refreshes periodically Export Now Export Now will transfer data from the internal memory to the external media such as CF cards USB key or Network Share NAS Exporting does not remove the data from the re corder but when the internal memory buffer is full the latest data will start to over write the oldest data The Network Share option NAS can be used for loading and saving of layout lay and or setup files set saving exporting reports any messages Diagnostic system etc loading sound files from this network share to recorder This can also be used to print to file and this file can be saved to this network shared folder The use of the network folder for Scheduled export is not recommended since network con nectivity and network problems could result in the risk of missing data due to the Scheduled export not being performed at the scheduled time and the folder It is advisable to use other media USB CF for scheduled export Select the Export Now button to go to a sub menu of available external storage dev
234. control thermocouple calibration date Process Inst Displays status of the thermocouple usage tracking this shows the rolled up status for all TC s being tracked the colour of the box determines the state of the TC closest to expiry If the user presses the TC Status button this goes directly to the TC tracking status screen See Thermocouple Usage on page 363 Note this button shows the status for ALL thermocouples being monitored for usage in the system not just for group being displayed Timer Reset When a SAT TUS Instrument Cal or Control TC button is pressed you may be asked to enter a user name and password if enabled See Passwords AMS2750 on page 392 The dialog box shows the next suggested date for SAT and TUS depending on Furnace class material and instrumentation type or provides a date 1 month in the future for Control TC or Instrument calibration 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK AMS2750 Process mode SAT System Accuracy Tests SAT AMS2750 Section 3 4 defines what equipment requires SAT the frequency waiver condi tions and the test procedure to use Refer to the section on AMS2750 Process mode on page 352 onwards for more details on SAT I O AMS2750 Process Mode Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Normally labelled Field IO this button has been modified for AMS2750 configuration All other analogue inputs are not affected This menu includes Furnace Configurati
235. corders are primarily used for exception recording They spend most of their life trending and recording straight lines Fuzzy Logging has been developed to improve the efficiency of data storage and is particularly effective in exception recording examples where normal operation consists of generally static inputs Fuzzy Logging looks for straight lines in the data stream in real time whether they are hor izontal climbing or descending A straight line made up of say 10 points can be equally well represented by 2 points one at either end the other 8 points are redundant Fuzzy logging works by creating straight lines in the data and discarding redundant points What s it for Becta To help the user in the trade off between Scan Rate Disk capacity and Recording Time after all the Pie is only so big Fuzzy Logging has been developed to help maximise all three sections in effect increas ing the size of the Pie The Recording Pie Scan Rate Bi Storage Capacity The result is a technique that delivers a host Recording Period of real world benefits over the more traditional recording methods 1 Disks take longer to fill changed less frequently less site visits 2 Faster scan rates can be used for any given disk size giving greater resolution on the process Recording time can be extended 3 4 Less hard disk memory required for archiving on the PC 5 Quicker graph
236. ct the next available table and rename it for ease of identification by selecting the name button Select the Values button to take you to the start of a new table Press the Add button to produce the first line Up to 50 points are availablie in the table More than one set of points are required to do the conversion Edit Setup Field 1 0 Name 0 10V table Values 2 Points Click into the text entry boxes under the X and Y boxes and enter the required values or leave it if your table starts at 0 The Signal Input X goes in the first column and the Engineering units Y in the second column To add aline at the bottom click on Add To ad a line above or below click on a line and use the Insert Above and Insert Below buttons To delete a line click in the line and select Delete 0 10V table 0 10V table T When you have finished your table select the tick box this will also verify the table and produce a Data Error box if there are any problems Data Error box If incorrect vales are entered a Data Error box will appear saying Data line is invalid This will appear when you select the tick box at the bottom of the screen The error box will indicate which line has the error There may be more than one error in the table if so the data error message box will appear for each error starting from the top line down going to the next as each error is fixed 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Lineari
237. ctive burnout replace the for 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 311 Thermocouple CJC Compensation Thermocouple CJC Compensation The different methods for connecting thermocouples according to the type of reference are shown below Internal Automatic Input terminals on rear panel of Measuring recorder junction lt T eo cms eee converts li M C D voltage read ing to tem C perature Thermocouple CJC Reading ode in volts i gt Thermocouple Temperature Reading Table readirid do in C maths expression Internal Auto This is connected to the input terminals of the recorder and the temperature atthis junction is being measured by a temperature sensor on the rear panel of the recorder The reading from this sensor is read off against a value taken from the thermocouple table which corresponds to the type of thermocouple being used The corresponding reading in volts for the temperature measured by the sensor is then used as a reference for the reading from the thermocouple Diagram shows passive burnout for active burnout replace the for 312 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Thermocouple CJC Compensation Ext 0 C Reference Thermocouple Copper wire cable Look up table T converts volt Volts a dina t ge reading to lt 0 c 0 Volts y EE dU
238. d de activate options DNS Domain Name System WINS Windows Internet Name Service MDNS Man aged Data Network Services See DNS WINS MDNS on page 79 Please see Entering IP address details on page 78 Ports The Port numbers are associated with the IT system in use Port numbers are set to a default but can be changed by the user to allow data traffic to use a specified port See Ports on page 79 Entering IP address details The IP Address in TCP IP Settings can be set in different number systems Octal Decimal and Hexadecimal The number system depends upon the leading character of each octave 0x for Hexadecimal 0 for Octal and decimal otherwise Using the SIP to enter the IP address the number gets stored in a Decimal number system and will be displayed in decimal number system only Below left is the snapshot for octal representation of IP Address and to the right is the snap shot after it gets converted to decimal IP Address 0 0 0 0 Automatic 80 502 d Octal IP address entered Decimal IP address representation The Address range that can be entered in different number system is as shown in Table 4 3 on page 78 Table 4 3 Number systems Minimum Value Maximum Value Entered Decimal Value Entered Decimal Value Octal 000 000 000 000 0 0 0 0 077 077 077 077 63 63 63 63 Decimal 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 Hexadecimal 0x0 0x0 0x0 0x0 0 0 0 0 Oxf Oxf Oxf Ox
239. d end addresses for Pens 1 to 96 Address Address Description To 51 52 25 66 IC00 7169 Alarm 1 Value Pen 1 A 16 1CBE 7359 Alarm 1 Value Pen 96 A 16 1CCO 7361 Alarm 2 Value Pen 1 A 16 1D7E 7551 Alarm 2 Value Pen 96 A 16 1D80 7553 Alarm 3 Value Pen 1 A 16 1E3E 7743 Alarm 3 Value Pen 96 A 16 1E40 7745 Alarm 4 Value Pen 1 A 16 1EFE 7935 Alarm 4 Value Pen 96 A 16 1F00 7937 Alarm5 Value Pen 1 A 16 1FBE 8127 Alarm 5 Value Pen 96 A 16 1FCO 8129 Alarm 6 Value Pen 1 A 16 207E 8319 Alarm 6 Value Pen 96 end address A 16 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Modbus Memory Map Supplement Alarm Status 96 Pens Allows you to read the status of all 6 alarms for each pen up to 16 pens for QX Address Address e See Hex Decimal Description Bley 1980 6529 Alarm Status Pen 1 start address A 16 1 1981 6530 Alarm Status Pen 2 A 16 1 1982 6531 Alarm Status Pen 3 A 16 1 1983 6532 Alarm Status Pen 4 A 16 1 1984 6533 Alarm Status Pen 5 A 16 1 1985 6534 Alarm Status Pen 6 A 16 1 1986 6535 Alarm Status Pen 7 A 16 1 1987 6536 Alarm Status Pen 8 A 16 1 1988 6537 Alarm Status Pen 9 A 16 1 1989 6538 Alarm Status Pen 10 A 16 1 19DF 6624 Alarm Status Pen 96 end address A 16 1 Alarm Status continued Bit 0 is Alarm 1 Bit 1 is Alarm 2 Bit 2 is Alarm 3 Bit 3 is Alarm 4 Bit 4 is Alarm 5 Bit 5 is
240. d select it by clicking on Open This logo will now appear on the top of every page of the generated report The logo select ed will be placed automatically into the Images folder an become the default for subsequent reports until another is selected O Graphics he Company logo jpg het Image logo jpg My Recent M Document logo jpg Documents My Documents qa My Computer File name Company logo jpg v Week Festim CBP 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 397 398 AMS2750 Report Generation Tool SAT Report Wizard When you select the SAT Report menu option the wizard will be started This will help cre ation of SAT Report Step 1 Obtain information This information will be printed on the SAT report SAT Report Wizard Please provide information for creating SAT Report Oven Name ID Furnace 3 Control Sensor TIC 10 Manufacturer Big Oven Manufacturer Tolerance i 10F Location Procedure Number P100 1A Additional Comments Ft Washington PA Oven Class 2 f not performed In house SAT Calibration Company Name SAT Calibration Company Representative Gente PO Oven Name ID enter the name or ID of the furnace or oven Control Sensor enter an identifier for the Control Sensor Manufacturer enter Manufacturer of the furnace or oven Tolerance of the furnace or oven Location enter the location of the company site Oven C
241. d the configuration is committed at 17 minutes past the recorder will wait until 20 past before starting the schedule interval As starting at 20 past with 10 minute increments will ensure alignment with a whole hour Count Only available when Interval Specific Days or Month End are selected as a Sub Type This is how often you want this to occur The recorder will carry on with this schedule for the amount entered in the count Eg If 24 is entered into the count the scheduled event will occur at the specified time for 24 hours A count of zero will carry on indefinitely Days of the Week Only available when Specific Days is selected as a Sub Type Select the days of the week when this scheduled event is to occur Time of Day Only available when Specific Days is selected as a Sub Type Select the Time Of Day when this scheduled event is to occur User Counters User Counters are quite simply counters that are set up by the user User Counters can be used as a Cause to trigger an Event Effect The User Counter information must be setup in the before it can be used as a part of the event system See Counters Menu on page 107 For a User Counter to be used as a Cause a User Counter must already be set up and be counting something eg a User Counter as an Effect of another Event An example of this could be First setup your counter in the Counters menu Enable it Name it enter the number the count will Start At and enter
242. d the new user is prompted to change the password when they first Log on The same user name cannot be used User names must not contain numeric characters The Administrator can add more than one user at a time They will not be added until the configuration has been Committed When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit When a new user is added a default password password is set When a new user first logs on they are prompted to change the password The new user is responsible for remem bering their own password The Administrator will not be able to access this information But the Administrator is able to reset the password for any user 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 145 Users Main Menu Configure Passwords User Admin Users This will list all the current users that have been entered into the password system and their access details Select a user to produce the following User Name Displays the user name Level Select a permission level from the drop down list Custom Activate this to allow customisation of the permission area access for this user only The custom settings will reflect the original Level set when the user was first added Edit Allows customisation of the permission areas The Administrator can re assign the permission areas for individual users at any level Login Days Select the days on which this user can Login Delete User Main Menu
243. dManager Software Suite to the recorder Allow Download Tick to allow FTP transfer from the recorder to TrendManager Software Suite Log Messages Tick to add a message to the messages list when an FTP transfer is performed Mark Chart Can only be active when Log Messages is enabled Tick to mark the chart when an FTP transfer is performed Refer to Section 8 Communication on page 225 in this manual and the TrendMan ager Software Suite manual for setting up FTP transfer 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Peers The Peer services communication function sets up the recorder so it can be recognised on a network containing other X Series recorders This means that multiple recorders will be able to discover other recorders on the same local network in order to share data between them For example basic unit information such as firmware version recorder name and net work identity This will be used mainly with the Trend Server software to allow discovery of recorders in order to transfer data via FTP or Modbus Enabled tick to enable Set Number Default to set 1 this should not have to be changed unless a lot of recorders are being used on the same network Start Port Default port number 8955 End Port Default port number 8970 The port numbers have been specially selected for this type of network communications It is recommended that the ports are not changed unless specifically requested by your IT
244. de the Total values of each selected pen All pens or group of pens depending what has been chosen in the Selection Type option The report can give you the pen Total value for every Hour Day Week Month the Current total pen value or Do Not Include Total values Totaliser Pens only available when Multiple Pens is selected for Selection Type This will display any pens that have been set up as a totaliser pen See Displaying Totals on page 76 Messages Select this to include the Messages of each selected pen All pens or group of pens depending what has been chosen in the Selection Type option The report can give you the pen Messages for the Last Hour Last Day Last Week Last Month All messages or Do Not Include Messages Message Lists Select which type of messages are required for your report Alarm Sys tem Diagnostic Security or User messages One or more selections can be made For more information see Message Types on page 165 Counters Select which type of Counters are required for your report Alarm User Event Digital Digital Input Relay Output or Pulse One or more selections can be made For more information see Events Counters on page 92 Include Digital Inputs Select to Include or Do Not Include this option Include Digital Outputs Select to Include or Do Not Include this option Footer Style Choose between one or two lines of footer at the end of the report The extra footer lines give you the op
245. dia whilst the LED is flashing After a few seconds the flashing LED goes to Full On LED Whilst the LED is fully on data is being written to the media DO NOT remove the media whilst the LED is on When the transfer is complete the LED goes off and the media may now be removed 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Messages Menu Main Menu Messages The messages screen will display message from many different areas Specific types of messages have been put into categories or All messages can be viewed The number of new messages to view are displayed on each button as a number in brackets after the label Messages System Message Types All Select this to view a list of All types of messages The messages screen will hold the latest 200 messages Alarms This is a list of active alarms that have occurred The screen will display the Type of alarm the Time and Date that the activity occurred and Message details of the activity System This will list a history of system messages The screen will display the Type of messages and warnings and errors that have been generated by the unit The screen will also display the Time and Date that the activity occurred and the Message details Diagnostics Examine a complete list of the recorder s functionality and processes since it was last powered up The screen will display Type of message Time and Date that the activity occurred and the Message details Securi
246. dit Setup gt General gt Error Alert A new alert system has been implemented to allow on screen alerts to be displayed for se rious errors and for early warning on potentially serious issues like available media space When an alert is detected a large message box will be displayed on the screen it has a flashing border for which colours are user defined and will display the current error state An acknowledge button is available and a re flash can be set to warn the user again if the error condition is not rectified exce 9 Edit Edtsetp 3 gt Genera j E ee Error Types 3 Error s meme seo JJ Border colour Colour E Enable Reflash Y Reflash Time 60 Mins Export Alarm FTP Mem Lo CJC Missing e x Int Mem Alarm v x aMssng X Y im Error Alert lid v a s Eco Ja en jii Error Types The following conditions are available to be enabled ee Network Unplugged will detect hub switch failure also ee Internal Memory Alarm Display when internal memory is going to start over writing non exported data within a defined period of time Storage Alarm level must be set Export Alarm Where external media capacity will run out within a defined period of time Storage Alarm level must be set ee Media Missing External media is missing so a scheduled export is not possi ble ee FTP Memory Low Display when internal memory is going to start overw
247. ds of 10mm hr 20mm hr 30mm hr and 60mmp hr if ena bled When the recorder screen is put into replay mode As you zoom out the time stamps on the chart background change from minutes to hours Show Chart Start Stop this will show or hide the Chart Start Stop Message when the chart has been started or stopped Show Hot Button Tick to enable the Hot Button appearing at the top right of active trend screens Once enabled any corresponding event that has been setup will be trig gered after clicking on the hot button Name of Hot Button Enter the name of the Hot Button as required 7 Character max 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 139 140 Appearance Chart background colour and graduations and the chart background colour when the record er goes into an alarm state can all be changed The same set of characteristics can be changed for a chart in Replay mode using the colour picker The colour of the Time Stamp at the top of the chart and Marker Mark on Chart can also be changed Chart B Graduations m E B BE Ca B Chart Replay Replay C NECI ENS L1 cou Blue New Current Chart Graduations This will change the colour of the graduation lines on the chart Chart Colour This will change the colour of the background of the chart Chart Alarm This will change the colour of the background of the chart when it goes into an alarm state Replay Graduations This will change
248. e 252 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK OPC Interface Open Process Control OPC Interface Open Process Control OPC Server connection must be enabled in the recorder by selecting the OPC option in Credits on page 112 Many types of OPC Server software packages are available and are compat ible with the recorders OPC server supports OPC DA version 3 and OPC AE Alarm and Events Use the name of the OPC server as it appears in the client software OPC limitations Technically speaking there are no restrictions on the number of clients that can connect to OPC DA or OPC A amp E servers Some software limits are in place OPC DA Server Maximum number of groups that can be added per client is 3 Maximum number of unique items that a OPC DA server supports is 100 l e Number of pens Number of totalisers Number of communication variable spread across 3 groups per client Recommended number of clients that can connect a OPC DA server is 3 OPC A amp E Server Number of active alarm that is maintained at a given time is 576 Includes pens having active alarms and pens which have normal but unacknowledged alarms if latch enabled Recommended maximum number of event subscriptions is 3 Not only can pen and alarm values be imported from the recorder but CV values can be sent to the recorder from the OPC software How OPC works When data acquisition devices conform to the OPC standard you can use them with any OPC enabled
249. e lines are they must be a USB printer that shows as a standard PCL Printer Command Lan guage The system will not support multi function devices or printers that require specific drivers Avoid photo printers and printers that allow stand alone operation with cameras or media specific printers such as pictbridge There isn t a constant factor to which printers work and those that wont We recommend that you follow the guidelines outlined here and plug it in and see To set up your printer configuration go to Printer Menu on page 122 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 31 32 Electrical Installation Keyboards All keyboards are native USB keyboards English and US keyboards are recognised as US layout QWERTY for all languages except French and German keyboard layouts French and German keyboards are activated when the recorder is set to that language There is no keyboard support for Asian languages Chinese simplified Japanese or Korean Barcode Reader Most USB barcode readers emulate keyboards and cause no recognition problems Exam ples of tested barcode readers are Peninsula Phoenix 2 Wasp WWR 2905 Pen Scanner Quick Scan QS2500 Barcode Traders LC4400 Series USB Keys Please test your USB key before using it for recording and transferring data 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Section 3 Overview Functions and Features Up to 16 Analogue Inputs for the Minitrend QX 48 for the Multit
250. e between the first and last TC s entering the setpoint tolerance band Stable Soak Duration Measures the length of time all the TC s are with in the toler ance band of the setpoint When in stable soak show the Max TC and Min TC readings for the entire run period TC1 10 Diff difference and TC SP Diff are also displayed Meets Class On a successful soak period the actual class met by the soak is shown The survey auto detects the next TC to test when last one has either completed or failed out of band width and will carry on testing the others The TC s Stabilized button This button will only be enabled available when a soak has all TC s within the soak and acceptable tolerance pressing the button will override the stability detection and put the cur rent soak from soak mode to stable mode 380 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK TUS mode TUS Survey Process screen Lower panel The graph will display the current state of the highest and lowest temperature sensors as the TUS is not running this will simply show the full scale i e not zoomed in to any specific soak 15 40 00 15 50 00 15 00 00 23 ug 0 23 Aug 02 23 Aug 0 Max TC TC2 449 63 Min TC Tcl J 447 80 The pens on the graph area show two thermocouples one minimum temp and one maxi mum temp When the TC s reach the soak period the chart reconfigures and zooms in on the setpoint area contained inside the toleranc
251. e AEROROSE 125 Clean Screen 158 Cleaning the Recorder sss 271 Clear All Messages Event Effects 5e EER Client Server Network ss Commit Configuration occ Commit Later Configuration Comms Data Logging and Transfer 229 Getting connected IP Address 228 Hubs or Switches essere 227 Internet Security Settings ATO Local Area Network RIP Modbus Capabilities tendens DOD OPC Clients isan 204 OPC Interface endum PC Ethernet Connections 224 Protocols 2 reete his 1 226 Remote Networks eee 229 Remote Viewer ecce DE 255 Software Installation Standard Communications Interfaces Web Browser Comms Connections Comms Diagnostics FTP Status Modbus Status sss OPC Status Peers Status sss E es SMTP Status 1n ses sevsssstascssvasesscassasaness Comms Menu DNS WINS MDNS 177 cette 79 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK TP AddteSS eerte terit IP Address Entry POLS nei Services TCP IP USB Comms Ports eee Comms Server Add Pens for Logging Add a Database eee Add a Database Server sss 240 Add a Device Add a new Device Administration Client Connections Comms Server Overview 2 oce 236 Configure Database Logging
252. e Output or Pulse Input Electrical Installation AC supply 100 250 VAC SPNC Relay 24V TX Power Supply Output Slot A Slot B OJC Sensor Alarm Relay or Ethernet Digital I O Slot G USB Host Figure 2 10 Minitrend QX Rear panel AC supply 100 250 VAC Earthscrew Analogue Input ground Analogue Output or Pulse Input 24V DC AC Input Slot A Slot B Slot C SPN Relay Slot D Slot E Slot F 24V TX Power Supply Output gi Relay LED Digital I O Slot G CJC Sensor Slot H position in the middle of the alot Analogue Input connector Ethernet Slots A F RS485 USB Host Figure 2 11 Multitrend SX Rear panel 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Electrical Installation Card and Slot positions Table 2 1 Card priority positions Cards Minitrend QX Multitrend SX eZtrend QXe Analogue Input card A B A B C D E F A B option Analogue Output card B EF s Pulse Input card A B A B C D E F Alarm Relay or Digital I O card G G H G QXe Analogue Input Standard card on page 21 20 to 30VDC 20 to 25VAC Input Instrument power option Wire seal provision Earth screw round 9 AC supply 100 250 VAC Analogue Input card option Slot B CJC Sensor Alarm Relay or Digital I O Slot G option
253. e made here to the sensor configuration you can at this stage proceed or cancel the wizard You are prompted for additional notes as a free format text when starting a TUS This will display the currently configure furnace details and the target soak information for the TUS the user has 4 options on this page 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK TUS mode TUS Configuration Confirmation Name Furnace 1 Manufacturer XYZ Furnace Co Model No QW 234 Y 45 Class 2 Type Parts Shape Rectangular eee ee ECAN Tant Name Time Setpoint 1 400 00 Deg F 30 Mins Setpoint 2 600 00 Deg F 30 Mins Setpoint 3 1000 00 Deg F 30 Mins TUS Configuration Screen 1 Load Config Configurations can be loaded via external media into the recorder manu ally this will allow you to load in a new configuration to perform another furnace survey Edit Config will take you directly into a setup edit and into the AMS2750 configuration page to edit furnace and soak details you can modify the details as required Once completed you will be returned to the wizard page showing the newly loaded configura tion details Note if a configuration is changed so that it requires system restart then you Will not be returned to the same place in the wizard and any parked configurations will be over written Cancel will take you back to the TUS screen but this will not cancel any changes made in the load or edit config options Ne
254. e or a USB data storage key The keyboard and mouse can be used to navigate the recorder s screen along with text entry Remote Viewer This is a firmware option that extends the user interface of the recorder onto the desktop PC Providing remote viewing of the unit launched from a web browser Full remote control is available as an option which is password protected to prevent unauthorized access Compatible with Microsoft Internet explorer 6 and higher Security Total Data Integrity data is stored in secure encrypted files making it easy to retrieve the data dependent on process information Data is automatically recognised without having to remember file names Password Protection Up to 4 levels of password protection with up to 50 different users are available Multiple levels of password protection and an audit trail of actions enhance the security of the data Password Network Synchronisation is a credit function in the recorders that provides a means of keeping the passwords of users in sync for network connected recorders It uses a Password Master Slave setup to update password changes Extended Security System option ESS provides features including entry of unique User ID s and associated passwords time out of password entry password expiration and traceability of user actions ESS is compatible with the requirements of 21CFR part 11 Events Events is a firmware option that can be activated using the cred
255. e setup Messages Downscale burnout on Al N A N A The T C on the specified Al channel has burnout failed O C Diagnostics channel The pen has gone downscale as stated in the setup Messages Al channel dual point com N A N A Dual point compensation was specified but one or more points Diagnostics pensation error using single were invalid therefore setup has been defaulted to single point Messages point 1 compensation using point 1 Al channel User analogue N A N A User limits were required for the specified analogue channel Diagnostics high and low limits are same however both limits were incorrectly detected with the value Messages 346 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Al channel removing fast N A N A Fast scanning option is disabled or is illegal for board channel Diagnostics scanning support but was specified in the setup file Messages Al channel updating illegal N A N A The acquisition rate specified in the setup for an Al channel was Diagnostics acquisition rate not allowed for board and option selected Messages AO channel incorrect N A N A The setup for the given AO channel specified an invalid pen to Diagnostics retransmit pen retransmit Messages Slot number of channels N A N A The I O card is the same type as that run previously however Diagnostics changed x channels pr
256. e the timer 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK else BLKV1 treset 1 return tget 1 Return the current paused timer value If itis reset the timer 1 to zero return the current zeroed timer value 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 309 310 Full Maths amp Script Processing Example 4 Commenting in Scripts This is an example of how commenting can be used in scripts you can use the standard C commenting inline comments use for example if A1 10 return 9 If A1 greater then 10 return 9 or for block single or multiline commenting the to open and to close these are C style comments and work as follows if A1 10 return 9 f A1 greater then 10 return 9 for single line or if A1 10 if A1 is greater then 10 then return 9 return 9 these are also useful for commenting out code to try different things for example if A1 gt 10 else return A1 return 9 return 20 Here the else statement is commented out so it won t be included but can easily be re in troduced if required Maths Error Messages When the Maths functionality is processing through the scrips you have written it will carry out Syntax and other checks When it comes across operations functions brackets etc not expected or permitted it will report an error However the fault being reported may be on a previous line cau
257. e time coverage So if you go right back to the earliest time on the slowest chart shown by in this example you cannot zoom in any more as the medium speed coverage does not go back that far 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 211 212 Zooming Capabilities The example in Figure 6 4 on page 213 shows 10 different replay screens covering the full zoom in zoom out capabilities When the screen is switched to replay the chart speed is set to Fast 600mm hr and the replay screen displays a 4 hour chart The replay chart can be zoomed out two more times to 10 hours then to 12 hours It can be zoomed in from 4 hours to 2hrs 1hr 1hr with bigger divisions 20 mins 10 mins 5 mins 2 mins and 1 min The Medium chart speed 20mm hr and the Slow chart speed bmm hr are also shown in the example 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 12 hour div replay chart 10 hour div replay chart 4 hour div replay chart Fast chart speed 600mm hr 2 hour div replay chart 1 hour div replay chart Medium chart speed 20mm hr Figure 6 4 Zooming on a Replay screen 00 00 00 07 Jul 06 Hiui m 29 236 26151 v A Chart Exit 10 00 00 00 00 W 00 00 ul 06 07 Jul 06 OF Jul 06 20 00 00 07 Jul 06 07 00 00 07 Jul 06 n 29 236 26 876 E Print 00 04 00 00 06 07 Jul 06 ospo o0 ozpul 06 07 Jul 06 07 12 00 07 Jul 06 Hiui m 28 006 26 876 06 00 00 P2 00 00 10 00 00 07 J
258. e time has been changed oth erwise returns false 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 303 Full Maths amp Script Processing Full Maths Full Maths functions provides a simple and intuitive method for the user to carry out numer ous mathematical functions Some examples are shown below Table 14 8 Full Maths examples Full Maths examples P4 lo A1 A2 Pen 4 shows the result of the lowest of either A1 or A2 P3 A1 A2 SQRT A3 Pen 3 shows the result of Analogue input 1 added to Analogue input 2 all multiplied by the square root of Analogue input 3 P4 GLBV1 P4 shows the Global Variable 1 NOTICE Please note Pn is not entered in the Maths Block and is assumed by the Recorder e g To enter the equation P2 A2 the user would just type A2 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Full Maths amp Script Processing Script Function Application Examples Scripting is not available on the eZtrend QXe To enter a script for a Pen ensure that Maths Type in the Pen Menu is set to Scripting Example 1 4 flow meters are fed into the recorder to trend totalise and record daily flow The application requires that the user must know and record which flow meter is outputting the highest flow at any particular time This can of course be derived from the four lots of recorded data but not only is this extra analysis later but a real time display is required The application is eas
259. e used as a cause to then trigger an effect Max Min values can be reset in the process menu see Max Min on page 168 System An occurrence in the system can be used as a cause to trigger an event effect System occurrences include Power On Setup Change Internal Memory Low Export Memory Low and FTP Memory Low The system moni tors the memory storage levels and triggers the alert when the low level set is reached To set the memory low level go to the Edit Recording menu go to Storage Alarm on page 130 User Action Select a User Action for placing a Mark on the Chart as a cause to trigger and event Or add a Hot Button which can be displayed on an active Trend screen ee The Hot Button function when active as a cause The user can click the Hot Button on the active screen and the corresponding event that the user needs to pn Hot Bin set will be triggered The hot button will display on active trend screens in top right of screen if enabled Batch Use a batch control as a cause to trigger an event effect An event cause can be set up so that when you Start Stop or Pause a batch it will cause an effect to occur Batches work using groups of pens so when setting up an event with a batch control as a cause you must assign a group of pens See Groups on page 123 TUS Temperature uniformity Survey This will only be enabled if the AMS 2750 TUS or TUS Process option has been enabled in the recorder credits menu Select eith
260. e whether this is the first Diagnostics ROM time this board has been powered up so could not default the Messages values Error reading FirstPower up signature from EEPROM Error reading NV EEP 6 3 3 Could not read the initial resistance held for active burnout Diagnostics ROM Error reading Initial loop resistance from EEPROM Messages Error reading NV EEP 7 3 3 Could not read the current resistance held for active burnout Diagnostics ROM Error reading Current loop resistance from EEPROM Messages 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 341 Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Error writing to NV EEP 0 3 3 General error writing persistent data EEWriteLong Diagnostics ROM Error writing data to EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 1 3 3 I O board has completed first time power up defaulting however Diagnostics ROM could not log the fact Error writing FirstPower up signature to Messages EEPROM Error writing to NV EEP 2 3 3 Life stats could not be persisted on I O card Error writing to Life Diagnostics ROM Stats in EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 3 3 3 Board stats could not be persisted on Al card Error writing to Al Diagnostics ROM Board Stats in EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 4 3 3 Board calibration could not be persisted on Al card ReadDe Diagnostics ROM
261. e width band The lower panel displays digital readings of the two TC s Max and Min hottest and coldest and a third pen displays a dig ital reading of the difference in temperature between the two TC s Seon 415 000 Max TC 405 00 Min TC TC1 403 34 F395 000 385 000 It also will automatically Zoom in when the temperature reaches the lower limit as defined by the AMS2750 specification for the defined Furnace Class So for example if the furnace being surveyed is defined to be a Class 2 furnace and you are doing a survey SP at 600 F the trend graph will switch from a full scale graph say 0 to 1100 F to a Zoomed in scale that shows the configured SP the Furnace class limit 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 381 TUS mode 382 SP1 setpoint 1 and SP2 setpoint 2 Time t1 2 the ramp time for the first ramp Time t2 time between first TC entering Dwell zone and Last TC entering Dwell Zone for setpoint 1 SP1 Point P1 The point where all TC s are stable and lie within the SP1 Tolerance limits Timer t3 starts at this point Time t3 the dwell time SP1 Must be at least 30 minutes within SP1 tolerance limits Value mxs1 Maximum temperature value during the SP1 dwell period Value mis1 Minimum temperature value during the SP1 dwell period Time t4 the ramp time for the second ramp Time t5 time between first TC entering Dwell zone and Last TC enter
262. eactivate the Managed Data Network Services When the setup is complete go back to the TCP IP menu and complete the Comms setup Ports Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Comms gt TCP IP gt Ports The port numbers are associated with the IT system in use Port numbers are set to a default but can be changed by the user to allow data traffic to use a specified port HTTP HyperText Transport Protocol is the communications protocol that enables Web browsing Select and enter the desired port number if required Defaults to 80 Modbus communications protocol used for automation applications Select and enter the desired port number if required Defaults to 502 When the setup is complete go back to the TCP IP menu and complete the Comms setup When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 79 80 Network Admin Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Comms Network Admin This must be set up to ensure network printing can be performed and emailing made easier without being prompted for this information each time you want to print or email This infor mation will remain after a firmware upgrade Network Admin is required for printers on a network and shared or work group printers Shared or work group printers must contain the correct file path see Pr
263. ed Event Script Timers Play Sounds Display Alert Batch Reports and Update Tabular Readings Depending on the Type of effect selected the menus will change as follows Mark on Chart If a pen goes into an alarm state the effect would be a mark will be placed on a chart and will display for example Pen 2 Alm 1 Into Alarm 37 Select Marker Type as Preset to display a list of all available markers that have been previously added to the recorder To add Preset Markers go to Preset Markers on page 108 Select the Marker Type as User Defined to add pen information using Embedded Proc ess Variable Embedded Process Values Adding Embedded Process Values in a Mark on Chart means you can display information such as Table 4 5 Embedded Process Variables Variable Description V Value T Tag Z Zero range S Span range U Unit Text time v Time in HH MM SS format date v Date in DD MM YY format td v Time and Date in HH MM SS and DD MM YY format name v recorder name id v recorder ID serial v serial number 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Table 4 6 Embedded examples Text Entry Function Examples P1 V will embed the current Value of P1 lt lt 16 233 gt gt P1 T will embed the current Tag of P1 Pen 1 gt gt P1 2 will embed the Zero point of P1 lt lt 0 gt gt P1 S will embed the span point of P1 l
264. ed for a soak period whilst in stability and the TC that made the measurement Min TC Shows the minimum temperature reached for a soak period whilst in stability and the TC that made the measurement In the case where more than one TC is at the same level the first TC to reach this level is displayed and recorded Max TC Diff Shows the largest difference between the Maximum and Minimum TC s In the case where more than one TC is at the same level the first TC to reach this level is displayed and recorded Max TC SP Diff Shows the largest difference between the measured temperature and the setpoint and which TC made the measurement In the case where more than one TC is at the same level the first TC to reach this level is displayed and recorded Max Ramp Overshoot This will monitor the maximum overshoot entering soak before stability is achieved and which TC made the measurement In the case where more than one TC is at the same level the first TC to reach this level is displayed and recorded Ramp Deviation The total time taken for all TC s to enter the soak from the previous setpoint or start of survey It shows the first TC to get within the temperature tolerance eg 6 This reading stops when all the TC s are within the tolerance of the setpoint T C lag into Soak Shows the time difference between the first TC and the last TC comes into the tolerance band hottest and the coldest Lag is the time differenc
265. ed information is found the relevant fields will be left as default usually blank Step 1 Select TUS file TUS File Location Enter the TUS file location file path or use the browse button to locate the TUS file required to create a TUS report The file extension for the data file is tus The Next button will validate the TUS file location and move you on to the next screen The Cancel button shows a message box Do you like to exit TUS Report Wizard If Yes the wizard is cancelled TUS Report Wizard TUS File Location This TUS Report creation wizard will create the report based on selected TUS file Please select the TLIS file for processing TUS File Location 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 401 402 AMS2750 Report Generation Tool Step 2 Certificate and Procedure Number TUS Report Wizard Certificate and Procedure Number Please enterthe Report Reference Number for this completed TUS Please enter the Procedure Number used for this TUS process Next Survey Due Date Editable MM DD YYY 10 31 2008 October 2008 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fr Sat 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 27 28 29 30 Next Survey Due Date Editable MM DD YYYY DZA Q Next Survey Date should be greater than current date Please enter the Report Reference Number for this completed TUS Please enter the procedure number used for this TUS process Next Survey Due Date
266. een TC is over 5 days from expiry Amber TC s is 0 to 5 days from expiry Red TC s has expired Process Inst Select the on screen buttons to set the countdown timers for each timer individually and fol low the on screen instructions The AMS2750 process screen for the recorder will display the countdown timers for the SAT TUS Instrument Calibration and the Control Thermocouple calibration The number of days remaining are displayed on a colour coded button The furnace name and the furnace class is also displayed Running pajgeua aun enr 3H 03 spe4Bdn semus SEPIWO 40J JJO UO 19Mog AMS2750 Status Furnace Furnace 1 Class 2 Inst Cal SAT Due 5 Control Process due In In prah Inst Example of a process screen on an SX recorder 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK AMS2750 Process mode Countdown Timers SAT TUS Control TC and Instrument calibration timers When a SAT TUS Instrument Cal or Control TC button is pressed you may be asked to enter user name and password if this function is enabled See Passwords AMS2750 on page 392 The timer reset screen is displayed that shows the next suggested date for SAT and TUS depending on Furnace class material and instrumentation type or provide a date 1 month in the future for Control TC or Instrument calibration The SAT TUS Control TC and Instrument Cal timers are separately implemented within a class where there is one ins
267. eing Done It also indicates the level of the furnace class that was actually achieved which could be better that the class specified in the recorder set up If it fails the indication is shown as Red 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 387 TUS mode Failure If a sensor fails during a TUS causing a test fail the recorder allows you to disable that particular TC and re run that setpoint This action is permitted under AMS2750 but the number of TC s that can be disabled is in accordance with AMS2750 i e for a 9 TC test no failures are permitted The recorder does not take into account TC position when allowing a failed sensor to be removed and it is your responsibility to ensure conformance with AMS2750 Remove TC s If the TC fails goes out of tolerance The Remove TC s button can be used to eliminate that TC from the calculations setpoint rerun This will ask you which one is to be removed and do you want to rerun This is to allow you to remove the bad T C and redo the survey without having to replace the T C before repeating the run a ul M AMS2750 TUS 22 Aug 08 16 02 03 Menu 0 l 2102 4 screen Temperature Uniformity Survey Running Furnace Time Name Furnace 1 Username NA Started Fri Aug 22 14 30 55 Model No QW 234 Y 45 No of TC s 8 Elapsed 1h 31m 07s Instrument Type B Class 2 Condition Running Setpoint Status Max TC Min TC Max TC Diff Max TC SP Max Ramp Ramp T
268. elect which pen is displayed Activate to display Max Min readings and or activate to display Total values ee Charts and DPMs Select which pen is displayed ee Charts and Scales Select which pen is displayed Select and activate which scale is required to be displayed ee Charts DPMs and Scales Select which pen is displayed Select and activate which scale is required to be displayed ee Tabular Select which pens are to be displayed in a table style layout See Tabular Screen on page 127 AMS2750 Process This screen is required when the recorder is being used in AMS2750 Process Mode Refer to AMS2750 Process Menu on page 353 Template If a template is being used it will appear here Select By This gives you the option of selecting Pens or a pre defined Group of pens that will be displayed on the screen This will be the default if AMS2750 Process screen is selected in Template Type Showing Pens Only available if Pens is selected in Select By Select pens from the on screen selection to be displayed on this screen Available pens will be in bold text on the selection screen and pens that are already selected will have a blue edge Group Name only available when Group is selected in Select By Select which group of pens is to be displayed on this screen To assign a pen to a group see Pens Menu on page 67 Orientation Not on the DPM screen Set the orientation to Vertical or Horizonta
269. elevant relay output s Alarm Acknowledge this is an effect of an event that can acknowledge a latched alarm on a Single Pen Pen Group or All pens Select the pen and the number of alarm to be acknowledged Email Is an event effect that will send an Email when triggered by a Cause Eg Cause Totaliser Starts Effect Email is sent Sub Type Auto Single Line User or Multiline User Auto will enter what the Event was eg Scheduled or Alarm triggered Single Line User can have up to 69 characters of text or use Embedded Process Values on page 100 Multiline User can have up to 80 characters per line with up to 1000 characters including spaces carriage returns and line feed in total They can also include embedded process variable Maths variables as embedded variables on page 101 can be used in an email Recipients Enter email recipients from the list If no email recipients are present in the list they must be entered first in the Email menu see Email on page 87 ee Embed Screenshot This feature allows a screen shot of the current screen to be attached to an out going email the attachment is in bitmap bmp format Email Text Only available when Single Line User is selected as a Sub Type Enter text here to add a Mark on Chart when the Email is sent ee Email Template Only available when Multiline User is selected These are sets of text scripts that can be pre written and assigned to an Email
270. em Fora manual report see Reports Process on page 170 Forareport triggered using the Event system see Event Effects on page 100 Pen Report Information Currently pens provide real time values max min and totals Reports need some history of these values to be maintained so a set of period based data is maintained The periods be ing an hour day week and month The recorder builds up the current hour day week and monthly data and keeps the previous completed hour day week and month stored At any time it is possible to access the current hour day week or month for Max Min Av erage and Totals also you can get access to the previously complete whole hour day week or month for each pen An hour is a whole hour starting on the hour eg 10 00 to 11 00 A day starts at one second passed midnight A week starts one second passed midnight on Sunday A month starts at one second passed midnight on the 1st of the month Access to this is provided automatically via reports but this information can also be included in maths scripts and by using embedded variables Examples below Pen Report Maths In maths the following syntax is available prmax x y z Pen report Max value prmin x y z Pen report Min value prave x y z Pen report Average value prtot x y z Pen report Totaliser value where X Pen Number 1 to 96 y period 1 Hour 2 Day 3 Week 4 Month z report set 1 Current 2
271. em Setup Add System Administrator Your recorder is configured with ESS Extended Security System This is a password system that cannot be switched off Follow these steps on first time power up Administrator User name 1 Switch the recorder On 2 From the process screen press the Menu button in the top left of the screen and select the Log In icon in the top right as shown here 3 A box will appear and prompt you to enter a User name enter Admin This is the first time user login Access to the first time login is removed once the password system has been configured The first time user is reinstated if the password system is reset No password is required for first time login No password is required for first time login 4 From the Main menu press the following buttons Configure Passwords User Admin Add User Select Blank User and type in your new administrator user name Default User name minimum length is 4 characters Allows the use of alpha symbol and numeric characters no spaces Default User name maximum length is 20 characters 5 In the Add User menu your new user name will be displayed select this default Opera tor and change the User Level to Administrator Select Finish and Commit 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 6 A box will appear when you have successfully added a user press OK 7 The recorder will return to the process screen You have now added an Administrator User Le
272. en identified Diagnostics ware identity Error reading board ID type invalid board type configuration Messages Incompatible hardware ID 0 1 1 The number of channels reported by I O board was invalid Error Diagnostics reading board ID type can t determine how many channels Messages Incompatible hardware ID 1 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified Diagnostics Invalid board type setting up working variables Messages Incompatible hardware ID 2 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified Diagnostics Invalid board type getting board capability Messages Incompatible hardware ID 3 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified Diagnostics Invalid board type AcqTimer Onlnterrupt Messages Incompatible hardware ID 4 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified Diagnostics Invalid board type on board initialisation Messages Incompatible hardware ID 5 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified whilst read Diagnostics ing life stats Invalid board type when reading stats Messages Incompatible hardware ID 6 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified whilst reset Diagnostics ting life stats Invalid board type resetting Life stats Messages Incompatible hardware ID 7 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified Diagnostics Invalid board type resetting Session stats Messages Incompatible hardware ID 8 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified Diagnostics I
273. en the various recorders within the Network Synchronization Group While these systems have been rigorously tested with various network topologies Honeywell cannot guarantee that it will work with every combination of network switches hubs and other Ethernet network communications equipment and settings Users of the Password NetSync function who experience issues with the recorders not being found or losing contact between various Password Slaves and the Password Master will need to troubleshoot their own network to insure proper operation of the Password NetSync function 148 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Figure 4 1 Example of Peer Network consisting of 2 Password Groups Password Net Sync Configuration Type To set up the Master recorder for the password group first select Master to make this recorder a slave device and select Slave Password Group For a Master recorder enter the password group name using the on screen keypad or keyboard For a Slave recorder select a password group from the list to join this recorder to an existing group Associated Slaves For Master recorders only Touch the screen to select from the available recorders shown in red Recorders that are enabled for password net sync and that already belong to this password group will be displayed in green Recorders not available because they are a part of another group or do not have the firmware option enabled will not be displayed Select t
274. endent barcode software The barcodes can then be read using a barcode wand or reader Any type of Batch marker can be encoded into a barcode using the same control characters used to build up a batch marker 1 FRED This example shows a barcode encoded to start a batch S Start Batch 216 Batch Name l User ID is Fred A barcode with up to 25 characters including spaces can be read into the recorder using a USB ASCII barcode reader Recording Menu Main Menu gt Recording This will display the current recording status of the recorder and allow recording control Recording Methodology The X Series recorder uses a new and powerful method for recording Data is acquired at pen specific rates processed and stored in the large on board Flash memory This memory operates in a cycle mode such that the oldest data is over written by the newest When data is exported from the X Series recorder this does not delete that data from the recorder but retains it for further or future downloads With this method the user can export multiple copies of the same encoded data giving extreme security s Recording 2 Start mm T Now 5 Recording 5 pens recording Export Required In 31d 6h 00m 00s Schedule 10 Minutes to Front CF Media Full In gt 1 Year FTP Export Reg In 31d 3h 20m 00s Pre Trigger Status Acquiring Finish 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Storage Media Format New CF cards and USB
275. enu Configure Layout Edit and the new layout will be loaded into the list of Screens If the Custom Screens option is disabled the screens will not display To display the new Layout go to the Screen button in the Main menu bar at the top of any process screen and select the next button to scroll through the screens 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Bitmaps Bitmaps can be inserted into a layout in Screen Designer and then loaded into the recorder just like any other layout lay E Template 1 Menu 0 Screen 22 Aug 06 14 03 25 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 219 220 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Section 7 Firmware Options Firmware Credit System The credits system is a flexible way of changing the recorder features without having to up grade the firmware Simply purchase a number of credits to cover your current and possibly future requirements and the recorder is delivered with the credits loaded The credit value in each recorder is displayed in the Factory menu Select the Options button and by activating and de activating the options in the credit list the recorder will change its functionality Go from Main Menu Configure Setup Edit General Factory Credits Table 7 1 Firmware Options Firmware option Credit Description value Full Maths Note 1 4 Full Maths this can handle math expressions that can
276. eplay tool bar to enable you to swap between cursors and or link them together Cursor Speed Exit Replay toolbar Switch between the Cursor moving on the chart or the Chart scrolling behind the cursor e Prin 208 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Replay Toolbar The Replay toolbar will appear at the bottom of the screen Action See Action Toolbar on page 209 Rev This is used to scroll back through previous data Touch once to scroll back in incre ments or hold the Rev button down to continue backwards viewing of data Fwd This is to scroll forwards on the chart Touch once to scroll back in increments or hold the Rev button down to continue backwards viewing of data In Zoom In on the chart being displayed Place the chart cursor at the point you wish to zoom in to Zooming In will magnify the chart to show greater detail around the cursor posi tion Out Zoom Out on the chart being displayed Place the cursor at the point you wish to zoom out from Zooming Out will decrease the chart to show a larger time span around the cursor position Cursor Chart In Cursor mode the cursor bar can be moved along the chart showing the max min pen readings as they change and are displayed on the DPMs This can be done by touching the line cursor on the screen and dragging it to either side In Chart mode the chart can be moved along behind the cursor bar The DPMs will update reflecting the m
277. er This will only be enabled if the AMS 2750 TUS or the TUS Process option has been enabled in the recorder credits menu A new Event Effect has been added Update Tabular Readings Triggering this event causes the tabular display to update and show the latest set of readings This does not show any periodic readings but shows a new line when the add tabbed data event effect is triggered For full details on Event setup see Events Menu on page 92 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 389 TUS mode Audit Trail AMS2750 When running a TUS on the recorder the recorder does provide an audit trail of the actions that occur during the TUS and these can be seen on the trend graph or reviewed as part of the recorder s Message screen An actual message screen showing the system messages that occurred during the TUS Messages 0 ta on on 11 00 00 12 00 00 13 E 05 Sep DG 05 Sep ae 5 Sep 08 Max TC a TC 1002 3 E fr un Lui er 1 Min TC m TC1 TUS TUS Exported TUS TUS Stopped TUS Soak 3 Completed OK TUS Auto Stability achieved TUS ALL in soak 3 ramp 397s lag 55s TUS New soak started for soak 3 limits 990 00 to 1010 00 TUS Try to detect new soak 3 limits 390 00 to 1010 00 TUS Soak 2 Completed OK 30 pey4duio T s eos sni AO pe3ejduio z Heos sn paaaiyae Ayqey ong SAL yuli T eas ao pales eos Many sri 6 squ eos MAU 33a3ap E
278. er Start or Stop TUS When a TUS is started or stopped this can be used to trigger and effect See Appendix L X Series AMS2750 capabilities on page 351 AMS2750 Timer This will only be enabled if the AMS 2750 TUS or the TUS Process option has been enabled in the recorder credits menu Select TC Timers or Process Timers as a cause and set the Alert Type to Warning or Expired See Appendix L X Series AMS2750 capabilities on page 351 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Scheduled Events A scheduled event can be set up as a cause so that when a scheduled event occurs it trig gers an effect With scheduled events you can specify the time and date for something to happen Eg A schedule can be setup every weekday at 12 00pm to send an Email Emcee Deon jem IN Enabled Y Type Scheduled Sub Type Specific Days Day of the W Mon Tues Weds Thurs Fri Time Of Day 12 00 00 PM Count 10 Ca po ag Enabled Tick to enable Type Scheduled Sub Type Set Once Interval Specific Days or Month End Once This is a once only occurrence Interval A scheduled can be setup at timed intervals eg every 12 hours Specific days Select the day s time and how often count the schedule will occur Eg Friday at 12 00 with a count of 10 will carry on for 10 weeks or Monday through to Friday at 12 00 with a count of 10 will carry on for two weeks Month End If Month End is selected with a count of 10 it will carr
279. er network drive Usually several devices computers or recorders can be authenticated on the same net work with the same name Username Your network email address or this could be a generic name used to identify the recorder Password Enter your password associated with your user name If you have a system where the log in password expires and requires you to change it periodically you will need to update the logon password in the recorders when you are forced to change your PC pass word User Address Your network email address Or this could be a generic name used to iden tify the recorder No spaces Recipients Address Enter up to 12 email addresses of the destination you want the email to be sent to Templates These are user defined templates containing email text If you require standard text to be sent out in an email then set them up here and give it a template name These templates can be used with the events function to send an email as an effect of an occurrence See Event Effects on page 100 Select a template from the list add a Subject heading up to 50 characters and Message Body text as you would for a normal email Type into the message body text box up to 80 characters per line and up to 100 lines of text can be entered including Embedded Process Values on page 100 This will include specific pen data to your email Contact your IT Administrator for advice on entering Server name requireme
280. er sec Note 4 ond 20ms for up to 8 inputs for the Minitrend QX and 8 inputs for the Multitrend SX Totalisers 4 Each pen can be associated with a totaliser Using extra pens the totalised values can be dis Sterilisation played and recorded multiple totals can be calculated out of the same variable weekly monthly calculation Note 1 etc The totaliser function can handle Fo and Po sterilisation calculation Custom Screens Note 2 4 Import custom built screens that have been created in Screen Designer Reports 3 Generate reports manually or using the event system to show daily weekly monthly Totals Max Mins Averages Current Value Messages Message Lists Alarm System Diagnostic Security amp User Counters Digital Inputs and Digital Outputs Reports can be printed e mailed as an attachment or exported to external media in RTF format Health Watch 2 The recorder keeps track of important life actions for improved diagnostics and preventative Maintenance maintenance notification Including Power cycles Last powered up Total On time Total Off time Longest off time Battery life left Backlight life left at 10096 brightness Compact Flash insertions Hi Lo CJC value Hi amp Lo temps Analogue In last factory user cal Relay operations Print Support 2 Enables the printer option to print text from various screens using a standard PCL Printer Com mand Language printer connected to the USB port or to the network Batch
281. ere X is the group number 1 6 Batch name list Blname x Get the index of Batch name list entered at batch start Where x is the group 1 6 Batch user list Bluser x Get the index of Batch user list entered at batch start Where x is the group 1 6 Blkv BLKVx Get the local variable x This variable is local to this script There is a maximum of 20 local varia bles per script Compact Flash free storage CFFREE Returns the percentage of free storage space space available on the Compact Flash card CJC CJCn Get the Board CJC value N 1 to 6 Returns value in Degrees F C or K depending on the localisation setting CJC in Degrees C CJCnC Get the Board CJC value N 1 to 6 Always returns value in degrees C Comms Variables CVn Get the Comms variable n 1 to 96 Digitals Dn Get the value of Digital Input or Digital output n 1 to 48 Digital Input bit pattern DIOn Get the 16 bit pattern from the DIO slots where n 1 2 or 3 Slot G H amp I respectively Returned as a 16 bit word 0 to 65535 A channel config ured as an output is set to O EC1 to EC 20 EC1 Event Counters 1 to 20 File Transfer Protocol FTPHRS Returns the number of hours of safe recording recording hours left time available Glbv GLBVx Get the global variable x This is a global varia ble accessible to all scripts There is a maximum of 200 global variables 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Full Maths amp Script Processing Table
282. ere x is the digital output 1 to 49 where 49 is the power relay and y is the value 1 to set or 0 to clear The function will return the value set if successful if not successful it will return 1 0 this would be caused by trying to set and digital input rather then output See Table 14 2 Maths Function Table on page 298 Counters Menu Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Events Counters Counters Up to 16 User Counters are available and can be used as a part of the Events system User Counters can be set up as a Cause or an Effect of an Event Setup a User Counter Select the next available Counter number Enabled Mame Counter 1 Start At Rollover At am oe ee Enabled In the Counter menu tick to Enable Name Name the counter for ease of identification Start At Enter the number at which you want the counter to Start At Rollover Enter the number at which you want the counter to Rollover At The default maximum Rollover value is 3 3e 38 When the count reaches the rollover number entered it will restart the count from your Start At number Once a User Counter is setup it has to be assigned something to count eg as a part as an Event See User Counters on page 98 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 107 108 Preset Markers Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Events Counters Preset Markers Set up marker text that can be used to mark the chart
283. erver the IP address must be known of the PC where the databases server is held Items with a sign signifies there are items listed within Click on the sign to activate expand Listed under the Database Servers are a list of Servers Listed under each Server are the Databases Listed under each Database are the devices E This is the Database Server icon tl This is the Database icon The bottom window has three actions Client connections Database logging and Diag nostics When a device is selected from the top window details of the device s activity is displayed here A device logging to a database will display details in the Database logging tab 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Communications Server Realtime data will display in the Client connections tab The Diagnostics tab can be activat ed by going to Administration Preferences and ticking the Show Diagnostics box this will display properties and vales of a selected device Database Size Management Although there is no fixed maximum size for a Honeywell Trendview recorder database we recommend that they be limited to some practical limit rather than just letting it increase in size unchecked Large databases will impact the performance of your PC the larger the database the slower the performance of your PC will be eventually the PC would stop as the hard drive is filled up Another concern should be the protection of your database and ar
284. es of messages that may appear during Password NetSync set up Pwd NetSync Pwd NetSync Type Type Change of Type Warning Update Failure The type has been changed to standalone Are you sure you wish to Could not leave group please try continue again later This warns you that you are changing This may occur if someone is accessing the recorder Type in the Group the same group of recorders Slave Master or Stand Alone Pwd NetSync E Pwd NetSync Info E T T he password system will now rescan the network for available recorders Type Update Successful The password system was successfully This may take up to two minutes synchronised This message will appear when the All recorders in this group have had their recorder is scanning the network passwords synchronised successfully 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 151 152 Settings Main Menu Configure Settings Set Time Set up the Time and Date for the recorder s real time clock Check that the correct Time Zone is set before setting the clock See Localisation on page 117 Date Select each button to set the day month and year This will automatically update and be displayed on the Menu bar at the top of the process screen Time HH MM SS Select each button to set the hours minutes and seconds The hours selection provides a list and the minutes and seconds require a numeric entry This will automatically upda
285. ess Permis sion Area 21 Groups require sion Area 26 b Factory Supervisor access Permis ad e IS Mo Credits FW Upgrade Calibration Demo Traces iE Localisation Figure 5 10 Default password access from the Messages Menu Messages all 31 Diagnostics 3 lt q All messages screen have a button to clear remove the existing messages stored in the recorder for that particular area of messages Permission area 44 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Messages Menu No Login Required Except to clear the messages from each area requires Engineer access E System Messages Type Time 16 19 18 16 19 03 16 18 21 16 15 41 16 15 26 16 14 42 16 03 51 16 03 36 16 02 54 15 10 30 15 03 12 15 02 14 ADate Message 08 06 2007 Scheduled export failed no me 08 06 2007 Power On Off for Om 39s 08 06 2007 Setup Changed 08 06 2007 Scheduled export failed no me 08 06 2007 Power On Off for Om 41s 08 06 2007 Setup Changed 08 06 2007 Scheduled export failed no me 08 06 2007 Power On Off for Om 40s 08 06 2007 Setup Changed 08 06 2007 Failed to copy group 1 report F _ 08 06 2007 Scheduled export failed no me 08 06 2007 Setup Changed v gt Cs eee Toe 201 202 Figure 5 11 Default password access from the Comms Menu J TCP IP Network Admin Comms Menu Engineer access Permission Area
286. ething recognisable all recorders should be given different names Press OK On pressing OK then Done you will return to the External Import dialog box as above Check that Setup only and from Network FTP are still selected Then drop down the list and select the recorder you have just added The recorder name and IP address are in the list Finally select Import TrendServer Pro will download the setup from the recorder and this will be displayed in a setup window Press OK and this recorder setup will be added to the recorder list 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Note The recorder will be added to the list under the Recorder Name as set in the re corder itself This is the name that appears in the top right corner of the recorder screen when in normal logging mode NOT the name you gave the recorder when set ting up the FTP If you select the Recorder button on TrendServer Pro this will show a list of all recorders currently logged with a setup The recorder just added will be the last one on the list This name will be used to set up the Modbus Profile in Comms Server for the recorder Importing Data via FTP Select type of import as Data this is the same as for Importing from a directory except that when im porting data via FTP you will have a choice of New data or all data The All function will import all the data in the recorder s memory to the external device port The New function will
287. etup mismatch DIO in N A N A A DIO board was detected on the previous run but now an alarm Diagnostics setup updating to Alarm board has been detected therefore the alarm setup will be used Messages instead of the DIO Slot setup mismatch Alarm N A N A An alarm board was detected on the previous run but now a DIO Diagnostics in setup updating to DIO board has been detected therefore the DIO setup will be used Messages instead of the alarm Slot setup unspecified for Al N A N A A warning that a new Al board has been fitted Diagnostics card Messages Slot setup unspecified for N A N A A warning that a new AO board has been fitted Diagnostics AO card Messages Slot setup unspecified for N A N A A warning that a new pulse board has been fitted Diagnostics pulse card Messages Slot setup unspecified for N A N A A warning that a new DIO board has been fitted Diagnostics DIO card Messages Slot setup unspecified for N A N A A warning that a new alarm board has been fitted Diagnostics Alarm card Messages 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 347 Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Firmware upgrade N A N A Notification that the recorder has just detected that the software System Status and has been upgraded from the last successful run Messages Configuration Loaded N A N A Notification that the configuration has
288. evi has a different number of channels This will be as a result of a Messages ously currently y channels board upgrade downgrade Slot setup mismatch AO in N A N A An AO board was detected on the previous run but now an Al Diagnostics setup updating to Al board has been detected therefore the Al setup will be used Messages instead of the AO Slot setup mismatch AO in N A N A An AO board was detected on the previous run but now a pulse Diagnostics setup updating to Pulse board has been detected therefore the pulse setup will be used Messages instead of the AO Slot setup mismatch Al in N A N A An Al board was detected on the previous run but now an AO Diagnostics setup updating to AO board has been detected therefore the AO setup will be used Messages instead of the Al Slot setup mismatch Al in N A N A An Al board was detected on the previous run but now a pulse Diagnostics setup updating to Pulse board has been detected therefore the pulse setup will be used Messages instead of the Al Slot setup mismatch Pulse N A N A A pulse board was detected on the previous run but now an Al Diagnostics in setup updating to AI board has been detected therefore the Al setup will be used Messages instead of the pulse Slot setup mismatch Pulse N A N A A pulse board was detected on the previous run but now an AO Diagnostics in setup updating to AO board has been detected therefore the AO setup will be used Messages instead of the pulse Slot s
289. ew ones NB the wav files can be up to 100KB in size Prepare Sound Files The system will now update the sound files Please ensure files on the external media are in the format S lt no gt lt name gt way e g S1 Alert wav 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK AMS2750 Main Menu gt Configure gt Settings gt AMS2750 Disable Thermocouple Adjustment Factor One method of checking the recorder calibration is to connect a temperature calibrator TC simulator and inject known values These can be read on a standard DPM summary screen and checked against requirements So for example if 800 degrees is injected cus tomers would expect to see 800 degrees on all the inputs allowable tolerance If the TC Cal Adjustment factors have already been entered those TC offsets will be being applied and that changes the displayed temperature Whilst not technically incorrect it has lead to user confusion so a temporary means of switching the TC cal adjustment factors off has been added To access this switch navigate to the Configure menu and select the Settings button Once selected an AMS2750 button is shown and selecting this will let the user switch on or off the TC calibration adjustment This button is only be displayed if the AMS2750 Survey mode is enabled In order to ensure that the values are not omitted from an actual survey run the instrument automatically switches on these TC Cal Ad
290. f 15 15 15 15 Remember When entering a Decimal Static IP address no preceding 0 should be added for example 192 168 015 019 must be entered as 192 168 15 19 The provision for Entering IP information in different number system is applicable for TCP IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway DNS and WINS 78 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK DNS WINS MDNS Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Comms TCP IP DNS WINS MDNS Set to Automatic click on this to activate and de activate options DNS Domain Name Sys tem WINS Windows Internet Name Service MDNS Managed Data Network Services Auto DNS This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Toggles On and Off With this deactivated the DNS Server address can be changed from the default if required Pri DNS Address This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Only available when Auto DNS is deactivated Sec DNS Address This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Only available when Auto DNS is deactivated Auto WINS This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Toggles On and Off With this deactivated the Windows Internet Name Service can be changed from the default if required Pri WINS Address This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Only available when Auto WINS is deactivated Sec WINS Address This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Only available when Auto WINS is deactivated Auto MDNS This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Toggles On and Off This will d
291. f deviation allowed on a designated pen Ref Pen before an alarm is triggered For Rate Up and Rate Down enter as a percentage how far the signal can deflect before an alarm is triggered Ref Pen Only available when the Alarm Type is set to Deviation Select and enter the pen that this alarm is referenced to This works like an actual pen that dynamically tracks a designated pen Time Period Only available when the Alarm Type is set to Rate Up or Rate Down Enter in seconds how long the signal is allowed to deviate at the specified deviation level before an alarm is triggered Tag Enter a tag or name to identify this alarm Up to 17 characters Allow Change If activated this will allow quick configuration changes to this alarm level from the Alarms Configure button on the Main Menu This does not change the original setup Relays Out Select and choose which Relay Output s is triggered by this alarm on this pen only The Fixed button will use the common relay output on the power board 24V relay Common relay output is not available for the eZtrend QXe recorder Latched A latched alarm will maintain in its active state until the trigger source has returned to a non alarm state and the alarm has been acknowledged A latched alarm will continue to flash if an alarm marker or pen pointer is displayed until it is acknowl edged and in a non alarm state See Acknowledging Alarms on page 315A Reflash option is ava
292. f outside of y amp z otherwise returns 0 Over over x y Returns x if it s larger than y otherwise returns 0 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Full Maths amp Script Processing Table 14 3 Compare amp Convert Syntax Description Under under x y Returns x if it s less than y otherwise returns 0 Table 14 4 Script Timers Timers Syntax Description Tget tget x Returns the elapsed time of timer x since start Tpause tpause x Pauses the timer x Treset treset x Resets the timer x Trun trun x y Starts the timer x in y mode Mode 1 reset to 0 and run Mode 0 resume from previous value Timers must return a value All timer commands must have BLKV1 the variable e g BLKV1 tpause 1 Value returned is the same as tget 1 Timers count in seconds Maximum of 20 timers available 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 301 302 Full Maths amp Script Processing Table 14 5 Accessors Syntax Description Ai Ai x Get the value of Analogue Input number x Alamct Almct x y Get the current alarm count for Pen x Alarm y the alarm number as identified in alarm mes sages Alamrt Almrt x y Get the current alarm number for Pen x Alarm y Alamsl Almsl x y z Get the current alarm level set Pen x 1 96 Alarm y 1 6 New level to set z Eg P3 almsl 1 1 A3 will set
293. fault Start Port value of 8955 For more information see Peers on page 91 5 Ensure that passwords are enabled from Menu Configure Passwords User Admin Policy on all of the recorders to be included in a password group 6 Recorders in the same Master Slave password group must have the same revision of firmware 7 Recorders set up with ESS Extended Security System and non ESS recorders can not be mixed in the same password group 8 Choose a recorder to be the Master of the password group and go to the Pwd Net Sync dialog on that recorder from the Menu gt Configure gt Passwords menu Set the Type field to Master and the use the Associated Slaves field to pick from a list of availa ble recorders in order to make up the password group membership 9 If a recorder is a part of a password group and the network becomes disconnected then the recorder will notify you of the available options concerning its associated password group This will occur if you have to update a password or if you have the Alert function set up to provide an Alert message that says the network cable is unplugged of if you do a rescan of the system 10 To remove a recorder from a password group set the recorder back to a stand alone device and deactivate the Password Net Sync option in the Firmware Credits menu This will cause the recorder to reset This recorder will no longer be available for use in a password group But the password system and
294. faultAlCal Error writing Al calibration to EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 5 3 3 Board calibration history could not be persisted on Al card Diagnostics ROM MakeEmptyAlCalHist Error writing Al calibration history to EE Messages Error writing to NV EEP 6 3 3 Board calibration history could not be persisted on Al card Error Diagnostics ROM writing Al calibration history to EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 7 3 3 Board stats could not be persisted on AO card Error writing to Diagnostics ROM AO Board Stats in EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 8 3 3 Board calibration could not be persisted on AO card ReadDe Diagnostics ROM faultAOCal Error writing AO calibration data to EE Messages Error writing to NV EEP 9 3 3 Board calibration could not be persisted on AO card MakeEmp Diagnostics ROM tyAOCalHist Error writing AO calibration history to EE Messages Error writing to NV EEP 10 3 3 Board calibration history could not be persisted on AO card Diagnostics ROM Error writing AO calibration history to EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 11 3 3 Board stats could not be persisted on digital I O card Diagnostics ROM Error writing to DIO Board Stats in EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 12 3 3 Board stats could not be persisted on alarm card Error writing to Diagnostics ROM AR Board Stats in EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 13 3 3 Board stats could not be persisted on pulse card Error writing to D
295. fects Fsub0 Sterilisation Totals Start Stop Reset 168 Touch Sereen daseicictindietieu ai ibus ondas 278 Touch Test TRETEN 158 Trademarks si 1 Transmitter Power Supply Card 26 TrendManager Pro Software 261 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK CAMS2 730 senesinin iaria TrendManager Pro zs TrendServer Pro Trend Viewer sanirani iaaa Troubleshooting Error Messages sse 337 U USB Comms Ports 83 USB Devices Barcode Reader 7 eee Keyboards eese Print Support sss USB KEYS 5 cieanoiieeiemeriem USB Devices Overview USB Key Format USB Keys Gussneetondtulieinqin adi mde Update Tabular Readings Event Effects vammanen a re Era E EHE 106 User Action Event Causes Hot Button c User Calibration User Counters Event Cause 98 User MeSSIBES auceiisiuntenduidu AH HARE 165 User Variables Process Menu eene 170 Users Passwords 146 VWXYZ View Alarms Warnings and Precautions Web Browser Auto DNS nasse eiie ennt Web Enable Zoom In Zoom Out ees v ck wisn E ZOOMING Capabilities s xs nnnnnn Auto DNS e 433 434 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Sales and Service For application assistance current specifications pricing or name of the nearest Authorized Distributor contact one of the offices below
296. ferent shapes and sizes Both are used as a common connection point for devices in a network They are commonly used to connect segments of a LAN A hub contains multiple ports and when a packet Of data arrives at one port itis copied to the other ports so that all segments of the LAN can see all packets Switches work in a similar way but send the data directly from one port to another On a busy net work this can be quicker and can have less data collision incidents Ethernet cable to device Ethernet cable to PC Spare Ethernet ports for additional devices Ethernet Uplink option to other networks DC Power Supply 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 227 Hardware Installation Getting connected IP Address Stand alone system This is for connecting a local device direct to a PC using an Ethernet crossover cable By using a crossover cable the PC is able to receive data transmitted from the device Contact your IT systems administrator for setting up this link The TCP IP properties are displayed showing the PC s IP address and the Subnet mask Make a note of the IP Address and the Subnet mask If there is no IP address or Subnet mask displayed contact your IT systems administrator When this information is entered the next stage is to configure the device See TCP IP on page 77 Figure 8 1 Stand Alone system Switch hub
297. fore leaving the factory If when you use the recorder the screen does not match where you are touching it then calibration will be required Select the Calibrate button and follow the on screen instructions to calibrate the touch screen Touch Test Main Menu Screen Touch Test Use the Touch test feature to see if your touch screen is calibrated correctly Select this but ton and touch the screen using the stylus If the centre of the cursor follows the stylus around the screen then the touch screen is calibrated correctly If the centre of the cursor is not where the stylus is touching the screen then go to the Calibrate button and recalibrate the Screen 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Batch Setup Batch Control Main Menu Batch Batch is a firmware option which can be activated from Credits on page 112 The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis Batch mode has changed to allow for concurrent batches where each batch is associated with a group so all pens within Group 1 will belong to the batch that is controlled by Group 1 Setting up a batch requires information to identify where the batch starts and stops Batch data can also be paused for viewing and resumed A batch can be aborted at any time if so this will not register as a batch a batch is only complete when it has been stopped Screens can now be set to display groups in this mode only messages associated with t
298. fore the data will start to be recycled The default for the slider time coverage wise is set to a bias in the recorder to initially pro vide more space for data storage than chart replay You should set the bias to what best meets your data storage vs chart replay requirements The recorder is set to balance time coverage wise the chart and logged data equally depending on how many pens are enabled and what current chart speeds are set As you move the slider to the right towards Chart you will notice the allocated internal flash memory space for the chart data will increase in the bar above the slider As you move the slider to the left towards Log you will notice an increase in the internal flash memory for the Log data in the bar above the slider Log Chart Coverage Control Log Total Available Space 69MB Chart pile eIHM I 2 2 2 0402 s0n eeeeeneeeeeeeee H Alloc 32 5MB S Min Required Alloc 37 0MB Chart Total 10 Pens Running Fast 94d Medium 5 4 Slow 7 2w Log Total 7 Pens Logging Reset Shortest Pen 1 2Hz 9 5h 285 0KB Longest Pen 3 92Hz 11 9h 357 5KB Default Storage Bias screen 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 129 130 The Total Available Space bar also contains minimum chart and log memory allocation this is shown in the hatched areas at both ends of the bar You cannot use this reserved internal flash memory The Reset button will return the slider and the memory al
299. ge 257 shows an example from Internet Explorer 6 on a Windows XP machine The settings shown are for Internet access If the device is to be accessed in an intranet scenario then the same has to be done for local intranet option Firewall Settings If this device is sitting on an enterprise network with a firewall in place then the firewall should be configured to allow all requests on port 80 and port 976 this is for remote control Active X There is also one port for FTP control and one for OPC which should be opened Access to the firewall settings will differ depending on what firewall is installed Active X Control Depending on your set up and if passwords are active a dialog box will appear for Internet Explorer Digitally Signed Active X Control if prompted select Yes To browse multiple recorders IE8 or higher version is required 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Internet Security Settings Access to the firewall settings will differ depending on what firewall is installed Figure 8 10 Internet Security gt r yu rre II M Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings e amp 0o Internet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet 4 This zone contains all Web sites you haven t placed in other zones Security level for this zone Move the slider t
300. ge is calculated The prefill simply takes the current pen value and fills the queue with that average causing the damping effect to be baselined at the current reading No prfill will cause the first few samples to have a greater effect on the average as they will not be diluted by 60 samples but 1 2 3 4 up to 60 after the 10 minutes Group This pen can be allocated to a Group with other pens to display information be used for batch control or run reports on groups of pens Select this to display the list of available Pen Groups If you select a group here this pen will be added to it The maxi mum number of pens that can be grouped together are 32 The group can then be renamed to rename these groups see Groups on page 123 Groups are used as a part of the Batch system see Batch Menu on page 119 Groups are also used as a part of AMS2750 see AMS2750 Process Menu on page 353 Colour Each Pen has a Default Pen Colour but this can be changed if required Select and use the colour palette to set the pen colour Trace Width Select and set the Trace Width for this pen when it is displayed on a chart The default trace width is 1 with a maximum of 7 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Scale Menu Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Pens Scale Individually configure each scale per pen
301. ge media device and the corresponding button on the screen will become active select the relevant media button Enter the file name required in the File name box Maximum of 50 characters File format is ay click on the Save button For Network Share folder select the NAS button and the Save Layout to NAS dialog will open Enter the Layout file name in Filename and click on Save The CF card and the front USB device port are found under the front flap on the recorder There is another USB port at the rear of the recorder The first USB device fitted will be USB1 therefore the second USB device fitted is USB2 Compact Flash not available for the eZtrend QXe amp Device Selection kd CF Card Free 82 6 MB Free 195 5 Size 122 0 MB MB Size 247 2 MB lt For Saving and Loading Layouts NAS button will only be enabled if Use Share path is toggled on in Admin Network and NAS devices are enabled in Media Config on page 118 and an error Access Denied for Media will appear If ther Network Share folder is not available or incorrect then the fol lowing error will appear Please check folder is shared and network admin settings are cor rect Load Layout Main Menu gt Configure gt Layout gt Load Layouts can be loaded from a CF card USB key removable storage media or to a Network Share folder NAS Plug in a removable storage media device and the corresponding but ton on the screen will
302. gh CEN A 90 0 IL Allow Change v Relays Out None am alarm displays its individual When an alarm has been configured an Alarm Marker or Pen Pointer will appear for each alarm depending on the type of process screen See Alarm Markers on page 215 Enabled Select Enable to see a list of ways to enable or disable the alarm Disable Enabled Always or Dig Enabled Enabled by Digital Only available when Enabled is set to Dig Enabled Select and choose which digital signal s will enable this alarm on this pen only Type Select this to display a list of different types of Alarms High Low Deviation Rate Up or Rate Down Set a High alarm to activate when the signal goes above the Alarm Level or set a Low alarm to activate when the signal goes below the Alarm Level Deviation is the how far this pen can deviate from the Ref Pen before triggering an alarm See Deviation Level and Ref Pen Rate Up and Rate Down Alarms are used to trigger an alarm when the signal changes a defined amount over a specified time See Deviation Level and Time Period 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 71 72 Level Select and enter a figure at which the alarm is to be triggered Deviation Level Only available when Alarm Type is set to Deviation Rate Up or Rate Down Select and use the numeric keypad to enter the amount of deviation in engi neering units For Deviation enter the amount o
303. ght Blue starts when the point value for the survey setpoint begins to rise 0001 Multtrend SX 29 Aug 08 15 22 26 17h 130 Screen Temperature Uniformity Survey Running Time Username MA Started Fri Aug 29 15 21 07 No of TC s 8 Elapsed 1m 16 Stop TUS Class 2 Condition Running Max TC Min TC Max TC Diff Max TC SP Max Ramp Ramp TCLaginto Stable Soak Meets m Diff Overshoot duration Soak Duration Class TC s Stabilized Manual 0 Mins Override TCO Toco TCO TCO Too TCO 0 Mins 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F TCO Toco TCO TCO Too TCO 0 Mins 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F Restart Soak 15 20 00 4100 pg 29 Aug 05 23 Aug 05 28 B 23 50390 14 50 00 15 00 00 Max TC TC7 359 64 When the recorder is in Detect phase the timers for monitoring the duration of this step will start At the top of the TUS screen It will also indicate the process is Running along with other status information concerning this particular survey The recorder is in Detect mode when any or all sensors are outside any of the pre defined soak temperatures and the point value for that survey setpoint begins to rise The recorder monitors all sensors in this mode checking them with each soak level when all sensors levels fall within one of the soaks for a qualification period of 2 minutes then the recorder proceeds to in soak mode The Detect out of soak mode is timed this tracks the ramp time until
304. guration and their associated condition and View the current alarm status See Alarms Menu on page 154 Screen The Screen Menu includes an Edit button to configure Pen Channel mapping Replay previous data Screen List to change the screen currently being displayed and Clean Screen facility There are Calibrate and Touch Test features to re calibrate the screen See Screen Menu on page 155 Batch The Batch function manages sections of data Batch markers are configured by the user and are used to identify and analyse batches of data See Batch Setup Batch Control on page 159 Recording Start or Stop recording Export Now will transfer data to external media such as CF card USB key or Network Share folder NAS See Hecording Menu on page 162 Messages The messages screen will display certain message areas Specific types of messages have been put into categories or all messages can be viewed See Mes sages Menu on page 165 Process Controls for any process in use eg Max Mins Totals Counters User Varia bles Script Timers and Reports can be controlled from this screen See Process Menu on page 168 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Status Displays status information screens that are available to the user these will provide information for reporting and diagnostic purposes See Status Menu on page 172 Finish When an operation is complete use the Finish button to Commit Discard or Com
305. gure Operator View Alarms No Login Configure Alarms requires Operator access Permission Area 9 View Alarms requires No Login Permission Area 5 Ack Alarm menu 2 Operator access Permission Area 8 All of the Acknowledge Alarm buttons require lt Pl Back Fish Operator access Figure 5 7 Default password access from the Screen Menu and Edit layout menu x n 0001 QX c Edit Layout f ie ge a 11 May 06 14 54 10 1S4 100 00 pan 1 EZT 25 18 eo oe Pen 2 Screens Settings Appearance 24 071 hl al mE Screen Pm 0 00 P Th WA Finisl EN E E mon d N Screen Edit Edit layout Supervisor access All of the Edit functions in the status bar re 51 quire Supervisor access Custom Screens Back Finish are not available for the eZtrend QXe Screen menu No Login required Permission Area 2 Edit Supervisor access Replay No Login required List No Login required Clean Screen No Login required Calibrate Engineer Access Touch Test Engineer Access Calibrate and Touch Test Engineer access Used to cal ibrate the touch screen Premission area 40 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 199 Figure 5 8 Default password access from the Process Menu Process Menu No Login required Max Min No Login Totals No Login Counters No Login User Variables Operator Script Timers Operator Reports Operator
306. gured for each thermocouple con figuration as per AMS2750 Up to 6 setpoints can be configured individually as a part of a single survey The setpoints must be done in an increasingly progressive order Edit Setup I O AMS2750 2 AMS2750 Enabled Setpoint 150 0 Deg C Stable Soak Time 30 Mins Tolerance Override v Tolerance 2 0 Deg C Enabled Default is off Check to enable Setpoint Enter the survey setpoint value as a temperature Stable Soak Time soak time for the actual survey period Per AMS2750 the minimum survey soak time is 30 minutes Tolerance Override Check to enable This will become the working tolerance for the soak in the TUS as opposed to the tolerance for the class Tolerance set a tolerance override temp value When all the details are complete select Finish and Commit or go Back to the Furnace or Stability Detect menus 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 371 TUS mode Sensor Configuration Menu TUS Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt I O AMS2750 gt Sensors Refer to AMS2750 section 3 1 and Table 1 and Table 2 for Thermocouple information The number of sensors available depends on the hardware fitted in the recorder The menu configuration is the same as Sensors Configuration Menu Process Mode on page 359 Sensor Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt I O AMS2750 gt Sensors gt Sensor The menu configuration is the same as Se
307. h as Pen 1 going into an alarm state and the effect of this could be to start a totaliser or acknowledge the alarm Select the first available event eg Event 1 In the Event 1 menu tick to enable and change the Event tag if required Each Event has four Causes and four Effects available these can be used in different combinations NOTICE Remember that any of the Causes will trigger All the Effects Cause 1 and Effect 1 are not linked Anevent can have up to 4 causes that triggers just one effect eg A pen going into alarm a Totaliser starts Max Mins reset and a Batch starts This could have the effect of starting Logging Anevent can have one cause that has up to 4 effects eg A pen could go into alarm and the effects could be that the alarm is acknowledged and a Totaliser is started there is a Mark placed on the chart and an Alarm is sounded See Event 1 example on page 95 An event can have up to 4 causes that have up to 4 effects eg A pen goes into alarm and a Totalisers is started A scheduled export starts and Max Min values are reset The effects could be the alarm is acknowledged and a mark on chart is displayed to show the start of the totaliser an Email is sent to notify a scheduled export has been made and a sound effect is played to identify the Max Min values have been reset In summary Cause 1 2 3 or Cause 4 will trigger Effect 1 2 3 and Effect 4 When selecting Totalisers and Alarms etc ensure they
308. han amp 08 09 2008 Upscale burnout on chan 5 lv When the end of life of a thermocouple is reached a message is added to the system mes sage list to indicate a thermocouple has reached end of life for each thermocouple When the recorder is in AMS2750 process mode as an option in the credit menu you can not select the Track Usage option for B R or S type Thermocouples Per AMS2750 these are considered noble metal thermocouples and should be tracked based on when they require recalibration and not based on uses The other types of ther mocouples can be selected for the track usage function but the B R or S types greyed out and cannot be selected 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK TUS mode TUS mode Temperature Uniformity Survey TUS Mode The Temperature Uniformity Survey TUS is a key requirement for a Nadcap audit The ba sic test is to determine how well a furnace performs relative to it s design In particular the uniformity of the temperature within the volume of the working area of the furnace compared to the programmed setpoint There are 6 classes of Furnace Class 1 to 6 based on how well they maintain the temper ature within the furnace working area with class 1 being the tightest and Class 6 the least stringent The TUS is performed on a regular basis to insure the furnace continues to meet the uni formity that is defined by the process procedures and the requirements for heat treating
309. hat group i e pens within that group or batch messages for that group will be shown on the chart If the groups in Batch Control are greyed out you need to go to the Pens menu and assign individual pens to a group See Pens Menu on page 67 Up to 6 batches can be run concurrently To start a batch enter information in all the required screens that have previously set up in the Batch Menu on page 119 For batch mode state and count in Maths scripts see Maths Variable and Function Ta bles on page 296 For batch mode state and count in embedded variables see Embed ded examples on page 101 Select a Group Batch Name Name to Identify the batch up to 19 characters User ID Identification of user starting the batch If Passwords are active on the recorder then the User ID page will be skipped for user entry and will be automatically entered up to 19 characters Lot No Add a batch Lot No if required up to 11 characters Desc Enter a description of what the batch is up to 17 characters Comment Add any further comments Lot No Desc and Comment are the default field names The field names can be changed in General Batch Properties on page 119 If Allow Direct Access has been setup in the Batch Menu on page 119 then a Barcode Reader can be used to make entries for all the items listed in this menu See Barcodes for Batch on page 162 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 159 160
310. he Help menu and the About sub menu gives version information of the application 396 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK AMS2750 Report Generation Tool Browse Logo You can insert your own company Logo image which will appear on the top of every page of the generated report A new folder Images will be created after you select Browse Lo go and be stored along with the application When you use a logo it will be stored in this Images folder for future use You can select any logo image so long as it is either bmp or jpg format It should not be any bigger than 14mm 0 55 height x 63 5 2 5 width Ideal dimensions in pixels are 81x81 96x96 300x300 When the first report with new logo is created Honeywell jpg will be saved in images folder as a backup for future After selecting any logo another file with name logo jpg will be created and placed in the images folder This logo will be used for subsequent reports until user selects another im age If you select logo jpg again from the Images folder a message will appear informing you that this file is already selected and prompting you to select another if this one is no long er required A backup copy of the Honeywell logo will always be kept at this location with name Honey well jpg This can be used at any time to re use the logo again in the report Add a Logo Select Browse Logo and browser the window will open Go to where your logo is located an
311. he back button and if all is correct confirm using the tick button This will have imme diate effect The update could take up to 2 minutes 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 149 Figure 4 2 Password Network Synchronisation setup Pwd NetSync Type Password Group xS 100023 x5 133331 0001 0005 XS 100018 XS 100062 0023 XS 100005 0270 XS 123412 0617 150 xXS 100061 0666 XS 123456 0069 xXS 100255 0711 xXS 100075 0855 Turbine Station Pump Station If Master is selected a keypad will be displayed to enter the new password group name If Slave is selected a list of existing password groups will be displayed xS 100015 0354 XS 100009 0101 UK22SW JLP 0540 This screen is available for a Master recorder so associated slaves can be added to its password group Only recorders with Pwd NetSync enabled will be displayed here Recorders in red do not belong to any password group and are availa ble to be added to a group Touch the screen to select from the available recorders shown in red Recorders that are enabled for password net sync and that already belong to this password group will be displayed in green 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Pwd Net Sync Messages Certain selections may cause the recorder to display specific messages when an entry or action has been executed Here are some examples of some messages that may appear during Pwd Net Sync setup Exampl
312. he first log The data readings are built at the end of the relevant processing cycle on the aligned 2 minute time period they are compiled into a single record which has a total capacity for 48 inputs Each record contains a Date and time an event indicator 48 readings and a CRC A logged data file is generated on internal Compact Flash this provides the storage for the full TUS logged data and will contain only the logged data TUS Soak data The soak information is maintained in a single NV SRAM record this stores all information relating to Max Min deviation and timers for all 48 channels Only the active channels are populated The information will be built up over the period of the ramp soak Once a soak have been completed the soak record will be saved to a soak data file The soak data file will hold a maximum of 6 soaks and will be pre generated on the internal CF card in the root directory Power loss during TUS If power is lost during TUS the TUS resumes when power is re applied if the power outage has been less than 20 minutes a power outage of more than 20 minutes automatically stops the TUS when power is re applied If power is lost during TUS and is less than 20 minutes then the TUS automatically resumes the data is marked that power was lost and the duration for which it was lost If power is lost during TUS and TUS is resumed any uncompleted soak is reset 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 391 Passw
313. her loca tion before being transferred onto removable media ensure that both the bcf and lay files are copied over A warning message will appear if the bcf file is missing Loading a Template into a Recorder One or more Templates can be loaded into a recorder added to a recorder screen or screens and displayed To save a template in Screen Designer onto removable media refer to the Screen Designer manual Fit the removable media into the recorder and go to Main Menu Configure Layout and select Load The Device selection menu will appear to select the correct media Enter a new file name if required and press the Load button Go to Main Menu Configure Layout Edit and select Add Screen Go to the Template Type option and your template will be listed here Select your template and it will be added to a screen re name the screen as required To display the new Layout go to the Screen button in the Main menu bar at the top of any process screen and select the next button to scroll through the screens Loading a Layout into a Recorder One or more Layouts can be loaded into a Recorder and displayed To save a Layout in Screen Designer onto removable media refer to the Screen Designer manual Fit the removable media into the recorder and go to Main Menu Configure Layout and select Load The Device selection menu will appear to select the correct media Select the desired layout and press the Load button Go to Main M
314. hermo couples as the measurement device and to protect the wiring and terminals For the rear cover part number see Section 10 Spares List on page 263 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 45 Multitrend SX Rear Connections AC supply Wire seal 100 250VAC Eeg eet a z Analogue Input Earth screw 1 m ker dine EM round adi ground Slot B Slot C 20 to 55VDC Slot D 20 to 30VAC Analogue Input 24 48V Instrument Pulse Input power option Analogue Output Slot E lot F Common Relay Set Output SPNC Alarm or Digital I O Slot G Slot H Slot 24V TX Power Supply Output CJC Sensor Slots A to F Ethernet RS485 USB Host 100 250VAC Rear Panel AC power is connected via the standard configuration IEC chassis plug on the rear panel An optional rear cover is available for this recorder it is recommended when using Thermo couples as the measurement device and to protect the wiring and terminals For the rear cover part number see Section 10 Spares List on page 263 46 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Section 4 Recorder Setup Power up Configuration of the recorder is performed in the Menu screens and the data is displayed in the Process screens This section takes you through the Menu system and how to set up your recorder See Section 6 Screen Configuration on page 205 for information on setting up screens to display the data User Interface Control
315. hese are the dimensions for the qualified working area Inst Type Instrument Type A to E Refer to AMS2750 section 3 3 1 1 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 369 TUS mode Into cycle at used to define a temperature cycle for a certain number of uses When the furnace has reached the high temperature set here and then falls below the Low temperature set in the menu below this is a complete temperature cycle Eg Into cycle is set to 110 can go higher in use once it drops back to the Out of cycle set eg Out of cycle is set to 90 the cycle is complete Out of cycle at Set Out of cycle as explained above in Into Cycle When all the details are complete select Finish and Commit or go Back to Stability Detect and setpoint menus Stability Detect Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt I O AMS2750 gt AMS2750 gt Stability Detect During the TUS the recorder starts to monitor all sensors for stability all sensors must re main stable for a minimum of 2 minutes in order to progress to in soak in stability mode no TC s can drift by more than X degrees within a 2 minute period for stability to be achieved X defaults to 0 5 Deg C See During survey on page 383 This time is determined by how you set up the stability parameters whether you base it on time or the degree temperature variation The tolerance hysteresis of the soak stability detection can be adjusted to suite the user
316. hown that temperature variations were present but was not of high enough resolution to pinpoint the cause Again as in example 1 the measured inputs would show long periods of stable constant readings interspersed with small sharp increases in temperature In order to track the cause of these variations it was necessary to maximise the time resolution of the data This appli cation was ideally suited to the Fuzzy Logging data storage technique as the periods of in activity would result in compression rates of over 50 times Example 3 Logged Data Example The diagram below is a sample of actual logged data in both the Fuzzy Logging method top and Sample Logging method bottom derived from the same analogue input 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 321 322 It provides an excellent illustration of how less data points can be used to construct an iden tical trace Fuzzy Logged j m Sampled Logged Diagram 2 Note This data extract was taken from a 56 hour temperature run which resulted in approx imately 1 Mbyte of sample data and approximately 40 Kbyte of Fuzzy Logged data A compression ratio of 25 times Anything else it can do Yes Fuzzy Logging can be used as a One Hit recording button In applications where the measured process is new or the ideal scan rate is unknown Fuzzy Logging is ideal as it adapts the log rate to the input signal and can therefore find the opti m
317. i p BuwyEmmer i Identification Of the Testing Company If not performed In House Signature for the Testing company If not performed In House mum qum pum cm Setromt soo foam EE SePomz ooo CIT Beste Report Reference Number Rer iii Wr em eem Rs m eem pa em eem Report Generated By AMS2750 TUS Report Tool All measured values except the comrol TC are corrected Page Sof 12 416 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Sample pages taken from a test TUS report Report Reference Number 345 Customer Heat Treatment Plant a ip Hmn NAME 1 derived from EE Cal ary Report Generated By AMS2750 TUS Report Tool All measured values except the contro TC are corrected 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 417 Sample pages taken from a test TUS report Report Reference Number 345 Customer Heat Treatment Plant Equipment Furnace 1 Qualified Work Area e fw 3 Emm 8 Norm 00 vara Oniy nace Report Generated By 4M52750 TUS Report Tool All measured values except rhe consol TC are corrected Page Sof 12 418 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Sample pages taken from a test TUS report Report Reference Number 345 Customer Heat Treatment Plant Equipment Furnace 1 M tig A Uniformity Survey Results All channels shown are corrected Report Generated By AMS2750 TUS Report Tool All measured values except the
318. ia See Media Status on page 184 Diagnostics kd m Hardware Events Comms Finish 178 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Hardware Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Hardware Complete diagnostics are shown for each of the following categories Analogue In Status See Analogue In Status on page 179 Analogue Out Status See Analogue Out Status on page 180 Alarm Digital IO Status See Alarm Digital IO Status on page 180 Pulse Input Status See Pulse Inputs Status on page 181 Analogue In Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Hardware Analogue In HB Analogue Input Statu Channel 1 v A 2 2 v A3 3 v ad 4 v A 5 5 v 4 6 6 v As 7 v A 8 8 v 0 71 mY 0 01 mY 0 02 V 0 02 V 0 02 V 0 02 V 0 02 V 0 02 V Type J 250mV Type T 25mY X12V X12V 12 12 12 12 Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Sample Rate lf 2Hz 500ms 2Hz 500ms 2Hz 500ms 2Hz 500ms 2Hz 500ms 2Hz 500ms 2Hz 500ms 2Hz 500ms XXXXXXX Sensor comp Pen Mone Dual Dual None None None None None aes I ETE Channel Displays the Slot position eg A B or C D E F the Analogue Input number and the system channel position This will show a tick if this channel is enabled Input Displays the current Analogue Input reading for this channel See Thermo
319. iable A1 P1 D1 etc Scripting is not available for the QXe Front and Rear USB Ports USB host ports front and rear for data and setup transfers through these ports External devices keyboard or mouse Barcode reader or external mass storage device Rear USB Host is available as an option on the Comms card for the QXe Standard Screens and Custom Fully programmable display values in engineering units Time amp date stamp on every division pro Screens viding the current time and date Sets of Standard screens are available to display data on a chart digital reading bargraphs or numerous combinations thereof Screen properties can be modified on the recorder and custom ised to suit Custom screens created in the Screen Designer software can be imported into the recorder for specialist applications Custom Screen firmware option is required Digital values displayed include alarms on bars engineering units pen name tag time and date 20 character description and totalised values Custom Screens are not available as an option for the QXe 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 283 Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Specification Design Attributes Data Storage Removable Media Compact Flash card supports up to 8 0 Giga bytes Compact Flash is not avail able as an option for the QXe Local Mass Storage Options USB memory key no size restriction but must be formatted FAT FAT16 TFAT FAT
320. iagnostics ROM PI Board Stats in EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 14 3 3 The I O board serial number could not be saved Error writing Diagnostics ROM Board ID to EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 15 3 3 The I O board calibration information could not be saved Error Diagnostics ROM writing Board Calibration to EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 16 3 3 The I O board stats information could not be saved Diagnostics ROM Error writing Stats to EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 17 3 3 The AO board calibration information could not be saved Error Diagnostics ROM writing AO Cal values to EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 18 3 3 The AO board calibration defaults could not be saved Error writ Diagnostics ROM ing defaults to AO cal history in EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 19 3 3 Could not write the initial resistance held for active burnout Error Diagnostics ROM writing Al loop resistance to EEPROM at start up Messages 342 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Error writing to NV EEP 20 3 3 Could not write the current resistance held for active burnout Diagnostics ROM Error writing Al Current loop resistance to EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 21 3 3 Could not write the initial resistance held for active bu
321. ially one bit at a time over the shared signal channel attached to each device It is up to the high level protocol that is sending data over the network to make sure that the data is correctly received at the destination device Devices attached to an Ethernet network can send application data to one another using high level protocol software such as TCP IP protocol suite High level protocols have their own system addresses such as the 32 bit addresses used in the current version of IP The high level IP based networking software in a device is aware of its own 32 bit IP address and can read the 48 bit Ethernet address of its own network in terface but it doesn t know the Ethernet addresses of the other devices on the network To discover the Ethernet addresses of other IP based devices on the network another high level protocol is used For TCP IP this is done using a protocol called Address Resolution Protocol ARP Example Device X has an IP address of 195 23 37 1 and sends data over the Ethernet channel to another IP based device Device Y with IP address 195 23 37 2 Device X sends the pack ets of information containing an ARP request The ARP request is asking the device with the IP address of 195 23 37 2 to identify the address of the Ethernet Interface Only Device Y with the IP address of 195 23 37 2 will respond sending a packet with the Ethernet address of device Y back to device X Now device X and Y have each others
322. ices 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 163 164 Buttons become active when a device is fitted Once fitted the size of the device memory and the amount of available space is displayed Select the desired device to export to and this will display two options New and All The All function will export all the data in the recorder s memory to the external device port The New function will just export any new data since the last export was made to this port If an Export Now is requested within 5 seconds of a Scheduled export being activated the manual export will not occur poses Selection CF B8 USB 1 Free 82 6 MB Free 1p5 5 Size 122 0 MB MB Size 24Y 2 MB CE to USB 1 Required Required Space Space 455 KB 54 MB Device Selection If the Device Selection buttons are greyed out you will need to insert a CF card or USB key into the port or select Network Share folder NAS After a few seconds the button becomes active Compact Flash not available for the eZtrend QXe USB1 is the first USB device to be fitted and USB2 is the second one fitted front or rear of the recorder If the recorder is powered off and on again the USB keys will have to be refitted in order to know which is 1 and which is 2 Export busy light When data is about to be exported to a device the transfer busy light starts flashing The flashing LED is a warning that the recorder is about to export to media DO NOT remove the me
323. ick on a comms port or a device in the left window or a device in the top window displaying the device for that port Connect to a new Database Server a Use this icon button to connect to a database server either a Local or Remote Serverthat has been added to the database servers list Connection can be made by selecting Database Servers in the left window and then right clicking in a clear space in the top window displaying the database servers list 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 237 238 Communications Server Comms ports The Communication Ports is a list of ports available COM1 to COM8 and Ethernet As de vices are added they are displayed under the port name Click on Communication Ports to display a list of all the ports in the main window tick the required port to enable Click on a port and the main window splits into two windows top and bottom The top window displays details of the devices using that port including device D No de vice Name Mode and Status show if the device is connected how many Channels the device has enabled an Active button to activate the device and the device s IP Address As devices get added to each port they will display in the list for that particular port The default is N 8 1 which means no parity 8 data bits and 1 stop bit This is currently the only byte option supported by Comms Server Database Servers The Database Server will list databases and display the devices with
324. ilable to keep the alarm flashing whilst in an alarm state even after it has been acknowledged See Reflash Change Log Toggles On and Off Select this to change the Log speed when an alarm occurs The Log rate changes when alarm is active and stays at the alarm rate for as long as the alarm is active then returns to the normal logging rate Set up the new alarm logging rate in Alarm Rate in Logging Menu on page 69 Mark Chart Toggles On and Off Selecting On will place a Mark on the Chart with automated messages when the alarm becomes active From the position of the Mark on Chart the chart background colour will change to show it is in an alarm state Email Alarm Enable this to send an email when any alarm is triggered on this pen This function is a firmware option that is activated from the Factory menu gt Credits on page 112 Recipients Only available when email has been enabled Select your recipients from the list provided Email addresses and Server names must be entered in Email on page 87 Hysteresis not available for Deviation Toggles On and Off When this is activated you can set a tolerance level for an alarm It allows a specified percentage value of the span of the scale to be added to the alarm level Hyst Level not available for Deviation alarm Enter as a percentage of the span of the scale This is how much tolerance the signal can have past the set alarm activation point until the alarm is de ac
325. ility optional The recorder keeps track of important life actions for improved diagnostics and preventative mainte nance notification Including Powered On Last powered On Time On since power up Total On time Total Off time Longest Off time Lithium cell life Backlight life left at 10096 brightness Hi Lo CJC value Hi amp Lo temps Analogue In last factory user cal Relay operations last configuration change Print Support optional Enables the printer option to print from various Status screens using a basic USB standard PCL Printer Command Language printer Batch Groups The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis The Batch function manages sections of data Concurrent batches are now associated with a group of pens The pens within each group will belong to the batch that is controlled by that group Batches can be controlled through the event system and batch markers are setup by the user and used to identify and analyse batches of data Supports up to 6 concurrent batches Counters User Counters can be set up and used as a part of the Events system to count an occurrence Other counters are available depending on hardware availability Eg Alarm Event Digital Input Relay Output and Pulse counters Modbus Master Modbus master enables the recorder to communicate with up to 32 Slave devices on both Ethernet and RS485 The recorder itself can also act as a slave de
326. ilsafe Relay Positions on page 282 Relay Output Specification The Minitrend QX recorder will provide the ability to have at least 1 relay output for each analogue input i e 16 Multitrend SX recorder will also provide at least one relay output for each analogue input i e 48 there are three available slots for Digital inputs Relay Out puts Up to 8 relay outputs are available for the eZtrend QXe recorder Common Alarm Output Not available for the eZtrend QXe recorder The common alarm output include a single alarm relay This relay is the same rating as those on the 8 amp 16 Digital I O cards This relay is NC normally closed and can be activated by any alarm This relay will close when power is removed This relay is identified as Fixed in the relay output pick lists Rating 24Vdc 1A Resistive Load Digital Input Cards Three options for digital inputs are available 8 Digital Inputs 8 Digital I O card this 8 channel card allows the user to configure each channel to be either relay output or digital input Relay output rated at 24V DC 1 Amp rated resistive load 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 281 282 Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification 16 Digital Inputs Not available for the eZtrend QXe recorder 16 Digital I O card this 16 channel card allows the user to configure each channel to be ei ther relay output or digital input Relay output rated at 24V DC 1 Amp rated resistive load Digit
327. ily solved by using the Script Function in the recorder represented in pseudo code the script is as follows If input 1 is bigger than all the others then make the global variable 1 equal to channel 1 and display and record input 1 If input 2 is bigger than all the others then make the global variable 1 equal to channel 2 and display and record input 2 If input 3 is bigger than all the others then make the global variable 1 equal to channel 3 and display and record input 3 If none of the above are correct then Input 4 must be the highest so make the global variable 1 equal to channel 4 and display and record input 4 Display the global variable 1 on another pen to show which channel is biggest at any given time Pen 5is chosen to record the highest channel input and channel 6 is chosen to record which input is the highest oon The greater than gt is used the AND amp amp Boolean is also used and the global variable GLBV1 is used to hold the current highest channel number Converting this to an actual script gives the following If A1 gt A2 amp amp A1 gt A3 amp amp A1 gt A4 This tests if flow meter 1 is more than 2 3 and 4 GLBV1 1 If yes then set display indicator to meter 1 return A1 And return the current flow reading elseif A2 gt A1 amp amp A2 gt A3 amp amp A2 gt A4 This tests if flow meter 2 is more than 1 3 and 4 GLBV1 2 If yes then set display indi
328. ime period here for the amount of time that screen will be displayed range 0 to 3600 seconds Alarm Screen Select which screen is to be displayed when any pen goes into an alarm state Only changes colour if Mark on Chart is enabled in the Alarms Menu on page 71 Alarm Screen Name Only active if Alarm Screen is enabled Replay Screen TO TimeOut If the recorder is in replay mode and there has not been any user activity for a defined amount of time then the replay screen will return to the process screen Replay TimeOut only active if Replay Screen TO is enabled Enter how long in min utes before the replay screen returns to a process screen Defaults to 10 minutes Menu Bar TO When you select an item from the menu bar along the top of the proc ess screen it will produce a sub menu bar This sub menu bar can have a display time assigned to it before it automatically disappears and returns to the main menu bar Enter here the amount of time before the menu bar is hidden For screens that have been created in the Screen Designer software and have been designed specifically without the menu bar being displayed The menu bar at the top of the screen will appear on the recorder automatically but can be hidden so the full area of the screen can be displayed Enter here the amount of time before the menu bar is hidden Hourly Stamps The Hourly stamps appear on the Trend Screen instead of the date and time stamps for chart spee
329. in each database as they are added Click on any of the database servers or the database within and details of that item are displayed in the main window The main window will split to give additional in formation for databases showing comms port and device details Devices are added to the comms server through the Communications port the device can then be configured for logging The devices appear in the database and these databases are held within database servers Figure 8 5 Comms Server Overview on page 236 shows the comms status screen in the left window from the top is displayed Database Serv er Local and remote database and devices held on the Local database All Logging config uration for comms logging and logging to a database is set up from the Comms Server Connected databases are displayed with a green icon If the database is in red it is not con nected check the P Address and Device ID are correct and a protocol has been selected on the device Un tick and then tick the active box on the comms server to restart the data base connection This section looks at the Comms Server s main elements displayed in the Status Screen Database Servers Local and Remote Servers Databases Communication Ports Data base logging and Client connections Remote database servers can be added to the list to enable access to devices held in other databases on a remote database server in another location To connect to a remote data base s
330. in the in dividual group screen eg Show List Sets of functions are available to retrieve the list index from within Maths allowing state based processing during user selection See Figure 14 1 Maths Variable Table on page 296 Name Props Enter the name of the batch name and setup a list of additional names to appear as a pick list as a part of the Batch Control screen see Batch Setup Batch Contro on page 159 User ID Props Enable this to make this a requirement when starting a new batch The User ID display name can be renamed and a list of additional names can be setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup If Passwords are active on the recorder then the User ID page will be skipped for user entry and the name of the per son logged in through the password system will be automatically entered Field 1 Props Defaults to Lot Enable this to make this a requirement when starting a new batch The Lot number display name can be renamed and a list of additional names can be setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup The addi tion list names will not appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen unless you enable Show n List in the group properties menu See Group on page 121 Field 2 Props Defaults to Description Enable this to make this a requirement when starting a new batch The Description display name can be renamed and a list of addi tional na
331. inem te mrriasin Edit Recording Menu Scheduled Export Storage Alarm T Storage Bids case ente teet Edit Screen Properties Custom Screens Standard Screens ES Edit Setup Mee C Edit Standard Screens ss 155 Electrical Installation 24V DC Input AC POWER iateleteseei entendre ien Alarm Relay Card Connections Analogue Input Card oe Analogue Output Card oo Cables 5 ensenseneonon memento Comms Connections DC amp AC POWet croesir Digital IO Card Connections lur cq e Installation Category Pulse Input Card sss SPNC Relay nenin o a metet s Signal Wing eene Transmitter Power Supply Card Email Event ET cts iecore meets 103 Email Alarm 72 Embedded Process Values 100 Events Menu aiid eiennoneeimeisie etis Enable Hot Button Ending the Survey Enter Replay Screen Event Effects iaisnosseenenn eene ibn 106 Error Alert 426 Error Messages 337 Ethernet Connections esee Reat Pott 22e Ethernet Appendix E Event Causes ssie AMS2750 Timer serene Alari eot ete pie Ins Batch Counters Digital Input eee Hot Button eee Max Mins Reset sss Scheduled Event Causes nca mM TC Burn OUL 3 etri i teris MUS Start cese meae E TUS Stop Totaliser User ACON t es Event Chart Controls Event Effects sss T Alarm Acknowledge Backlight 2rd dnte then Batch
332. ing Dwell Zone for setpoint 2 SP2 Value mxo2 Maximum temperature overshoot recorded prior to P2 The value for mxo1 in this example would be the value of the TC at P1 as there is no measured over shoot Point P2 The point where all TC s are stable and lie within the SP2 Tolerance limits Value mxs2 Maximum temperature value during the SP2 dwell period 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK TUS mode Start a Survey The start TUS button will produce the configuration confirmation wizard see Configure Confirmation Wizard on page 376 At the end of the wizard the Start TUS dialog appears This allows you to enter 150 charac ters of free format notes using the SIP or a keyboard if attached which is included in the TUS data file and the report generated by the AMS2750 Report Generation Tool You can select cancel to return to the process screen but any notes that were entered will be lost When a TUS is running you will not be allowed to enter configuration i e when a survey is running you cannot enter setup The user will have to complete or abort the TUS to enter configuration mode You can press the start button this will return to the process screen and start the TUS mon itoring When the TUS is started an event will be triggered identifying this and a message will be logged into the system events Warning messages may appear if a previous TUS file has not been exported Only one TUS file is saved in the memory
333. ing of data 6 Smaller data files for remote collection How does it work Fuzzy Logging does not log data points that form part of a straight line The technique is best illustrated by the diagram below 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 319 320 Input Signal Continuously Sampled data CS 12 points only Y Fuzzy Logged data Changing slope requires more data points to be logged to capture the shape correctly Diagram 1 Points marked O are NOT logged as they lie on an imaginary straight line between points marked The graph of the Fuzzy Logged data looks identical to the graph of the sampled data but has taken less than half the points to build it What about Spikes on my trend line Won t it miss them NO you will not miss any Spikes Glitches or Transients these are what you need to see As Fuzzy Logging is an adaptive technique it will log as fast as it needs to in order to capture everything Although not all points are logged the base Scan Rate of the input is the same as if you were using a standard logging technique 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK What about slowly drifting inputs Again No Problem The algorithm is processed in Real Time i e as the reading is taken As it already knows the previous logged readings it can calculate where the next point should be assuming it s on a straight line if the measured value does n
334. inter Menu on page 122 The Network Share Path NAS can be used for loading and saving layouts lay and or set up files set saving exporting reports any messages Diagnostic system etc loading sound files from this network share to recorder This can also be used to print to file and this file can be saved to this network shared folder The use of the network folder for Scheduled export is not recommended since network con nectivity and network problems could result in the risk of missing data due to the Scheduled export not being performed at the scheduled time and the folder not being updated Note The network share folder cannot be used to upgrade firmware remotely Firmware up grade needs to be done locally using local USB or local CF card Username ES505040 Password A a Domain pacrim1 Use Share Path y Share Path TVie67tcsj52bsitestl a ex ee ee Username Enter your network Logon username Password Enter you network password For a local printer connected directly to the recorder via USB no domain is required Ensure the printer name is set to the default LPT1 see Printer Menu on page 122 Domain For network printers enter your network domain No domain is required for Local printers connected directly to the recorder via USB Use Share Path Check this to enable or disable the Share path Share Path enter network path to folder Note Share Path Should be in
335. ion After connection select the Ethernet port from the Comms menu and select the required protocol from the Protocol menu eg Modbus 2 4 6 8 JH Se ere 87654321 i 24999 dad OA BO or x RJ45 Pin 1 is to the right from the rear of the unit 24V DC Instrument Power Input 24V DC instrument power is available on all X Series record ers as an option It is connected using 3 way connector mat ing half is supplied Diagram shows a view looking from the GND rear of the unit O ON O eZtrend QXe Comms card An option card is available with RS485 Modbus port and USB device connections The card can be purchased and fitted at any time The RS485 connection uses a 3 way connector The card also has connection for 24V DC Transmitter Power Supply see Transmitter Power Supply Card on page 26 To fit this option card into the eZtrend QXe recorder you will require an expansion card to interface to the recorder See QXe Analogue Input Standard card on page 21 Figure 2 19 eZtrend QXe Comms card o Hu Oo Oo Hu 24V DC TX RS485 USB Host Power Supply Modbus port 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Electrical Installation RS485 Minitrend QX and Multitrend SX recorders The RS485 port is fitted as standard as a part of the processor card and uses a 3 way connection 1 2 3 O0 U After c
336. ion captures a high resolution trend leading up to an event triggered by an alarm and optionally after the event Post Trigger where the information can then be viewed in TrendManager Pro for analysis Configuration The pre trigger system is simply configured by selecting which pens they wish to be included in the pre trigger by enabling the Pre Trigger item in the pen logging menu Logging Menu on page 69 and setting the desired pre trigger time which is common to all pens this is done here in the recording menu Edit Setup Edit Recording Pre Trigger Time 5 Mins Post Trigger T D Secs a a Pre Trigger Time The pre trigger system can be configured to allow between 1 and 10 minutes at whole minute increments of pre trigger data to be stored for each pen each pen will store the same time span The default will be set to 5 minutes Post Trigger Time specified in seconds from 0 disabled and the default to 3600 for 1 hour of post trigger time extending the alarm log rate for all pre trigger pens by the specified time after the last pre trigger pen alarm has cleared Acquiring In the running state the pre trigger buffers are being filled with pen readings dependant on the alarm logging rate when no pre trigger pen alarms are asserted The buffer will cycle when they reach the maximum pre trigger time as configured If power is lost when the pre trigger is acquiring then the pre trigger information will be lost
337. ion is at best pre cise to 1 second Time changes eg daylight saving During resetting the time or updating the time change in the recorder the data which gets collected during this interval will be ignored In the case of daylight saving if recorder clock is behind the hour there will be a gap in data collection For example when recorder re ceives the digital input and there is a state change the recorders system clock is showing 11 58 AM i e behind the hour then there will be a gap of 2 minutes in data collection as the time will be synchronized to the nearest hour If recorder clock is ahead of the hour then there will be duplicate data entry For example when recorder receives the digital input and there is a state change the recorders system clock is showing 12 02 PM i e ahead of the hour then there will be a duplicate data entry of 2 minutes as the time will be synchronized to the nearest hour The data collected before synchronization will be preserved 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK General Menu Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup General From this screen select the buttons required for General recorder configuration a General a Identity Error Alert Factory Finish Identity Unique recorder information Name Description and ID See Identity on page 109 Error Alert Setup and customise the Alert box information See Error Alert on page 110 Factory
338. ions are available Commit This will save the new setup or changes to an existing setup over writing the existing one and implement them into the recorder Field validation is performed when a change has been made if a problem is identified an error message is shown and the field in question clearly marked Discard This will ignore the new setup or the changes that have been made to the existing setup and not implement them into the recorder Commit Later This gives the user the option for a configuration to be partially completed but to be commit ted at a later date This will retain the new set up or the changes to the existing setup until they are required A partially completed setup will not be maintained over a power failure If Commit Later has been executed a warning message will display for Edit Setup Edit Lay out and User Admin Passwords screens This is to alert the user that the changes have been made to the configuration and not committed in the recorder The user can Discard the changes or continue to do changes and then Commit them Setup Modified This setup has been modified but not committed Select to discard the existing changes or continue Discard Continue 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 185 186 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Section 5 Password Security Log On Off If ESS Extended Security System Password security is active on your recorder a password is required t
339. ious screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media Pen Overview Main Menu gt Status gt Pen Overview Each pen is displayed with full configuration details Pen Displays the pen number and ticked if it is enabled Value Displays the current reading for this pen Name Pen name or number Maths Displays any Maths calculation applied to this pen or the Analogue Input chan nel for this pen Summarised to M for any Maths expressions Scale Displays the High and Low limits of the scale range for this pen n Alarm Displays the current status of the alarm tick active and a cross inactive Pen Rate This displays the fastest of all dependencies Alarm Displays how many alarms are enabled on this pen Total This will be ticked if a totaliser has been enabled on this pen Group Displays the group number if this pen has been allocated to a group Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 175 176 Maintenance Main Menu Status Maintenance The recorder keeps track of important life actions for improved diagnostics and preventa tive maintenance notification The Maintenance button will become active when Health Watch Maintenance is selected as a firmware option To enable this go to Options on page 174 5i Maintenance Item Value Powered on 4
340. ires 1 Add a new device to a Communications port Devices will appear under the Communi cations Port when selected in the left window and will appear in the initial database on the local comms server See Add a Device on page 240 2 Click on Communication Ports in the left window to display a list of the ports in the main window Tick the port that the device has been added to See Comms ports on page 238 3 For a realtime connection check device connection status by clicking on the device under its comms port in the left window to display the device status in the top main win dow Green LED s will show a realtime connection is made If grey LED s are showing and the device displays Unconnected and if Red LED s display then there is a problem with connection Keep power saving options of the PC disabled if enable it will turn off display and put computer to sleep which will stop real time data logging 4 The data from this device can now be logged to a database by using the Configure log ging screen and setting up channels for logging with the log rate and type and setting up a destination database See Logging Configuration on page 246 5 When the realtime data is being run eg graphed to the application server software or an OPC client this will enable the bottom window that will display details of the data 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 239 Communications Server Add a Database To add a database to a se
341. ires a separate code to enable its use this will be supplied with the software The software is compatible with Windows 2000 2003 XP Vista Windows 7 32 and 64 bit Professional and Ultimate Edition and Windows 7 Enterprise Vista Compatibility When using Windows Vista additional security settings need to be configured to run the Tool Go to the executable file that can be found in the folder where the application is installed Right click on the file AMS2750 Tool exe and select Properties Next select the Compatibility tab At the bottom is a section called Privilege Level Check the box for Run this program as an administrator Apply and OK From this point on each time the Report Tool is opened you will be asked if you wish to allow this program to run select Yes OK 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK ReportTooLexe Properties If you have problems with this program and it worked correctly on an earlier version of Windows select the compatibility mode that matches that earlier version Compatibility mode E Run this program in compatibility mode for Windows XP Service Pack 2 Settings E Run in 256 colors E Run in 640 x 480 screen resolution E Disable visual themes F Disable desktop composition E Disable display scaling on high DP settings V Run this program as an administrator I Show settings for all users ten Additional install Adobe Reader The AMS2750
342. is not specified for example F 8 6 it is understood that the temperature is 250 F 121 11 C the subscript O as in the term Fo 7 4 is used to indicate that the z 18 degrees F and the temperature is 250 F 121 11 C Specification Environmental and Operating Conditions Parameter Reference Rated Extreme Transport amp Storage Ambient Temperature 67 F to 77 F 32 F to 122 F 32 F to 122 F 14 F to 140 F 19 C to 25 C 0 C to 50 C 0 C to 50 C 10 C to 60 C Relative Humidity RH 50 to 65 10 to 90 5 to 90 5 to 95 Vibration Frequency Hz 0 0 to 70 0 to 100 0 to 100 Acceleration g 0 0 1 0 2 0 5 Mechanical Shock Acceleration g 0 1 5 20 Duration ms 0 30 30 30 Mounting Position from Vertical Tilted Forward 52 40 40 Any Tilted Backward 5 65 65 Any Tilted to Side 5 65 65 Any Power Requirements Mains Voltage Vrms 220 to 240 100 to 250 90 to 264 N A Low Voltage AC Vrms 24 2 20 to 30 QX SX 20 to 30 QX SX N A 20 to 25 QXe 20 to 25 QXe DC Voltages 24 2 20 to 55 QX SX 20 to 55 QX SX N A 12 to 35V QX 12 to 35V QX 20 to 30 QXe 20 to 30 QXe Frequency Hz 49 8 to 50 2 47 to 63 47 to 63 N A Power Consumption QX QXe AC lt 40W max DC lt 40W max Typical 20W SX AC lt 60W max DC lt 60W max Typical 30W Warm Up 30 minutes minimum Seismic Qualification Complies with IEEE 323 1974 and or 1983 and IEEE 344 1975 and or 1987
343. is up to 16 extra pens for the Minitrend QX 12 extra pens for the eZtrend QXe recorders and 48 extra pens for the Multitrend SX recorder 222 Notes for Table 7 1 on page 221 Basic maths is standard in all recorders Basic Maths math comprises of Add Subtract Multiply and Divide 1 Additional pens Extra Pens can be used to display and store the results of calculations totalisers variables imported via communications or to store values 2 Custom Screens must be built using X Series Screen Designer lay Screens from V5 Screen Designer ver sions cannot be imported lyt not available for the eZtrend QXe 3 Event markers are required to automatically reset the totalisers for example on a periodic basis or on an exter nal condition Not necessary if the totalisers are reset manually 4 Not available for the eZtrend QXe Credits can be applied to the Firmware functions until the total number of credits purchased has been used up See Applying your Firmware credits on page 223 Additional credits can be purchased later if new features are to be activated and not enough credits are available to support these additional functions 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Firmware Credit System Firmware Options Applying your Firmware credits To activate the Firmware options follow this file path Main Menu Configue Setup Edit General Factory Credits The Credit menu cont
344. ish French or German Any other items ordered as an option Model Selection Guide Re packing NOTICE Should the original packing be destroyed or lost new packaging can be ordered or as a last alternative then ONLY pack the recorder in polystyrene granules if the recorder is FIRST sealed in a strong plastic bag Failure to do this will invalidate your warranty Environment and Location The recorder is designed to be mounted into a panel See Installation Instruc tions on page 9 Mounting angle is unlimited Choose a suitable location with an ideal viewing angle See Mounting and Viewing Angles on page 6 The location should be free from vibration The environment should be of non condensing humidity The ambient temperature should be between 0 C and 50 C 32 F to 122 F The relative humidity should be between 10 to 90 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 5 Mechanical Installation NOTICE The eZtrend QXe recorder is an Emissions Class A product In a domestic environ ment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Mechanical Installation Mounting and Viewing Angles Mounting The Minitrend QX Multitrend SX and eZtrend QXe recorders have an un limited mounting angle Viewing For the best view of the display the viewing angle should not exceed Minitrend QX 55 from the left or right 40 looking down and 50 looking up a
345. isor access Permission Area 24 access Permission Area 18 Edit Layout see Figure 5 7 Layout P d Configure menu Operator access EX Permission Area 13 Save Setup Technician access Layout Supervisor access Passwords Operator access Settings Supervisor access m Settings a Set Time Update Sounds xe Back Finish Settings menu Supervisor access F Passwords ad Arar User Admin 2 aad wf Pwds Pwd NetSync vw Password menu Operator access See Figure 5 4 for Password menu Set Volume Permission Area 23 access Permission Area 36 196 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Figure 5 3 Default Password access from the Setup Menu Setup menu Technician access Permission Area 18 Edit Supervisor access Save Technician access Load Technician access Save and Load setup buttons require Technician access Permission Area 17 Edit menu Supervisor access we See Figure 5 5 for Edit Setup Becas menu access Permission Area 19 ul Field IO Recording Figure 5 4 Default password access from the Password Menu Password Menu Operator access Permission Area 36 User Administration D User Admin Administrator m a E Change Password Operator access B Users
346. it system Events are certain conditions or operations which can be set up and logged according to the time and date of the occurrence Subsequently events can be reviewed in a list or represented on a graph An Event is made up from a Cause and an Effect For example set up a cause such as Pen 1 going into an alarm state and the effect of this could be to start a totaliser or acknowledge the alarm 38 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Functions and Features Batch The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis Batch enhances the management of data collected in a non continuous process known as batch processing used in thermal treatment sterilisation food processing and chemical reactions Concurrent batch mode is now available where each batch is associated to a group of pens Other features include Batch logging control Automated batch counters and Event driven batch control Batches are controlled with command lines entered into the recorder these include Start Stop Pause Resume and Abort batch Batch Markers are placed on to the recorder s chart and entered into the messages system for every batch command applied Counters Up to 16 User Counters are available and can be used as a part of the Events system User Counters can be set up as a Cause or an Effect of an Event A Counter Effect can be used to count an occurrence or to reset different types of counters depending on hardware avail
347. ized repair centre 4 Where conductive pollution such as condensation or conductive dust is present ade quate air conditioning filtering and or sealing must be installed 5 This recorder contains one battery on the Processor board which must be treated and disposed of with care Batteries must not be short circuited Batteries should be dis posed of in accordance with local regulations they must not be disposed of with normal refuse 6 Improper signal and supply wiring WARNING A WARNING IMPROPER SIGNAL AND SUPPLY WIRING Signal and supply wiring should be kept separate Where this is impractical shielded cables should be used for the signal wiring Where signal wiring is carrying or could carry under fault conditions hazardous voltage defined as gt 30 V rms and 42 4 V peak or gt 60 Vd c double insulation must be used for all signal wiring Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury 7 If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be inadequate 8 The protective earth terminal must remain connected even if the recorder is isolated from the mains supply if any of the measuring communications or relay terminals are connected to hazardous voltages Hazardous Voltage Hazardous Voltages are defined by EN61010 1 as follows A WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE LEVELS Voltage levels above 30V rms a
348. justment values if they have been mistakenly left off In addition a User Message will entered into the message list when this switch is turned Off or On which will enable users and auditors to demonstrate a traceable line of action if re quired 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 153 154 Alarms Menu Main Menu Alarms Acknowledge and Configure Alarms by categories dl Alarms 4 d Ack Alarm Configure Finish Acknowledge Alarm Main Menu Alarms Acknowledge Alarm User acknowledgment of alarms can be performed at this menu only Latched alarms can be acknowledged Normal alarms cannot be acknowledged When a Latched alarm is set up in the Pen Alarms menu and a latched relay is configured it will maintain its active state until the alarm has been acknowledged A latched alarm will continue to flash if an alarm marker is displayed until it is acknowl edged and it is out of alarm state See Alarm Markers on page 215 for flash colour iden tification Ack Alarm All Select this button to acknowledge all active latched alarms By Group Select this button to acknowledge latched alarms in a group of pens Pen groups can be set up in the Pens menu By Pen Select this option to acknowledge latched alarms for individual pens Configure Main Menu Alarms Configure This is a short cut to change alarm levels this will display all available pens with alarms set up To ch
349. king See Passwords AMS2750 on page 392 SAT interval timer The SAT timer is based on tables found in AMS2750 that are dependent on Furnace class Instrument type and if it is a parts or raw material furnace 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 355 356 AMS2750 Process mode Instrument Cal Due In A countdown timer provides a countdown to the next instrument calibration This can be changed by selecting this button and changing the date using the on screen date selection This will reset the next instrument calibration date Instrument Cal Timer Reset Please enter the date for the next Instrument Cal Enter the new date to change it and use OK to confirm or Cancel to exit You may also enable disable this timer Instrument Cal date mm rae The user can change the date and select OK this will reset the timer to countdown to the new date The button marked with the X will simply return the user to the process screen with the countdown timer unchanged The disabled button will set the timer to an Unused state by setting the time to 0 The timer will then be displayed as Unused with a grey button To re enable the button is pressed and a date entered and ok selected Control TC due A countdown timer provides a countdown to the next control thermocouple calibration This can be changed by selecting this button and changing the date using the on screen date selection This will reset the next
350. known Policy Failed Password N A N A Password system has failed to start up correctly because of a configuration unsuccessful problem with the configuration This account needs to be N A N A This account must be reset by someone with administrator reset by an administrator authorization Access Denied to Area N A N A Access to the area that the operator tried to access is refused because the operator has not got the authority level necessary Password Failure N A N A User has tried to login and has failed Inactivity Timeout N A N A Recorder inactivity has timed the current user out so the user must re log on Unknown Password Error N A N A Password system has failed to start up correctly for an unknown reason 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 349 Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Supplied username con N A N A A username cannot contain space characters tains space characters DPPQ FATAL ERROR N A N A Acquired l O card data has been lost Diagnostics Status DATA LOSS IO and Messages Data reset has been per N A N A The data held internally has been deleted System Status and formed Messages The touch screen was NOT N A N A The touch screen requires calibration System Status and calibrated Messages 350 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Appendix L X Series AMS2750 capabilities AMS2750 and the X Series Reco
351. l Inputs available on the 4 channels Alarm Relay card Table 2 6 Alarm Relay card 4 channel Alarm Relay card 8 channel Card Channel Digital Card Channel Digital position number Inputs position number Inputs Slot G 1to 4 N A Slot G 1to8 7 amp 8 Slot H 17 to 20 N A Slot H 17 to 24 23 amp 24 Slot 33 to 36 N A Slot 33 to 40 39 amp 40 Figure 2 17 Alarm Relay Card connector details CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 NCCNO NCCNO NCCNO NC C NO NCCNO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO Relay contacts position R Channels 7 and 8 can be set as Digital Inputs Use C and NO NC Normally Closed C Common NO Normally Open 8 and 16 Digital Input Output Card The 16 channel Digital I O card is not available on the eZtrend QXe recorders The Digital Input Output Card has 1A 24V DC rated relays that are connected via two 16 way connectors the left connector for the first 8 channels and right connector for the second 8 channels The pin outs for 8 and 16 I O cards are labelled from left to right 1 to 16 on the left side and 17 to 32 on the right Each channel can be set up as an input or an output For output the relay is normally open type A Form A dry contacts relay is used for this type of card The inputs are designed to accept Dry contact no volt inputs 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Electrical Installation NOTICE For Digital Inputs short together the 2 pin
352. l standard eZtrend QXe Analogue Input card which is fitted in Slot A see QXe Analogue Input Standard card on page 21 To fit this option card into the eZtrend QXe recorder you will require an expansion card to interface to the recorder See QXe Analogue Input Standard card on page 21 A WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES Insulation from channel to channel Normally a channel can be safely connected to a hazardous voltage up to 300V AC common mode with respect to earth However where a channel is connected to a safety low voltage circuit an immediately adjacent channel must be adequately insulated from hazardous voltages between 150V AC and 300V AC max This insulation should comprise of at least 1 5mm air gap or a bar rier rated greater than 1400V AC This is to ensure that protection of the safety low voltage circuit is fully maintained Common Mode voltage is a voltage applied between the whole channel and earth not between pins on a channel 300V AC is permitted at Measurement Category CAT I Overvoltage Category Il Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury NOTICE For 12 and 24 way connectors torque setting 0 4 Nm 3 5lbf in Do not over tighten Recommended wire size for termination connector is 22 12 AWG American Wire gauge equivalent to 22 14 SWG Standard Wire Gauge AWG metric 0 6426 2 052mm in diameter or SWG metric 0 71 2 03mm in diameter Rear Covers Optional rea
353. l for Scales and Charts Cycle Scales active with chart and scale combination If ticked the recorder will cycle through each pen in the form of a scale or bar chart depending on which is selected for the Scale Indicator Scale Indicator active with chart and scale combination Select which indicator either bar or pen pointers will indicate on the scale Background Background colour can be set if no template is used Select and choose from the Colour palette Add Screen To add a new screen just select Add Screen and configure as required Delete Screen To Delete a screen just select Delete Screen to produce a list of current screens Select the screen to delete and it will be removed immediately When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu 138 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Settings Main Menu Configure Layout Edit Settings Use this menu to set up the layout settings for the screens C Cycle Screens Tick this to cycle though each of the recorder s screens Cycle List Select which screens you wish to be cycled Cycle Interval Enter the amount of time in seconds that each of the cycle screens are displayed for range 5 to 3600 seconds Screen Hold If during cycling screens you wish to investigate a certain screen for a longer period than the cycle interval you can enter a t
354. lass Refer to AMS2750 Procedure number enter a procedure number for the SAT where applicable Additional Comments Add any comments to appear on the report If the SAT test is not performed In house enter SAT Calibration Company Name enter SAT Calibration Company Representative Generate PDF This will start process of generating SAT Report PDF Cancel Shows message box Do you like to exit SAT Report Wizard If user selects Yes then wizard will be cancelled 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK AMS2750 Report Generation Tool Step 2 Obtain location to save SAT Report PDF This screen helps in obtaining the location to save PDF file Reports can be saved on your local PC remote machines or on any external devices attached with the machine Reports can be saved only in the PDF format Save in 2 Desktop d B My Documents Ee i My Computer My Recent amp My Network Places Documents Ls Desktop My Documents My Computer L File name SATReport b Save My Network Save as type PDF file pdr Cancel An egg timer message is produced informing you that the report is being created SAT Report PDF creation is in progress When the report is created a message is produced informing the report has been success fully created and shows the path location to where the file is now saved Once the report is created if appropriate version of acrobat reade
355. le 10 characters Logarithmic 38 min to 38 max recommend up to 20 decades on one screen to ensure clarity Input Isolation 300VAC channel to channel channel to ground Resistance thermometers are not isolated on the QXe Noise Rejection at 50 60Hz 2 Analogue Input card std Common mode 2Hz 120dB 5Hz 120dB Normal Mode 2Hz 80dB 5Hz 25dB Analogue Input expansion card option Common mode 2Hz 120dB 5Hz 120dB 10Hz 120dB Normal Mode 2Hz 85dB 5Hz 80dB 10Hz 48dB Specification Logging Logging Method Sample Average Min Max can be set independently per pen Logging Types Continuous Fuzzy Logging Rate QX SX 20 msec to 60 hours per pen QXe100 msec to 60 hours per pen Fuzzy Logging A secure data storage technique which delivers data compression ratio of 100 1 or more self teaching storing the data at a variable rate to match the process Specification Physical Parameters Enclosure Bezel Zinc plated steel case with high impact resistant polycarbonate bezel scratch resistant lens Pol yethylene Terephthalate NEMA3 IP54 for SX and QXe models only and NEMA3R IP54 for QX protection rating standard with NEMA 4X IP66 Front face only protection rating as an option Mounting Panel Unlimited mounting angle For the best view of the display the viewing angle should not exceed QX 55 from the left or
356. le when not using Use Pen Scale option This is the bottom of the engineering scale and represents the bottom of the input scale Select and enter a value using the on screen keyboard Demo Setup Only available if there is no Analogue Input card fitted Examples of var ious inputs are available without having an actual signal input coming into the recorder ee Demo Type Select this for a list of available Demo Type inputs Cycle Time Enter the Cycle Time in seconds of the Demo Input Select and use the on screen keyboard Add Noise This is to Add Noise to the Demo Input as a percentage value Select and use the on screen keyboard When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Thermocouple Wiring Changes If the recorder is set to Active select Passive and Commit the change Then return to the menu and select Active and Commit the change Analogue Out Menu Not available for the eZtrend QXe recorder Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Field IO Analogue Out Only available when an Analogue Out card is fitted as an option 2 or 4 outputs are available per card The outputs are factory calibrated to meet the published specification and cannot be field calibrated 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 59 60 Refer to connection details and Analogue Output Channel Numbers on page 24
357. lected database Summary of all changes This example of the logging configuration box was produced by right clicking on a specific recorder Some of the areas have been auto populated 1 Use the Configure Database Logging icon at the top left of the screen and select Con figure Logging from the resulting menu 2 Right click on Communication Ports in the left window and select Configure Logging from the resulting menu 3 Right click on the comms port and select Configure Logging from the resulting menu 4 Right click on the device and select Configure Logging from the resulting menu Any of these will display the Logging Configuration box If this screen is selected from either a comms port or a device then the comms port information will already be inserted If the 246 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Communications Server screen is selected from the icon or Communications Port heading then the comms port will need to be assigned Select the device ID number if necessary from the drop down menu The next section is Database Configuration a list of connected database servers and a list of databases that are currently being logged to In this section is a window showing the channels available to be logged As channels are selected from this window three additional buttons become active Add Channel selection select each channel for logging Add all Channels for logging and Clear Channel selection Add Chan
358. lity 50V Range 2 Burnout T C Active High or Low Passive and Health watch Maintenance option Cold Junction Compensation Internal compensation with the ability to manually adjust values External Input for compensation External CJC value specified Input Resolution 0 0015 16 Bit ADC Input Impedance Current loop resistance 10 ohms use 0 1 external resistor Volts gt 1MQ all other gt 10MQ Source Impedance T C and RTD 100 ohms per lead maximum CU10 15 ohms not available for the QXe A single point cal on Slot A of the QXe recorder will improve accuracy for lead resistance above 10 ohms Square Root Extraction Available as standard on every input type Sensor Compensation Single point and Dual point 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 285 Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Specification Analogue Inputs Input Sampling Rate QX QXe Recorder has 2 available slots and the SX Recorder has 6 available slots with up to 8 analog inputs each the input sampling rate is dependent on actuation type QX SX All Inputs 100mS 10Hz 200mS 5Hz 500mS 2Hz QX SX Fast Sampling 20mS 50Hz mA mV Ohms and Volts only QXe200mS 5Hz 500mS 2Hz and 100mS 10Hz Analogue Input expansion card option Scales Linear amp Logarithmic Normal and Scientific notation Decimal Point automatic or programmable Engineering units user definab
359. llowing user to have another try Retry amp Reset Password Reset retries unlock and reset password which must be changed on first login User Interface requirements No Activity Timeout A no activity timeout programmable from 20 to 3600 seconds which will automatically log out a user after a defined period of inactivity at the menu system or web page Level Names The level names such as Operator Technician Supervisor Engineer are for internal refer ence and are displayed as defaults it is possible for the user to change the group names to suit their personnel structure This is stored in the policy set up for the Password configura tion Audit Trail A full audit trail is available and is stored as a message log Trail Rules The audit trail cannot be turned off and will always be generated for the password system Audit Trail Entries Audit trail is generated for the following actions Userlog On Off and source Recorder Web Failed password attempts Areas where access was attempted but denied Password expiry Inactivity timeouts auto logouts Temporary User entry 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Level Permissions Table 5 1 Default Level Permissions Default user levels of access to areas within the recorder menu system Permission Area Admin Engineer super Technician Operator No Login visor required Perm
360. location to its original position when you entered the Storage Bias screen The screen also shows chart information regarding how many pens are currently enabled and how much time it will take to fill the chart memory depending on the chart speeds se lected When you move the slider to increase the chart memory the amount of time to fill the chart memory will also increase If you decrease the chart memory thus increasing the log memory the amount of time to fill the chart memory ie chart history will decrease accord ingly Note that as you allocate more chart memory the recorder gives preference to medium and slower chart speeds The log information displays how many pens are currently set for logging recording The shortest pen means the pen that will take the shortest amount of time to fill it s part of the log memory before it starts recycling that is overwriting the oldest data with the newest The longest pen is the pen that will take the longest amount of time to fill it s part of the log mem ory before it starts recycling The recorder will where possible balance the times so the shortest and longest pens fill the log memory at approximately the same time Depending on the different log rates the allocation of memory will vary per pen When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu NOTICE Because pens only begin to use ext
361. lows 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 187 188 Administrator Administrator has access to everything and it is possible to have more than one user at the administrator level The Administrator will have unlimited access to the system and provide the ability to setup other users With the exception of Administrator who has access to everything the other 4 groups per mission areas can be configured users can then be allocated to a level and they will inherit those permissions Permissions Permissions may also be customised for an individual user their permissions can be changed to become a customised user However for global access restrictions the user must be allocated a security level of Engineer Supervisor Technician or Operator even though the individual permissions will differ First Time Password System Setup The first time the system is used a default user name and password is available the user name is Admin and will have no password this is known as the first time user Access to the first time user is removed once the password system has been configured The first time user is reinstated if the password system is reset ESS Extended Security System CFR21 Part 11 The password system allows for user names to be typed in All logging in and out activity is automatically stored in the audit trail If your recorder is fitted with the ESS password system follow these instructions First Time Password Syst
362. ls on the Pre Trigger function and configuration for the pre trigger time is held in the recording menu in the setup configuration under a separate button called pre trig ger Pre Trigger on page 131 The alarm rate for each pen will be used for the pre trigger rate The alarm rate must be set to less than 10 seconds per sample for pre triggering to operate Pre trigger will only operate when the logging is in continuous sample mode pre trig gering will not be available with fuzzy logging or Max Min Method Only available if the logging Type is set to Continuous Select from a list of Methods Sample logs the last sampled reading Average logs the average of all the samples taken since the last log Max Min logs the highest and the lowest of the sampled readings since the last log Align Only available if the logging Type is set to Continuous Select and enter a value from the list to align the logging at specified intervals This will hold the start of logging until the aligned time selected occurs based on the recorders real time clock Auto Fit Only available if the logging Type is set to Fuzzy Toggles On and Off AutoFit ensures that the last sampled data point is logged before the signal goes out of the tol erance set in Band 1 or Band 2 When displayed on a graph the input signal will auto matically fit to this last logged point This gives a better fit for stepped input changes Band 1 Only available if the logging
363. lysis using the TrendManager Software Suite Fast Scanning mode For fast processes the scan rate and recording of the data can be set for up to 50 times per second 20ms for up to 8 inputs for the Minitrend QX and 8 inputs for the Multitrend SX Totaliser Sterilisation optional One totaliser per pen Totaliser value must be assigned to a pen for display and storage Multiple totalisa tions Maths option are possible with the use of extra pens option Reset may be manual or pro grammed Event option Totalisation values are ten digits plus exponent Each pen can be totalised according to the Fo or Po sterilisation function at 250 F 121 11 C The Standard Reference Temperature and Thermal Resistance Z Value are fully adjustable values of X Y W and V Start temp Reference temp and Z factor are all user defined allowing support for many different types of sterilisation applications Custom Screens optional not available for the QXe Provides the capability in the recorder to accept custom screen designs from the Screen Designer Reports Generate reports manually or using the event system to show daily weekly monthly Totals Max Mins Averages Current Value Messages Message Lists Alarm System Diagnostic Security amp User Counters Digital Inputs and Digital Outputs Reports can be printed e mailed as an attachment or exported to external media in RTF format Health Watch Maintenance Capab
364. m not acknowledged Alarm Red Green bell in Alarm and acknowledged System Diagnostics Information General eg System check System Diagnostics Warning eg media error FTP failure Timeouts System Diagnostics Error eg Password failure power failure no media Ev6eOG5 m 80r E amp e 5 Security Security audit trail Security Log In open padlock Security Log Out closed padlock Security Access Failure No entry sign Security Thermocouple Failure User Mark on Chart and Batch User Start Logging or Totals User Stop Logging or Totals User Pause Logging or Totals A User Reset Logging or Totals 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 167 168 Process Menu Main Menu Process If Max Min Totals and Counters can be controlled from this screen d v e WFW UYn ja User Variables Reports Controls for any process in use Max Min Reset Max Min Maximum or Minimum values by categories Totals Start Stop Reset or View Totals by categories Counters View and Reset counters by type Firmware option User Variables Modify and View User variables that have been set up in Maths and Scripting See User Variables on page 170 Script Timers Script timers provide 20 independent timers to be used as desired See Script Timers on page 170 Reports Reports can be generated manually or on a periodical basis using
365. mark on chart and the Pause button on the Batch Control menu is replaced with a Resume button When Resume is selected the screen will be marked with R A Batch Figure 4 6 Batch Control screen and Messages screen 4 Es All Messages Message 555 2 1 19 2006 155 0 1 19 2006 54 5 1 18 2006 50 4 1 18 2006 t4 KA i 118 2006 HD Test batch run 1 18 2006 iT June 1 19 2006 US start new batch Finish When the batch is stopped the Batch Control screen reverts back to the Batch Setup screen so the user can start a new batch Batch Setup screens on page 160 As well as a Mark on Chart for every command applied to the batch you can check the Mes sages screen for details of the batch activity Batch Commands S Start Batch E End or Stop Batch this will complete the batch run P Pause the batch in progress R Resume batch Only available when a batch has been paused A Abort batch If the batch is aborted it is incomplete and the batch will be cancelled User ID Displays the user entered ID or User ID entered automatically by the Pass word function D Description User entered description of the batch in progress L Lot No User entered Lot number for the batch in progress C Comment Extra comment field of additional information for the batch in progress 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 161 162 Barcodes for Batch Batch markers can be created using indep
366. mensions eene Installation Instructions Mounting and Viewing Angles Panel Mounting v I Panel Mounting Clamp Installation Panel cut out size Media Config Media Diagnostics Memory Maps and Function Codes 329 Menu Baf 206 SCEeern enoia otii i e TRE 207 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK MEET Path astitit quieta nuin den oie 49 Message Format accessit tte 167 Message List JUIN esses Message Types ssis Alarms AL arnor Diagnostics Security System s USET e Message list printing Messages Menu Alarm Messages All Messages Diagnostics Messages Message Types Messages Format Messages List Security Messages System Messages User Messages eet irritas Messages Screen printing ss 165 Minitrend OX Rear Connections 44 Minitrend OX Standard Screens 42 Minitrend QX and QXe Portable Case 266 275 Modbus oss aset Modbus Capabilities Modbus Function Codes sss 336 Modbus Status 182 Modbus profile tool data update 243 Modbus Comms ees 226 Mounting Clamp Diagram for 45mm panel thickness Lene 13 Mounting and Viewing Angles 6 Multi Point Cal ees 326 Multitrend SX Portable Case 271 Multitrend SX Rear C
367. mes can be setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup The addition list names will not appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen unless you enable Show n List in the group properties menu See Group on page 121 Field 3 Props Defaults to Comment Enable this to make this a requirement when starting a new batch The Comment display name can be renamed and a list of addi tional names can be setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup The addition list names will not appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen unless you enable Show n List in the group properties menu See Group on page 121 120 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Group In the Batch menu select a Group Auto Pop Wizard When enabled this will automatically populate the Batch Control screen with the properties entered into that specific Group Auto Pop Name This is the name of the group that will have it s properties populate the Batch Control screen Zero Pad Count This refers to the amount of zeros that will be added to the embed ded batch counter Eg BATCH 2 GC 000001 This has to have the same amount of digits to accommodate the largest number the counter will reach which will be the Roll over value If this is not enabled the leading zeros will not be shown Ctr Start This refers to the number at which the batch counter will start Ctr Increment This i
368. message disappear until the next reflash time occurs Reflash Time Set this to how often you want the error alert message to repeat until the problem is solved When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Display alert as an event effect This feature is available from within the event system where the Alert Display can be used as an event effect to display a preset or user defined marker See Event Effects contin ued on page 103 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 111 112 Factory Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup General Factory The Factory menu contains information on the Firmware Credit System Upgrading the re corder Firmware CJC and Analogue Input Card Calibration Demo Traces Reset Setup function and a Localisation menu a Si FW Upgrade Calibration Demo Traces Finish Credits The Credit menu contains the Serial no of the recorder how many credits are available displays the Options Code and lists what Firmware Options are currently active See Credits on page 112 FW Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade button allows new versions of the recorder firmware to be loaded into the recorder See FW Upgrade on page 113 Calibration Analogue In and CJC Calibration can be performed per slot card See Calibration on page 113 Demo Traces A set of demo t
369. mit Later See Finish on page 185 Help The Help icon appears as a question mark on all menu screens The Help files are context sensitive and will supply information for each menu screen where the icon appears See Help on page 50 Configure Menu Main Menu Configure The Configure screen gives access to the Setup Layout Password menus and Settings Time and Date The majority of the recorder configuration is done in the Setup menus Setup In the Setup menu the user can configure how the recorder acquires stores and actions data The Edit Setup gives access to sub menus for Field IO Pens Comms Events Counters General Screen and Recording set up See Edit Setup on page 53 Layout The user can configure how the data is presented on the screen From the Layouts screen choose to Edit Saved or Load layouts in the recorder See Layout on page 137 Passwords Manages the security and access to full password configuration that allows restricted access within the recorder providing password protection at different levels Administrate Load and Save passwords from this menu See Passwords on page 143 Settings Recorder settings such as Set Time to configure the recorder s time and date See Settings on page 152 Select a button to take you to the next menu 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 51 52 Setup Menu Main Menu Configure Setup In the Setup menu the user can
370. n ae yog WM eae Ae oR 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK TUS Data file ament ERU EE PINE 390 TUS Logged data 391 TUS Mode AMS2750 sss 365 TUS Report Wizard 401 TUS Start Event Causes 5 aues nici 96 TUS Stop Event Causes serco aine EER 96 TUS survey process screen u 375 Tabular Display Tabular Screen Technical Data amp Specifications Analogue Output sse Field IO 1n eerte bte tego Input Range Performance Accuracy Table 287 Pulse Input Card sees 279 Relay Alarm Digital Input 280 Specification Tables Temp Units n Temperature Uniformity Survey TUS 365 During a Survey essere Ending the Survey Start a Survey Survey SIA US peeso noeneen Detect Mode 1 eerte a DONG T n Failure acce eire Soak Mode sss Stable in soak Mode TG Stabilized 5 eeatbtiastde rd Temperature overshoot TUS Logged data Thermocouple Adjustment Factor Disable 153 Thermocouple Connections External Reference ses 313 How Thermocouples work 311 Internal Reference eee 312 Thermocouple CJC Compensation 312 Thermocouple Connections Appendix C 311 Time amp Date SEINES e Time Sync Time Zone Timer AMS2750 Event Causes essere nnns Totaliser aos Displaying Totals Event Causes Event Ef
371. n Client Enable is active This is a specified amount of time in seconds that the recorder clock must be within to ensure synchronisation with the network server Eg if set to 3600 the recorder time must be within 1 hour of the net work server to ensure time sync will take place 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 89 90 Figure 4 7 Client Server network When using time synchronisation via SNTP always make sure that the recorders and the PC if any are configured to the same time zone See Localisation on page 117 Client Server Network Figure 4 7 on page 90 shows a Network Server at the top a recorder acting as both a server and a client in the middle and a string of client recorders at the bottom A recorder can be set up to be a server and a client Setting it as both means this recorder will synchro nise time with the network server But will also allow other recorders to time sync with it This saves many recorders trying to time sync with the network server When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu FTP File Transfer Protocol Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Comms Comms Services FTP This is a method of transferring data and setups to and from TrendManager Software Suite and the recorder Enabled Tick to enable FTP transfer Allow Upload Tick to allow FTP transfer from Tren
372. n TrendServer Pro set up a cause to trigger the effect of a chart control ee Pause this will pause the chart until it is resumed Resuming a paused chart Will display continuous chart data from when it had been paused The chart can be stopped if in a paused state ee Stop this will stop the chart and no chart data will be displayed for the length of time the chart is stopped If a stopped chart is resumed there will be a gap in the displayed chart data e e Resume this can be used after the chart has been stopped or paused The chart data will continue from where it has been paused with no gaps displayed But if the chart has been stopped the displayed data will display a gap in data until it is resumed ee Clear this will clear all the data being displayed Data will not be cleared if the chart has been stopped ee Prefill this will clear the chart and then fill it with the current reading Setup Window a Events Counters Preset Markers General j WARNING uisi Mau Events are credit controlled peti Changes here may not be reflected on the recorder KE ume se eea W remem 5er Details of Effect 1 Enabled Type Chart Action on us I Reports 250 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Communications Server Realtime Graphing To graph real time data on TrendServer Pro press the Real time button located on the left hand side This will list all the recorders curren
373. nalogue In Menu on page 56 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Resets Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup General Factory Hesets Setup This will remove the current setup from the recorder and return to the default setup When you select this button the Reset Setup Warning box will appear with a message Are you sure you want to clear your current setup This is irreversible and will restart the re corder Select OK to reset the setup or Cancel to ignore and return to the Factory menu Layout This will remove the current layouts from the recorder and return to the default layout When you select this button the Reset Layout Warning box will appear with a message Are you sure you want to clear your current layouts This is irreversible and will restart the recorder Select OK to reset the layouts or Cancel to ignore and return to the Factory menu Data This will remove all log and chart data from the recorder When you select this button the Reset Data Warning box will appear with a message This will delete ALL log and chart data taking approx 80s to complete and will restart during the process Select OK to reset the data or Cancel to ignore and return to the Factory menu Reset All This will remove the current setup current layouts and chart and log data from the recorder and return to the default setup When you select this button the Reset All Warning box will appear with a message Thi
374. nd Messages Error writing DIG Cfg to EEPROM Unable to write configuration 17 3 3 The AO configuration could not be written on configuration Diagnostics change after WrAOConfig command Messages Error writing AO Cfg to EEPROM Unable to write configuration 18 3 3 The Al configuration could not be written on configuration change Diagnostics after SetActiveBnout command Error writing Al Cfg to EEPROM Messages Watchdog timer timed out 0 4 4 COP I O Watchdog timer timeout I O board has failed COP Fail Diagnostics ure was triggered Messages Error reading NV EEP 0 3 3 The I O board serial number could not be identified by the I O Diagnostics ROM firmware Messages Error reading Board ID serial number couldn t read EEPROM Error reading NV EEP 1 3 3 I O board setup information could not be read Error reading Diagnostics ROM Board Setup couldn t read EEPROM Messages Error reading NV EEP 2 3 3 The Al card calibration history could not be read on power up Diagnostics ROM Error reading Al calibration history from EEPROM on power up Messages Error reading NV EEP 3 3 3 The AO card calibration history could not be read on power up Diagnostics ROM Error reading AO calibration from EEPROM on power up Messages Error reading NV EEP 4 3 3 The AO card calibration history could not be read Diagnostics ROM Error reading AO calibration history from EEPROM Messages Error reading NV EEP 5 3 3 l O board could not correctly determin
375. nd 42 4V peak or 60V dc are deemed to be Hazardous Live Ensure operators are not exposed to hazardous voltage levels Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Section 2 Installation Damage checks Any damage caused to the recorder or the contents should be reported immediately to your shipper Unpacking Remove the contents check the packaging and remove all documentation and accessories supplied Retain the box and any packaging for future transportation Contents Check that the contents and accessories are correct against the order or Model Selection Guide using the model number on the recorder Contact your authorised Honeywell dis tributor or Honeywell immediately should there be any query The contents are based on Unit Model Number ordered and will vary from unit to unit The following list is provided as a general guide and not specific to any single unit Recorder specification as ordered check against the Model Selection Guide Mounting fixings Mounting clamps and panel gasket Connector kit mating half connectors to recorder spec Including a CJC connector for Thermocouple operation Quick Start Guide to get you started First time Password system instructions for ESS recorders only CD Viewer software documentation Plastic stylus x 2 for use with the touch screen Manual optional Hard copy Engl
376. nditions or operations which can be set up and logged according to the time and date of the occurrence See Events Menu on page 92 User Counters can be set up and used as a Cause or Effect in the Events system to count an occurrence See Counters Menu on page 107 Preset Markers are also available to be configured for use in the event system and as a mark on chart and Time Synchronisation on recorders on a Digital Input General This button displays a sub menu containing general recorder information including recorder Ident Error Alert Factory Batch Printer set up and Groups Pens menus See General Menu on page 109 Screen This button displays a sub menu containing Screen Saver Chart speed and screen Brightness set up See Screen Saver on page 124 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 53 Recording Set up Scheduled recording and specify the Storage Bias for recording logged and chart data Edit Hecording on page 128 Reports Reports can be generated manually or on a periodical basis using event sys tem to show daily weekly monthly totals max mins averages etc the reports can be printed e mailed as attachments or exported to external media The report details must be set up first before a report can be run see Reports Menu on page 133 To run a report see Reports Process on page 170 Field IO Menu Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup Field lO Select which type of Field In
377. nels for Logging As each channel is selected or all channels depending on the button selected the Logging Channel Configuration box appears so the Log Rate and Type of logging can be set for each channel individually or all channels If all channels are added the next box will ask how often you want these channels to be logged log rate this can be a sample every second to one sample every 24 hours This selection will apply to all channels If channels are added one at a time using the Add Channel Selection button the same log rate box comes up but a different log rate can be set for each channel When all the required channels have been added click OK When the channels have been selected they will appear in the bottom window click on Ap ply to enable the channels to log Once the channels are in the Channels logging to selected database window they can be selected and the Edit and Delete button become active The Edit button allows the logging rate or type of logging to be changed There is also a Database Events Logging box that can be ticked that allows any events to be logged to the database using Trendbus Not available for X Series recorders Summary of Logging Changes If any changes are made using the Edit button the Sum mary of Changes button becomes active this will show the last changes made to any of the channels for this configuration only The Delete button will take the channel out of this window and put
378. net work administrator If this is changed on the recorder it must also be changed on all other recorders TrendServer and Comms Server If you experience and security issues using peers see Internet Security Settings on page 256 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 91 Events Counters Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Events Counters Events See Events Menu on page 92 Counters See Counters Menu on page 107 Preset Markers See Preset Markers on page 108 Time Sync See Time Sync on page 108 e Events Counters dj Ei Events Counters Preset Markers 3O an e Time Sync EN A Events Menu Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Events Counters gt Events Events is a firmware option that can be activated using the credit system All Event occurrences can be viewed in Events Status on page 181 Edit Setup Event 1 Eventi Enabled Event 2 X Event2 Event 1 Event 3 x Event 3 Cause 1 Alarms Event 4 x Event 4 Cause 2 Event 5 amp Event5 e Effect 1 Alarm Ack Event 6 X Event Iv Effect 2 v Totaliser pnt a am jd rea Events are certain conditions or operations which can be set up and logged according to the time and date of the occurrence Subsequently events can be reviewed in a list or represent ed on a graph 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK An event is made up from a Cause and an Effect For example set up a cause suc
379. ng you to specify 1 to 9 calibration points and the sen sor correction from that cal point e g cal point 300 deg C correction 0 6 This would add a 0 6 degree C correction at 300 degrees C net e ea If only one cal point is entered then it will be taken as a single point cal and that correction applied across the whole range If two or more points are added then a reference table will be generated this will use the standard reference table functionality currently within X Series and apply that to the signal All thermocouple calibration adjustments will be performed after the existing single or dual cal has been applied to the signal 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK AMS2750 Process mode Thermocouple Usage Tracking AMS2750 Main menu Status TC Usage Thermocouple Usage Tracking is available with both TUS and Process options It provides a means to track the usage of thermocouples within the recorder when being used as a process instrument This give an indication to when thermocouples need replac ing dependent on load cycles and other factors specified in AMS2750 Thermocouple usage tracking is shown as a status screen within the recorder It shows the current status of the thermocouple within the furnace in process mode A thermocouple has to be configured to be tracked for either calibration or usage within the sensor configuration If a thermocouple is set to be tracked but has no expiry or recalibrati
380. ning the device for editing and right click on the device either in the left or top window The Edit Device Details dialog box will appear showing the config uration for comms with that device Any fields not greyed out can be changed For Ethernet devices the IP address can be changed Any device can be made active or inactive from here For active Modbus devices the recorder name and protocol variant can be changed modbus vs Modbus X For an inactive Modbus device the device profile can also be changed For information on the Test button see above Click on the OK button to save the changes Delete a Device Select the Comms port containing the device to be deleted and right click on the device ei ther in the left or top window Select Delete Device from the resulting menu The Delete De vice Details dialog box will appear showing the details of that particular device Check this is the correct device for deletion then click on the OK button and the device is removed otherwise the operation can be cancelled Comms Server Logging To set up logging you must first decide where to store the data A database must be set up The database can either be on the PC running Comms Server or on another networked de vice There will be a database already set up by default on your PC when TrendServer Pro was loaded This will be called Initial database To set up a database on the PC click the Database Servers icon this will expand to sho
381. nsors Configuration Menu Process Mode on page 359 except for the AMS2750 Info menu AMS2750 Info TUS Mode Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt I O AMS2750 gt Sensors gt Sensor gt AMS2750 Info In TUS mode SX recorders only each sensor requires additional information this informa tion is stored separately to the recorder configuration allowing it to be reused for multiple fur naces or recorder configurations 123456 top left front Furnace Rite TUS TC Control TC Track Usage Serial No Position Manufacturer Type Renewed On Track Cal Expendable 01 09 2009 372 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK TUS mode TUS TC Check this to include this TC in the TUS Control TC Depending on Instrument type refer to AMS2750 specification section 3 3 If a TC is set to be control TC i e the input is spliced into the control TC all func tions will remain the same as for all other survey TC s except there will be no calibra tion adjustments for the Control TC Track Usage Check this if you wish to track the usage of this TC Serial Number Batch or Serial number of this sensor 40 Alphanumeric Position of thermocouple enter the position of the sensor in the furnace Eg Top left front or Bottom right back Manufacturer Enter the manufacturer of the sensor 20 alphanumeric Type expendable non expendable thermocouple Number of uses usually 0 this i
382. nst component failures the user should fit an external fuse for the DC input power supply The value should be 4A time delay high breaking capacity mini mum 60Vdc rated Failure to comply with these instructions may result in product damage A WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES When using the recorder as portable equipment the optional rear cover must be fitted when hazardous voltages are connected Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury AC Power AC supply is connected via the standard configuration IEC chassis plug on the rear panel 100 250 Vac 50 60 Hz 40 VA Minitrend QX eZtrend QXe and 60VA Multitrend SX Absolute limits 90V 132Vac 110V and 180V 264Vac 240V AC DC Power Suppy For the Minitrend QX and the Multitrend SX the supply range is 24V DC 10 ab solute limits are 20V to 55V DC the AC range is 20 to 30V AC The Minitrend QX also has an 18V option with supply range 12VDC 35VDC 12VAC 26VAC Power to the D C variant is connected via a rectangular 3 way connector as identified in page 16 for the Minitrend QX and page 16 for the Multitrend SX The eZtrend QXethe supply range is 24V DC 10 absolute limits are 20V to 30V DC Also accepts 20 to 25V AC Note Inrush Current 75A max High Line Cold Start for all recorders 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 15 Earth screw ground Wire seal provision 24V DC AC Input Analogue Input alle ES Analogu
383. nts 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Figure 4 6 Templates for Email using Embedded Values Subject Pen 1 Temperature Test m IPLT P1 v P1 U Message Body P1 T P1 V P1 L SNTP Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Comms Comms Services SNTP Simple Network Time Protocols is a protocol for synchronising the clock on the recorder with a Network Server Server Enable Toggle On and Off Activate this to make this recorder the server Other recorders set up as clients can synchronise their time to this server recorder Client Enable Toggle On and Off Activate this to set this recorder to synchronise time with the server See Figure 4 7 on page 90 Server Name up to 32 characters Only available when Client Enable is active This is the name of the Network Server that can be used for time synchronisation Enter the server name to be used for time synchronisation this could be a Time Server on the internet or on your network If a recorder is acting as the Server the Client recorders must have the recorder s network ID eg xs nnnnnn this is the 6 digit Serial number See System on page 173 for the recorder s serial number Period Only available when Client Enable is active Select and enter the time period in seconds required between checking and updating the time using the on screen key board This will be between 600 and 3600 seconds Threshold Only available whe
384. nu Status System General Displays the version status for the different types of firmware hardware and current recorder information Table 4 11 Example System Version Status Options Version ID 0001 Name QX Serial No LES Processor MHz Firmware ae Firmware Data 16 33 33 Oct 11 2006 Bridge Firmware Platform 5 Boot Loader 1 Mac address 00 d0 6e IP Address 160 221 Front USB Host Mode Internal Mem Id This number is made up from the size of the memory card and what type of format it is Eg 256T16 256MB size formatted to TFAT16 Database Size Mb CF Card MB MB USB 1 MB MB USB2 Empty Password Node Type Standalone Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media See Database Size Management on page 239 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 173 Options Main Menu Status System Options Displays a list of firmware options available and which ones are enabled For more information see See Section 7 Firmware Options on page 221 Table 4 12 Options Credits Enabled Full Math 4 Y o X Scripting Full Maths Note 2 6 Y or X Events 6 Y or X Fast Scan Note 2 5 Y or X Totals 4 Y or X Custom Screens Note 2 4 Y o X Reports 3 Y o
385. nvalid board type finding history size Messages Incompatible hardware ID 9 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified whilst getting Diagnostics life history Invalid board type getting life history Messages Incompatible hardware ID 10 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified whilst getting Diagnostics session history Messages Incompatible hardware ID 11 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified during writ Diagnostics ing life stats operation Messages Incompatible hardware ID 12 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified whilst in Diagnostics diagnostic mode Invalid board type writing FieldPortDiagOutput Messages Unable to read board revi 0 1 1 Invalid or unsupported board revision for I O board firmware Diagnostics sion Error reading board revision conversion request or reading value Messages Invalid board revision 0 1 1 Invalid or unsupported board revision for I O board firmware Diagnostics Error reading board revision value read was not recognised Messages Board not marked as having N A N A Board has not passed ATE test return to factory Diagnostics passed post mfr test Messages Unable to read valid configu N A N A Could not read a valid I O board configuration Diagnostics ration from E2 Messages Unable to read history stats 0 3 3 Could not read history or stats information from I O card Error Diagnostics from E2 reading board statistics Messages 43 TV 25 30 Iss
386. o anyone that requires up to the minute data on which to base their decisions OPC allows plug and play All OPC devices will connect together and immediately work with the OPC client software This has the potential to massively reduce installation and sys tem configuration time It also means that you can add devices without shutting down exist ing systems 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 253 254 OPC Interface Open Process Control OPC offers the following Combine different devices from different manufacturers in one system Reduce installation time Add devices without stopping existing software and systems Quickly replace a device from one vendor with one from another Share information around networks Device drivers rendered obsolete Factory laboratory and office applications can all access the same data Reliable data as any number of OPC software applications can simultaneously read a device Single industry standard data interface OPC Clients An OPC client can be used instead of the TrendServer software It is a user software ap plicatio server n for realtime interface between servers and clients Information from our comms which is OPC compliant uses an industry standard method of uniform data inter change The OPC client can then export realtime communications to other applications eg Microsoft Excel OPC clients must be version 3 compatible For mor e information refer to Application
387. o enter the menu system and process screens Limited access is available with out logging on see Table 5 1 on page 191 When Log On is required the Log On button will appear in the top right of the Main Menu screen The Log On button can be set to switch to auto Log Off at a specified period of time To Log On select the Log On button at the top right of the Main Menu screen Log On User is presented with a user name and password box First time user login is Admin No password is required Access for i wm the first time user is removed once the password system has been configured Log Off Once the user has logged on the option in the Main Menu M j will turn to Log Off once selected the user is logged off and returned to the current process screen User Log in Log Out Method Users can log in and out of the system or web page easily using the touch screen or an at tached keyboard Users and Groups Number of Users The system will support up to 50 users Multiple Log On s Users are allowed to log on to the system more then once allowing the same user to log on from different areas e g via the user interface and via web browser at the same time User Name Each user must have a user name this is a maximum of 20 characters in length and cannot be duplicated Numeric characters and symbols can be used in the user name but no spac es User Group Each user can be allocated to a group these are defined as fol
388. o set the security level for this zone Medium Safe browsing and still functional Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned ActiveX controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites Security Settings Settings Disable 9 Enable A Download signed ActiveX controls Disable i Select this option ctivex controls Initialize and script ActiveX controls not marked as safe Disable Enable f Munscsat Reset custom settings Reset to Medium Custom Level v NOTICE Please ensure any firewall settings on the desktop are permissive of the Comms Server Trend Server and that ports set up in the configuration default 8955 TCP and 8956 UDP are allowed passage through the firewall Remote Display Tool Active X Installation Recorder is Password Protected 1 On the login page add on message will appear as This Website wants to install the fol lowing add on RemotedisplayTool cab from Honeywell Automation India Ltd If you trust the website and the add on and want to install it click here 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 257 ce a RU O x dc a Q serh 9 safe dbDoNotTak f C Weather E Facebook Speedtest e dy Favorites LOGIN PAGE B LH This website wants to install the following add on RemoteDisplayTool cab from Honeywell If you trust the website and the add on and want to install it click here
389. o size for QX QXe and SX recorders allowing 6 pen values per line for a QX and QXe and 12 pen values per line for an SX Spacing will be fixed so that there will always be room for 6 and 12 per line on default screens custom screens can be created to display more Up to 32 pens can be configured to be displayed on the tabular display screen as with other canned screens An Event Effect can be setup whereby the tabular readings can be updated each time it was triggered If the recorder is put into Replay mode the standard chart replay screen will be shown xd gt Wl Standard Screen 4 Menu 25d 5 Screen 29 Aug 08 13 52 41 29 Aug i Pen 1 2 Pen2 3 Pen 3 4iPen 4 S PenS 6 Pen6 13 52 33 55 43 97 00 14 92 84 21 28 27 81 37 29 Aug i Pen 1 2 Pen2 3 Pen 3 4 Pen4 5 Pen 5 6 Pen6 13 52 29 70 57 87 00 14 13 81 40 25 94 81 46 29 ug Peni 2 Pen2 3 Pen3 4 Pen4 5iPen 5 6 Pen6 13 52 19 83 65 77 00 13 43 80 87 26 11 77 57 23 Aug i Pen 1 2 Pen2 3 Pen 3 4iPen 4 S5 Pen5 6 Pen6 13 52 09 33 43 67 00 15 81 8171 21 80 83 00 294ug i Pen1 2 Pen2 3 Pen3 4 Pen4 S PenS 6 Pen6 13 51 53 98 96 57 00 11 36 82 42 22 65 82 13 29 Aug i Pen 1 2 Pen2 3 Pen 3 4 Pen4 5 Pen 5 6 Pen6 13 51 43 33 70 47 00 12 13 82 88 22 04 82 87 29 Aug i Pen 1 2 Pen 2 3 Pen 3 4Pen4 S PenS 6 Pen6 13 51 39 35 57 37 00 12 45 82 32 20 10 82 42 29 Aug i Pen 1 2 Pen 2 3 Pen 3 4i Pen 4 S PenS 6 Pen6 13 51 29 86 98 27 00 11 71 80 50 17 21 8
390. ogging to start when the batch starts Batch logging control Pen logging can be controlled by batch start and stop the stop and start logging can be independently controlled so a batch could start the pens log ging but choose not to stop them logging when the batch stops or start logging inde pendently of a batch but have all pens stop logging when a batch stops Only pens within the group of the associated batch will be controlled 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 119 Stop Log Finish Enable this if you require logging to stop when the batch ends See Start Log 9 Start for details Allow Direct Input Enable this to allow the Batch control properties listed below to be edited directly from the batch control screen A barcode reader can be plugged into the front of the recorder and the barcodes scanned in directly NOTICE List driven data fields The next 5 fields are available for data entry associated with a batch The names can be overridden to suite the end user application all fields are now 69 character long with the exception of the User ID which is 20 A pre defined list of up to 30 items can be configured to allow users to select input for these fields from a list rather than type them in every time E g a user might have 8 different products running though the same process these can be pre configured so when starting a batch the user can pick from a list of products The pre defined lists have to be enabled
391. on See Maintenance on page 176 Recording Shows the current logging status of all pens within the system Pen Value Recording Log Rate Alarm Rate and Group See Recording on page 177 Diagnostics Complete diagnostics is shown for each of the following categories Hardware including Analogue In Analogue Out Digital IO and Pulse Inputs Events Comms and Media This is an option and requires firmware credits to be activated See Diagnostics on page 178 TC Usage For AMS2750 TUS and Process modes only Please refer to Thermo couple Usage Tracking AMS2750 on page 363 Saving Screens All Status screens can be saved as portable rtf files onto removable media These can be transferred to another location and kept for records or sent via email for troubleshooting and maintenance issues 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Printing Screens All the Status screens have a Print button to execute this the printer must first be configured in Network Admin on page 80 and in the Printer Menu on page 122 For details on suitable printer types see Print Support on page 31 The Print function is a firmware option that is selectable from the Factory menu Credits on page 112 System Main Menu Status System The System status menu is divided into three more sub sections General Options and IO Cards Each one will display the current status of the recorder for each category General Main Me
392. on Menu Process Mode on page 358 AMS2750 button Sensors Configuration Menu Process Mode on page 359 n n e x e Analogue Out Alarm Digital IO LJ Recording Reports ini Finish 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 357 AMS2750 Process mode AMS2750 Button Process Mode Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt I O AMS2750 This button produces the Furnace Configuration Menus Furnace Configuration Menu Process Mode Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt O AMS2750 Refer to AMS2750 section 3 3 1 and Tables 6 7 8 amp 9 Edit Setup I O AMS2750 Edit Setup AMS2750 BET E Manufacturer Furnace Rite Model No 654190 Class Mat M i Furnace 3 Furnace 3 Furnace 4 Furnace 4 Furnace 5 Furnace 5 gt i Mat Mat Type Pats 0 Parts Furnace 6 Furnace 6 Inst Inst Type JB RR vw Cem remm ww CRT Se Up to 6 furnaces or ovens can be configured and fed into one recorder Furnaces 1 to 6 re late directly to Groups 1 to 6 configured in AMS2750 Process Menu on page 353 Se lect each furnace in turn and configure as required Name Name or tag used to identify this furnace 39 characters of Alphanumeric Manufacturer Enter the manufacturer of the furnace Model Number Unique Model or Serial number of this furnace 19 characters Alpha numeric Class Enter the Fu
393. on page 26 For the Minitrend QX and the Multitrend SX recorders RS 485 2 wire half duplex to support Modbus RTU is standard See HS485 Minitrend QX and Multitrend SX recorders on page 31 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 225 226 Standard Communication Interfaces Front and Rear USB Communication Ports USB communication ports can be found one at the front and one at the rear of the recorder The eZtrend QXe only has one USB port at the front fitted as standard An extra rear USB port is only available with the Comms card option The USB Host ports will provide an interface for Save and Load Data Save and Load Setups External keyboard amp mouse Barcode reader Mass storage device USB key or Hard drives 250 GB USB Barcode Header USB ports allow the use of a USB barcode reader Protocols Protocols are an agreed upon format for transmitting data between two devices The pro tocol determines the following the type of error checking to be used data compression method if any how the sending device will indicate that it has finished sending a message how the receiving device will indicate that it has received a message The following Protocols available are Modbus Modbus primarily sends data no setup information is transferred via Ethernet or RS485 ports The device ID and Serial number is held in the setup and this information is required to locate the correct device in TrendServer
394. on requirement the number of days in use will be shown as opposed to a countdown till expiry Up to 16 sensor status buttons will be displayed on a QX or QXe and 24 on an SX If more sensors are available than fit on a single page then the Next button will be available and will show the remainder of the sensors To activate a TC to be tracked see AMS2750 Info Process Mode on page 361 or AMS2750 Info TUS Mode on page 372 Figure 24 1 Thermocouple Usage Uses ia 26 Dz alt Mi Uses teft 26 D ree elt NA Uses Left 30 3 vs Lehr NA Lises Left 30 Left NA Uses Le 30 Days Left NA Uses Left 30 Recording lt Sersor Input 5 Expendable Type K Base metal Serial Number 0123 Certificate No NA958 K Installed on 02 11 2008 Days Left 0 Uses Left 30 Calibration Due 02 09 2009 The status for each sensor is shown as a status button and shows the following top level information Sensor Input Thermocouple ID Overall health Green TC is over 5 days from expiry Amber TC s is 0 to 5 days from expiry Red TC s has expired Countdown in uses days to end of life days left Uses left and how long the TC has been in use 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 363 364 AMS2750 Process mode By selecting a sensor a dialog box appears showing more information and also providing a configure button for the sensor The additional information i
395. onnection select the RS485 port from the Comms menu and select the required protocol from the Protocol menu eg Modbus Diagram shows a view looking from the rear of the unit See Comms Services Menu on page 82 A B GND SPNC Relay Minitrend QX and Multitrend SX recorders Single Pole Normally Closed 2 way connector This is a fail safe relay which means if the power goes off the relay closes and can be set to trigger an alarm So should the power fail the relay is in a fail safe condition Diagram shows a view looking from the rear of the unit Either pins can be Common or Normally closed O Om NOTE Once the recorder is powered up if there are no active alarms associated with the Fixed Relay the contacts will open When the alarm is on they will close eZtrend QXe Expansion Card This is an interface card that is required when fitting the following option cards Analogue Input card in Slot B up to 6 channels Four Relay output card 8 Relay 2 Digital Inputs card 6 fixed Outputs 2 Configurable DI DO 8 Configurable Digital Inputs Discrete 24V Output card Comms card 24Vdc Transmitter Power Supply Rear USB Port RS485 Comms Port USB Devices Print Support Print Support is a firmware option that can be activated using the credit system refer to the Options item in Credits on page 112 Not all printers will be compatible with the print support feature on the recorder The guid
396. onnections 46 Multitrend SX Standard Screens OVOEVIGW i esed tea aea A reis 41 N NAS EXPO NOW 252r d nemici det 163 Save or Load Layout Share Pathi 5 esent creen NAS Button Device Selection eee 141 Network Settings COMMS Server eene 237 Network Share Path NAS sssaaa 80 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK O OPC CIBNDS aditam AP ETUR maa OPC Interface societas bt mtintin OPC Status Operating Temperature Dp q OvervieW tette tnn bride Comms Display Minitrend QX Rear Connections Minitrend QX Standard Screens Multitrend SX Rear Connections Multitrend SX Standard Screens Options Hardware Recorder Functionality Remote Control Viewer DOCULILY aae a EARR USB Devices eZtrend QX Rear Connections eZtrend QXe Standard Screens P PC Ethernet Connections 227 Panel Mounting seeds ses schaisniciviv sia nitncasaveseciseial 11 Panel cut out size ees 6 Password Net Sync Configuration sinocni RUNES aciei Password NetSync Password Network Synchronisation 147 Password Policy sss Password Security Audit Trail ESS uu M Urs ete First Time Password Setup ESS Level Permissions Table Log On Off Users and Groups Passwords sss Add User Administrator Change Passwords
397. option Hardware includes an IEC bracket The maximum rating only applies up to 104 F 40 C For higher temperatures the RH spec is de rated to maintain constant moisture content 290 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification LED Flash Codes LEDs are fitted on the Analogue Input card Analogue Output card Pulse Input card 4 and 8 Alarm Relay cards and the 8 and 16 Digital IO cards The LEDs can be seen through six holes on the left side of the QX QXe recorders and 18 holes on the SX recorder looking from the front Table 12 3 Bis acne Sequence Type of Fault 1 1 flash once pause flash once pause etc Hardware 2 2 flash twice pause flash twice pause etc Communications 3 3 flash three times pause flash three times pause etc Memory 4 4 flash four times pause flash four times pause etc Other 1 2 flash once pause flash twice more quickly pause CJC fault flash once etc added as CJC could be unplugged 1 3 If another error is also present with CJC error flash CJC fault once pause flash 3 times Red LED flash codes relate to the first fault stored in the error buffer With no faults the red LED remains off When the red LED is flashing the green LED stays lit The green LED flashes for normal operation The board outputs the flash code for about 30 seconds after it was registered 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO Augu
398. order you will require an expansion card to interface to the recorder QXe Analogue Input Standard card on page 21 Analogue In Menu Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Field IO Analogue In For AMS2750 mode the Analogue In button will change to Sensors Please refer to Sensors Con figuration Menu Process Mode on page 359 Press the Analogue In button to display all the analogue inputs available Click on individual Analogue In number to set up each channel profile Each channel has a list of menu items to be configured Refer to connection details and Analogue Input Channel Numbers on page 19 Edit Setup s Analog In 9 AS Volts 412 5 AnalogIn 10 v A10 Amps 0 20mA 2Hz Analog In 11 v A11 Ohms 1K 2Hz Analog In 12 v A12 TC Type K 2Hz Analog In 13 A13 RT PT100 10Hz I Analog In 14 A14 Volts 504 5Hz 3H cml Enabled Toggle On and Off Type Select this for a list of available Signal Inputs 56 Menu path to current menu The Analogue In screen displays all the available Analogue Input channels Each channel displays its individual settings Select a numbered chan nel to edit the configura tion of each input 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Sample Rate Select this for a list of available Analogue Input sample speeds A Fast Scanning range of 50Hz 20ms is available as a firmware option not available for the
399. ords AMS2750 Passwords AMS2750 392 The X Series recorders provides full password system to comply with 21 CFR Part 11 50 Users with unique ID amp Password time outs expiry of passwords password definitions and audit trail information Extended Security and Password Capabilities Provides security to recorder functions audit trail of actions Password expiration reuse and password customisation 21CFR Part 11 compliant For full information on the password system and setup Section 5 Password Security on page 187 5 When passwords are enabled in the recorder these are the areas that are password protect ed TUS Screen The TUS screen can be password protected if passwords are enabled in the recorder to prevent unauthorized individuals from starting the TUS The TUS screen provides controls for the operator that allows them to take some actions relative to the actual data collection process Configuration and Start Stop buttons on the TUS screen The Configure TUS and Start Stop buttons are only available when a TUS is not running If passwords are enabled in the recorder these buttons are password protected This will re strict unauthorized access to start stop and configure the TUS Thermocouple Usage Pressing the configure button will prompt for a password if passwords are enabled in the recorder Thermocouple usage tracking is shown as a status screen within the recorder It shows the current status
400. ormation Bar Help 3 UAC control will appear Click on Yes to confirm the installation Note a If user does not follow steps 1 to 3 and clicks on Remote viewer link and again clicks on add on message for installation of RemotedisplayTool cab file following pop up window will appear Microsoft Internet Explorer AN The page cannot be refreshed without resending the information Click Retry to send the information again or click Cancel to return to the page that you were trying to view Click on either button to complete the installation b After completing steps 1 to 3 installation for activex control for the particular recorder is complete User can use remote viewer functionality for this recorder If user wishes use remote viewer functionality for the other recorder from the same web browser same machine he will have to undergo steps 1 to 3 again for that recorder 260 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Section 9 PC Software Suite The TrendManager Pro Software Suite The TrendManager Pro Software Suite complements the capabilities of the X Series re corders by providing the benefits of viewing configuration network communications database man agement data analysis and report generation using a personal computer It ties the process together providing for real time or FTP communications with the recorders through a Local Area Network LAN TrendViewer This is the standard software provided with the recorder
401. orter time span and can zoom out a further 4 times to view more data over a longer period of time The amount of data displayed on the replay screen is dependant on what chart speed is se lected and how many pens are enabled in the recorder Chart Logged data Slider An adjustable slider shows how much memory is allocated to Chart data and how much memory is allocated to Logged data The user can adjust the slider which will display how long it will take to fill the memory at the current chart speed before the data will start to be recycled See Storage Bias on page 129 How Replay works There are three separate queues of data represented by the three different chart speeds As you zoom in and out it switches between these different queues These queues are not all the same length so for example The fast speed may be at 600mm hr which means to cover 24 hours takes approx 30Mbytes for 8 pens The medium speed may be at 20mm hr which means that to cover 24 hours takes 1Mbyte 1 30 of fast The Slow speed may be at 1mm hr which means that to cover 24 hours takes 50Kbyte 1 20 of Medium The result of this is that the slow speed will tend to give you much more elapsed time history but at a lower time resolution here is a representation of what this could look like Data 2 week 4 weeks 6 weeks 8 weeks 12 weeks Fast speed Medium speed Slow speed The lines represent absolut
402. ot equal the pre dicted value the point is logged as it no longer forms part of the straight line Fuzzy Logging looks for straight lines at any angle Not just on the horizontal Do you have any examples Example 1 Flow amp Pressure Measurement of Mains Water Pressure A recorder was installed to monitor the flow of a mains water supply At peak demand the mains pressure had been subject to sharp drops in pressure and flow rate and it was nec essary to find the cause of the problem The recorder had to have a fast scan rate in order to capture the glitches The recording period would be over many days if not weeks so storage capacity was at a premium A fast scan rate using the standard sampling method would result in a disk life of about a day which was not acceptable As this application consists of long periods of little activity relatively constant flow rate and short periods of high activity rapidly changing flow rate itis ideally suited to Fuzzy Logging During the hours of stable flow where the flow rate remained more or less constant the Fuzzy Logging technique would give compression ratios up to 100 times However as soon as a glitch appeared the fast sampling rate was able to capture and store all the points Example 2 Cold Storage Temperature Measurement A recorder was required to help track random and rapid temperature changes within the cold storage rooms Conventional sample recording had s
403. ottom of the 0 10V table the last two inputs are X 0 Y 0 and X 2 Y 6 At the top of the 0 10V table the last two points are X 8 Y 9 8 and X 10 Y 10 Figure 4 4 shows these last two inputs at the top and bottom of the 0 10V signal 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Pens Menu Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Pens Select the Pens button to display all the pens available Menu path to current menu Pen 1 0 00 to 100 00 P 4 Pen 2 50 00 to 500 00 B The Pens screen displays Pen 3 10E9 to 10E22 all the available pens Each pen displays its Q Pens 4 v Pen 4 10E1 to 1066 lt J gt Scale setlings Pens 5 Pen 5 0 00 5000 00 B Select a pen number to Pens 6 Bore ja ee me rues Click on individual pen number to set up each pen profile edit the setup of each pen v Pen 6 20 00 200 00 B gt ww including the Scale Logging Alarms and Enabled Toggle On and Off Tag Select and use the on screen keyboard to type in an identifier for the pen Up to 47 characters Description Screen Designer screens only Enter a screen description in this field that will then be displayed on the Screen Designer screen Maths Type Analogue signals may have a mathematical calculation performed on them before they are represented as a pen Basic maths is standard in all recorders Full Maths or Math Scripting are options that must be activated See Options on page
404. ows the choice of multiple channels to copy to A channel is selected by touching the corresponding channel number and when completed the user applies the changes by touching the tick the finish amp commit as usual Note that the source channel will always be blocked by a no entry sign as it is not pos sible to copy a channel to itself as shown below In this example channel one is being copied to channels 2 through 10 This capability is available in both AMS2750 survey and process modes and what is copied is listed below 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 373 374 TUS mode Each channel has a number of pieces of information that are used by the instrument and the generated survey report The copy function does not just copy the Cal Adjust ment table the following other items are copied Table 24 1 TUS Mode Process Mode Track usage flag Track usage flag Serial number Manufacturer Type Type Renewed On date Renewed On date Track Cal flag Track Cal flag Next Cal date Next Cal date Cal Adjust table in full Cal Adjust table in full Certificate number Certificate number Cert No enter the certificate number for the sensor 20 alphanumeric Any sensor correction factor is deemed to be a single point cal configured within the Ana logue input configuration menu Note All above information is copied from the source channel as is and the use
405. ows the user to set up Modbus Device Profiles for use by the Communications Server It allows the user to set up other Modbus devices other than the X Series recorders to get real time data into TrendServer Pro Communications Server The Communication Server is supplied with TrendServer Pro It manages real time communica tions distributed access to the stored data time synchronisation over RS 485 and Ethernet networks It is also available with a V3 compliant OPC Server to make it easier to interface third party HMI soft ware packages that support an OPC Client The Communication Server provides security for the trans mission and storage of process data A Comms option card and expansion card are required for the eZtrend QXe recorder X Series Screen Designer Not available for the eZtrend QXe recorder X Series Screen Designer is a separate software package that enables the user to design unique display layouts for transfer to the recorder s screen Screen layouts can be created using a combina tion of indicators such as Trending Charts Digital Panel Meters and Bargraphs Flexibility allows each type of indicator to have elements of its appearance changed to create an individual presentation The X Series Screen Designer software package is compatible with all Minitrend QX and Mul titrend SX recorders Layouts can be transferred on to single or multiple recorders of the same type which contributes to continuity and standardization of proce
406. pavptesirssindctveessine High and Low Alarms Hot Button sss Enable Show 1 di e Event Cause 2uo9teeniiaeeteemwontems Name iion teinte lee User Action eere Hubs or Switches I VO AMS2750 TUS sss 367 IO AMS2750 Process Mode 357 IP Address IP Address Entry IP Address Troubleshooting ldentity Me p Installation tete DAN DC Inp t eterne tente Alarm Relay Cards Analogue Input Card Analogue Output Card ss Comms Connections eee Digital IO Cards sse Electrical Installation D Environment and Location Mechanical Installation Panel cut out size Pulse Input Card ses SPNC Relay ateoneucte terres Transmitter Power Supply Card Installation Category sss 427 Internet Security Settings sss 256 J Jump feature aac demie pn a asd 166 LED Flash Codes uo aiuti ob iode 291 Language Layout Ment ssiri Add Screen Appearance Delete Screen Edit Layout Edit Settings Load Layout Save Layout Screens wee Layout Settings Level Permissions Table ss 191 Levels Pass WOES i ios d tta eaa le tr ORUM d 145 Linearisation Tables Analogue Input tnt 64 Load Layout Load Setup Re Load layout NAS ERE 141 Local Area Network COMMIS aiea eE E E E A
407. pen number you wish to totalise eg T3 Pen 4 is now set to totalise the value of Pen 3 It may be necessary to set a larger scale for the totalising pen pen 4 as the totalising value may become larger than the pen scale of the pen being totalised pen 3 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Go to the recorder s process screen and select a screen showing DPMs The totalising pen pen 4 will display the totalising value of pen 3 Rest at 16M Accuracy table for totaliser count over 16 million Totaliser menu Reset at 16M disabled Table 4 2 Loss in Recorder Exponent Data Range Precision Accuracy Error 23 8388608 16777215 0 24 16777216 33554431 1 25 33554432 67108863 2 26 67108864 134217727 4 27 134217728 268435455 8 28 268435456 536870911 16 29 536870912 1073741823 32 30 1073741824 2147483648 64 31 2147483648 4294967296 128 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Comms Menu Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Comms Services TCP IP Network Admin Finish Services Modbus Web Email SNTP FTP and Peers See Comms Services Menu on page 82 TCP IP Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Comms TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol A protocol for communication between computers recorder
408. perform up to 8 trans actions where a transaction can retrieve or send 1 or more registers from a slave or re treive or send 1 or more Pens to a slave When requesting multiple transactions it is recommended not to request more that 24 at one time to allow the recorder to process the information So for 32 devices we would recomend 2 requests of 16 devices Access to slave registers within the maths function has been provided using SCV Slave Comms Variable For example SCV x y z where x Slave number y Transaction Number and z is the each successive register retrieved starting from 1 Item The Modbus master can be used in conjunction with the Modbus slave functionality of the recorder or OPC to enable the recorder to act as a communications bridge Data from the slaves connected to a Modbus master is made available as a map on the slave side of the Modbus master this allows another master to get access directly to another master s slaves data without the master having to re process that information Or a Modbus master can process the data and expose it to the network as its own pens in Modbus or OPC 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Modbus master must be enabled as a firmware option and requires Full Math or Scripting to assign values to a pen see Credits on page 112 X Series Other Master Master 485 or TCP IP Slave network TCP IP
409. policies will still be active using the last group password 11 If a Master is removed from a password group a new master can be assigned or all the recorders can be returned to Stand alone recorders and the password group is dis solved 12 As soon as confirmation is made in the Password Net Sync screen using the tick then the information will be passed on to all recorders in that password group 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 147 13 When a password is changed or recorders are added or removed from a password group a password synchronisation occurs automatically 14 A password group can be set up from the Master recorder without assigning all the slaves required You may not know the names of the recorders for the password group at that time When the password group is established each recorder you want to add to the password group can be visited and added as a slave to the password group 15 A login failure on any recorder in a password group after 3 tries or whatever is set up in the Master will lock that user from all recorders in that password group Contact your Password Administrator to reset the password from the master recorder only 16 Slave recorders have limited access to the Password Net Sync system a user pass word can be changed and sent out to update all the other recorders Slaves can also leave a group or promote themselves to Master All the password Admin configuration must be executed through the
410. port on including Total iser pens Pen Group Allows you to select which group of pens to run a report on All Pens This will run a report on all the currently enabled pens Group only available when Pen Group is selected for Selection Type Select the Pen Group you wish to run a report on from the available groups list To have groups of pens available in this list individual pens must be allocated to a group see Group in the Pens Menu on page 67 Use Group to produce an AMS2750 summary report 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 133 134 Current Pen Value Select whether to include the Current Pen Values of enabled pens in your report Max Mins Select this to include the Maximum and Minimum values of each selected pen All pens or Group of pens depending what has been chosen in the Selection Type option The report can give you the pen Max Min value for every Hour Day Week Month the Cur rent max min pen value or Do Not Include Max Min values Averages Select this to include the Average values of each selected pen All pens or group of pens depending what has been chosen in the Selection Type option The report can give you the pen Average value for every Hour Day Week Month the Current average pen val ue or Do Not Include Average values Pens Pens only available when either Curent Pen Value or Max Mins is set to Included Select which pens this report will be run on Totals Select this to inclu
411. pper wire rr Normal signal processing T Input A terminals Temperature on rear reading to maths panel of Thermocouple CApIESSION recorder Table convert R T A ye temp to Volts C Reading in Volts Inputs Volts Look up table PT100 uA lt i D added converts C D voltage read ing to tem perature Thermocouple Copper cable wire External Input Reference The reference temperature reading in this method is provided by a separate temperature measuring device connected to another input usually RT This input is processed in the normal way and then passed back into the thermocouple signal processing system as a temperature reading 314 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Appendix D Alarms Alarms Menu Main Menu Alarms Acknowledge Configure and View alarms from this menu m Alarms Ack Alarm A view Process ini Acknowledging Alarms gt Recording User acknowledgment of alarms can be performed at this menu only latched alarms can be acknowledged If a latched alarm is set up in the Pen Alarms menu then a latched relay will maintain in its active state until the trigger source has returned to a no alarmed state and the alarm has been acknowledged A latched alarm will continue to flash if an alarm marker is displayed until i
412. pulse inputs 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 279 Analogue Input Analogue Input User Defined Maximum Input Ranges For values entered for the Range Type in the Analogue In Menu on page 56 Table 12 1 Analogue In Ranges Preset Ranges ae Preset Ranges Maximum Voltages Voltages 50V 52V 1000mV 14V 25V 26V 500mV 600mV 12V 13V 250mV 300mV ev 6 5V 100mV 150mV 3V 3 25V 50mV 75mV 1 5V 1 6V 25mV 36mV 0 6V 0 8V 10mV 18mV 0 3V 0 4V 5mV 9mV Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification 280 Minitrend QX and eZtrend QXe recorders have one slot for digital inputs and alarm re lay outputs All alarm card channels provide 240V AC isolation channel to channel and channel to recorder Digital I O channels will provide isolation to 100V AC test voltage not for mains connection The Multitrend SX recorder has three available expansion slots for Digital Input Relay Alarm output cards Inputs are automatically debounced to remove switching oscillations All Digital Inputs are volt free contacts and are sampled at 10Hz max Relay Alarm Output Card Options There are two card options split into two types 4 Channel Relay Alarm Card 120 240 VAC 3 Amps rated resistive load The relay contacts are form C NO NC and includes suppression 8 Channel Relay Alarm Card 120 240V AC 3 Amps rated resistive load Two channels on the 8 Relay Alarm card can be used as digital inputs The rela
413. puts Outputs are required for configuration depending on what type of cards are fitted in the recorder For AMS2750 mode the Field IO button will change to IO AMS2750 Please refer to Appendix L X Series AMS2750 capabilities on page 351 B Bt B amp gt La Analogue In Analogue Qut Alarm Digital IO B a I z9 Pulse Inputs Linearisation Finish Analogue In Select this to configure each Analogue Input channel See Analogue In Menu on page 56 If AMS2750 mode is selected in the credits this button will show Sensors refer to Appendix L X Series AMS2750 capabilities on page 351 Analogue Out Select this to configure each Analogue Output channel See Ana logue Out Menu on page 59 Not available for the eZtrend QXe recorder Alarm Digital IO Select this to configure Relay Alarm Output card or Digital Input Out put card See Alarm Digital IO on page 60 Pulse Inputs Select this to configure each Pulse Input channel See Pulse Input on page 63 Not available for the eZtrend QXe recorder Linearisation Tables To be used with Analogue Input type Volts Amps or Ohms These are user defined tables that can be set up to allow a non linear input sig nal to be used See Linearisation Tables on page 64 54 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Table 4 1 Card Positions and Channel Numbers Minitrend Q
414. r Pen or Input Channel Showing is what is displayed on the screen The selections will change depending on what is selected in Data From Showing For Pen Current Value Minimum Maximum Average or Total value Showing For Alarm for Pen List of available Alarms Showing For Input Channel Analogue Digital Hi Pulse or Low Pulse Figure 4 4 Channel mapping Setup Screen for a selected widget or object Channels ALM MKR 1 TEXT 1 DIG 1 TEXT Pen No 1 Total Pen No 1 Total Select a Pen Le e as os a a Input Channel Average Cancel Total m ae D Channel Mapping Objects To select an object activate the Expert button on the Screen menu bar Objects have blue grab handles around the edge Select Map from the Screen bar to display the Setup information as described in Channel Mapping Setup screen on page 156 If the object is an Alarm Marker the data will always be from Alarm for Pen Select the Pen number and the alarm number to be shown Pen Pointers just need to be mapped to a Pen 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 157 158 Parent Pens This does not apply to charts as charts normally have more than one pen displayed The parent channel is the initial channel to be configured on a widget All objects added to a wid get except charts and pen pointers automatically default to using the parent channel The parent it
415. r Supervisors and above incl Engineer and Administrator levels Technician Access is for Technicians and above incl Supervisor Engineer and Adminis trator levels Operator Access is for Operators and above incl Technicians Supervisors Engineers and Administrator levels No Login gives access only to unrestricted areas Access levels can change for each menu for example Operator or above access is required to get to the Configure menu Once in the Configure menu the operator level can only ac cess the Passwords button Setup is Technician or above access and Layout and Settings are Supervisor or above access 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Figure 5 1 Default password access from the Main menu Configure Menu Operator Access See Figure 5 2 for Configure menu access Permission Area 13 a Configure a LEJE Setup Passwords Layout Batch Control Operator Access All of the Batch Control menu buttons require Operator access Permission Area 10 Process a JE MaxjMin Counters M v2 Uva z User Variables Script Timers Reports fal ila Process Menu No Login required See Figure 5 8 for Process menu access 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Alarms Menu No Login required See Figure 5 6 for Alarms menu access Alarms a A Ack Alarm Back Configure 5l Main Menu 3 sw
416. r USB key then putting it into the PC and using the Import button This method has to be used for a recorder on an RS 485 network and can be used for a recorder on Ethernet Alternately the setup can be saved to the recorder by importing the setup that has been placed in a Network Share folder NAS Figure 8 4 Import recorders External Import Select type of import Pen data and events Setup only Import Close r Source Location From Directory C From Network FTP Please select the root directory where your storage device is General options located eg A for a floppy disk IV Auto graph the data 33 Desktop B 3 My Computer I Make a log file in the program directory 5 Se Local Disk C inel de estr djagrestic detalle i 5 Local Disk D Hj 3j Audio CD E SS Apps F m SS Data H E Personal 1 1 Sf Common on uk22nt2n UK22 Data X E Removable Disk Z c My Documents m My Network Places I Ttr5eetiin 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 233 234 Comms and Trend Manager Suite When the External Import box appears select Setup only use the Change button to browse for the device Select the import button to import the setup to TrendServer Pro Or for Ethernet connections the setup can be down loaded from the recorder via FTP Select Setup only as shown but change From Directory to From Network FTP External Import When From network is
417. r X AMS2750 Process Note 3 5 Y or X Maintenance 2 Y or X Printing 2 Y or X AMS2750 TUS Note 3 10 Y or X Batch 5 Y or X Counters 3 Y or X Modbus Master 10 Y or X Remote View 3 Y or X Email 3 V o X OPC 8 Y o X Pwd Net Sync 5 Y or X Extra Pens 2 4 pens Total Pens Password CFR Note 1 NA Y or X Total Credits no used no available NA Note 1 Password CFR ESS Extended Security System This will only appear in the list if this feature is ena bled in the recorder It cannot be enabled by the firmware credit system contact Honeywell for details Note 2 not available for the eZtrend QXe Note 3 AMS2750 Process and AMS2750 TUS credits cannot be enabled at the same time Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media 174 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK IO Cards Main Menu Status System IO Cards This will display the Slot position of each card in the recorder The Card Type is identified as Analogue I P Alarm Digital I O Analogue O P or Pulse Input The number of Channels on each card eg Digital I O 1 16 The Firmware Version of the card is displayed and the Board Revision Table 4 13 Example of IO Card Status for a Minitrend QX Slot Card Type Channels FW Version Board Revision A Analogue I P 1 8 A 00 0 B Pulse 9 12 A 00 1 G Digital I O 1 16 A 00 0 Go Back to return to the prev
418. r covers are available for these products and it is recommended to use the rear cover to protect the wiring and to minimize external effects that could impact the perform ance of the CJC For the rear cover part number see Section 10 Spares List on page 263 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Electrical Installation Analogue Input Channel Numbers Analogue Input cards are either 4 6 or 8 channels with a full length connector taking up 8 channels even if only 4 or 6 are operational Table 2 2 Minitrend QX and Multitrend SX Analogue Input card Card Position SIot A Slot B Slot C Slot D Slot E Slot F Channel number 1to8 9 to 16 17 to 24 25 to 32 33 to 40 41 to 48 Table 2 3 eZtrend QXe Analogue Input cards Card 3 CH 6 CH 9 CH 12 CH A 1 3 1 6 1 3 1 6 B 9 14 9 14 Analogue Input Connection Details Current Input For Current mA Input fit a 10Q resistor across the and pins of the 12 way mating half analogue connector Figure on page 21 shows a 102 0 196 resistor fitted to channel 5 for a current mA input 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 19 20 Electrical Installation Thermocouples Ensure polarity of thermocouple is correct Resistance Thermometers If using 2 wire R T the and terminals must be linked together See Figure 2 14 Input signal wiring on page 21 Analogue Input
419. r is installed then user will be prompted with the message box Would you like to open print the generated report If user selects Yes then report will be opened with installed Acrobat Reader The SAT report is complete 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 399 AMS2750 Report Generation Tool 9uieN Jesuibuy V1 001I d3uni 3o0Hd J3H Ho ubis jeaoiddy uequinN 3Inpa20Jd LYS JOjE2Ipul 1521 Josues s l SAT Report example DuipeseM iueunasu jueuinasu 1s8 s9 JO pejpenoj Uuon suo Sjueuiuio2 jePuonippv eoutisjol Josues jo13u02 Duipees jueuunujsul uoneoipul 158 peieuooun Japjooagj ie omuoo uon2auo uoneuinoju 3ueuie2e d ejdnooouueu 1 eunyeuBis eAneyuese1dex ueduio2 uonedqiie2 LYS eAnejuesajdex ueduio2 uoneiqies LYS esnou ui euop jou jj aweN ueduio2 uonejqiiea LYS sselo usAO Vd uo buIgseM 13 uone2o Jainpejnuejy usao Dig Ja1njaejnuepy gaum gl eueN ueAQ Bo11sa1 Aoeinoog uejs g 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 400 AMS2750 Report Generation Tool TUS Report Wizard When you select TUS Report menu option the wizard will be started This will help creation of the TUS Report Appropriate fields such as Instrument Info Site Info and Furnace layout image are pre pop ulated with previously entered furnace information if the furnace ID of the currently loaded TUS data file is found to match a previously stored furnace ID Where no stor
420. r the Maths capabilities will be available but will only become active if the recorder has the same Maths functions enabled This document provides the Maths Variable and Function table and examples of the capa bilities from the simple to the complex to assist the user in understanding the concepts and potential of these features Important Note Full Maths and Script functions are Options and must be enable using the Credit System Be sure to enable these options or they will not be available See Firm ware Credit System on page 221 Notes if elseif amp else are followed by expressions in curly brackets lines within the curly brackets always end in semicolon e g every execution path must have a return statement As soon as a return is executed the script finishes make sure that the return is the last operation to be executed every expression within curly brackets does not have to include a return Small values fractions entered into a maths expression will require a zero before the deci mal point Eg 0 5 Decimal point and not comma must be used always Outputs that are set to Single Pulse should not be used as a part of a maths expression as it can cause spurious values Nowhite spaces Syntax is not case sensitive 500 character limit for scripting NOTICE Full Maths and Scripting functions are Options and must be enabled using the Credit System Be sure to enable these
421. r would need to go to each designation channel and adjust the specific information that would be different for the designation channels Pens for TC s TUS Mode This is not available in TUS mode available in Process mode only 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK TUS mode TUS survey process screen A survey status screen is available as a standard process screen in the SX recorder it is available at all times and the screen cannot be deleted See AMS2750 TUS Screen on page 367 This screen is only available when TUS is selected in the credit system See AMS2750 TUS Credit Option on page 366 The survey status screen displays information about the TUS and provides on screen but tons to control the survey Start Stop TUS Configure TUS and Export TUS Top panel shows a summary of the survey details plus TUS operation buttons gt AMS2750 TUS 25 Sep 08 15 38 14 7d 19 Screen Temperature Uniformity Survey Stopped Furnace Time 7 Ed a S Name Parts Oven Username NA Started NA Model No XRH56748 No of TC s 65535 Elapsed NA Stat TUS Configure TUs Export rus Instrument Type B Class 2 Condition Stopped Ls Setpoint Status Max TC Min TC Max TC Diff Max TC SP Max Ramp Ramp TCLaginto Stable Soak Meets Tol Diff Overshoot duration Soak Duration Class TC s Stabilized Manual 150 00 TC0 TC0 TCO TCO TCO TCO 0 Mins Override 6 0 000c 000C 0 00C 0 00 0 00 300
422. ra memory when it is required there will be some delay in how quickly other screens update the memory allocation information Eg the Recording screen will adjust Export Required In time depending on chart speeds pens rate and how far the slider is moved Storage Alarm Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Edit Recording Storage Alarm The storage alarm function is linked to the Error Alert system when there is a requirement for a time period to be set to alert the user before the storage media is full Internal memory Set the amount of time before the internal memory becomes full and data is lost and for the Error Alert Message to display on the screen Enter a time period of between 0 5 and 48 hours Export media Set the amount of time before the data being exported to a media becomes full and data is lost for the Error Alert Message to display on the screen Enter a time period of between 0 5 and 48 hours FTP Memory Set the amount of time before the FTP memory becomes full and data is lost for the Error Alert Message to display on the screen Enter a time period of between 0 5 and 48 hours When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Pre Trigger Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Edit Hecording Pre Trigger The pre trigger functionality funct
423. races are available for demonstration or simulation pur poses See Demo Traces on page 116 Reset Setup Select this to clear the current setup A Warning message will appear before activating the reset See Resets on page 117 Localisation Set up the recorder for native language use and global settings See Localisation on page 117 Media Config contains the list of Storage media with Save and Load Options See Media Config on page 118 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Credits Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt General gt Factory gt Credits The Credit menu contains the Serial No of the recorder how may credits are available dis plays the Options Code and lists what Firmware Options are currently active Serial No read only and cannot be edited Credits read only and cannot be edited It displays the number of Credits available to activate additional firmware functionality Options Code The Options code is a unique coded number for this recorder that con tains information that enables certain functionality including the total credit value 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Options This displays how many credits are currently in use Select this to produce a list of Firmware options available and their credit values Toggle each option On or Off
424. rders The recorders can operate in 2 Modes 1 Temperature Uniformity Survey TUS Stand alone recorder that measures T Cs in oven furnace only available on an SX recorder 2 Process mode Screen amp Timers Program when next survey and calibration is due Any recorder type can run separate on side of the oven as part of the process instru ments Note Instrumentation and Instrumentation Calibration refer to AMS2750 sections 3 2 3 3 and Ta ble 3 Note It is recommended that the recorders be used with the rear cover in place when using them for recording data for AMS2750 applications or any thermocouple measurement to minimize the ambient effects on the cold junction compensation measurement High Limit Control TIC Tic Vacuum Gauge Control Output to Heating Element 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 351 AMS2750 Process mode AMS2750 Process mode 352 AMS2750 process is used when the recorder is attached to the process in the role of a re cording device All SX QX and QXe recorders can operate in the Process mode and can be used as a process recorder to monitor process timers for calibration due dates and ther mocouple usage set by the user Process mode adds some new status screens and timers to the recorder to help with AMS2750 compliance of the process giving a countdown to SAT and TUS intervals as well as control TC and instrument calibration The standard X Series recorders are capable
425. re longer stable soak duration It enters this stage based on the Stability criteria that was set up during the AMS2750 setup Done Red or Green the setpoint survey step has completed minimum of 30 min utes and recorder indicates whether that survey setpoint was successful or not Other colour codes are Green when the survey is complete grey when the TUS has been stopped and not complete and Red when a TC has failed First column Number of the thermocouple Setpoint Tol The configured setpoint or soak level this is the level configured for each soak within the AMS2750 setup configuration Status This shows the current status of the soak and can be one of the following Blank A soak for the setpoint has not been started yet 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 379 TUS mode e Detect The first stage starts when the temperature is ramping up towards the set point e e Soak All TC s have entered the soak level and are in tolerance but not yet stable e e Stable All TC s within soak and stability for less than 30 minutes if over 30 min utes will show Done Done A soak has been completed where all TC s have remained within tolerance for at least 30 minutes after stability e e Failed Indicates that stability was achieved for a setpoint but did not remain within the required limits for at least 30 minutes Max TC Shows the maximum temperature reach
426. re first reaches this value 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 323 324 Because of this small but increasing contribution to Fg once T reaches 100 C and the fact that in this trace the temperature exceeds 121 11 C the Fo value reaches 15 at time t 20 minutes at which point the sterilisation is complete and cooling begins For some applications it is allowed to report the Fg value that is finally achieved as the sample cools back to the start temperature in this example 100 C and so the contribution under the curve up to t 22 minutes would be included in the reported Fo The final Fg value might then be 16 1 say with 15 having been achieved up to t 20 minutes and the extra 1 1 having accumulated during the cooling back to 100 C between t 20 minutes and t 22 minutes The terms used in setting up the Fo totaliser together with their default values are summa rised in this table Term Definition Default Allowed values Range The equivalent time in minutes at 121 11 C that would pro Fo duce the same degree of sterilisation This is the totaliser out put value The temperature increase in C above the reference tempera 10 5 20 z factor ture that will produce a 10 fold increase in the rate of sterilisa tion Start The temperature in C above which the contributions to FO 100 90 120 temperature can be counted Reference The reference temperature for sterilisation normally 121 11 C
427. re if configured but use USB or CF card for scheduled ex port if possible See note above Update Period Select how often you wish data to be exported from the list provided 10 30 minutes 1 2 12 or 24 hours Log Messages Tick to add a message to the messages list when a scheduled export has been performed 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Mark Chart Only active when Log Messages is enabled Tick to mark the chart when a scheduled export has been performed When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu If a manual Export Now is in progress during the time when a Scheduled export is to occur the scheduled export will hold off until the manual export is finished Storage Bias Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Recording Storage Bias An adjustable slider can be used to determine how much internal flash memory is allocated for storing chart data and how much internal flash memory is allocated to storing logged da ta The User can adjust the slider to increase and decrease the internal flash memory stor age allocation Displayed under the Total Available Space bar is the amount of internal flash memory allo cated to chart and log data This will update as you move the slider The amounts shown display how much time it will take to fill the internal flash memory allocations at the current chart speed be
428. re nnnnnn is the serial number of the recorder This allows you to browse the recorder if you are using DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Slave ID This is a unique Modbus ID Address used by the recorder to identify Modbus messages Applications that talk to the recorder with Modbus will need to know this number to return messages to the device Comms Server must the same number must match Recorder Name This is the name displayed in the top right any process screen on the recorder or found in Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt General gt Ident gt Name The entered name will be used within comms server to reference the recorder Serial Number This is a read only box displaying the serial number for devices already on the network This will display as Not Available when adding a new device Status This will automatically enable the designated port and the device will become active This can be activated later from the main Comms Server screen Socket This number should not need to be changed only by advanced users for network ing When every thing has been entered use the Test button to make sure that everything is set up correctly The Test Profile button enables the Add Device settings to be validated It can be used to determine whether the recorder is configured for Modbus or Modbus X Because we are using Modbus X the Modbus X column gives correct readings the Modbus column ret
429. re possible to heat a sample from ambient to 121 11 C in 1 second hold it there for 15 minutes and then cool it back to ambient in 1 second the temperature time profile would look something like the trace in Figure 1 on page 323 and the Fy value would be 15 representing 15 minutes at 121 11 C In practice of course to reach this temperature the object would have to be subject to an initial heating period up to that temperature and later a cooling period back down again to ambient temperature more like the profile shown in Figure 2 on page 323 During all this heating up holding at temperature and subsequent cooling micro organisms are being killed at different rates and the Fo value is calculated by summing the effect at each tem perature provided it is over some defined starting temperature see below This calculation is performed by using the expression where T is the temperature in C and At is the time spent at that temperature The z factor that appears in this equation is the tem perature coefficient for the destruction of micro organisms and is the increase in tempera ture in C that produces a 10 fold increase in sterilisation rate This summation is only performed once the sample temperature has reached some speci fied starting temperature For example in Figure 2 on page 323 if this starting tempera ture has been set to 100 C a common value then the Fg summation would begin at t 8 minutes when the temperatu
430. rean Logarithmic Scales all displayed scales can be set as linear or logarithmic max 99 decades Enclosure rating Standard NEMA3 IP54 for Multitrend SX and eZtrend QXe mod els with NEMA3R IP54 for Minitrend QX model NEMA 4X IP66 available as an option Fuzzy Logging this standard feature provides a unique method to increase the storage capacity of the recorder The data is monitored to determine changes in process data if no changes are observed data is logged periodically If data is changing rapidly it is recorded normally at the programmed rate By not logging data that is static data compression of up to 100 1 or more can be achieved saving valuable memory 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 39 Functions and Features Security tag wire seal provision provides added security to seal the front door and rear when using optional rear cover to prevent undetected entry to these areas of the recorder USB Ports USB 1 1 only Front and rear USB host ports for data and setup transfers or remote screen through these ports Attach external devices keyboard or mouse Rear USB is an option for the eZtrend QXe recorder Replay with Zoom Select replay mode and zoom in on a specific area on the screen The data can easily be replayed at the recorder with the ability to zoom The touch screen makes it fast to review and analyse historical data A Jump function allows you to go from the alarm list directly to the
431. rect Current Protective conductor terminal Earth ground terminal Static Electricity Directive 2002 96 EC WEEE Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment xp e pe 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Protocols used in this manual Static Electricity All circuit boards and electronic modules associated with this recorder contain components which are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge Should it be necessary to handle such components appropriate precautions in accordance with ANSI ESD 820 20 Electrostatic Discharge Control Program Standard should be observed Protocols used in this manual Safety and Symbol Identification Table 1 3 Symbol Description A WARNING The WARNING symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury A CAUTION This CAUTION symbol may indicates a potential ly hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in property damage NOTICE A NOTICE symbol indicates important informa tion that must be remembered and aids in job performance Warnings and Safety Precautions Do s and Don ts 1 Before any connections are made to the recorder ensure the protective earth terminal is connected to a protective conductor before applying power or any other connections y WARNING IMPROPER INTERRUPTION OF CONNECTIONS Any interruption of the protecti
432. reen Setup Bo 9 s 2 n A ZA fe Screen Saver Charts Brightness Tabular Disp lt pl Finish Screen Saver In this menu you can configure the Screen Saver functions See Screen Saver on page 124 Charts In this menu you can set the Fast Medium and Slow chart speeds See Charts on page 125 Brightness Adjust the brightness of the screen using the instant brightness slider See Brightness on page 126 Tabular Display Configure Tabular Screen Display When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Screen Saver Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Screen gt Screen Saver Configure the screen display and Screen Saver functions The default state for the Screen Saver is disabled The Screen Saver function helps to reduce backlight wear When active the back light is off and nothing on the display is visible The screen saver will not function in Setup Menus or in test mode 124 Enabled Toggle On and Off Timeout Only available when the Screen Saver function is active This is how long the Screen Saver will display on the screen Programmable between 1 and 720 minutes in software when disabled the screen will remain on permanently enter O to disable Saver Type Only available when the Screen Saver function is active This is set to Normal 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 G
433. rend SX and Data Storage media QX SX Compact Flash up to 8Gb up to 12 for the eZtrend QXe USB ports for keyboard mouse and storage m external shunt ohms Volts mv Thermocouple RTD QX Up to 4 Analogue Outputs SX Up to 8 Analogue Outputs QX Up to 8 Pulse Inputs SX Up to 24 Pulse Inputs QX Up to 8 Relay Alarm Outputs SX Up to 24 Relay Alarm Outputs QXe Up to 8 Relay Alarm Outputs QX Up to 192 soft alarms 6 per pen SX Up to 576 soft alarms 6 per pen QXe Up to 144 soft alarms 6 per pen QX Up to 32 Totalisers 1 per pen QXe Up to 24 Totalisers 1 per pen SX Up to 96 Totalisers 1 per pen Fast Scanning Mode QX 8 Inputs SX 8 inputs 24V Power Supply 24V Transmitter Power Supply QX SX Common Relay Output QX Up to 16 Digital Inputs Y 24V Outputs SX Up to 48 Digital Inputs Communications QXe Up to 8 Digital Inputs RS485 Modbus slave QX SX 24V Outputs 10 100 Ethernet Web and Email USB ports for keyboard and mouse OPC Server RS485 Modbus slave QXe Crystal Clear Display Key Standard Option Minitrend QX has a 5 5 Digital Colour LCD TFT QVGA Resolution 320 x 24
434. res 1 51453012 501 SX Processor PWA 128MB CF Note Customer must 51453012 503 SX Processor PWA 256MB CF supply model number 51453012 504 SX Processor PWA 512MB CF and Serial number of 51453012 505 SX Processor PWA 1GB CF existing unit when 51453012 506 SX Processor PWA 2GB CF placing and order for processor board kits 2 51453006 501 SX Analogue Input 4CH Assy 51453006 502 SX Analogue Input 6CH Assy 51453006 503 SX Analogue Input 8CH Assy 2 51453027 501 SX Analogue Output 2CH Assy 51453027 502 SX Analogue Output 4CH Assy 2 50001017 502 SX Pulse Input 4CH Assy 3 51453024 501 SX Mother Board Assy 4 51453018 501 SX Digital I O 8CH Assy 51453018 502 SX Digital I O 16CH Assy 4 51453021 501 SX Relay Alarm 4CH Assy 51453021 502 SX Relay Alarm 8CH Assy 5 50001182 501 SX Power Supply AC Mains 50001182 502 SX Power Supply 20 55VDC 20 30VAC 6 51453030 501 SX Transmitter Power Supply board 11 50013946 501 SX Bezel Touch Screen Std and Includes Bezel Touch Nema 3 IP54 Door Screen and Door 50013946 502 SX Bezel Touch Screen and Nema 4X IP66 Door Assy 14 50009119 501 SX Std Nema 3 IP54 Door 15 50003590 501 SX Nema 4X IP66 Door 23 50001782 501 QX SX Speaker Assy 27 50006787 501 QX SX Battery kit of 5 Not shown 28 50056624 502 Compact Flash card 8Gb Not shown 30 50006809 502 SX Display Bezel Touch Screen Assy Includes Bezel Touch NEMA 4X IP66 Screen and Display 50006809 501 SX Display
435. riables eese eene nne Process Mode AMS2750 sss 358 Process Screen Overview 205 Processor Board Battery Safety chine tiani 327 Protocols 3 226 430 Pulse Input Card Channel Numbers Connection Details Diagnostics Pulse Input Menu Q Quality and Safety CE Matk i nuin E a KE 293 Salely r RA E a o tiende has 293 Quality and Safety Appendix A 293 R RS485 Connections Rear Pott 2niconeeceninme sse memes Rate Up or Rate Down Alarms Realtime Chart Controls 0 12222 Recorder Functionality Overview Recorder Setup usce irme men Default Time Zone eene Local Settings LogOnD OFff inopes Main Menu n Main Menu Access sss Menu Path 5 inscosiree aid itistene teorie te enis Recording Menu Device Selection Export NOW onessnanonime miae cine Export busy light escairia Recording Methodology is Recording Methodology T Recording Status iss anat eco Buenos Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification 280 Remote Control Viewer Overview 38 Remote Display Tool Active X Control ese Internet Security Settings oe Remote Networks COMMING issie a a PI die 229 Remote Viewer sssr 255 Replay MNT enan ARE SENTIR 158 208 CCUTSOR sae dd dare ea 208 Report Generation Tool AMS2750D 262 Report Tool ocecciecneintondst d ndi iei Installation sss
436. riggered from within a script it will apply a 1 second automatic lock preventing the same event from being trig gered more then once a second irrespective of the CLRE x being called for that event Damping examples Example 1 if P1 was measuring degrees C the expression P1 damp A1 P1 3 will damp the signal with changes up to 3 degrees C any change over 3 degrees between readings will be damped but by a small amount Example 2 P5 damp A2 P5 A3 will damp the A2 input up to a level determined by input A3 note the reference parameter P5 is always the same as the pen it is being used in this should always be the case Table 14 3 Compare amp Convert Syntax Description RHc rhe x y Returns Relative Humidity with y as the dry bulb temperature in degrees C and x the wet bulb tem perature in degrees C 9e RHf rhf x y Returns Relative Humidity with y as the dry bulb temperature in degrees F and x the wet bulb tem perature in degrees F Caf c2f x Converts a temperature in C to one in F F2c f2c x Converts a temperature in F to one in C Hi hi x y Returns the larger value of x amp y Hi4 hi4 x y x1 y1 Returns the larger value of x y x1 y1 Inside inside x y z Returns x if between y amp z otherwise returns 0 Lo lo x y Returns the lower value of x amp y Lo4 lo4 x y x1 y1 Returns the lower value of x y x1 y1 Outside outside x y z Returns x i
437. right 40 looking down and 50 looking up at the recorder display SX 70 from the left or right 45 looking down and 55 looking up at the recorder display QXe 45 from the left or right 10 looking down and 30 looking up at the recorder display Mounting adjustable for panel thickness of 2mm to 20mm Adapter kits available for covering existing panel cutouts Dimensions QX QXe Recorder W 144mm 5 67 H 144mm 5 67 D 200mm 7 87 Additional 80mm 8 15 clearance recommended for a straight type power cable and signal connectors Cutout 138 x 138mm 5 43 x 5 43 SX Recorder W 288mm 11 34 H 288mm 11 34 D 200mm 7 87 Additional 80mm 3 15 clearance recommended for a straight type power cable and signal connectors Cutout 281 x 281mm 11 06 x 11 06 Weight QX Recorder 2 7 Kg 6lb max SX Recorder 10 Kg 22 Ib max QXe Recorder 2 4 Kg 5 3lb max Colour Bezel Black Wiring Connections IEC Power Plug Removable terminal strip for input and alarm connections 286 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Input Range Performance Accuracy Table Analogue Input standard and expansion cards Input Actuation Range Accuracy Temp Stability Input Impedance Linear Millivolts DC 5 to 5 10 to 10 0 296 F S 0 01
438. riting non FTP d data within a defined period of time Storage Alarm level must be set CJC Missing CJC Sensor is not plugged into Al Card TC Burnout A TC burnout has been detected Storage Alarm Levels need to be set as to when the system is alerted that the three differ ent memory areas as low This is done in the Edit R on page 130 110 ecording menu go to Storage Alarm 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Internal Memory Full Thu Apr 19 13 24 44 lex Logged data is being lost en 4 6 3e 01 Pen 5 e hes Pen 6 45 98 Pen 7 Border Colour Use the on screen colour palette to change the message border col our Background Colour Use the on screen colour palette to change the message back ground colour Auto Clear When Auto clear is switched on the recorder will automatically detect if something has been done to rectify the problem and the message will disappear Eg if the removable external storage media being used for a scheduled export is full and is replaced with media that has sufficient memory available then the error alert box will disappear If Auto Clear is switched off you will be required to press OK on the screen error alert message Enable Reflash If Reflash is enabled and a time set the error alert message will appear again at the time specified until the error is resolved With Reflash enabled pressing the OK button on the screen message will only make the
439. rmat for use in MS Word or other compatible word processors A batch report for a Temperature Uniformity Survey can be produced Before a report can be run the report menu must be configured In the Reports Menu select the first or next available Report Edit Setup Report 1 group 1 report j Report 2 oven 2 batch report E i Report 3 Report 4 Report 5 Report 6 Edt Setup Enabled Name group 1 report Style Normal Selection Type Pen Group Group Group 1 Curr Pen Value Included v P Enabled Set to a tick to enable Name Enter an identifiable name of your report Style Select Batch for running reports on current batches Select Normal to run reports on specific pens all pens or groups A TUS report is for a Temperature Uniformity Survey that can only be used if this option is enabled in the credits menu This type of TUS report is condensed and should not be used as the final report to comply with AMS2750 specifications The full report for a TUS should be generated using the TUS procedure following Appendix L X Series AMS2750 capabilities on page 351 Selection Type This will be set to Group if Batch is selected for the Style select which group of pens the report will be run on If the Style is set to Normal the following options will be available Multiple Pens This allows you to select which pens to run a re
440. rmine the firmware serial number Diagnostics firmware serial number Messages Unable to determine the N A N A Unable to determine the firmware revision number given when Diagnostics board s GUID first ATE tested Messages Unable to determine the life N A N A The life history is not available from card Diagnostics history Messages Failure writing output value 0 1 1 There was an error setting the specified AO channel output Diagnostics value Note that subsequent writes may succeed Problem writ Messages ing AO value detected first attempt to send failed Failure writing output value 1 1 1 There was an error setting the specified AO channel output value Diagnostics on the second occasion Note that subsequent writes may suc Messages ceed Problem writing AO value detected second attempt also failed Failure writing output value 2 1 1 There was an error setting the specified AO channel output value Diagnostics because the last selected channel was not deselected first Prob Messages lem writing AO value detected last channel wasn t deselected Failure writing output value 3 1 1 Failed to set the identified Al channel correctly for acquisition in Diagnostics ChangeRange command Failed writing Al ADC values Messages Failure writing output value 4 1 1 Failed to set the identified Al channel correctly for acquisition in Diagnostics ChangeAcqFreq command Failed writing Al ADC values Messages Failure writing output value 5 1 1 Failed to set
441. rmocouple Almost Failed absolute measurement 330Q to 2kQ Open Circuit Thermocouple Failed No data on passive channel Thermocouple Failed but no error on passive thermocouple channel Thermocouple Failed also failed status on passive channel Short Circuit Possible thermocouple wiring short circuit detected significant reduction in 2 any increase is measured from the level when the recorder is first powered up Analogue Out Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Hardware Analogue Out Not available for the eZtrend QXe Channel Displays the Slot position eg B E or F the Analogue Output number and the system channel position This will show a tick if this channel is enabled TX Pen Displays which pen is transmitting the signal Range Displays the Output range set A tick here will indicate this is over range Output Displays the current Analogue Output reading for this channel Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media Alarm Digital IO Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Digital IO Channel Displays the Slot position eg G H or I the Digital IO number and the system channel position This will show a tick if this channel is enabled Fixed refers to the com mon relay output on the power board 24V relay Input Output Pulse Displays what activity is on this channel Input Output or Pulse Input
442. rnace class 1 to 6 numeric Mat Type Enter the type of material or load Parts or Raw material furnace Instrument Type A to E Refer to AMS2750 section 3 3 1 1 Into cycle at used to define a temperature cycle for a certain number of uses When the furnace has reached the high temperature set here and then falls below the Low temperature set in the menu below this is a complete temperature cycle Eg Into cycle is set to 110 can go higher in use once it drops back to the Out of cycle set eg Out of cycle is set to 90 the cycle is complete Out of cycle at Set Out of cycle as explained above in Into Cycle When all the furnace details are complete select Finish and Commit 358 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK AMS2750 Process mode Sensors Button Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt I O AMS2750 This button produces the Sensor Configuration Menus Sensors Configuration Menu Process Mode Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt I O Sensors Refer to AMS2750 section 3 1 and Table 1 and table 2 for Thermocouple information NOTE As per AMS2750 Standard the Noble metals T C s R S amp B do not require tracking of the number of uses but do require Tracking Calibration see page 361 The Track Usage will not be available in the menu for these types of T Cs The number of sensors available depends on the hardware fitted in the recorder Edit Setup I O AMS2750 sensor 41
443. rnet Protocol is the main transport pro tocol used on the Internet for connectivity and transmission of data across heteroge neous systems With all Honeywell software performance improves with more RAM faster CPUs and faster and larger hard disk drives NB It is recommended that at least 100 Mbyte of free hard disk space is available for archiving data Please note the more logging and data being stored the more free space on the hard disk is required This is not required with TrendViewer 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 231 232 Comms and Trend Manager Suite Software Installation The Comms server is only available with the TrendServer software The comms server will auto install with the TrendServer software Ensure the same communications information is entered into the hardware and the software in order for the communications link to work e g Device name and ID IP address of the device etc Install TrendServer from the TrendManager Pro Suite folder and the comms server and database servers install automatically Before installing the software on to your PC it is recommended to close down all other ap plications including any programs that automatically load during the start up procedure It is not recommended to load multiple installations on the same PC Load the CD into the drive and wait for the autorun sequence to start If autorun does not commence follow these instructions go to My Computer
444. rning and Red for expired Change Sensors button will take you directly to the sensor status page for thermo couple usage This helps to identify the exact issue relating to a thermocouple and take the appropriate action as described in the section TC Usage status screen see Ther mocouple Usage Tracking AMS2750 on page 363 If none of the thermocouples have been configured to be included in the usage tracking then the Change Sensors button will be greyed out The Cancel button will simply cancel the dialog and return to the process screen but this will not cancel any changes made in change sensors option The Done button will prompt the Start a TUS now dialog to be displayed Select No to return to the process screen or selects Yes to start TUS The next screen to be dis played will be the start TUS note entry screen see Start a Survey on page 383 378 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK TUS mode TUS Survey Process screen Middle panel Middle section lists up to 6 setpoints that have been entered for the survey This section shows the currently configured soak levels If you only have 2 setpoints eg 600 and 950 this would give a temperature difference of 300 Check AMS2750 spec to see if a temperature difference of 300 is allowable if not an additional setpoint may need to be added Each setpoint in the list has a tolerance width band see table in spec Status shows what stage of the survey is
445. rnout Diagnostics ROM Error writing Al Initial loop resistance to EEPROM Messages No board serial number on 0 3 3 The I O board serial number could not be confirmed as correct Diagnostics power up Error reading Board ID serial number failed CRC check Messages CRC error on reading setup 1 3 3 The setup file stored on the I O board has become corrupted Diagnostics from NV memory EEP Error reading Board Setup failed CRC check Messages ROM There are readings missing 0 4 4 50Hz acquisition is not possible whilst active burnout is selected Diagnostics from channel 10Hz operation is the maximum Messages 50Hz acquisition with active burnout caused lost readings use 10Hz max More data than buffer can N A N A More data than buffer can hold only part returned but some has Diagnostics hold some overwritten also been overwritten Messages Can t execute invalid state 0 4 4 The stored calibration is for an illegal range Invalid gain in Read Diagnostics WorkingCals Messages Can t execute invalid state 1 4 4 The I O card internal state is unable to take a CJC reading Diagnostics Invalid state in CUC state machine on Al board Messages Can t execute invalid state 2 4 4 The I O card internal state is unable to take read operate a dig Diagnostics ital Invalid state relating to DIG board pointer update Messages Can t execute invalid state 3 4 4 The I O card internal state is unable to take a reading for all Al Diagnostics channels Invalid state of Ad
446. rs via a Server Web Server with the recorder connected to a LAN all process variables alarm and mes sages can be viewed from an internet browser values are automatically refreshed Data Storage Internal Data Storage 70MB to 1850MB of expandible internal non volatile flash memory is available for data storage and chart history replay of data on the display Internal memory Logging rate 1 sec Type Pens 70MB 180MB 400MB 890MB 1850MB QX SX 8 24days 61d 137d 301d 622d QXe 8 24days 137d QX SX 16 12d 30 5d 68 5d 150d 311d QXe 16 12d 68 5d QX SX 32 6d 15d 34d 75d 155d SX 48 4 10d 22d 50d 103d SX 96 2 5d 11d 25d 51d 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 37 Functions and Features Data Export Removable compact flash and USB flash storage device provides multiple data storage alternatives Data is stored in a secure binary encrypted format with the recorder s configurations pro viding added security of the data files Compact Flash is not available for the eZtrend QXerecorder Removable Compact flash and USB flash storage devices External USB Devices The Minitrend QX and the Multitrend SX recorders have two USB host ports one front and one at the rear The eZtrend QXe recorder has one front USB Host and another USB port available as an option at the rear The USB ports can be used for attaching exter nal USB devices such as a keyboard mous
447. rsors as opposed to under a single cursor See Figure 6 3 on page 208 Action Swap Link Jump This is a Message jump mode that allows the user to jump to the next or previous message on the chart the display will centre on the message in ques tion Select Jump and the toolbar buttons will change to Prev ious and Next Use these to jump to the previous or next message on the screen See Figure 6 3 on page 208 ai Action Prev Next Exit to return to the Replay screen 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 209 210 Messages List links to Replay Screen To locate the time of an occurrence on a chart you can select an item in any of the message lists and press the Jump button This will take you to the exact time of the occurrence on the replay screen If the message requested is older that the oldest chart time data available a message box will appear and jump you to the oldest chart time and date available Hide Pens When in replay mode all pens are initially displayed to allow for better analysis Pens in re play can be quickly turned off leaving just the pens you want to analyse by pressing the dig ital panel for a pen the trace will be removed off the chart and the digital panel will go dark grey but still showing the pen name Press the digital panel of a removed pen to reinstate At least one pen must remain on the replay screen and any pens removed will be reinstated after exiting replay 13 53 00 emi deg C
448. running There are four stages of the survey Detect Soak unstable Stable soak and Done These are shown in more detail in During survey on page 383 Furnace Time Mame Furnace 1 Username NA Started Fri Aug 29 15 21 07 Stop TUS Model No QW 234 45 No of TC s 8 Elapsed 1h 25m 53s oH Class 2 Setpoint Status Max TC Min TC Max TC Diff Max TC SP MaxRamp Ramp TCLaginto Stable Soak Meets A Tol Diff Overshoot duration Soak Duration Class TC s Stabilized Manual Override 3 1000 00F Detect TCO TCO TCO TCO TCO TCO 10s 10 0 0 00F O 00F 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F NA ad li i li i i NA j T Restart Soak 15 00 00 15 10 07 TS 20 00 30 5 40 00 5 50 00 16 00 00 16 10 00 16r20 00 15 30 00 16 40 00 Laar T 29 Aug 08 23Aug08 259 Aug 0S 23 Aug 08 20 hug 0S 23 Aug 08 29 hug 03 29 Aug 08 234908 23 Augg08 23 Aug 08 2 1100 00 Max TC Detect blue is when the TC s are coming up to temperature including any under or overshoot and begins to level out around the setpoint Soakunstable magenta begins when the first TC s are within the tolerance band and begin levelling out around the setpoint As soon as the first TC goes into soak the set point turns magenta Stable soak yellow is a minimum 30 minute test period of the stable TC s Check spec for stable soak time as it depends on size of oven and load and some ovens requi
449. rver right click on the server eg Local Server select Add Data base and complete the dialog box details for the name and description of the device Add a Database Server 1 Use the database icon with a sign in the top left of the comms server window 2 Right click on Database Servers in the top left window Connect to a Database Server 1 Select Database Servers in the left window and then right click on the server to be connected in the servers list in the main window 2 Connect to database server dialog box will appear enter an IP address and a descrip tion to identify the database server Delete a Database Server 1 Right click on the database server to be removed and select the delete option 2 A dialog box will appear with the IP address of the database server to be deleted If this is correct click on OK All database servers can be removed except for the Local Server Add a Device There are three ways to add a device they all deliver the same dialog box 1 Use the device icon in the top left of the comms server window 2 Right click on a selected Comms port in the left window COM1 to COM8 or Ethernet and select Add Device from the resulting menu 3 Select a Comms port and right click in a blank space in the top window and select Add Device from the resulting menu Add a Device via Ethernet Double click the ethernet icon in the left column This will activate ethernet the red cross will change to
450. s Address Description Toe 51 52 25 66 1B00 6913 Totalisers 1 start address A 10 1B02 6915 Totalisers 2 A 10 1B04 6917 Totalisers 3 A 10 1B06 6919 Totalisers 4 A 10 1B08 6921 Totalisers 5 A 10 1B0A 6923 Totalisers 6 A 10 1BOC 6925 Totalisers 7 A 10 1BOE 6927 Totalisers 8 A 10 1B10 6929 Totalisers 9 A 10 1B12 6931 Totalisers 10 A 10 1B7E 7039 Totalisers 64 end address A 10 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 331 332 Modbus Memory Map Supplement Alarm Value 96 Pens Allows you to read and write the value of the alarm level over Modbus Table below shows Alarm 1 Pen 1 to Alarm 1 Pen 96 Address Address pm Tue 51 52 25 66 1C00 7169 Alarm 1 Value Pen 1 start address A 16 1002 7171 Alarm 1 Value Pen 2 A 16 1C04 7173 Alarm 1 Value Pen 3 A 16 1C06 7175 Alarm 1 Value Pen 4 A 16 1C08 7177 Alarm 1 Value Pen 5 A 16 1COA 7179 Alarm 1 Value Pen 6 A 16 1C0C 7181 Alarm 1 Value Pen 7 A 16 1COE 7183 Alarm 1 Value Pen 8 A 16 1C10 7185 Alarm 1 Value Pen 9 A 16 1012 7187 Alarm 1 Value Pen 10 A 16 1CBE 7359 Alarm 1 Value Pen 96 A 16 The address range continues from Alarm 2 up to Alarm 6 96 pens for each alarm EG Alarm value 2 Pen 1 96 Alarm value 3 Pen 1 96 up to Alarm value 6 Pen 1 96 Table below shows Alarm value 1 to 6 start an
451. s The 2 fn code bytes failed N A N A I O card did not recognize the command sent to it because the Diagnostics validation test code and inverse code were different Messages Slave still processing previ 0 2 2 l O board communications error Character received from SPI Diagnostics ous message when host should be waiting Messages Slave still processing previ 1 2 2 l O board field port diagnostic communications error Diagnostics ous message Character received from FieldPort before ready for next com Messages mand Slave still processing previ 2 2 2 l O board communications error Non clocking char received Diagnostics ous message from SPI when should be clocking reply Messages Cannot execute this com N A N A The command could not currently be executed because the I O Diagnostics mand in present state card is in the wrong state to accept the command Messages Wrong number of arguments N A N A The message sent to the I O card was invalid it had the wrong Diagnostics for this message number of arguments Messages Arguments of the message 0 4 4 Al board could not be initialized suspect Al board Diagnostics were invalid Invalid frequency sent to SetAcqFreq Messages Arguments of the message 1 4 4 Al board could not be initialized suspect Al board Diagnostics were invalid Invalid frequency sent to GetAcqFreq Messages Arguments of the message 2 4 4 DIO board could not be initialized suspect I O board Diagnostics were invalid Invalid mode sent to Flagint
452. s overridden to allow reuse of salvaged thermocouples this is clearly logged Renewed On Enter a date using the date selection screen for when the sensor was last renewed i e the current TC was connected on this date Track Cal Check this to track the calibration information of this sensor Next Cal Date Enter a date using the date selection screen for when the next calibra tion is due for renewal Cal Adjust Cal adjust for each TC up to 9 cal points Extrapolates between those points Calibration adjustments can be added and deleted by selecting Add In the Cal Point Deg C column use the touch screen and the on screen keypad to enter the cali bration point value In the Correction Deg C column enter the amount by which the sensor can be allowed or from the Cal point in degrees C before being regarded as out of calibration EG cal point 1 100 5 cal point 2 300 1 0 cal point 3 500 75 Looks for the setpoint 150 and works out the sensor cal for 150 See Ther mocouple Calibration Adjustments on page 362 Copy Cal Adjust the ability to copy settings from one input to another with copy capability up to 12 TC survey with 9 TC Cal Configure one channel competely including the adjust factors then select Copy Cal Adjust at the bottom of the screen Cal ro 0 Points ct No When the Copy Cal Adjust is pressed a multi selection screen is displayed which all
453. s without having to change the configuration Compact Flash is not available on the eZtrend QXe See Figure 22 1 Comms variables on page 335 Slave Comms Variable SCV 1 1 1 as Slave Comms Variable Slave No Transaction 1 Item 1 Table 14 2 Maths Function Table Maths Functions Syntax Description Add Returns the result of the addition ACos acos x Returns the Arc COS of x ASin asin x Returns the Arc SIN of x ATan atan x Returns the Arc TAN of x Ceiling ceil x Round up x to the nearest whole number Clear Event CLRE x Where x is the event number to be cleared 1 to 20 Cos cos x Returns the COSINE of x CosH cosh x Returns the Hyperbolic COSINE of x Damp damp x y z x input y Pen pen variable being used and z damping limit in engineering units See Damping examples on page 300 Divide Returns the result of the division Eval eval x Returns 1 if x is non zero otherwise returns zero Exponent exp x Returns the Exponential of x 298 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Full Maths amp Script Processing Table 14 2 Maths Function Table Maths Functions Syntax Description Floating Point Absolute fabs x Returns the Floating Point Absolute value of x Floor floor x Round down x to the nearest whole number Get Screen Number GETS
454. s and other devices Automatic DNS Names The recorder will automatically register a unique Network ID using the serial number The format is xs nnnnnn where nnnnnn is the serial number of the re corder This allows you to locate the recorder for browsing if you are using DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol TCP IP Settings Static IP Toggle On and Off With this enabled the IP address will be the same every time the recorder is powered up With this feature Off the recorder s IP address is cre ated dynamically using a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server With this feature On the IP address can be fixed by entering a known available IP address Preceding 0 should not be added when entering a Decimal Static IP address for example 192 168 015 019 must be entered as 192 168 15 19 IP Address Available when Static IP is On This is an identification address for com munications between two devices The IP Address identifies a specific recorder Please see Entering IP address details on page 78 Sub Net Mask Available when Static IP is On Acts as a filter when identifying an IP address Please see Entering IP address details on page 78 Gateway Available when Static IP is On A configuration parameter transmitted to each network device Please see Entering IP address details on page 78 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 77 DNS WINS MDNS Set to Automatic click on this to activate an
455. s as follows and as shown above Type of TC Expendable or Non expendable and metal type Serial Number unique to that TC Certificate No of sensor Installed on the date when the current TC was connected Calibration on the date when the TC was last calibrated Select the Configure button to take a short cut to the Sensors menu Main Menu Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt I O AMS2750 gt Sensors You can access the thermocouple and change the details for the newly connected replacement TC When a thermocouple is reset a mes sage is added to the system message list to indicate a reset User alert system to display when a thermocouple is reaching end of life and when one or more have reached end of life The colour coding for the TC Status button on the Process screen are as follows Green TC is over 5 days from expiry Amber TC s is 0 to 5 days from expiry Red TC s has expired All Messages Message 16 51 46 08 09 2008 Setup Changed 16 51 46 08 09 2008 Upscale burnout on chan amp 16 51 46 08 09 2008 Upscale bumout on chan 5 16 51 46 08 09 2008 Upscale burnout on chan 4 16 51 45 08 09 2008 Upscale burnout on chan 3 16 51 45 08 09 2008 Upscale bumout on chan 2 16 51 45 08 09 2008 Upscale burnout on chan 1 16 51 43 08 09 2008 Session updated Cornmit to 11 16 51 08 08 09 2008 TC 4 expired on number of use 08 03 2008 Setup Changed 08 03 2008 Upscale bumout on c
456. s how much the counter will increase or increment by Ctr Rollover Enter the number at which you want the counter to reach before it starts again Show name List only appears when Auto Pop Wizard is off Enable this to allow any additional list item names to appear in a drop down list in the Batch Process screen See below Show id List Enable this to allow any addition list item id s to appear in a drop down list in the Batch Process screen See below Show Field 1 List Enable this to allow any addition list item for Field 1 to appear in a drop down list in the Batch Process screen See below Show Field 2 List Enable this to allow any addition list item for Field 2 to appear in a drop down list in the Batch Process screen See below Show Field 3 List Enable this to allow any addition list item for Field 3 to appear in a drop down list in the Batch Process screen See below Additional list items are entered in General Batch Properties on page 119 Ensure you have the pens you require assigned to a group see Pens Menu on page 67 When the Batch Menu set up is complete and you want to start a batch go to Batch Setup Batch Control on page 159 At the bottom of the screen is the Ctr Reset button this will produce a warning dialog asking if you want to reset group counters When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back bu
457. s of the channels with a switch or a relay Pulse Inputs The 8 and 16 Digital I O option card has 4 channels that can be set as pulse inputs first 4 channels The operating frequency for pulse inputs on the Digital I O card is 1kKHz max Input Low 1V High gt 4 5V to 10V DC 9V to 20V p p AC or Volt free input Low short circuit High open circuit Figure 2 18 Digital Input Output card connector details CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16 19 20 21 2223 2425 26 27 2829 30 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 alerede NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NO Normally Open C Common Digital Input Card Channel Numbers The Digital input cards are either 8 or 16 channels with a full length connector taking up 16 channels even if only 8 channels are in operation Both the digital input cards can be used as a relay card if required Table 2 7 Du Digital Input card 16 Digital Input card 8 channel chanel Card Channel Card Channel position number position number Slot G 1t08 Slot G 1to 16 Slot H 17 to 24 Slot H 17 to 32 Slot 33 to 40 Slot I 33 to 48 The 16 channel Digital I O card is not available on the eZtrend QXe 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 29 Electrical Installation Communications Connections Ethernet The Ethernet port is fitted to all X Series recorders as standard and uses a standard RJ45 Ethernet connect
458. s time and you want to Totalise in litres there 1 litres in 1 litre so your unit factor would be 1 so every 1 second 1 1 unit is added If your flow meter is in litres time and you want to Totalise in Cubic meters there are 1000 litres in 1 cubic meter so your unit factor would be 1000 so every 1 second 1 1000th of a unit is added No Backflow Normal Totaliser only If the flow reading should go into a negative value eg The flow meter has been switched off and No Backflow is inactive the totaliser will subtract from the total value When No Backflow is active any negative values are ignored and the total value is held while the flow meter is off until the backflow level is exceeded Backflow Level Only active when No Backflow is set Set the level at which totalising will stop if the signal flow goes below this limit and if the No Backflow option is active Restrict Range Normal Totaliser only Toggles On and Off When active the totaliser restarts at Min range once it reaches Max range Min Range Normal Totaliser only Only available when Restrict Range is active Select and enter the minimum limit for the totals to range to Max Range Normal Totaliser only Only available when Restrict Range is active Select and enter the maximum limit for the totals to range from Use Remainder Normal Totaliser only Only available when Restrict Range is active Toggles On and Off If the total exceeds the m
459. s will reset all data including setups layouts and chart and log data This is irreversible and will restart the recorder Are you sure you wish to continue Select OK to Reset All or Cancel to ignore and return to the Factory menu Localisation Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup General Factory Localisation Set up the recorder for native language use and global settings including Language Select native language menu prompts from list For French and German the corresponding keyboard layout will be selected Help Language Select native language for Help Files currently English only availa ble Time Zone Select the corresponding time zone from the drop down list Daylight Saving Toggle On or Off to activate daylight saving if applicable When the time zone is selected and daylight saving is active the recorder will change the daylight saving hour automatically The date this occurs depends on the time zone selected Some time zones do not have daylight saving Data being recorded will be affected either with a 1 hour gap of data or a 1 hour overlap of data Temp Units Select the Temperature Units that the recorder is set to for temperature measurement Pen scale units may need to be changed accordingly See Pen Scale Line Hz Toggle between 50Hz or 60Hz Mains power frequency Used to optimise analogue input filtering Note The default value is set based on the model number but can be
460. sation Table examples Figure 4 3 shows an example of a set of non linear signal inputs X and the required values in engineering units Y that have been entered into a linearisation table They would pro duce the following curve Figure 4 3 Example of a 0 10V non linear input signal 10 8 Y 6 Eng Units 2 0 Signal Input A straight line is drawn between each point as shown by the continuous red line in Figure 4 3 For a more accurate curve as shown by the dotted line blue add more data points into the linearisation table The Linearisation tables that you set up here can then be used in the Analogue In Menu on page 56 If the full input range is greater than the range used in the linearisation tables then the signal will carry on following the slope of the last two inputs For example if we had a 50 to 50V range and just used the 0 to 10V linearisation table then the signal would look like Figure 4 4 If the Analog input has been set to millivolts and that the span is greater or equal to 1000 mV then the linearisation table X values should be specified in Volts 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 65 66 Figure 4 4 Linearisation table used for part of the range 50 40 30 20 10 Y Eng 0 Units 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 X Signa Input The last two points are used to follow the slope for the rest of the signal At the b
461. screens Mes sage lists Process screens and Replay screens The printer network information should be entered prior to printing see Network Admin on page 80 If the information is not entered in the Network Admin menu a dialog box will appear prompting you to enter Username Password and Domain Entering this information into the dialog will not populate the Network Admin menu It is recommended that you fill in this information into the Network Admin menu as it will not be affected by Firmware up grades in the recorder Allow Printing Paper Size A4 Orientation Landscape Printer Name Muk22nt2nijd2 Colour Printer x a 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK The Printer menu allows configuration for setting up a printer The printer option displays a Print button from various screens using a basic USB standard PCL Printer Command Lan guage printer For details on suitable printer types see Print Support on page 31 Allow Printing Tick to enable On and Off Paper Size Toggles between A4 and Letter Orientation Toggles between Landscape and Portrait Printer Name Enter the printer name as found on the network For a local printer that is connected directly to the recorder via USB ensure the printer name is set to the default LPT1 Shared printers on a domain or work group require the network path to be entered in the Printer name The file path will contain the server name this could be the PC
462. sed according to the Fo or Po sterilisation function at 250 F 121 11 C The Standard Reference Temperature and Thermal Resistance Z Value are adjustable All temperature limits are adjustable Start temp Reference temp and Z factor are all user defined allowing support for many different types of sterilisation applications See Sterilisation on page 76 Tag Select and enter an identifier for the pen Up to 17 characters Add to Msgs Toggles On and Off Select this to add a totaliser to the messages screen Eg Total1 Total 1 Reset Units Normal Totaliser only This is the Units of Measurement for the totaliser Select and enter the units Up to 12 characters Time Factor Normal Totaliser only Time factor Totaliser adds a value once per sec ond so you need to Divide by this factor For example If your flow meter is in units second Time factor is 1 If your flow meter is in units minute the unit will DIVIDE by the time factor in this case 60 so every 1 second 1 60th of the unit is added If your flow meter is in units hour the unit will DIVIDE by the time factor in this case 3600 so every 1 second 1 3600th of the unit is added Unit Factor Normal Totaliser only The Totaliser adds the engineering unit from the instrument onto the total after the time factor is applied You then need to Divide by the unit factor For example 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK If your flow meter is in litre
463. sed by the missing or incorrect function Refer to Application Note 43 TV 07 32 on your CD or web site for a list of scripting error messages 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Appendix C Thermocouple Connections How Thermocouples work Thermocouples produce a voltage dependant upon the temperature gradient between the hot and cold junctions The hot junction is the measuring junction of the thermocouple the cold junction is the point where the thermocouple wires are connected usually the connec tion block on the back of the recorder 20 C 100 C B CJC Hot Junction Cold Junction If the hot measuring junction is at 100 C and the connection block of the recorder is at 20 C the thermocouple will produce a voltage corresponding to 80 C the difference between the hot and cold junctions For the recorder to correctly report the 100 C it needs to know the temperature at the cold junction There are 4 options of cold junction compensation CJC on the recorder that are detailed below The simplest and most common is to use the Internal Automatic compen sation This uses a CJC sensor built onto the Al board to measure the connector tempera ture In this case it will measure 20 C this will then be added to the 80 C measured by the thermocouple to give a displayed reading of 100 C The 4 methods of cold junction compensation are described below All diagrams show passive burnout for a
464. self allows the user to quickly make all of their objects update to use the pen number indicated by the parent Replay Main Menu Screen Heplay The Replay button takes you to the process screen in replay mode The Replay screen con sists of a chart and DPMs The chart is vertical or horizontal depending on the orientation of the screen you have come from The replay screen has DPMs that display max min readings for each pen these values are taken from where the cursor is positioned on the screen The replay screen has many features and functions so go to Heplay on page 208 Screen List Main Menu Screen Screen List The Screen button produces a list of all available screens Select to make this the current Screen active on the recorder To add a new screen go to Add Screen in Main Menu Configure Layout Edit Lay out on page 137 Clean Screen Main Menu Screen Clean Screen The Clean Screen function disables the touch screen for 30 seconds so that the screen can be cleaned A dialog box will appear informing you You have 30 seconds to clean the Screen Press escape if you wish to close this dialog early The escape key option would only be available if a USB keyboard was plugged in The box will also display a time bar to show the 30 seconds of time lapsing See Cleaning Instructions on page 277 Calibrate Main Menu Screen Calibrate Your touch screen on the recorder is calibrated be
465. setup or pen data that use the new setup into TrendServer Pro software Do this either via USB Com pact Flash Network Share folder NAS or a manual FTP operation then go to Comms Serv er and bring up the Edit Device dialog as described above and press OK For more detailed information on the Modbus Profile tool refer to the TrendManager Pro Suite software manual Add a Device via RS485 Setting up the Comms Server for Modbus on RS 485 follows the same procedure but the PCs comm port that the 485 interface is connected to is selected in the Communications Port drop down list Everything else is the same there is no IP address to enter and test should still work the same Figure 8 6 New Device Status d Communications Server Administration Fi Database Servers IDNo Name Mode IP Address i E Communication Ports i Furnace 1 Realtime 20 xs 100089 x COM1 x COM2 x COM3 x COM4 x COMS x COM6 x COM7 x COMS New device is added ensure the Active box is ticked xi V Ethernet 244 Destination Client connections Database logging logging The status lights will not be active yet This is because no logging or graphs have been set up so no data is being requested To set up Logging go to Logging Configuration on page 246 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Communications Server To start Realtime graphing go to Realtime Graphing on page 251 Edit a Device Select the Comms port contai
466. shown here Enter the Furnace instrument information including the instrumentation associated with the furnace such as the Temperature controller Recorder etc TUS Report Wizard Thermal Processing Equipment Instruments Instrument 1 Please enter the details for the control measuring and recording instrumentation of the Thermal Processing Equipment This information will be included in the TUS report Purpose Asset Tag Model ID Serial Number Cal Certificate No Cal Due Date MM DD YYYY Purpose what is it used for a part or raw material Asset Tag enter for the instrument Model ID Model number of the instrument Serial Number Serial number of the instrument Cal Certificate No Calibration certificate number for the furnace instrument Cal Due Date MM DD YY Y If date is valid then it is compared with Survey Date and if the date is past the survey date then message box will be shown that Calibration Due Date is past the Survey Date would you like to continue The number of instrument boxes to be completed depends on the furnace class and the in strumentation used on the furnace complete as many as required based on AMS2750 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Step 5 Furnace Comments Enter the serial number for the furnace or oven Allows you to enter any general comments concerning the furnace these will be included in the report IUS Report Wizard
467. sor Comp Sensor Compensation may be required to improve accuracy on a sub range This is an adjustment to the value of the signal input on each channel based on the Engineering units settings Choose from Single Point Dual Point or Multi Point Cal see Sensor Compensation on page 325 High Limit Available when Range is User Defined Select and enter the high limit value Lower Limit Available when Range is User Defined Select and enter the lower limit value RT Type Only available when Type is set to RT Resistance Thermometer Select this for a list of available RT types Burnout Type Only available when Type is set to TC Thermocouple Toggle between Active and Passive Active means it will send out a current to the TC Set to Passive means it takes a reading without sending out a current The T C is wired differ ently for Active and Passive Burnout see Figure Figure 2 14 Input signal wiring on page 21 Active Burnout is not available for the eZtrend QXe recorder Active Burnout checks the health of the thermocouples every 30 seconds if your proc ess requires continuous check of the thermocouples to see if they are in burnout you should use Passive Burnout Active burnout is an implementation of thermocouple health and provides error warning messages for a range of thermocouple activity failure conditions Passive burnout does not provide any error warning messages If the thermocouple wiring changes and the channel
468. ss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 421 422 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Index A AC POWER sosasetastiiiraihdeeeacfqettutideet road AI Calibration Factory Calibration AMS2750 Audit Trall uie ttes Iu M C er e aaee scs a ON PassSWOES annate a raea iden itg Screen Designer TC Cal Adjust TC Usage Tracking e 363 TrendManager Pro Software 393 AMS2750 Process Mode sss 358 Countdown Timers AMS2750 355 Credit Option retenir Furnace Config Menu INE isse reir tae REOR e aie Men een Process Screen Sensors Config Menu AMS2750 TUS Mode 2c 365 Copy Cal Adjust 373 Credit Option Furnace Config Menu Info Menu Sensor Config Menu TS SCTeSD oido tie oomen terris AMS2750 Capabilities sss 351 AMS2750 Process mode sss 352 AMS2750 Report Generation Tool 394 Acknowledge Alarm sss 154 Active X Control s 256 Internet Security Settings 256 Add Screen Ade E 138 Administrator Passwords 144 Alarm Event Causes eene ordered 96 Alarm Acknowledge Event Effects Alarm Markers Alarm Marker Flash Colours 215 Alarm Messages sso 165 Alarm Relay Card Connections 26 4 and 8 Alarm Relay Cards 27 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Channel Numbers eee 28 Alarm Digital IO
469. ss data For use with X Series recorders only Firmware can be upgraded from the web site at www honeywell com ps Database Management Tool 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 261 Database Management Tool Database Management Tool this software application works with TrendManager Pro and TrendServer Pro to provide safe administration of data with tools to archive sort move copy and delete the data stored in local and remote databases The Database Management Tool software is supplied with TrendServer Pro Report Generation Tool AMS2750 PC software that uses a TUS data file generated by the SX recorder to generate a tem perature uniformity survey report It produces a report that documents the uniformity per formance of a furnace based on the AMS2750 specification AMS2750 is the specification that covers pyrometric requirements for thermal processing equipment used for heat treatment System Requirements Minimum System requirements for TrendViewer TrendManager Pro and X Series Screen Designer Minimum System requirements for TrendServer Pro 1GHz Pentium processor or higher 1GHz Pentium processor or higher CD ROM drive CD ROM drive Monitor screen resolution 1024 x 768 recommended minimum high colour Monitor screen resolution 1024 x 768 recommended minimum high colour Windows 2000 2003 XP Vista and Windows 7 32 and 64 bit Professional and Ultimate Edition Windows
470. st 2013 UK 291 292 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Appendix A Quality and Safety CE Mark Honeywell X Series recorders are compliant with Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC and the Electromagnetic Capability Directive 89 336 EEC as amended by 92 31 EEC and 93 68 EEC Safety The product range of instruments is compliant with the requirements of BS EN 61010 1 2001 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement Control and labo ratory Use and UL 61010C 1 and CSA 22 2 1010 1 If the equipment is used in a manner not specified the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 293 294 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Appendix B Maths Expressions Full Maths amp Script Processing The X Series recorders are supplied with Basic Maths functions Add Subtract Divide and Multiply There are two further options that can be added Full Maths and an extremely powerful Scripting processing module Scripting delivers an additional level of enhanced capabilities with multi line script processing Full and Scripting Maths must be activated in the recorder as a Firmware credit option Scripting is not available on the eZtrend QXe When a recorder setup is loaded into the TrendManager software the Maths capabilities will be transferred with the setup If you are creating a new recorder in TrendManager software to be transferred to a recorde
471. st SPI Port OverRun error Diagnostics Messages Error with Host SPI 1 2 2 Host SPI Port Receive Buffer Overflow error Diagnostics Messages Error with Host SPI 2 2 2 Host SPI Port Software Receive Buffer Overflowed Diagnostics Messages Master SPI ADC or DAC 0 1 1 Master SPI Adc or Dac Receive Buffer overflowed and was Diagnostics Receive buffer overflowed reset Messages Clock monitor failure N A N A The I O card clock monitor failed Diagnostics occurred Messages Error with master SPI ADC 0 1 1 Master SPI Adc or Dac Over run error Diagnostics or DAC Messages Error with master SPI ADC 1 1 1 Master SPI Adc or Dac Receive Buffer Overflow error Diagnostics or DAC Messages Waited too long without 0 4 4 I O card has timed out waiting for SPITransfer Diagnostics response Messages Waited too long without 1 4 4 I O card has timed out waiting for AdcSpiSend Diagnostics response Messages Waited too long without 2 4 4 I O card has timed out waiting for ResetADC Diagnostics response Messages 344 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Waited too long without 3 4 4 I O card has timed out waiting for CheckSelectedAD Diagnostics response Messages An error has occurred with N A N A General error that the I O card channel specified has failed to Diagnostics channel make a meas
472. stem where the Alert Display can be used as an event effect to display a preset or user defined marker Select Message Type as Preset to display a list of all available markers that have been previously added to the recorder To add Preset Markers go to Preset Markers on page 108 Select the Message Type as User Defined to enter your own text For more information on the Alert system and how to customise it see Error Alert on page 110 Batch Batch controls can be used as the effect of an event occurring An event cause must be set up so that the effect of the event is to Start Stop or Pause a batch Batches work using groups of pens so when setting up an event with a batch control as a cause you must assign a group of pens See Groups on page 123 Reports A report can be created as an effect of an event Reports can be generated on a periodical basis using event system to show daily weeks monthly totals max mins averages etc the reports can be printed e mailed as attachments or exported to exter nal media A batch report for a Temperature Uniformity Survey can be produced Before a report can be run the report details must be entered in Heports Menu on page 133 Update Tabular Readings Triggering this event causes the tabular display to update and show the latest set of readings Enter Replay Screen An event can be set so that the effect is to change the screen to enter the Replay Screen Exit Replay Screen An event c
473. stom Screens D DC Inp t 24V acide ae ned RP ERU 30 DC Power sees 15 DNS WINS MDNS sse 79 Data Logging and Transfer 229 Data Storage Overview sss 37 Database Management Tool 261 Database Size Management 239 Daylight Saving Default Time Zone usaeneianti rim Rut 49 Delayed Event Event Effects sess Delete Screen Demo Traces Deviation Alarm Markers Deviation Alarms s Diagnostics Alarm Digital IO Analogue In ies Analogue Out ee COMMS anrr named reis Comms Server Event Status seen Hardware Status Medid 51 2 eicere tien Pulse Inputs sse Diagnostics Messages Diagnostics Status coenam erepti Digital IO Card Connections 8 and 16 Digital Input Output Cards Channel Numbers eene Digital Input Event Causes 22e nacer LER 96 Digital Outputs Eyent Bie cts i eno nno eitie o 103 Dimensions eee tenes 8 Discard Configuration sss 185 Display Alert Event Effects ie Ea DRE 106 425 Display Overview sssrini 37 Displaying Totals opie ttai endet 76 Dual Point Cal aussen HU IH 325 During a Survey AMS2750 383 E ESS Extended Security System 188 Edit Custom Screens Edit Layout Add Screen Appearance Delete Screen ur SCTEENS iic ieri iei E SEINES x neoonen baie tet etntoteieei t e dicis Edit Recording eceeste
474. t card Eg in card slot A Al last user cal When the last user calibration was made to this Analogue Input card Eg in slot position A input 1 All channels will be listed per channel 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK c Relay cycle s Displays the amount of relay cycles per relay listed AI last user cal 7 AI last user cal A 8 Relay 1 cycle s Relay 2 cycle s Relay 3 cycle s Relay 4 cycle s Relay 5 cycle s Relay 6 cycle s Relay 7 cycle s Relay 8 cycle s Fixed Maintenance Fri Mar OF 2007 13 50 25 Fri Mar 07 2007 13 50 25 O cycle s O cycles D cvcle s D cvcle s 0 cycle s 0 cvcle s 0 cvcle s O cvcle s O cycle s Fixed reports common relay output cycles v Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media Recording Main Menu gt Status gt Recording gt Recording Status Pen Value Recording Log Rate Alarm Rate Pre Tric Group 1v 14 46 2 25 36 34 49 92 4 Overrange 5x Overrange 64 Overrange 7Y 49 92 BY 49 92 9f 3 48 10 70 96 95 Fuzzy Continuous Sample Continuous Sample Continuous Sample Continuous Sample Continuous Sample Continuous Sample Continuous Sample Continuous Sample Continuous Sample Shows the current logging status of all pens within the system Pen Displays the Pen number and will display a tick when recording and a cross when
475. t control options are Pause Stop Resume Clear and Prefill gt gt Enabled Y Type Chart Control Resume CO e m B Pause this will pause the chart until it is resumed Resuming a paused chart will display continuous chart data from when it had been paused The chart can be stopped if in a paused state If the Event is disabled the chart will need to be restarted using Resume as an event effect or by resetting the recorder ee Stop this will stop the chart and no chart data will be displayed for the length of time the chart is stopped If a stopped chart is resumed there will be a gap in the displayed chart data If the Event is disabled the chart will need to be restarted using Resume as an event effect or by resetting the recorder Resume this can be used after the chart has been stopped or paused The chart data will continue from where it has been paused with no gaps displayed But if the chart has been stopped the displayed data will display a gap in data until it is resumed ee Clear this will clear all the data from the chart being displayed Data will not be cleared if the chart has been stopped This will not clear recorder data from the memory only the chart ee Prefill this will clear the chart and then fill it with the current reading A stopped chart cannot be prefilled Clear All Messages this will clear all the messages in the message list See Mes sages Menu on page 165
476. t lt 100 gt gt P1 U will embed the Unit text of P1 deg C gt gt time v will embed the current time lt lt 11 51 23 gt gt date v will embed the current date lt lt 10 11 06 gt gt td v will embed the current time and date 11 51 23 10 11 02 name v will embed the current recorder name lt lt Furnace1 gt gt id v will embed the current recorder ID lt lt 21 gt gt serial v will embed the recorder serial number lt lt 200034 gt gt BATMD1 v will embed the batch mode 1 Running 2 lt lt Batch 1 0001234 Stopped 3 Paused Stopped gt gt BATMDI1 t will embed the batch name Batch 1 0001234 Group 1 gt gt Batch mode is for each group BATMD1 to BATMD6 Used in embedded variables as BATMD 1 v will also allow the current batch name to be embedded using BATMD t Maths variables as embedded variables Other information can be accessed by exchanging the Pn with the following variables see Figure 4 7 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Table 4 7 more embedded variables Syntax Syntax Syntax An GLBVn HPULn BATMDn HPC1 LPULn BLKVn INTHRS RAn CFFREE IOC1 RTCOMPn CJCn LPC1 RTCALn CJCnC Pn Tn CVn PnAnL UC1 Dn PnMINU USB1FREE DIOn PnMAXU USB2FREE EC1 PSTVn UV1 FTPHRS PRC 101 In Figure 4 12is an example that shows pen information can be used as an embedded var aible An example for pen information
477. t 2013 UK Rear RS485 Port A Comms option card and expansion card are required for the eZtrend QXe recorder RS485 2 wire to support Modbus RTU The RS485 connector plugs into the back of the recorder Recorders can be setup as either Master or Slave devices See Figure Modbus Master Communications on page 84 Front and Rear USB Communication Ports The front and rear of the Minitrend QX and Multitrend SX recorders are fitted with a USB communication port The eZtrend QXe recorder has a USB port at the front as standard and another available at the rear as an option The USB Host ports will provide an interface for Save and Load Data Save and Load Setups External keyboard amp mouse Barcode reader Mass storage device USB key Local printer 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 83 84 Modbus Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup Comms gt Comms Services gt Modbus Modbus is available as a Firmware option see Credits on page 112 Modbus can be used with RS485 or Ethernet ports The Modbus protocol defines a mes sage structure that devices will recognise and use regardless of the type of network over which they communicate RS485 is an option for the eZtrend QXe recorder 22 MODBUS Modbus Master Communications The recorder can communicate with up to 32 slave devices on both RS485 and or Ethernet at a maximum poll rate of 1 second slowest 1 hour Each slave can
478. t every year or in accord ance with your industry regulations to ensure maximum accuracy See Calibration on page 113 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Section 12 Technical Data amp Specifications Field IO Specification Analogue Output Not available for the eZtrend QXe recorder Each recorder is capable of supporting analogue output function The AO card is available as a 2 or 4 channel option and will plug into any of the analogue input slots Analogue Outputs are used to support Re transmission of Analogue Input values Re transmission of Math Results Re transmission of Process values Control Outputs Analogue Output Specifications Resolution 0 00296 or better Accuracy 0 1 0 500ohm load 0 25 500ohm 1Kohm load Maximum load resistance 1Kohm Isolation 300V AC Outputting 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA over range capability to 21mA Update rate 250mSec per channel Pulse Input Card The Pulse Card is available as an option and will fit in slots normally allocated to Al cards The frequency output from the card can be used in a Maths block and is represented by HPULn where n is from 1 to 4 when the card is fitted in the top slot Frequency 1 Hz to 25kHz this will update once per second Inputs 4 x isolated inputs A separate Pulse input card is not available for the eZtrend QXe recorder however the first 4 inputs on the Digital I O card option can be used as
479. t is acknowl edged and in a non alarm state See Alarm Markers on page 215 for flash colour iden tification Ack Alarm All Select this button to acknowledge all active alarms latched and normal alarms By Group Select this button to acknowledge any alarms in a group of pens Pen groups can be set up in the Pens menu By Pen Select this option to acknowledge any alarms for individual pens Configure This will display all available Pens with alarms set up To change the configuration select the desired pen this will display the alarm details Select the Edit button to change the alarm level If the Edit button is greyed out go to the Alarms Menu on page 71 menu and select the alarm then activate Allow Change View This will display all available Pens with alarms set up To view the configuration select the desired pen this will display the alarm details When complete go to Finish to commit the new set up 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 315 316 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Appendix E Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet is a local area network LAN technology that transmits information between com puters and other devices at speeds of 10 or 100 million bits per second Mbps Each Eth ernet equipped device operates independently of all other devices on the network All devices attached to an Ethernet network are connected to a shared signalling system Ethernet signals are transmitted ser
480. t layouts include 9thermocouple rectangular square 5 thermocouple rectangular square 5 thermocouple cylindrical 9 thermocouple cylindrical A 9 thermocouple cylindrical B Add Custom Allows user to add custom images The TC Positioning Layout Form will be displayed see TC Positioning Layout Form on page 408 Custom images are the re sponsibility of the user and the AMS2750 Report Generation Tool will notify you if the image fails to meet certain requirements ie file type size limitations 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 407 408 AMS2750 Report Generation Tool Remove Custom Button This button remains enabled for only custom images If this but ton is pressed it removes the selected image from the database TC Positioning Layout Form When Add Custom button is used the TC Positioning Layout box appears so you can up load your own image Enter the Layout name and then select the Upload Image button Upload Image Once image is selected it will be shown in Thermocouple Layout image box Image should be in BMP or JPEG format Supported image size is around 260 x 250 pixels If the image is not supported then Error icon is shown besides the Thermocouple Layout image label TC Positioning Layout Layout Name Thermocouple Layout image Upload Image 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Step 8 TUS Offset Information If Offsets are used in production to provide an adjustment
481. t the recorder dis play Multitrend SX 70 from the left or right 45 looking down and 55 looking up at the re corder display eZtrend QXe 45 from the left or right 10 looking down and 30 looking up at the recorder display Panel cut out size for the Minitrend QX and eZtrend QXe recorders 138 00 7 9 43 Panel Panel 138 00 a Cut out Cut out 5 43 7 00 gt 6 00 0 287 0 237 Panel Cut out Please note the recommended spacing for adjacent mounting Figure 2 1 Minitrend QX and eZtrend QXe Panel cut out 6 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Mechanical Installation Panel cut out size for the Multitrend SX recorder 281 00 11 067 Panel op 281 00 Cut out 11 06 220 00 0 7877 Panel Cut out Please note the recommended spacing for adjacent mounting Figure 2 2 Multitrend SX Panel cut out The Minitrend QX Multitrend SX and eZtrend QXe recorders are DIN Standard sizes and should be panel mounted 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 7 Mechanical Installation Minitrend QX Dimension details Figure 2 3 Miniitrend QX Recorder Dimensions and Mounting slots including 45mm panel thickness 00008 000000 09008 000000 090061 aaoo o ADDITIONAL SLOTS FOR ANNAAAAAANAAAAAA 45 MM THICK PANEL MOUNTING 45 WM THICK PANEL 1 988 7 869 1 630 4 Mounting clamp positions for 2 20mm panel thickness For standard units fit only two brackets on opposite sides of the unit
482. tabase servers will have to be added manually If you have purchased a different package to what is already installed the new software will detect this and only make available the same package To install a different package first un install the previous version There is no need to save databases or data these will not be lost when un installing the previous version Devices and data held on a local database are retained for use with the new package as long as it is installed into the same directory 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Start Up The TrendManager Suite has been installed on the Hard drive of your computer in program files unless during set up you have changed the destination folder To re start the software click on Start go to Programs and select TrendManager Suite then select either TrendServer Pro TrendManager Pro or TrendViewer according to which version of software has been installed A shortcut for your desktop is automati cally created programs menu It is advisable to ensure that each recorder has a unique Record er ID number this will make identifying individual recorders in TrendServer Pro much easier This is set in the recorder Ident menu see recorder user manual aa Start up TrendServer Pro by double clicking the desktop shortcut or from the The first thing to do is to get the recorders setup into TrendServer Pro This may be achieved by saving the setup at the recorder to CF card o
483. tance per group furnace 6 in total Each timer has a date to expiry the date is initially set to zero this indicates that the relevant timer is not required or has not yet been used A timer processing class coordinates the class instances for the thermocouple usage timers and the individual TUS SAT Control TC and Instrument Cal Countdown Timers The timer can be disabled by clearing the timer to zero it will then be shown as unused TUS Due In SAT Due In The TUS and SAT countdown timers track the next date for survey test and displays this in formation on a the AMS2750 process screen The user is alerted when these timers are about to expire SAT Timer Reset Please enter the date for the next SAT The suggested date for Furnace 1 based on its class instrument type and last SAT date is 09 Oct 2008 Enter the new date to change it and use OK to confirm or Cancel to exit You may also enable disable this timer SAT date omm v x When a SAT timer is reset a message is posted to the system message queue When a SAT timer enters a warning period or expires a message will be posted to the system message list Upon expiry for SAT or TUS the recorder displays non compliance and logs a message to the system message list You can reset the date time for SAT or TUS providing another new target time date for the timers Upon reset a message is logged into the system message list This is password pro tected for trac
484. tart into the export state allowing the files to be exported If the power fails before the the Pre Trigger alarm is activated data will be lost and the recorder will restart Restart Once the files for a pre trigger have been exported and all alarms on pre trigger enabled pens have cleared the pre trigger buffers are reset and the existing pre trigger information has been exported then the system returns to the acquiring state If a configuration change is performed then the pre trigger system will be restarted the user will be warned before committing that they will restart the pre trigger buffering if an export is pending they will also be asked to perform the export procedure or lose the existing pre trigger information Importing Once exported the import into TrendManager Pro can be performed from removable me dia or via FTP the imported information will show the pre trigger pens as overlapped data this will automatically be displayed utilising the TrendManager Pro overlapped pens fea ture to clearly show the pre trigger data See TrendManager Pro software manual 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Reports Menu Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt Reports Reports can be generated manually or on a periodic basis using the event system to show daily weekly monthly totals max mins averages etc the reports can be printed e mailed as attachments or exported to the external media The reports will be in RTF fo
485. te and be displayed on the Menu bar at the top of the process screen The recorder uses a 24 hour clock Tick to confirm the setup changes and return to the Settings menu Select the cross to ignore any changes and return to the Settings menu From the Settings menu select the Finish button to commit the changes or select the Back button to return to the previous menu Set Volume Set the volume here for the sound effects Use the slider to increase and decrease the vol ume Press the arrow button to the right of the slider to test the volume Update Sounds The user can pick from a list of 20 different sounds these can be configured to play a single time or repeat continuously To upgrade sounds the user must have a compatible sound file format of wav the wav file needs to be renamed to the internal format which is as follows S lt n gt lt name gt wav Where lt n gt is number 1 to 20 and lt name gt is a short name to describe the sound this file name will be shown in the pick lists Eg S1 Alert wav So a user could replace the default sound 1 which is S1 Two Tone Slow wav with S1 User Sound wav and this is what they will then see in their list To update the sounds a prompt will be displayed and the system will request the correctly named files be available on external media in the recorder once confirmed the system will scan the media for correctly named wav files and will replace the internal files with the n
486. te eoo e e iei rotes E FU PERSE EE e eoa ieo tah 334 Pen VQIUOS E 335 Modbus Function Codes eerie eerte sees eese neis tasa sitas ta stessa senatu sena 336 Appendix K Troubleshooting e eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ener 337 Error Messages 337 Appendix L X Series AMS2750 capabilities AMS2750 and the X Series Recorders AMS2750 Process mode e eee eerie eese eee eese nete setas etos setas ense toas Sois 4AMS2750 Credit Option iiie niei iniit boite IR EE Eenh AMS2 750 Process Menu ciini mestiere tie EH teeta 4AMS2750 Process Screen iato ete een ee bereit A EVER esee tion SAT aunt am EUH I O AMS2750 Process Mode AMS2750 Button Process Mode Pens for TC s Process Mode Thermocouple Usage Tracking AMS2750 essent 363 TUS MOG ETE M SooS 365 Temperature Uniformity Survey TUS Mode eee 365 AMS2750 TUS Credit Option esses 366 AMS2750 TUS SCYeeri su auiniie D DH ERR ERR 367 I O 3 AMS2730 TUS Jissie aer ee aree aterert ree FRE 367 AMS27950 Menu TUS iiie REOR DDRIHBIN E EROR 368 Pens for TC s TUS Mode eee ette ie a e eee eei eo PE PEE FE 374 TUS SUrvey Process SCrEeN 375 Start GSUIVEY 383 DUT ING SUP
487. ters Reset will give you the option of resetting All alarms by pen Groups or by individual Pens View will display all Pens with active alarms Alarms will be counted providing they are enabled The count will increase when the pen goes into an alarm state and increase again when the pen goes out of an alarm state User Counters Reset All will do exactly that reset all of the User Counters Reset Single will allow you to select which User Counters you wish to reset View will display all the User Counters that have been set up Event Counters Reset All will reset all of the Event Counters Reset Single will allow you to select which Event Counters you wish to reset View will display all the Event Counters that have been set up Digital Input Counters Reset All will reset all of the Digital Input Counters Reset Sin gle will allow you to select which Digital Input Counters you wish to reset View will dis play all the Digital Input Counters that have been set up Relay Output Counters Reset All will reset all of the Relay Output Counters Reset Single will allow you to select which Relay Output Counters you wish to reset View will display all the Relay Output Counters that have been set up Pulse Counters Reset All will reset all of the Pulse Counters Reset Single will allow you to select which Pulse Counters you wish to reset View will display all the Pulse Counters that have been set up 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GL
488. that chan nel Channel Mapping Widgets Channel configuration can be done per widget or per object Configure the widget if all the objects on the widget are to be mapped to the same channel Select the widget and go to the Map in the Screen menu toolbar Widgets have green grab handles around the edge Pen and or channel information will appear for each object within the widget Each object in the widget can be assigned to the same or different Pen For example a DPM menu will display the pen currently being used and a set of channel information associated to the text digital and alarm marker objects within the DPM widget Select any of the objects in the channel menu to produce the setup screen Channel Mapping Setup screen In the Channel Mapping Setup screen select where the data is from Data from Pen set what the object is going to be showing Current Value Minimum value Maximum value Average pen reading or Total pen reading Data from Alarm for Pen set the alarm number Data from nput Channel set the channel number and what the object is going to be showing Analogue Digital Hi Pulse or Low Pulse 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Select the pen number required On a widget you can select the Parent this will assign all the objects in the selected widget to the same pen Select objects individually on the screen to assign different pens to each object within the widget Number of the Pen Alarm fo
489. that flow 3 exceeds that of flow 2 The pseudo code is written as If flow meter 3 has a larger reading than flow meter 2 check to ensure that it was already greater than meter 2 if it was return the latest change count value If it was not greater than meter 3 last time set a flag to indicate a change and increment the change counter by 1 then return the latest change counter If flow meter 3 is less than 2 simply return the change count value with no increment Pen 7 is used to implement this script and is implemented as follows 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Full Maths amp Script Processing if A32A2 if BLKV1 1 return BLKV2 else BLKV1 1 BLKV2 BLKV2 1 Return BLKV2 else BLKV1 0 Return BLKV2 Tests if A3 is bigger than A2 If it was then tests if A3 was bigger than A2 last time period If it was return with the current change counter If not then Set flag to show that A3 has just exceeded A2 Increment the change counter by 1 Return the new change counter total If A3 is not bigger than A2 Set flag to show A2 is bigger than A3 this time Return current change counter With script above BLKV all Variables are used to maintain values It should be noted that BLKV s do not persist over a power removal and if the application were to require a non volatile count then BLKVn should be substituted with PSTVn 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 307 308 Full
490. the first time user Access to the first time user is removed once the password system has been configured The first time user is reinstated if the password system is reset For more detailed information see Section 5 Password Security on page 187 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 3 Local Settings Go from the Main Menu to Configure Setup Edit General Localisation All text is displayed in the currently selected language Help system language can be select ed independently currently English only available To configure local settings languages time zones daylight saving temperature units and mains frequency for input filtering see Localisation on page 117 section Default Time Zone Go from the Main Menu to Configure Setup Edit General Localisation Time Zone The recorder is set to the default Time Zone for Eastern Time US Canada GMT 5 00 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit 4 Time and Date Settings Go from the Main Menu to Configure Settings Set Time Set the Recorder Time and Date settings see Set Time on page 152 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit 5 Firmware Options Go from the Main Menu to Configure Setup Edit General Factory Credits Check your recorder has been set up with the correct amount of credits displayed as a number against the Credits item in the menu Then select the Op
491. the colour of the graduation lines on the chart when the recorder screen is in Replay mode Replay Colour This will change the colour of the background of the Replay chart Replay Alarm This will change the colour of the Replay chart when it goes into an alarm state Time Stamp This will change the colour of the time stamp and date at the top of the screen Marker Colour This will change the colour of any Mark on Chart displayed on the screen The Default button will return all colours to their original factory settings The Colour Picker On the right side is a selection of default colours which can be used as they are When a colour is selected it will appear in the New box with the Current colour next to it Use the sliders labelled Red Green and Blue to vary the colour displayed in the New box As you move the slider the colour shade number will change in the box below the slider If a specific colour is required enter the colour number by selecting the box under the Red Green and Blue sliders and the colour will be change accordingly in the New box When the desired shade has been chosen select the tick box to confirm you choice Each new colour will be saved and will appear in the Recent tab 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Save Layout Main Menu Configure Layout Save Layouts can be saved to CF card USB key removable storage media or to a Network Share folder NAS Plug in a removable stora
492. the printer is connected to or a print server and the printer name Eg PC or print server name printer name Colour Printer Tick if a colour printer is being used for the screen capture facility Screen captures can be printed as an Effect of an Event See Events Cause and Effect on page 94 If in doubt contact your IT Administrator for advice When complete go to Finish Commit to implement the new set up Groups Configure Setup Edit Setup General Groups This menu is used for re naming the groups Groups are used as a part of the concurrent batch system Each batch is associated with a group pens are assigned to a group and all the pens within group 1 will belong to the batch that is controlled by group 1 See Batch Menu on page 119 The maximum number of pens that can be grouped together are 32 The same pen can only be associated with one group To add a pen to a Group see Pens Menu on page 67 Groups of pens can also be used in order to Acknowledge Alarms in pen groups Reset Max Min Reset Max or Reset Min in pen groups Start Stop and Reset Totals in pen groups When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 123 Screen Menu Screen Setup Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Screen Set up the recorder s screen configuration 3 Sc
493. this defines how stability is determined in the soak Stability detect is measured in 3 ways 1 Timeout see below 2 Automated detection see below 3 Manual stability the user can determine when stability has been achieved and can use the manual override button on the TUS screen to register stability Edit Setup I O AMS2750 AMS2750 Timer Enable v 10 Mins Time Auto Enable Degree Change 0 5 Deg C Timer Enable Default is off Check this to enable the Stability Detect Timer Time default 10 mins Timer based stability the system will be deemed stable after the defined period of time that all TC s remain within tolerance from the point at which they all enter the soak band Auto Enable Default is off Automatic stability Stability will deemed to be achieved when all TC s are within tolerance band required for soak for class and no TC continues to change in temperature by more than a user defined degree step between readings Degree Change This becomes enabled when Auto Enable is activated Default is 0 5 degree over 2 mins looks for an amount of temperature drift on any TC When all the details are complete select Finish and Commit or go Back to Furnace or Set point menus 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK TUS mode Setpoint Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt O AMS2750 gt AMS2750 gt Setpoint The configured setpoint or soak level this is the level confi
494. tics fied reason Messages 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 343 Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Unable to execute unspeci 4 4 4 Error sending data to SPI for Al Active Burnout readings Diagnostics fied reason Messages Unable to execute unspeci 5 4 4 Data received for Al Active Burnout indicates an error condition Diagnostics fied reason Messages Unable to execute unspeci 6 4 4 Error ADC not ready while taking Active Burnout readings Diagnostics fied reason Messages Unable to execute unspeci 7 4 4 Could not initialise active burnout will try again next power up Diagnostics fied reason Messages Unspecified error has N A N A I O card failure An unspecified error has occurred Diagnostics occurred Messages Unable to enable or disable N A N A l O card failure Unable to enable or disable timer interrupts Diagnostics timer interrupts Messages Error with RS232 port 0 2 2 Diagnostic FieldPort OverRun error Diagnostics Messages Error with RS232 port 1 2 2 Diagnostic FieldPort Framing error Diagnostics Messages Error with RS232 port 3 2 2 Diagnostic FieldPort Receive Buffer Diagnostics Messages Error with RS232 port 4 2 2 Diagnostic FieldPort Noise error Diagnostics Messages Error with RS232 port 5 2 2 Diagnostic FieldPort Idle error Diagnostics Messages Error with Host SPI 0 2 2 Ho
495. tific format displays the P 7 0 pa bi value to the power of 10 shown here Notice the 96 we value has been rounded up Normal Scientific Auto Toggle Between Automatic number for matting and User Defined After Decimal Only available when User Defined is selected Select and enter the number of decimal places up to 15 decimal places When this pen setup is complete go back to the Pen menu and complete the pen setup for all other pens Logging Menu Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Pens Logging Menu path to current menu Edit Setup ogging Edit Setup 7 ee Enabled Enabled Type Continuous Type Fuzzy Rate Units Seconds Rate Units Seconds ey Rate 10 Sec Rate 10 Sec Alarm Rate Units Milliseconds Auto Fit Y Alarm Rate 500ms 2Hz bd Band 1 0 5 bd a Jac jid a Je Pen Logging can be set to log as Continuous or Fuzzy Click on Logging to set up each logging profile per pen 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 69 70 Enabled Toggles On and Off to activate or de activate logging for this pen Type Toggles between Continuous or Fuzzy logging Continuous logs every value based on the Method chosen Sample Average or Max Min Fuzzy Logging has been developed as a secure data storage technique which has a self teaching data storage algorithm so the recorder stores data at a variable rate to match the process being monitored Fuzzy Logging has intelligent
496. tion Media Config Temp Units Time Zone Field IO Menu Alarm Relay Alarm Digital IO Analogue In Menu Analogue Out e Digital IO Pulse Input ene ete cemere inde tettes Field IO Specification s Analogue Output Pulse Input Card reete Finish COMME RN Commit Later IE M Finish button Firewall Settings Internet Security Settings 256 Firmware Credit System occ 221 Firmware Options eerte 223 Firmware Upgrade 1 1 113 First Time Password Setup ESS 188 Full Maths oiir 304 Full Maths amp Script Processing 295 Function Codes and Memory Maps 329 Functions and Features Overview 33 Furnace Config Menu Process Mode 358 Furnace Config Menu TUS FUSES muenesesie e RR Fuzzy Logging Appendix Fs 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK G General Batch Properties 119 General Menu ER Batch Menu sese Error Alert eeee iere ee ER ed Factory Groups Identity ies Printer Menu sese Getting connected IP Address 228 Group Batch GIOUPS ecce mm E E 123 H Hardware Options Overview 1 40 Hardware Status DiagnoOStiCS osi arer NER 179 Hazardous Voltages sssrinin 4 Header and Footer report information 413 Help Files ausesutausii totis d
497. tion to add fields such as Cheked By and Date etc See Fig ure 4 7 on page 171 Email Tick to enable the Email function See Figure 4 7 Email Report example on page 171 The report is sent as a Word document and to view all the options eg Footers you may have to change your View to see these options View Print layout Recipients only available when the Email function has been enabled Select from a list of email recipients Email addresses and Server names must be entered in Email on page 87 Print Set to a tick to enable the Print function The printer settings must be set up before this feature will operate see Printer Menu on page 122 Export Device Select from a list of options if you require your report to be exported to an external media device CF card USB key Network Share folder NAS or select Do not ex port The removable media device needs to be fitted to the recorder when the report is run and have enough memory available To Export to a NAS folder Use Share Path needs to be set up in Network Admin on page 80 and NAS devices enabled in Media Config on page 118 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Run a Report Once the report details have been completed in the report menu you can run your report either manually or by using the Event syst
498. tions item in the Credits menu and enable the firmware options you require by changing the cross to a tick check symbol When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Menu Path As each button is selected in the menu system a menu path will appear at the top of the Screen to enable the user to know where they are in the system The user can select these buttons to return to previous menus and enables the user to jump back more than one menu at a time Menu path dit Edi Setup 9 gt General 9 gt Factory 4 Select to go back to previous menus Serial No 100089 E Credits a further sub menu e 1000890302109 Options 25 Credits in Use A grey arrows indicates 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 49 50 Help Help is available on all menu screens and is context sensitive from each screen The Help icon will reside either in the top right or bottom right on all menu screens All the Help files have a Home button that will take you to the Help System main index Navigating in the help does not stop the logging Main Menu Main Menu Select a button Configure Screen to take you to the next menu e gt a Recording Messages 102 Configure Configure the recorder through the Setup Layout Passwords and Settings menus See Configure Menu on page 51 Alarms Acknowledge Alarms Alarm confi
499. tivated The example in Figure 4 5 shows the alarm acti vating at 40 which is the set low alarm level The alarm is not de activated until the signal is at 50 which is 10 past the set alarm level So the Hyst Level would be set to 10 Reverse the process for a high alarm 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Damping Toggles On and Off Damping is a time delay that works going into alarm only When switched On the alarm level must be breached for a specific period of time before an alarm is triggered Damping Time Set the amount of Damping time in seconds Reflash Toggles On and Off Activate this to re enable an active alarm that has been acknowledged Set the Reflash Time Reflash Time Only enabled when Reflash is active Set the time period after the alarm has been acknowledged for the alarm to reflash if it is still in an alarm state When the setup is complete go back to the Pen menu and complete the pen setup Figure 4 5 Hysteresis Level 10096 Alarm de activated at this point 50 10 Hysteresis level o 4095 Low Alarm Level Alarm activated at this point 0 Totaliser Menu Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Pens gt Totaliser The Totals option must be active to use this option See Table 7 1 Firmware Options on page 221 To Start Stop Reset and View Totals see Totals on page 168 The Totaliser function is normally associated with flow
500. tly connected The recorder set up on Modbus will be in the list The recorder will be in the list under the name that you gave it when entering the device details Either click and drag the recorder name from the list to the graph area this will add all the recorders pens onto the graph or click on pens to list the pens available and drag the re quired ones onto the graph As soon as the pens are on the graph they should start to update in real time The graph will be split into two as below Figure 8 9 Realtime Graphing Default GRAPHOO3 HSraph Window Help Recorders ix EA 4 Comms Servers Graphs pens B y SESE Default GRAPH003 DER emo Drag and Drop Recorder from the list onto the graph area es t9 E ED Realtime Modbus The white background area The blue background area button recorder is the historical data is the real time data The white area for historical data will display the data that is stored to the database At this point we have no data being stored to the database it is simply being acquired and graphed if the graph is closed any data downloaded via Modbus will be lost More information about graphing on TrendServer Pro and the options for arranging pens etc are available in the TrendManager Pro software manual for this product If this doc umentation is unavailable it can be downloaded at www honeywell com ps 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013
501. tness Backlight life time 43 000 hours to half brightness when used at 100 67 000hr if used at 80 Maximum luminosity 400 cd m Touch Screen life 1 000 000 touches QXe Recorder Display size and Type 5 diagonal Digital Colour LCD TFT with Touch Screen Industrial grade with brightness adjustment and wide viewing angle Resolution QVGA 320 x 240 pixels Screen Saver Set in minutes from 1 to 720 can be set to dim the screen or to switch off Brightness adjustment Adjustable between 10 and 100 default set to 80 brightness Backlight life time 40 000 hours to half brightness when used at 100 62 500hr if used at 80 Maximum luminosity 450 cd m Touch Screen life 1 000 000 touches Display Update Rate Display values updated every second Status Display A status bar at the top of the recorder s screen displays the real time icons of the recorder status such as Time left and alarm active Communications Ethernet 10 100 base T with RJ45 connector supporting Modbus TCP FTP Internet DHCP or fixed IP address RS485Modbus RTU up to 115200 Baud Rate RS485 is available as an option on the Comms card for the QXe Mathematics Basic maths include Add Subtract Multiply Divide Modulo and power Full Maths and Scripting option support up to 100 character free form math expression for each pen Like SINE COS TAN Log Parenthesis eg A1 A2 comm variables free memory and access to any data item var
502. to earth However where a channel is connected to a safety low voltage circuit an immediately adjacent channel must be adequately insulated from hazardous voltages between 150V AC and 300V AC max This insulation should comprise of at least 1 5mm air gap or a barrier rated greater than 1400V AC This is to ensure that protection of the safety low voltage circuit is fully maintained Common Mode voltage is a voltage applied between the whole channel and earth not between pins on a channel 300V AC is permitted at Measurement Category CAT Il Overvoltage Category Il Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 23 Electrical Installation Analogue Output Channel Numbers The Analogue Output cards are either 2 or 4 channels using a connector that only takes up half the length of the connector slot Looking from the rear of the unit the Analogue Out con nector is on the left of the Analogue slot with a blanking plate on the right Table 2 4 Analogue Output card Card Position Slot B Slot E Slot F Channel number 9 to 12 33 to 36 41 to 44 Analogue Output Connection Details Output 1 Output2 Output 3 Output 4 Loop NC Loop Loop NC Loop NC Not Loop Loop NC Loop Loop NC connected Pulse Input Card The Pulse Input card connections are made via 1 x 12 way screw terminal plugs that fits into a P
503. to the process screen in replay mode The replay screen con sists of a chart and DPMs For standard screens the replay chart is vertical or horizontal de pending on the orientation of the screen you have come from The replay screen has DPMs that display max min readings for each pen these values are taken from where the cursor is positioned on the screen Use the print button on the replay bar to print the replay screen Cursor On the right hand side of the replay screen DPMs can display max min readings for each pen these values are taken from where the cursor is positioned on the screen Note You can do replay on Bar Charts and Digital Panel Meter process screens and this will jump into a trend replay screen with the DPM s showing the Min Max values When using Custom Screens you can only replay 8 pens on the QX and 18 pens on the SX recorder even though you can have more pens than this on the custom screen Custom Screens are not available on the eZtrend QXe Figure 6 3 Replay screens Single Cursor Dual Cursors 33 00 10 40 00 41 00 10 42 00 Jan 06 10 Jan 06 i 10 Jan 06 23 804 96 4 1e 04 36 5 8e 01 20 0 Secs 96 thee 14 21 07 80 28 Apr 36 49 82 36 74 09 10 40 35 96 10 Jan 06 z 100 00 Action Rev Fwd In Out Cursor Speed Exit i Qut i Single Dual Jump Exit The Action button produces the Action toolbar The Dual button will change the icons on the r
504. tocol differs from standard Modbus by the 4 floating point order which is reversed for application compatibility To check communications connections and trouble shooting network settings versus SCV parameters see Comms Status on page 182 This screen will help to identify which area to focus on if the recorder connections are not doing what you expected When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Web Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Comms Comms Services Web The Web browse function is enabled disabled from this menu Select this to enable and al low the recorder to be browsed on a web page Internet access is required The Web button is password protected if passwords are enabled For web browsing information see Web Browser on page 255 and Internet Security Settings on page 256 See Level Permissions on page 191 for information on how to Web Browse and have full remote control of your recorder from your PC The Remote View function is a firmware option that is activated from the Factory menu Credits on page 112 Email Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Comms Comms Services Email Set up this email menu in order to send emails for the following 1 When an Alarm is triggered see Email Alarms in the Alarms Menu on page 71 2 An Email can be sent as a part of an Event occ
505. ton bar for quick access to Batch Controls Batch Detail Mark on Chart or Message details The number displayed is the number of new messages that have been registered since the menu was last checked Select this to produce another button bar with access to Batches Shortcut to enter details to start a new batch or to control a batch that has already been started See Batch Setup Batch Control on page 159 Detail Gives detail of the current batch status for all batches running If you are displaying a screen that has been set up specifically to show a batch then the details will be just for that batch Mark on Chart Select the Mark button to enter a Mark on Chart Embedded process val ues can be entered which will display pen information on the marker See Embedded Process Values on page 100 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Message Detail Press this button for quick access to the Messages screen where each message is put into a category or All Messages can be viewed See Messages Menu on page 165 Exit To return to the process screen Screen The Screen button produces the Screen menu bar Figure 6 2 Screen Menu bar Press to print or save the Previous and Next buttons scroll back current process screen and forth through the screen list iv gt Wael D gt Al Print Edit Replay List Prey Next Exit f Standard Screen 1 Select to check or change the screen Standard Screen 2 properties and set La
506. trend QX Minitrend QX and QXe Portable Case 266 275 Multtrend SX 2 oen eeebestesh at 267 Multitrend SX Portable Case 271 432 OK Rec eZtrend QXe 1 Specification Tables m Specifications sssrinin Standard Communications Interfaces DAUD ca acetamide a Start a Survey AMS2750 sss Static Electricity Safety isse Status Menu sses Alarm Digital IO Analogue In 1 Analogue Out sse COMMS 1isssunsascneieeomienn Diagnostics 2 7 Event Status ze General Status on enose tano eee Hardware Status TIO CdS 13a enim imet Maintenance sss Medid sneseno nun orarin nhi Pen OverVieW issus rena Pulse I nputs cii etre Recording acere een misin SYSE etched qmd ase d Sterilisation iusso iens Storage Alarm vss SIDHUDE DIGS siidininunoniieacmuanmannnauin Storage Media Format sss his um n Survey Status AMS2750 s Symbols Safety aso tox REIR UTUUSUERGE 2 System Event Causes sse 96 System Accuracy Tests SAT 357 System Menu General Status sss IO Cards sineret etate QPUODS M M System Messages System Requirements iss System StatUS sssini T TC Burn Out Event Causes eese TC Cal Adjust AMS2750 TC Usage Tracking AMS2750 Ji 8 7 7 ecru 08 eestor te A cies tse eaten DNS WINS MDNS ccrte IP Address
507. trend showing the occurrence of the alarm Hide pens function allows you to display only the pens required for analysis Print Support Network printing from status message and replay screens Plus screen capture facility of process screens instantly using a basic USB standard PCL Printer Com mand Language printer Print screen function captures every pixel that is sent to the printer Options Hardware Alarm amp Digital IO Cards 4 or 8 outputs relay contacts SPCO 240V 8 Digital I O or 16 Digital I O SPNO 24VDC 16 Digital I O not available for the eZtrend QXe recorder Programmable alarm set points can be configured to activate up to 16 outputs for the Minitrend QX 8 outputs for the eZtrend QXe and 48 outputs for the Multitrend SX Analogue Output 2 or 4 outputs available per card for the Minitrend QX with 2 4 6 or 8 outputs available for the Multitrend SX recorder Output type 0 20mA or 4 20mA Not available for the eZtrend QXe recorder Nema 4X IP66 Nema 4X IP66 protection available as an option Portable Recorders Portable cases available as an accessory item Digital Input 2 inputs on 8 channel Alarm card 8 inputs on 8 Digital I O card and 16 inputs on a 16 Digital I O card The digital inputs allow users to initiate from a remote location through a dry contact closure selected recorder functions only 8 Digital I O available for the eZtrend QXe recorder Pulse Frequency four frequenc
508. ts shown in Figure 2 3 Only 2 mountimg brackets need to be fixed in opposite positions Figure 2 9 Multitrend SX 45mm Mounting Clamps 4 mounting clamp positions 1 shown for mounting in 45mm panel thickness on opposite sides of the unit Mounting slots shown in Figure 2 4 Both mount ing clamps are required to be fitted c c c co c c c c c c c c c c 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 13 Electrical Installation Electrical Installation Installation Category Installation category Installation category Il Pollution degree 2 Follow National and local electrical codes for installation in a Class 1 Div 2 area For voltage frequency and power refer to the appropriate Specification sheet See Sec tion 12 Technical Data amp Specifications on page 279 Fuses There is a fuse situated on the DC input version power supply type 2A time delay this can be replaced by the user Replacement of fuses should be carried out by qualified service personnel If the fuse should blow again there is probably a problem elsewhere within the unit and the recorder should be returned for inspection to your authorised Honeywell distributor or Honeywell Service department Cables To fully comply with the requirements of the CE Mark all cables connected to the rear of the unit should use screened cable terminated at both ends A low impedance earth cable 50 mQ must be connected to the earthing stud on
509. ts for time of message the data blocks have System Status and oldest chart data been recycled Messages Layout not valid or incorrect N A N A Layout specified is invalid or invalid for the recorder type that itis System Status and recorder type trying to be used on Messages Recorder now operating in N A N A Notification that the recorder is now operating in daylight saving System Status and daylight saving time mode Messages Recorder now operating in N A N A Notification that the recorder is now operating in standard time System Status and standard time mode Messages Setup error N A N A An unrecoverable error was found in the recorder setup file System Status and Messages Reset Passwords N A N A The passwords held in the recorder have been deleted This user is not permitted to N A N A The user is not allowed to log on because it is outside of their log in at this time time allocation You must have at least one N A N A There must be at least one administrator user when passwords top level user in the system are enabled if passwords are enabled Reset password data to fac N A N A A prompt to tell the user that resetting the passwords to the fac tory default This will invoke tory default will automatically cause the recorder to restart a recorder restart Login Failed N A N A General fail message specific cause has already been identified previously Login has failed Error N A N A General fail message specific cause could not be identified Un
510. tton to return to the previous menu Batch mode state and count in scripts see Maths Variable and Function Tables on page 296 Batch mode state and count in embedded variables see Table 4 6 on page 101 NOTE Batch mode no longer operates on pens that do not belong in a group so when up grading to the new version existing users need to add pens to a group to use the batch func tionality 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 121 122 Batch process screen To show a batch related process screen the screen must be configured to display the group being used for that batch Under the message count icon it will show the current status for the batch related to that group The message list status bar will also show the Batch name state and group name in rotation with the date time display An extra button is now available within the message button on the status bar to show the current status of the batches for all groups i fe fa Group3 Me gt B Aay OF 15 14 01 Hil Batches Detail Mark Msg Exit Select Options for Group 3 May Note on non batch screens the message list icon no longer shows the batch state as there are potentially 6 batches running in different states Printer Menu Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt General gt Printer The Printer function is a firmware option that is selectable from the Factory menu gt Cred its on page 112 The screens that currently can be printed are all Status
511. ty Audit trail of entries made to secure areas such as Password setup includ ing Log on Log off what area has been accessed time date and the user name Users These are messages that have been entered by the user by entering a Mark on Chart The screen will display the Type of message Time and Date that the activity occurred and the Message details Printing Screens All the Messages screens have a Print button to execute this the printer must first be con figured in Network Admin on page 80 and in the Printer Menu on page 122 For details on suitable printer types see Print Support on page 31 The Printer function is a firmware option that is selectable from the Factory menu Cred its on page 112 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 165 Saving Screens All Message screens can be saved as portable rtf files onto removable media These can be transferred to another location and kept for records or sent via email for troubleshooting and maintenance issues Message List All messages will conform to the following format Type Time Date and Format rer Messages Message 10 04 2008 P2 Alm 2 Into Alam 5092 10 04 2008 Session 1103 LCM 1103 10 04 2008 Session updated Cornmit to 11 10 04 2008 Power On Off for m 34s 1 10 04 2008 amp 33 52 10 04 2008 RESET REQUIRED Options 10 03 27 10 04 2008 Setup Changed 10 09 21 10 04 2008 Session updated Cornmit to 11 03 41 06 10 04 2008 LOCAL LII
512. ug 08 29 Aug 08 23 Aug 08 29 Aug 08 23 Aug 08 23 Aud UR 23 Aug 08 23 Aug 08 23 Aug 08 415 000 Max TC TC 405 00 Ec Min TC TCi 403 34 395 000 The recorder enters this mode automatically when all sensor signals are within soak AND have remained stable within tolerance limits for the qualification period A manual override button is available only when the in soak mode has been present for at least 2 minutes See TC Stabilized on page 385 A timer is started to measure the stability period achieved this continues to count up until the configured amount of time for the TUS has been reached If at any time one or more sensors fail the stability but remain in soak then the in soak in stability recorded history is checked and a new in soak in stability time generated If this time is less than one minute then the mode drops back to in soak 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK TUS mode The recorder shows Max Min and temperature differences for the current survey setpoint and the lag time it took for the first and last TC to enter the soak mode It also provides a running record of the time that the recorder has been in the Stable mode The Stable mode is the actual time and reading taken to determine the uniformity of the furnace at this partic ular setpoint and is the temperature readings that get documented in the Survey Report Done Done Red or Green the setpoint survey step has
513. ugust 2013 UK Electrical Installation A CAUTION CONTROL UNIT DAMAGE Do not apply a hazardous live voltage between and pins within a channel e g 60V maximum on voltage ranges 5V maximum on millivolts ranges The pin should be connected only as part of ohms or R T measurements Ohms and R T measurements share a common connection pin with all channels in the same bank the inputs are divided into two banks inputs 1 to 3 are one bank and inputs 4 to 6 if fitted are another bank To avoid damage ensure that a channel selected as ohms or R T remains floating i e the sensor is not connected to any external voltage Alternatively if an ohms or R T sensor must be biased to an external voltage ensure that the other two channels within the same input bank are floating or are biased to the same voltage i e inputs of all three channels connected to the same voltage Failure to comply with these instructions may result in product damage Analogue Output Card Not available on the eZtrend QXe recorder The Analogue Output card connections are made via 1 x 12 way screw terminal plug that fits into a PCB header on the rear of the unit The Analogue Output card position for the Minitrend QX is shown in page 16 and page 16 for the Multitrend SX A WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES Insulation from channel to channel Normally a channel can be safely connected to a hazardous voltage up to 300V AC common mode with respect
514. ul 06 07 Jul 0 Hiui m 29 043 27309 07 00 00 07 Jul 06 08 00 00 09 00 07 Jul 06 07 Jul 06 07 Jul Hiui m 29 043 27509 Print Rev Zoom In Zoom Out 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 07 00 00 07 Jul 06 08 00 00 07 Jul 06 Hiui m 29 043 27509 Rev 00 00 17 Jul 06 07 10 00 07 Jul 06 Fwd 07 20 00 07 Jul 06 07 30 00 07 Jul 06 bos odes B u Print 07 10 00 07 Jul 06 2 5 Chart Exit Hiui m 28 995 28803 7 12 00 07 14 00 07 Jul 06 Jul 06 07 16 00 07 Jul 06 g Out 07 18 00 07 Jul 06 25 5 Chart Exit 2d 803 p 07 1400 07 Jul 06 07 100 07 Mj 06 07 16 00 07 Jul 06 T 28 995 20 947 amp Print Rev 1 hour div replay chart bigger divisions 10 mins div replay chart 5 mins div replay chart 2 mins div replay chart Slow chart speed 5mm hr 1 min div replay chart 213 214 Chart Speeds This is the speed at which the chart travels across the screen not replay mode There are three categories Slow Medium and Fast default chart speeds that can be set up in Charts on page 125 To change the chart speed gently tap the touch screen on a chart to activate the Settings button in the top right of the screen Press the Settings button to produce a drop down list of the 3 chart speed categories Select the desired speed and this will immediately change
515. ulse Input 2 y P12 Frequency Measure DIM erede displays all the available Pulse Input 3 v PIS Frequency Measure Hz gt pulse input channels that can be set up Pulse Input 4 x PI4 Frequency Measure Hz ie Each channel displays its individual settings Select a numbered chan nel to edit the configura tion of each Pulse input cur jzm Jd Press the Pulse Input button to display the available pulse inputs Click on individual Pulse Input number to set up each channel profile Enabled Toggle On and Off Hertz Fixed as Frequency Measure in Hertz Update Rate Fixed at 1Hz Label Select and enter an identification label for the pulse input Select and enter a label Up to 16 characters When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 63 Linearisation Tables Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup Field I O gt Linearisation Linearisation Tables To be used with Analogue Input type Volts Amps or Ohms These are user defined tables that can be set up to allow a non linear input signal to be dis played on the recorder By entering a set of non linear signal input values X into the line arisation table the recorder will use the table to generate linear output Y in engineering units to be displayed and or log on the recorder Sele
516. um logging rate for you Tolerance band widths Tolerance band width can be set as a percentage of the scale range allowed above and be low the input signal A second band width can be set this is where a tighter tolerance can be specified which must be set within the limits of Band 1 Specify as a percentage of the scale range the tol erance band allowed above and below the input signal See Logging Menu on page 69 Figure 18 1 Fuzzy logging tolerance settings a Band 196 4 Band 2 4 Trace lt Band 2 q Band 1 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Appendix G F sub zero Sterilisation 121 1 TPC The significance of Fg The Fo value is used in the pharmaceutical and related industries in the sterilisation of items A brief summary is included here to give the essence of the meaning of the terms used When items are subjected to sterilisation by heating the rate at which micro organisms are killed is dependent on the temperature Traditionally items were sterilised by holding them at 250 F 121 11 C and the Fg value for a sterilisation is simply the equivalent time at this temperature that would produce the same effect For many average micro organisms each minute at 121 11 C reduces the number present by a factor of 10 so a 15 minute hold at this temperature would reduce the number by a factor of 1015 Time min os Time min 20 30 Figure 1 Figure 2 If it we
517. um of 30 min for the survey the maximum temperature value during the dwell period and the minimum temper ature value during the dwell period The on line TUS tracking screen shows the current sta tus of a survey for up to 6 set points furnace details status Min amp Max TC readings Max differences Max Overshoot durations and the Class of furnace the survey met 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Specification Tables Specification Design Attributes Digital indicators and Display QX Recorder Display size and Type 5 5 diagonal Digital Colour LCD TFT with Touch Screen Industrial grade with brightness adjustment and wide viewing angle Resolution QVGA 320 x 240 pixels Screen Saver Set in minutes from 1 to 720 can be set to dim the screen or to switch off Brightness adjustment Adjustable between 10 and 100 default set to 80 brightness Backlight life time 55 000 hours to half brightness when used at 100 86 000hr if used at 80 Maximum luminosity 400 cd m Touch Screen life 1 000 000 touches SX Recorder Display size and Type 12 1 diagonal Digital Colour LCD TFT with Touch Screen Industrial grade with brightness adjustment and wide viewing angle Resolution SVGA 800 x 600 pixels Screen Saver Set in minutes from 1 to 720 can be set to dim the screen or to switch off Brightness adjustment Adjustable between 10 and 100 default set to 80 brigh
518. up menu where you can configure all the Batch and Group prop erties before starting a batch Concurrent Batch Mode Batch mode has changed to allow concurrent batches where each batch is associated with a group so all pens within Group 1 will belong to the batch that is controlled by Group 1 Screens can now be set to display groups in this mode only messages associated with that group i e pens within that group or batch messages for that group will be shown on the chart Remember when you have set up your batch requirements you need to assign pens to the batch group Pause Chart General General Batch Properties re Group 1 BATCH 1 GC v Start Log 5 Group 2 BATCH 2 GC StoplogGFi v Group 3 BATCH 3 GC v Allow Direct I v viv viv Name Props Batch 1 Name Group 4 BATCH 4 GC v Group 5 BATCH 5 GC Ctr Reset button will produce a warning dialog asking if you want to reset all counters When a group is selected then the counters can be reset by group UserID Props v Operator ID 2 Field 1 Props x Vegetables Field 2 Props Meat Field 3 Props y Dairy General Batch Properties Pause Chart Finish Enable this if you require the chart to be paused at the end of the batch The chart will restart when another batch is started for that group Start Log Start Enable this if you require l
519. up to 10 screens available for displaying combinations of charts scales and DPMs can be configured 6 examples below Wl Standard Screen 1 Menu Screen 29 Jun 06 09 33 43 03 28 00 Menu 41 Screen 29 Jun 06 12 37 46 37 10 1 0 12 37 30 12 37 40 3Jun 06 29 Jun 06 6 29 Jun 06 u npud i Chart n 3 Vert bars Om Pen 1 1 23 294 385 000 50 000 100 00 36 Pen 2 33 405 000 36 0296 wey 7 Horizontal Chart 3 Vertical Bars Apu Wl Standard Screen 2 Om 15 Screen 29 Jun 06 09 47 33 Apu si 3 vert bars Om 48 Screen 29 Jun 06 13 34 34 Pen 2 50 000 Max 54 413 Max 52 000 Min 2 319 in 233 067 9 9e4 13 Max 444 Min 0 0e 00 2499 0 Max 49 92 Min 2499 12 0 000 21 000 30 000 14 000 20 000 Yi 7 000 10 000 000 000 23 967 34 193 1 0e 09 6 Digital Panel Meters 3 Horizontal Bars s FDL rP eo 4 ru gj Chart n 3 Horie bars Om Menu 1 19 Screen 29 Jun 06 09 56 04 0 Om 42 Screen 29 Jun 06 12 38 25 Pen 1 7 000 14 000 21 000 28 000 35 000 0 000 10 000 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 20 881 a p 10 000 20 000 30 000 40 000 loa a al Pen 2 0 000 10 000 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 32 352 0 S0 8 5 85 85 7 ENMNNEM 36 2 9 9e 13 TI EE EL 36 E3 E4 E5 Ee 3 2e 03 i A Jun 06 5000 00 2499 04 P2 Alm 1 Out of alarm 9620 36 Pen 6 20 00 2400 68 00 112 00 156 00 200 00 89 95 Ce 36 Horizontal
520. urement or set the output Messages Calib vals not written prop 0 3 3 The calibration values written in factory or field calibration could Diagnostics erly in factory or field cal not be read Reading EEPROM cals failed so did attempted Messages default read CJC port error detected 0 1 1 Communications to the CJC failed subsequent retries may have Diagnostics succeeded CJC driver OverRun error Messages CJC port error detected 1 1 1 Communications to the CJC failed subsequent retries may have Diagnostics succeeded CJC driver Framing error Messages CJC port error detected 2 1 1 Communications to the CJC failed subsequent retries may have Diagnostics succeeded CJC driver Parity error Messages CJC port error detected 3 1 1 Communications to the CJC failed subsequent retries may have Diagnostics succeeded CJC driver Receive Buffer Overflow error Messages CJC port error detected 4 1 1 Communications to the CJC failed subsequent retries may have Diagnostics succeeded CJC driver Noise error Messages CJC port error detected 5 1 1 Communications to the CJC failed subsequent retries may have Diagnostics succeeded CJC driver Idle error Messages Cannot enable ADC chip 0 4 4 The I O card internal and or external communications have failed Diagnostics to be initialized correctly Messages Failed to configure and enable SPI master Cannot enable ADC chip 1 4 4 Failed to initialize the CJC driver Diagnostics Failed to enable CJC Driver Messages
521. urns wrong readings Vice versa if using Modbus If the column shows the correct reading the recorder must be communicating correctly 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Communications Server Press Done Test modbus device communications The goal of this test is to help determine which Modbus protocol variant Modbus or Modbus X the device being added has been configured to use The slave address and COM port IP address from the setup dialog are used to get data from the First input register in the modbus device profile selected For the device The data is retrieved using both Modbus and Modbus X By programming a set value on the first channel of the device it is possible to confirm the specific protocol that the device is using Modbus slave address 1 IP Address 160 221 36 31 Modbus profile Recorder ID 1 64 628510 25 532473 0 000028 24 152302 6 706206E 016 4 714286 0 000000 37 500000 0 000000 25 000010 1 203979E 011 45 204956 5 910645E 022 86 447815 0 000000 0 000000 Find Device button This can be used to find X Series recorders on the network It uses Locate Device the recorder s unique Network ID to identify them and populate this list Select your device from the list and Select device to connect to from the list below press the Use Selection button to Pump station 1 ae Ss r X Pump Station 12 xs 100062 160 221 36 56 insert the recorder details into the Avon Creek west xs 100075 160 221 36 76
522. urring such as Alarms In to Out of or Acknowledged Totaliser Start Stop or Reset Digital Inputs On Off or State change TC Burnout on a specific Analogue Input channel Scheduled Events Once Interval Specific days Month End For more information on setting up events that will send emails see Event Effects on page 100 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 87 88 Server Name EN84EV402 global trains com Authentication Username loc 511500 User Address phil d gap underground com Recipient Addr s Recipient Addr s Sa a ji Server Name Enter your server name that will handle the transfer of the emails Ask your IT Admin for the server details One method of finding this information is to go to Microsoft Outlook Tools Email Accounts select View or change existing email accounts Select your email server from the box eg Microsoft Exchange Server and click on the Change button The server name you require is displayed in the Exchange Server Settings dialog Enter this name exactly using the on screen or USB keyboard Authentication Indicates whether a username or password is read by the server Check with your IT Admin For Network printers and drivers if you intend to connect the recorder on a Microsoft net work administered as a domain you may have to authenticate the recorder as a user with sufficient permissions to use the resources that you want network print
523. ut Use a thermocouple or resistance thermometer from another chan nel to measure the cold junction sensor Units Ohms Volts and Amps only This is the Units of Measurement for each input Select and enter a value Max 13 characters For Thermocouple and Resistance Ther mometer units see Localisation on page 117 Label Select and enter a identification label for the input Select and enter a label Max 15 characters Sensor Comp Sensor Compensation may be required to improve accuracy on a sub range This is an adjustment to the value of the signal input on each channel based on the Engineering units settings Choose from Single Point Dual Point or Multi Point Cal see Sensor Compensation on page 325 360 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK AMS2750 Process mode AMS2750 Info Process Mode Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt I O Sensors gt AMS2750 Info The items in this menu are different depending on if the recorder is in Process mode or TUS mode In Process mode this menu is used to track the usage of each sensor TC For TUS mode see AMS2750 Info TUS Mode on page 372 Edit Setup Enabled gue AMS2750 Info ESS Sample Rate Damp Level Burnout Type This menu shows Track Usage for a recorder in Process mode m P Track Usage Expendable Track Usage Check this if you wish to track the usage of this
524. ut reading The Dual Point adjust ment works in the same way but at two different points on the signal input It is recommend ed that the two points should be more than 50 of the engineering units away from each other Low Eng and High Eng are the two points where the adjustment offset is made The user can enter their own adjustment points on the signal input and enter the Offset for both points Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt Field IO gt Analog In gt Sensor Comp Figure 20 1 Dual Point Compensation Comp Type Dual Point Low Eng 0 0 Low offset 5 0 High Eng 100 0 High offset 5 0 am ess fA em 1i 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 325 326 10V 10V Single Point Sensor Compensation is Sensor Compensation Compensation Type select from None Single Point or Dual Point compensation Low Eng only available when Dual point is selected Set the Low limit for the Engineer ing units Low Offset enter an offset value that is offset against the Low Eng value High Eng only available when Dual point is selected Set the High limit for the Engineer ing units High Offset enter an offset value that is offset against the High Eng value Figure App H 21 Sensor Compensation Solid line shows without compensation and dotted line shows with compensation High Offset of 5 F Z 410V 100 High Eng Z d 7 Low Offset of 5 10V
525. val system or transmitted in any form without the prior permission from Honeywell International Inc Trademarks Microsoft MS DOS Windows Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 32 and 64 bit Professional and Ultimate Edition Windows Server 2003 and Windows CE are all registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Compact Flash and CF logo are trademarks of the Compact Flash Association CFA 43 TV 25 33 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 1 Safety Safety For the purpose of this manual the and symbols will not follow their own trade mark names or registered trademark names in every instance Company names and Product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their individual owners The X Series range of instruments is compliant with the requirements of BS EN 61010 1 2001 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement Control and Labo ratory Use and UL 61010C 1 and CSA 22 2 1010 1 as options If the equipment is used in a manner not specified the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired The QX and SX range of instruments is compliant to the requirements for Class 1 Div 2 Hazardous Classified Locations Symbols One or more of the following symbols may appear on the recorder labelling Table 1 2 Safety Symbols Symbol Meaning Caution refer to manual for instructions Caution risk of electric shock Di
526. ve conductor outside the recorder or disconnection of the protective earth terminal is likely to make the recorder dangerous under some fault conditions Intentional interruption of the protective conductor is dangerous Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury In order to comply with the requirements of safety standard EN 61010 1 2001 the recorder should have one of the following as a disconnecting device located within easy reach of the operator and be clearly labelled as the disconnecting safety device A switch or circuit breaker which complies with the requirements of IEC 60947 1 and IEC 60947 3 Aseparable coupler which can be disconnected without the use of a tool Aseparable plug without a locking device to mate with a socket outlet in the building 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 3 Warnings and Safety Precautions 2 Whenever it is likely that protection has been impaired the recorder should be made inoperative and secured against operation The manufacturer s service centre should be contacted 3 Repair is not to be attempted by a customer Any adjustment or maintenance expected of an operator as part of the normal operation of the product is referred to as Opera tional Maintenance Any maintenance not expected of the operator is referred to as Corrective Maintenance and is to be carried out only by authorized service personnel or returned to an author
527. vel to the password system You must now give the new user a password Administrator Password 1 From the process screen press the Menu button in the top left of the screen and select the Log In icon in the top right as shown here 85 2 A box will appear and you will be prompted for your Administrator user name which you have just created in items 1 to 7 listed above 3 The Password dialog box will appear The recorder enters a default password when a user is added so select Yes to change it Default Password minimum length is 6 characters requires a minimum of 5 alpha char acters Allows the use of symbols and numeric characters no spaces Default Password maximum length is 20 characters 4 Enter your new password then repeat to confirm 5 The password dialog will appear confirming the change has been successful 6 You have now completed creating an Administrator You can now enter the password system to check and reset the default Policies eg Pass word Expiry Time Main Menu Configure Passwords User Admin Policy Refer to the Password section in the User manual for more information User Name Description User names are case dependent however duplicate user names will not be allowed even if case does not match The user name and password cannot be the same Minimum Access Level If an end user has password enabled and starts a batch the Operator and Technician levels can log in enter the setup
528. vice while also being a master Modbus master can also be used in conjunction with OPC to enable the recorder to act as a communication bridge Remote Viewer Remote Con trol Tool Extends the user interface of the recorder onto the desktop PC Providing full remote control of the recorder launched from a web browser Email optional Setup email accounts to send the following When an Alarm is triggered or an Email can be sent as a part of an Event occurring such as Alarms In Out Ack Totaliser Start Stop or Reset Digital Inputs On Off or State change TC Burnout on a specific Analogue Input channel Scheduled Events Once Inter val Specific days Month End 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 289 Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Specification Options OPC Server optional OPC Server Open Process Control Software application for realtime interfacing between servers and clients OPC is a software standard that defines common interfaces for data exchange between devices such as recorders controllers PCL s and Windows based applications OPC 3 0 DA amp AE compliant Totalisers and up to 96 pens can be transmitted via OPC server max poll rate 1 s Pwd Net Sync optional Password Network Synchronisation Password can be synchronised over the network a recorder can be designated as a master of a password group and other recorders can be added to that group
529. vious menu 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Edit Setup Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Edit Setup will access the main configuration of the recorder through further sub menus for Field IO Pens Comms Events Counters General Screen and Recording set up The Edit button may display a warning message if the Commit Later option has been select ed This means changes to the configuration have been made but the changes have not been committed to the recorder See Commit Later on page 185 d Edit Setup ea Field 10 Events Counters General gt LJ Recording Reports Finish Select a button to take you to the next menu Field IO This button displays a sub menu containing Analogue In Analogue Out Alarm Digital IO and Pulse Inputs card menus See Field IO Menu on page 54 If AMS2750 mode is selected in the credits this button will show 1 O AMS2750 refer to Appendix L X Series AMS2750 capabilities on page 351 Pens This button displays all the configuration areas for setting up Pens including Scales Maths Alarms Logging and Totalisers See Pens Menu on page 67 Comms This button displays Services TCP IP and Network Admin Services takes you to a sub menu containing Modbus Web Email SNTP FTP and Peers menus See Comms Services Menu on page 82 Events Counters Events and counters are firmware options that can be activated using the credit system Events are certain co
530. w local Servers i e databases on that PC Click local servers to expand out to show all da tabases 7 Communications Server Communications Server ji Database Servers jf Database Servers Communication Ports fi Local Server x COM1 Initial Database x COM2 June FTP x COM3 c x COM4 x COMS In the example shown there are two available databases The default database called Initial Database and June FTP Databases can be added by right clicking on the Local Server icon and then clicking Add Database Enter a database name and description click OK and the new database will ap pear on the list 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 245 Communications Server To add a database server you will need the IP address of the device that will be the database server Click the new database server button Enter the IP address and a new database server will be added Add databases to this server as above New Database Server Logging Configuration Logging Configuration This screen configures channels for logging from a device to a database It can be accessed in several ways Figure 8 7 Logging Configuration Logging Configuration Port Number Device ID Number Database Configuration Connected Database Servers Database Currently Logging To Initial Database Y Channels available to be logged ELM Add All Channels Pen 15 Channels logging to the se
531. will display user defined marks on a chart CE Conformity CE Mark Immunity Product Classification Enclosure Rating Installation Requirements This product conforms with the protection requirements of the following European Council Direc tives 73 23 EEC the Low Voltage Directive and 89 336 EEC the EMC Directive Conformity of this product with any other CE Mark Directive s shall not be assumed Complies with EN61326 Class Cord Connected Panel Mounted Industrial Control Equipment with protective earthing grounding EN 61010 1 Front panel designed to NEMA3 IP54 for SX and QXe models only and NEMA3R IP54 for QX Optional NEMA 4X IP66 Category Il Overvoltage EN 61010 1 Pollution Degree 2 EMC Standards Emissions EN61326 Class B QXe Class A radiated Immunity EN61326 Industrial Levels QXe Light Industrial Safety Complies with EN61010 1 2001 Panel Mounted Equipment Terminals must be enclosed within the panel Specification Analogue Inputs Number of Inputs QX recorder can have 4 6 8 12 or 16 input channels SX recorder can have 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 40 or 48 input channels QXe recorder can have 3 6 9 or 12 input channels Input Types mV V mA with external shunt provided as standard Thermocouple RTD and ohms Minimum Input Span Range is fully configurable with span limitation of the operating range selected with 496 under range to 4 over range capabi
532. wing will deactivate the screen saver User touches the recorder screen Any USB device is plugged in or unplugged Onalarm An alarm is triggered the unit will not return to screen saver till the alarm state is inactive and another screen saver time out period has expired Charts Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Screen Charts The Chart Speed sets how fast in mm hr the chart moves across the screen The recorder has 11 different chart speeds There are 3 categories that can be set Slow Medium and Fast From each of those categories the actual speed of the chart can be selected Figure 4 12 Chart Speed selection 20mm h M Cancel g immj h Cancel Fast Speed Medium Speed Slow Speed 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 125 Fast Speed 60mm h 120mm h 300mm h 600mm h 1200mm h and 6000mm h Medium Speed 10mm h 20mm h 30mm hr 60mm hr and 120mm h Slow Speed 1mm h 5mm h and 10mm h 20mm h Once the charts speeds have been set up in this menu go to a process screen displaying data on a chart and touch the screen This will activate the Settings menu in the top right of the screen select this to display the 3 categories set See Chart Speeds on page 214 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Brightness Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Screen
533. writing Al config to EEPROM Messages Unable to write configuration 2 3 3 The Al configuration could not be written to EEPROM on configu Diagnostics ration change Error writing AO config to EEPROM Messages Unable to write configuration 3 3 3 The digital configuration could not be written to EEPROM on con Diagnostics figuration change Error writing DIG config to EEPROM Messages Unable to write configuration 4 3 3 The Al configuration could not be written on configuration Diagnostics change Error writing Al config to EEPROM Messages Unable to write configuration 5 3 3 The AO configuration could not be written on configuration Diagnostics change Error writing AO config to EEPROM Messages Unable to write configuration 6 3 3 The digital pulse configuration could not be written on configura Diagnostics tion change Error writing DIG config to EEPROM Messages Unable to write configuration 7 3 3 The Al configuration could not be written on configuration change Diagnostics after ChangeRange command Messages Error writing Al config to EEPROM Unable to write configuration 8 3 3 The Al configuration could not be written on configuration change Diagnostics after ChangeAcqFreq command Messages Error writing Al config to EEPROM Unable to write configuration 9 3 3 The Al configuration could not be written on configuration change Diagnostics after SetDiagInterval command Messages Error writing Al setup to EEPROM 340
534. x Groups Maximum Number of Groups Supported for the OPCDAServer OPCDA Max Supp Items Maximum Number of Unique Items Supported for the OPCDAServer OPCDA Groups Requested Number of Groups Requested to OPCDAServer OPCDA Items Requested Number of Items Requested to OPCDAServer OPCAE Rec Con Recommended Connections for OPCDAServer OPCAE Clients Number of OPCAE Clients Connected OPCAE Max Alarms Number of Active Alarms Supported in OPCAEServer OPCAE No Alarms Number of Active Alarms Available in OPCAEServer 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 183 184 SMTP Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Comms SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Displays the Type Time Date and Message details for Email transfers FTP Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Comms FTP File Transfer Protocol Displays the Type Time Date and Message details for FTP trans fers Peers Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Comms Peers Displays all recorders available on the network The screen will display the recorder name what version of Firmware is installed ID number and Network Name and IP address It also displays the recorder s network sync status to show if the recorder is part of a pass word group It will display either Master Slave or a Stand Alone recorder not belonging to a net sync group The last column displays which Password Net Sync group each recorder belongs to Stand
535. x returns the current screen number where x in the screen number this can be used to detect what screen is being displayed Global Alarm Status ATOTIt x ATOT O will return the total number of alarms that are currently enabled in the recorder ATOT 1 will return the total number of alarms in Alarm state in the recorder E g P1 ATOT 1 ATOT 0 100 would set P1 to give alarm state percentage for the recorder Ln In x Returns the Natural Log of x Log log x Returns the Base 10 Log of x Modulus X Y Returns the value of x with a modulus of y Multiply i Returns the result of the multiplication Power pow x y Returns the value of x raised to the power y Can also be represented by Power x y Returns the value of x raised to the power y Reciprocal recip x Returns the reciprocal of x i e 1 x Root root x y Returns the y root of x Round round x Rounds x to the nearest whole number Serial Comms Variable SCV x y Z Returns serial variables during Modbus comms X Slave number y Transaction number z Item number Set clear a digital output SETD x y This feature allows a digital output to be set or cleared from a script using the function SETD x y where x is the digital output 1 to 49 where 49 is the power relay and y is the value 1 to set or 0 to clear The function will return the value set if successful if not successful it will return 1 0 this would be caused by trying to set and digital input rather then output
536. xt will move you onto the second page of the configuration confirmation wizard this will provide an overview of the currently attached sensors included in the TUS and their status the screen is as follows Screen 2 shows the following information on the thermocouples TC Number the number relating to the analogue input for the thermocouple Position The text position of the sensor within the furnace Status the current status of the sensor with relation to the thermocouple tracking The status will display good for a thermocouple whose usage or calibration is ok and not within an expiry period Warning for a thermocouple whose status is OK but a calibra tion or usage is due to expire shortly or expired for a thermocouple that has expired on either usage or calibration 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 377 TUS mode If a thermocouple is included in the TUS but has been set not to be tracked the status will be shown as good TUS Configuration Confirmation me Poston o Front Bottom Right Good Front Bottom Left Good Front Top Right Warning Front Top Left Expried Back Bottom Right Good Back Bottom Left Good Back Top Right Good Back Top Left Good Middle Good iO O00 Ch CD amp CO n2 Change Sensors TUS Configuration Screen 2 A coloured icon will be listed on the line of the TC as a visual aid to identify issues quickly The colours will be defined as Green for good Amber for wa
537. y contacts are form C NO NC and includes suppression The 8 amp 2 Relay Alarm card this 8 channel card will have 8 mains rated relays of which 2 of the 8 channels can be configured for use as digital inputs 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Latched or Single Pulse The relay outputs can be set by the user to be either Latched or Single Pulse Latched A latched relay will maintain in its active state until the trigger source has returned to a non alarmed state or a second Event has been activated to disable the relay Single Pulse The relay will go active for a period of time specified by the user then return to a non active state The time out period remains independent of the length of time the active state re mains Single Pulse Relay Settings User can specify Pulse length in seconds from 0 1 100ms to 6480 108 minutes in 0 1 sec ond increments Fail Safe Each relay channel can be independently selected with the fail safe option This will invert the state of the relay output With Failsafe Off normally open NO relays have open contacts when the power is off and open contacts when there is no active alarm The contacts will close when an associated alarm goes active With Failsafe On normally open relays have closed contacts when the recorder is powered on and there are no open active alarms and the contacts open with an alarm active or when the power is removed See Fa
538. y inputs per board are available to measure pulse signals up to 25 kHz max 2 cards Not available for the eZtrend QXe recorder but 4 pulse inputs can be used on the Digital I O option card Pulse Inputs The 8 Digital I O option card has 4 channels that can be set as pulse inputs first 4 channels The operating frequency for pulse inputs on the Digital I O card is 1kHz max Approvals CSA and UL approvals Minitrend QX and Multitrend SX also have FM CL1 Div 2 approval e 24VAC DC or 48VDC Power Supply 20 to 55VDC 20 to 30VAC for the Minitrend QX and Multitrend SX Plus 18V DC option 12VDC 35VDC 12VAC 26VAC for the Minitrend QX Only 24V AC DC available for the eZtrend QXe recorder 20 to 30VDC 20 to 25VAC 24VDC Transmitter Power Supply Minitrend QX can supply up to 200mA to external transmitters Multitrend SX up to 1A Available as an option for the eZtrend QXe recorder with up to 130mA 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Functions and Features Multitrend SX Standard Screens The Multitrend SX recorder has up to 20 screens available for displaying combinations of charts bars and DPMs can be configured 4 examples below 2623 5201 7244 55 44 1 20 70 28 2661 16 Digital Panel Meters Horizontal Chart 8 Vertical Bars amp 8 DPMS showing Max Min values and Totals for each pen DPM and Scales 16 Horizontal Bars showing Max Min values and Totals for each pen 43 TV
539. y of the TrendManager Suite software The AMS2750 Report Generation Tool is used for generating a TUS report using data from the recorder The AMS2750 Report Generation Tool also provides the ability to produce a SAT template report for manual entry or populated within the tool Overview TUS reports are generated using the self contained data file from the recorder and is out putted in PDF format for printing and sign off Data files generated by the recorder are imported directly from the CF card or USB key plugged into the PC or Network Share folder NAS There is no facility for remote commu nications SAT report templates can be generated by the tool from fixed format the templates can be stored for re use by furnace SAT report templates can be output to PDF and printed for users to fill in manually SAT reports templates can be filled out within the AMS2750 Report Generation Tool to pro duce a completed SAT report the reports can be exported in PDF format for printing and sign off Once a completed TUS or SAT report has been generated you can save it in a location of your choice for easy retrieval You are able to save the completed SAT or TUS report in secure PDF format not editable to a specified directory drive The reporting tool is currently only available in English Installation The Report Generation Tool is a stand alone application that is installed separately from the TrendManager Suite software and requ
540. y on for 10 months The recorder refers to a built in calendar and clock and will schedule the event to occur at midnight on the last day of each month Date Time Only available when Once is selected as a Sub Type Select the time and date for a one off occurrence Period Only available when Interval is selected as a Sub Type Set the time interval for how often this event should occur eg every hour would be 1h 00m 00s Alignment Only available when Interval is selected as a Sub Type Select and enter a value from the list to align the scheduled event at specific intervals For certain applications it maybe desirable for a relatively fast schedule interval event for example every 10 minutes to be aligned with a particular time For example on the hour When the alignment function is not used the schedule interval starts immediately on committing the configuration When the alignment function is used the schedule inter val starts when the first interval event coincides with a subsequent interval that lines up with the desired alignment ie Top of the hour 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 97 98 Figure 4 9 Interval alignment Time 1 00 1 10 1 20 1 30 1 40 1 50 2 00 2 10 2 20 2 30 2 40 2 50 3 00 i H H hth Wes I 33493 Example of a schedule interval event started at 17 minutes past the hour Figure 4 9 shows if a 10 minutes schedule is required to align with a whole hour an
541. y to e mail graph print and export data Device data can be entered into any PC on the LAN Local Area Networks and automatically viewed and graphed at any other PC on the LAN One of the unique features of the TrendServer software is the Realtime facility in con junction with the Communications Server Realtime data can be retrieved from the device to a PC via an Ethernet and or RS485 connection This data can be viewed graphed and logged into the system Data from the device can be logged to a database and held on a database server Remote servers can be added to the comms server to allow access to remote devices on remote databases not on a local network Keep power saving options of the PC disabled if enable it will turn off display and put com puter to sleep which will stop real time data logging See Database Size Management on page 239 System Requirements Following minimum specification 1GHz Pentium IV processor or higher e CD ROM drive Monitor recommended screen resolution 1024x768 minimum requirement high colour Windows 2000 2003 XP Vista and Windows 7 32 and 64 bit Professional and Ulti mate Edition 4GB Mbyte or more of RAM min 4GB Mbyte recommended 16 bit colour graphics 24 bit recommended Screen Designer only 50 Mbyte hard disk free disk space 2 Gbyte for TrendServer TCP IP installed for TrendServer Flash card reader or USB port TCP IP z Transmission Control Protocol Inte
542. yout Settings Standard Screen 3 Standard Screen 4 yp gt AA Fi B Action Rew Fwd In Out Cursor Speed Exit ENTE Screen Menu Bar e Print Instantly prints the screen you are displaying To set up your printer see Printer Menu on page 122 Every pixel is sent to the printer Save a screen shot of the cur rent displayed screen to external removable media Edit From a standard process screen this gives quick access to Screens Settings and Appearance View all available Screens and modify certain screen properties including Screen name Template Type Orientation and Pens being displayed See Edit Layout on page 137 for details Use Settings to set up screens for cycling Cycling screens will display specific screens for an allocated amount of time before switching to the next For Custom Screens this will enable the Edit tool bar go to the Edit Toolbar on page 155 This is for Pen Channel mapping and Expert mode for moving and resizing items on the screen Replay Gives quick access to the Replay Screen and the Replay toolbar See Replay on page 208 List List of all available screens select to change the current screen Prev Displays the previous enabled screen in current selection Next Displays the next enabled screen in current selection Exit Exit this menu return to the current process screen 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK 207 Replay The Replay button takes you
543. ys Ethernet or RS485 in an Active or inactive state and the recorder s IP address Modbus Status Main Menu gt Status gt Diagnostics gt Comms gt Modbus Ss ModBus Status Description Status Transport Ethernet Address Dynamic 160 221 36 31 Device ID 1 Protocol ModBus X Good Messages Bad Messages Internal Errors Description and Status of Modbus Transport Ethernet or RS485 Transport Ethernet or RS485 Address the IP address of your recorder and if it is fixed or Dynamic Device ID Recorder ID number 182 43 TV 25 30 Iss 16 GLO August 2013 UK Protocol Modbus or Modbus X Good Messages Number of messages being transferred successfully Bad Messages Number of corrupt or rejected messages eg a checksum failure Internal Errors Number of Hardware errors 3 OPC Status Description Status OPC Server Status a OPCDA Min Update Rate 1000 OPCDA Rec Conn OPCDA Clients OPCDA Max Groups OCPDA Max Supp Items OPCDA Groups Requested OPCDA Items Requested OPCAE Rec Conn OPCAE Clients OPCAE Max Alarms OPCAE No Alarms OPC Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Comms OPC Status of the OPC activity OPC Server Status Tick will show the Server is running OPCDA Min Update Rate Minimum Update Rate Supported for the OPCDAServer in milliseconds OPCDA Rec Conn Recommended Connections for OPCDAServer OPCDA Clients Number of OPCDA Clients Connected OPCDA Ma

For the best in data acquisition, data security and peace of mind

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents